P. 1
Tutorials Building Mete Nu

Tutorials Building Mete Nu

|Views: 214|Likes:
Published by Aarti Jadli

More info:

Published by: Aarti Jadli on May 17, 2011
Copyright:Attribution Non-commercial

Availability:

Read on Scribd mobile: iPhone, iPad and Android.
download as PDF, TXT or read online from Scribd
See more
See less

06/26/2013

pdf

text

original

Sections

  • Using the Tutorials
  • Accessing Training Files
  • Understanding the Basics
  • Navigating the User Interface
  • Performing Common Tasks as You Work in Revit Architecture
  • Creating the Project
  • Adding Project Levels
  • Creating a Column Grid
  • Adding Beams
  • Adding Braces
  • Creating a Foundation
  • Changing Structural Member Types
  • Adding Floors
  • Adding a Roof
  • Adding a Curtain Wall
  • Creating an Entrance
  • Creating a Drop Ceiling
  • Creating Multi-Level Stairs
  • Creating a Wall with a Non-Uniform Height
  • Adding Entourage and Site Components
  • Linking a Service Core to the Building Project
  • Modifying a Floor and Adding Railings
  • Creating Views
  • Duplicating Plan Views
  • Creating Elevation and Section Views
  • Creating Callout Views
  • Modifying View Tag Appearance
  • Setting Visibility and Graphics Options in Views
  • Creating a View Template
  • View Range and Plan Regions
  • Using Filters to Control Visibility
  • Masking Portions of a View
  • Working with Visual Overrides
  • Creating Drawing Sheets in a Project
  • Creating Drawing Sheets
  • Adding Views to Sheets
  • Modifying the Building Model from a Sheet View
  • Creating and Modifying a Title Sheet
  • Tagging Objects
  • Sequentially Placing and Tagging Rooms
  • Tagging Doors and Windows
  • Tagging Other Objects
  • Defining Schedules and Color Diagrams
  • Creating a Window Schedule
  • Adding Project Parameters to a Window Schedule
  • Creating a Unit-Based Door Schedule with a Filter
  • Creating a Room Schedule
  • Scheduling Rooms from a Program List
  • Creating a Room Color Diagram
  • Creating a Material Takeoff
  • Create a material takeoff
  • Scheduling Shared Parameters
  • Creating a Shared Parameter File
  • Adding Shared Parameters to a Family
  • Placing,Tagging, and Scheduling a Family with Shared Parameters
  • Scheduling Uniformat Assembly Codes
  • Scheduling Uniformat Assembly Codes and Descriptions
  • Exporting Project Information with ODBC
  • Exporting Schedule Information to Microsoft Access
  • Changing the Base Elevation of a Project
  • Relocating a Project
  • Dimensioning
  • Creating Dimensions
  • Creating Automatic Wall Dimensions
  • Controlling Witness Lines
  • Creating an Office Standard Dimension Type from Existing Dimensions
  • Creating Text Annotation
  • Adding Text Notes to the Floor Plan
  • Creating a Detail from a Building Model
  • Detailing the View
  • Adding Detail Lines
  • Adding Text Notes
  • Creating Detail Components
  • Adding Keynotes
  • Creating Line-based Detail Components
  • Modifying a Keynote Database
  • Creating a Drafted Detail
  • Importing a Detail into a Drafting View
  • Creating a Reference Callout
  • Creating a Detail in a Drafting View
  • Using Note Blocks
  • Creating a Note Block
  • Using Drawing Lists
  • Creating a Drawing List
  • Using Legends
  • Creating a Symbol Legend
  • Creating a Component Legend
  • Using Revision Tracking
  • Setting Up a Revision Table
  • Sketching Revision Clouds
  • Tagging Revision Clouds
  • Working with Revisions
  • Importing from Other Applications
  • Importing Image Files
  • Importing Text Documents
  • Importing Spreadsheets
  • Using Dependent Views in Documentation
  • Using Dependent Views for Floor Plan Views
  • Using Dependent Views for Elevation Views
  • Viewing a Building Model
  • Exploring the Building Model
  • Creating a Perspective View with a Camera
  • Creating a Section View
  • Creating Elevation Views
  • Controlling Fill Pattern Colors
  • Controlling the Fill Pattern Color of a Material
  • Setting the Coarse Scale Fill Pattern Color for a Wall Type
  • Creating a View Plan Region
  • Creating a Plan Region in a Floor Plan
  • Rendering an Exterior View
  • Applying Materials and Textures to the Building Model
  • Adding Trees to the Site
  • Creating a Perspective View
  • Selecting a Scene and Rendering the View
  • Rendering an Interior View
  • Adding RPC People
  • Creating the Interior Perspective View
  • Creating a New Render Scene
  • Defining Daylights and Rendering the View
  • Creating and Recording Walkthroughs
  • Creating a Walkthrough
  • Changing the Walkthrough Path and Camera Position
  • Recording the Walkthrough
  • Creating Views for Solar Studies
  • Creating a Solar Study - Courtyard View
  • Creating a Solar Study Section Cutaway View
  • Creating a Solar Study Plan Cutaway View
  • Saving Solar Study Settings and Previewing Animations
  • Creating Solar Studies - Summer and Winter Solstice
  • Previewing Solar Study Animation
  • Exporting Solar Studies
  • Exporting the Study as AVI
  • Exporting a Study as PNG
  • Creating an Internal Plan Solar Study
  • Creating an Internal Plan Study
  • Orienting to True North for Solar Studies
  • Orienting to True North
  • Rendering Interior Shadow Views
  • Adding a Floor Plan View to the Analytique
  • Preparing a Floor Plan for the Analytique
  • Using Advanced Model Graphics
  • Adding the Floor Plan to a Sheet
  • Adding an Elevation View to the Analytique
  • Preparing the Elevation Analytique
  • Adding the Presentation Elevation View to the Presentation Sheet
  • Adding Section Views to the Analytique
  • Preparing a Section View for the Analytique
  • Adding Shadows and Silhouettes to a Section View
  • Adding the Presentation Section to the Analytique
  • Working with a Presentation View Template
  • Working in a Callout Analytique
  • Creating 3D Cutaways with Section Boxes
  • Creating Cutaway Isometric Views
  • Creating Cutaway Perspective Views
  • Annotating the Analytique
  • Render a Revit Architecture Building Model in 3ds Max
  • Rendering Cutaway Views in 3ds Max
  • Creating a Daylight Analysis
  • Importing a SketchUp Model as a Mass
  • Creating a Building from Mass Faces
  • Using Families and the Family Editor
  • Introduction to Families
  • Introduction to the Family Editor
  • Creating 3D Geometry
  • Process Overview: Creating a Family
  • Defining the Origin of a Family
  • Adding Reference Planes
  • Defining Priorities for Reference Planes
  • Dimensioning Reference Planes
  • Managing Family Parameters and Family Types
  • Lock geometry to reference planes
  • Defining Work Planes
  • Creating Geometry
  • Creating Solid Forms
  • Creating 2D Geometry
  • Loading a Family into a Project
  • Creating a Door Family
  • Drawing the Door Plan View Components
  • Creating the Door Leaf Solid Geometry
  • Assigning Materials to the Door Components
  • Defining New Door Types
  • Creating a Window Family
  • Specifying the New Window Parameters
  • Creating the Window Frame Solid Geometry
  • Creating the Window Sash Solid Geometry
  • Creating the Window Glass Solid Geometry
  • Creating the Window Mullion Solid Geometry
  • Assigning Materials to the Window Components
  • Defining New Window Types
  • Creating a Complex Model Family
  • Planning a Complex Model Family
  • Selecting a Family Template
  • Creating the Skeleton for a Complex Wall Opening
  • Modelling a Complex Wall Opening
  • Creating Window Frame Geometry
  • Defining the Window Sash Parameters
  • Defining Visibility Parameters
  • Creating Reference Planes for the Glass Geometry
  • Creating the Glass Geometry
  • Creating Formulas to Define Width
  • Creating Elevation Lines
  • Assigning Default Materials
  • Creating Material Parameters
  • Creating Nested Families
  • Creating Sill Families
  • Loading Sill Families into the Window Family
  • Creating a Length Parameter
  • Placing the Sill Family
  • Creating a Shared Parameter
  • Testing Nested Families
  • Testing the Family in a Project Environment
  • Creating a Furniture Family
  • Specifying the New Rolltop Desk Parameters
  • Creating the Desktop Solid Geometry
  • Creating the Desk Drawer Base Solid Geometry
  • Creating the Rolltop Solid Geometry
  • Creating the Drawers Solid Geometry
  • Defining New Furniture Types
  • Creating a Baluster Family
  • Drawing a Baluster
  • Assigning the New Baluster to a Stair Run
  • Creating Profile Families
  • Drawing a Sweep Profile
  • Drawing a Rail Profile
  • Drawing a Stair Nosing Profile
  • Drawing a Reveal Profile
  • Drawing a Host Sweep Profile
  • Applying a Sweep Profile to a 2D Path
  • Applying a Host Sweep Profile to Walls
  • Creating a Room Tag
  • Specifying Room Tag Parameters
  • Creating an Annotation Symbol
  • Creating a Custom North Arrow Annotation Symbol
  • Adding the New North Arrow to a Project
  • Creating a Titleblock Family
  • Drawing Linework for a Titleblock Sheet
  • Adding Graphics and Text to a Titleblock
  • Adding the Titleblock to a New Project
  • Creating In-Place Families
  • Creating the Dome Roof In-Place Family
  • Creating the Concave Floor In-Place Family
  • Appendix A - Exploring Family Templates
  • Model Family Templates
  • Annotation Family Templates
  • Titleblock Family Templates
  • Planning a Parametric Component Family
  • Determining Component Needs
  • Selecting the Family Template
  • Creating the Component Skeleton
  • Adding Dimensions and Constraints
  • Creating New Length Parameters
  • Flexing the Component Model
  • Adding Solid Geometry
  • Creating Solid Extrusions
  • Adding Constraints to the Solid Geometry
  • Creating Additional Solid Geometry
  • Testing the Family in a Project
  • Testing a Family Instance in a Project
  • Working with Nested Subcomponents
  • Adding a Nested Component
  • Creating Formula-controlled Parameters
  • Arraying Nested Subcomponents
  • Reloading a Family into a Project
  • Applying Subcategories, Materials, and Parameters
  • Creating and Applying Subcategories
  • Controlling Component Visibility
  • Assigning Detail Level and View Controls
  • Creating Component Types
  • Creating Multiple Component Types
  • Creating Conditional Formulas
  • Flat Curtain System
  • Adding Mullions to the Curtain System
  • Curved Curtain System
  • Adding a Curved Curtain System
  • Adding a Custom Curtain Panel
  • Adding Mullions to the Curved Curtain Panel
  • Additional Curtain Systems
  • Sloped Glazings
  • Storefront System
  • Curtain System by Lines
  • Creating Roofs
  • Creating an Extruded Roof
  • Creating a Gable Roof from a Footprint
  • Creating a Roof with a Vertical Penetration from a Footprint
  • Creating a Hip Roof from a Footprint
  • Creating a Shed Roof from a Footprint
  • Adding Slope Arrows to a Shed Roof
  • Aligning Roof Eaves
  • Creating a Mansard Roof
  • Creating Fascia, Gutters, and Soffits
  • Creating Roof Fascia
  • Creating Gutters
  • Creating Soffits
  • Area Analysis
  • Using Area Analysis Tools
  • Creating Area Schemes and Plans
  • Creating Area Schedules and Color Fill Area Plans
  • Using Massing Tools
  • Adding Massing Elements to a Building Model
  • Using Massing Tools to Cut Geometry from the Building Model
  • Using Mass Family Files in a Project
  • Creating New Mass Family Types
  • Loading and Placing New Mass Families
  • Joining Mass Elements
  • Using Mass Elements with Design Options
  • Mass Elements in Design Options
  • Creating Building Components from Mass Elements
  • Creating Walls by Picking Faces
  • Creating Floors by Picking Faces
  • Creating Roofs by Picking Faces
  • Creating Curtain Systems
  • Editing Elements Created from Massings
  • Controlling Mass/Shell Visibility
  • Creating, Modifying, and Nesting Groups
  • Creating and Placing a Group
  • Modifying a Group
  • Nesting Groups
  • Working with Detail Groups
  • Creating a Detail Group
  • Using Attached Detail Groups
  • Saving and Loading Groups
  • Using Site Tools
  • Creating a Toposurface
  • Adding Property Lines
  • Modifying Contour Visibility and Site Settings
  • Creating Topographic Subregions
  • Grading the Toposurface
  • Adding a Building Pad
  • Adding Site Components
  • Tagging Site and Parking Components
  • Creating Parking Space Schedules
  • Adding Structural Walls
  • Importing a DWG for Use as an Underlay
  • Sketching Structural Walls
  • Dimensioning and Modifying Walls
  • Adding Structural Columns and Beams
  • Adding Structural Columns
  • Adding Structural Beams and Girders
  • Adding Joists and Purlins
  • Copying Level 1 Structure to Upper Levels
  • Defining New Levels
  • Duplicating the Existing Design
  • Adding Braces in a Framing Elevation
  • Creating a Framing Elevation
  • Adding Structural Braces
  • Overview
  • Using Worksharing in a Project
  • Understanding Worksharing Fundamentals
  • Enabling Worksharing and Setting Up Worksets
  • Working Individually with Worksets
  • Using Worksets with Multiple Users
  • Borrowing Elements from the Worksets of Other Users
  • Creating Multiple Design Options in a Project
  • Creating the Structural Design Options
  • Creating the Roof System Design Options
  • Managing Design Options
  • Project Phasing
  • Using Phasing
  • Phasing Your Model
  • Using Phase-Specific Room Tags
  • Linking Building Models
  • Linking Building Models from Different Project Files
  • Repositioning Linked Building Models
  • Controlling Linked Building Model Visibility
  • Managing Linked Building Models
  • Sharing Coordinates Between Building Models
  • Acquiring and Publishing Coordinates
  • Relocating a Project with Shared Coordinates
  • Working with a Linked Building Model
  • Managing Shared Locations
  • Scheduling Components of Linked Files
  • Modifying System Settings
  • Modifying General System Options
  • Specifying File Locations
  • Specifying Spelling Options
  • Modifying Snap Settings
  • Modifying Project Settings
  • Creating and Applying Materials
  • Creating and Applying Fill Patterns
  • Controlling Object Styles
  • Modifying Line Patterns and Styles
  • Modifying Annotations
  • Specifying Units of Measurement,Temporary Dimensions, and Detail Level Options
  • Modifying Project Browser Organization
  • Creating an Office Template
  • Choosing the Base Template
  • Loading and Modifying Families and Groups
  • Modifying Views and View Templates
  • Modifying Render Scene Settings
  • Modifying Import/Export Settings
  • Setting up Shared and Project Parameters
  • Creating Named Print Settings
  • Create named print settings

Revit Architecture 2008

Metric Tutorials

April 2007

Copyright© 2007 Autodesk, Inc.
All Rights Reserved This publication, or parts thereof, may not be reproduced in any form, by any method, for any purpose. AUTODESK, INC., MAKES NO WARRANTY, EITHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO ANY IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE REGARDING THESE MATERIALS, AND MAKES SUCH MATERIALS AVAILABLE SOLELY ON AN "AS-IS" BASIS. IN NO EVENT SHALL AUTODESK, INC., BE LIABLE TO ANYONE FOR SPECIAL, COLLATERAL, INCIDENTAL, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES IN CONNECTION WITH OR ARISING OUT OF ACQUISITION OR USE OF THESE MATERIALS. THE SOLE AND EXCLUSIVE LIABILITY TO AUTODESK, INC., REGARDLESS OF THE FORM OF ACTION, SHALL NOT EXCEED THE PURCHASE PRICE, IF ANY, OF THE MATERIALS DESCRIBED HEREIN. Autodesk, Inc., reserves the right to revise and improve its products as it sees fit. This publication describes the state of the product at the time of publication, and may not reflect the product at all times in the future.

Autodesk Trademarks
The following are registered trademarks or trademarks of Autodesk, Inc., in the USA and other countries: 3DEC (design/logo), 3December, 3December.com, 3ds Max, ActiveShapes, Actrix, ADI, Alias, Alias (swirl design/logo), AliasStudio, Alias|Wavefront (design/logo), ATC, AUGI, AutoCAD, AutoCAD Learning Assistance, AutoCAD LT, AutoCAD Simulator, AutoCAD SQL Extension, AutoCAD SQL Interface, Autodesk, Autodesk Envision, Autodesk Insight, Autodesk Intent, Autodesk Inventor, Autodesk Map, Autodesk MapGuide, Autodesk Streamline, AutoLISP, AutoSnap, AutoSketch, AutoTrack, Backdraft, Built with ObjectARX (logo), Burn, Buzzsaw, CAiCE, Can You Imagine, Character Studio, Cinestream, Civil 3D, Cleaner, Cleaner Central, ClearScale, Colour Warper, Combustion, Communication Specification, Constructware, Content Explorer, Create>what's>Next> (design/logo), Dancing Baby (image), DesignCenter, Design Doctor, Designer's Toolkit, DesignKids, DesignProf, DesignServer, DesignStudio, Design|Studio (design/logo), Design Your World, Design Your World (design/logo), DWF, DWG, DWG (logo), DWG TrueConvert, DWG TrueView, DXF, EditDV, Education by Design, Extending the Design Team, FBX, Filmbox, FMDesktop, GDX Driver, Gmax, Heads-up Design, Heidi, HOOPS, HumanIK, i-drop, iMOUT, Incinerator, IntroDV, Kaydara, Kaydara (design/logo), LocationLogic, Lustre, Maya, Mechanical Desktop, MotionBuilder, ObjectARX, ObjectDBX, Open Reality, PolarSnap, PortfolioWall, Powered with Autodesk Technology, Productstream, ProjectPoint, Reactor, RealDWG, Real-time Roto, Render Queue, Revit, Showcase, SketchBook, StudioTools, Topobase, Toxik, Visual, Visual Bridge, Visual Construction, Visual Drainage, Visual Hydro, Visual Landscape, Visual Roads, Visual Survey, Visual Syllabus, Visual Toolbox, Visual Tugboat, Visual LISP, Voice Reality, Volo, and Wiretap. The following are registered trademarks or trademarks of Autodesk Canada Co. in the USA and/or Canada and other countries: Backburner, Discreet, Fire, Flame, Flint, Frost, Inferno, Multi-Master Editing, River, Smoke, Sparks, Stone, Wire.

Third Party Trademarks
All other brand names, product names or trademarks belong to their respective holders.

Third Party Software Program Credits
ACIS Copyright© 1989-2001 Spatial Corp. Portions Copyright© 2002 Autodesk, Inc. Copyright© 1997 Microsoft Corporation. All rights reserved. Flash ® is a registered trademark of Macromedia, Inc. in the United States and/or other countries. International CorrectSpell™ Spelling Correction System© 1995 by Lernout & Hauspie Speech Products, N.V. All rights reserved. InstallShield™ 3.0. Copyright© 1997 InstallShield Software Corporation. All rights reserved. PANTONE® Colors displayed in the software application or in the user documentation may not match PANTONE-identified standards. Consult current PANTONE Color Publications for accurate color. PANTONE® and other Pantone, Inc. trademarks are the property of Pantone, Inc.© Pantone, Inc., 2002 Pantone, Inc. is the copyright owner of color data and/or software which are licensed to Autodesk, Inc., to distribute for use only in combination with certain Autodesk software products. PANTONE Color Data and/or Software shall not be copied onto another disk or into memory unless as part of the execution of this Autodesk software product. Portions Copyright© 1991-1996 Arthur D. Applegate. All rights reserved. Portions of this software are based on the work of the Independent JPEG Group. RAL DESIGN© RAL, Sankt Augustin, 2002 RAL CLASSIC© RAL, Sankt Augustin, 2002 Representation of the RAL Colors is done with the approval of RAL Deutsches Institut für Gütesicherung und Kennzeichnung e.V. (RAL German Institute for Quality Assurance and Certification, re. Assoc.), D-53757 Sankt Augustin. Typefaces from the Bitstream® typeface library copyright 1992. Typefaces from Payne Loving Trust© 1996. All rights reserved. AutoCAD 2008 is produced under a license of data derived from DIC Color Guide® from Dainippon Ink and Chemicals, Inc. Copyright © Dainippon Ink and Chemicals, Inc. All rights reserved. DIC Color Guide computer color simulations used in this product may not exactly match DIC Color Guide, DIC color Guide Part 2 identified solid color standards. Use current DIC Color Guide Manuals for exact color reference. DIC and DIC Color Guide are registered trademarks of Dainippon Ink and Chemicals, Inc. Printed manual and help produced with Idiom WorldServer™. WindowBlinds: DirectSkin™ OCX © Stardock® AnswerWorks 4.0 ©; 1997-2003 WexTech Systems, Inc. Portions of this software © Vantage-Knexys. All rights reserved. The Director General of the Geographic Survey Institute has issued the approval for the coordinates exchange numbered TKY2JGD for Japan Geodetic Datum 2000, also known as technical information No H1-N0.2 of the Geographic Survey Institute, to be installed and used within this software product (Approval No.: 646 issued by GSI, April 8, 2002).

Portions of this computer program are copyright © 1995-1999 LizardTech, Inc. All rights reserved. MrSID is protected by U.S. Patent No. 5,710,835. Foreign Patents Pending. Portions of this computer program are Copyright ©; 2000 Earth Resource Mapping, Inc. OSTN97 © Crown Copyright 1997. All rights reserved. OSTN02 © Crown copyright 2002. All rights reserved. OSGM02 © Crown copyright 2002, © Ordnance Survey Ireland, 2002. FME Objects Engine © 2005 SAFE Software. All rights reserved.

GOVERNMENT USE
Use, duplication, or disclosure by the U.S. Government is subject to restrictions as set forth in FAR 12.212 (Commercial Computer Software-Restricted Rights) and DFAR 227.7202 (Rights in Technical Data and Computer Software), as applicable.

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

Contents

Part 1

Getting Started . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
Using the Tutorials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Accessing Training Files . . . . . . . . . . . Understanding the Basics . . . . . . . . . . . . Navigating the User Interface . . . . . . . . Performing Common Tasks as You Work in . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 Revit Architecture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16

Chapter 1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3

Part 2

Developing Your Designs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Creating the Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27 Adding Project Levels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28 Creating a Column Grid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32 Adding Beams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38 Adding Braces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43 Creating a Foundation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47 Changing Structural Member Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50 Adding Floors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52 Adding a Roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58 Adding a Curtain Wall . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62 Creating an Entrance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65 Creating a Drop Ceiling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71 Creating Multi-Level Stairs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79 Creating a Wall with a Non-Uniform Height . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87 Adding Entourage and Site Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92 Linking a Service Core to the Building Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99 Modifying a Floor and Adding Railings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103

Chapter 2 Creating a Building Information Model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25

Part 3

Documenting Your Projects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
Creating Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Duplicating Plan Views . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Elevation and Section Views . . . . Creating Callout Views . . . . . . . . . . . . Modifying View Tag Appearance . . . . . . . Setting Visibility and Graphics Options in Views . Creating a View Template . . . . . . . . . . View Range and Plan Regions . . . . . . . . Using Filters to Control Visibility . . . . . . Masking Portions of a View . . . . . . . . . Working with Visual Overrides . . . . . . . Creating Drawing Sheets in a Project . . . . . . . Creating Drawing Sheets . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Views to Sheets . . . . . . . . . . . Modifying the Building Model from a Sheet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112 . 112 . 115 . 121 . 126 . 130 . 130 . 133 . 136 . 137 . 140 . 146 . 146 . 149 . 153

Chapter 3 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111

Contents | v

Creating and Modifying a Title Sheet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155

Chapter 4 Tagging and Scheduling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
Tagging Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Sequentially Placing and Tagging Rooms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tagging Doors and Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tagging Other Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Defining Schedules and Color Diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Window Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Project Parameters to a Window Schedule . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Unit-Based Door Schedule with a Filter . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Room Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Scheduling Rooms from a Program List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Room Color Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Material Takeoff . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Scheduling Shared Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Shared Parameter File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Shared Parameters to a Family . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Placing, Tagging, and Scheduling a Family with Shared Parameters . Scheduling Uniformat Assembly Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Scheduling Uniformat Assembly Codes and Descriptions . . . . . . . Exporting Project Information with ODBC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Exporting Schedule Information to Microsoft Access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160 . 160 . 165 . 169 . 172 . 172 . 177 . 179 . 181 . 183 . 189 . 192 . 195 . 195 . 196 . 199 . 204 . 204 . 206 . 206 . 210 . 211 . 215 . 215 . 221 . 223 . 227 . 230 . 231 . 238 . 238 . 244 . 248 . 250 . 252 . 254 . 258 . 259 . 260 . 260 . 262 . 278 . 278 . 283 . 283 . 284 . 284 . 287 . 292 . 292 . 294 . 296

Chapter 5 Annotating and Dimensioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209
Changing the Base Elevation of a Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Relocating a Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Dimensioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Automatic Wall Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Controlling Witness Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating an Office Standard Dimension Type from Existing Dimensions . Creating Text Annotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Text Notes to the Floor Plan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Detail from a Building Model . . . . Detailing the View . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Detail Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Text Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Detail Components . . . . . . . . Adding Keynotes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Line-based Detail Components . Modifying a Keynote Database . . . . . . . Creating a Drafted Detail . . . . . . . . . . . . Importing a Detail into a Drafting View . . Creating a Reference Callout . . . . . . . . Creating a Detail in a Drafting View . . . . Using Note Blocks . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Note Block . . . . . Using Drawing Lists . . . . . . . . . Creating a Drawing List . . . . Using Legends . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Symbol Legend . . . Creating a Component Legend Using Revision Tracking . . . . . . . Setting Up a Revision Table . . Sketching Revision Clouds . . . Tagging Revision Clouds . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Chapter 6 Detailing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237

Chapter 7 Finishing the Sheets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277

vi | Contents

Working with Revisions . . . . Importing from Other Applications . Importing Image Files . . . . . Importing Text Documents . . Importing Spreadsheets . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. 297 . 299 . 299 . 300 . 301

Chapter 8 Using Dependent Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 303
Using Dependent Views in Documentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 306 Using Dependent Views for Floor Plan Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 306 Using Dependent Views for Elevation Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 316

Part 4

Viewing and Rendering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321
Viewing a Building Model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Exploring the Building Model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Perspective View with a Camera . . . . . . . . . Creating a Section View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Elevation Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Controlling Fill Pattern Colors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Controlling the Fill Pattern Color of a Material . . . . . . . Setting the Coarse Scale Fill Pattern Color for a Wall Type . Creating a View Plan Region . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Plan Region in a Floor Plan . . . . . . . . . . . . Rendering an Exterior View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Applying Materials and Textures to the Building Model . Adding Trees to the Site . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Perspective View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Selecting a Scene and Rendering the View . . . . . . . . . Rendering an Interior View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding RPC People . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating the Interior Perspective View . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a New Render Scene . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Defining Daylights and Rendering the View . . . . . . . Creating and Recording Walkthroughs . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Walkthrough . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Changing the Walkthrough Path and Camera Position . . Recording the Walkthrough . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Views for Solar Studies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Solar Study - Courtyard View . . . . . . . . Creating a Solar Study Section Cutaway View . . . . . Creating a Solar Study Plan Cutaway View . . . . . . Saving Solar Study Settings and Previewing Animations . . Creating Solar Studies - Summer and Winter Solstice . Previewing Solar Study Animation . . . . . . . . . . . Exporting Solar Studies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Exporting the Study as AVI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Exporting a Study as PNG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating an Internal Plan Solar Study . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating an Internal Plan Study . . . . . . . . . . . . Orienting to True North for Solar Studies . . . . . . . . . . Orienting to True North . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Rendering Interior Shadow Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Rendering an Interior View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 324 . 324 . 327 . 333 . 335 . 337 . 337 . 339 . 340 . 341 . 346 . 346 . 350 . 352 . 355 . 358 . 358 . 360 . 364 . 365 . 367 . 367 . 370 . 372 . 376 . 376 . 377 . 379 . 382 . 382 . 383 . 384 . 384 . 387 . 388 . 388 . 390 . 391 . 394 . 394

Chapter 9 Viewing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 323

Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 345

Chapter 11 Creating Solar Studies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 375

Chapter 12 Presentation Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 397
Adding a Floor Plan View to the Analytique . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 399

Contents | vii

Preparing a Floor Plan for the Analytique . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Using Advanced Model Graphics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding the Floor Plan to a Sheet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding an Elevation View to the Analytique . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Preparing the Elevation Analytique . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding the Presentation Elevation View to the Presentation Sheet . Adding Section Views to the Analytique . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Preparing a Section View for the Analytique . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Shadows and Silhouettes to a Section View . . . . . . . . . Adding the Presentation Section to the Analytique . . . . . . . . . Working with a Presentation View Template . . . . . . . . . . . . Working in a Callout Analytique . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating 3D Cutaways with Section Boxes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Cutaway Isometric Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Cutaway Perspective Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Annotating the Analytique . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. 399 . 401 . 403 . 406 . 406 . 408 . 411 . 411 . 415 . 417 . 420 . 422 . 429 . 429 . 436 . 440

Part 5

Importing and Exporting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 443
Render a Revit Architecture Building Model in 3ds Max . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 446 Rendering Cutaway Views in 3ds Max . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 453 Creating a Daylight Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 457

Chapter 13 Exporting to Autodesk 3ds Max or VIZ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 445

Chapter 14 Importing SketchUp Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 459
Importing a SketchUp Model as a Mass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 461 Creating a Building from Mass Faces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 462

Part 6

Creating

Families . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 473

Chapter 15 About Families and the Family Editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 475
Using Families and the Family Editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 476 Introduction to Families . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 476 Introduction to the Family Editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 477

Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 479
Creating 3D Geometry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Process Overview: Creating a Family . . . . . . . . . . Defining the Origin of a Family . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Reference Planes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Defining Priorities for Reference Planes . . . . . . . . . Dimensioning Reference Planes . . . . . . . . . . . . . Managing Family Parameters and Family Types . . . . Lock geometry to reference planes . . . . . . . . . . . Defining Work Planes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Geometry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Solid Forms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating 2D Geometry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Loading a Family into a Project . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Door Family . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Drawing the Door Plan View Components . . . . Creating the Door Leaf Solid Geometry . . . . . . Assigning Materials to the Door Components . . . Defining New Door Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Window Family . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Specifying the New Window Parameters . . . . . Creating the Window Frame Solid Geometry . . . Creating the Window Sash Solid Geometry . . . . Creating the Window Glass Solid Geometry . . . Creating the Window Mullion Solid Geometry . . Assigning Materials to the Window Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 480 . 480 . 481 . 481 . 483 . 484 . 490 . 491 . 491 . 491 . 491 . 495 . 496 . 497 . 498 . 503 . 506 . 508 . 511 . 512 . 513 . 519 . 521 . 526 . 538

viii | Contents

Defining New Window Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Complex Model Family . . . . . . . . . . . . . Selecting a Family Template . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating the Skeleton for a Complex Wall Opening . Modelling a Complex Wall Opening . . . . . . . . . Creating Window Frame Geometry . . . . . . . . . . Defining the Window Sash Parameters . . . . . . . . Defining Visibility Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Reference Planes for the Glass Geometry . . Creating the Glass Geometry . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Formulas to Define Width . . . . . . . . . . Creating Elevation Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Assigning Default Materials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Material Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Nested Families . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Sill Families . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Loading Sill Families into the Window Family . . . . Creating a Length Parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Placing the Sill Family . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Shared Parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Testing Nested Families . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Testing the Family in a Project Environment . . . . . Creating a Furniture Family . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Specifying the New Rolltop Desk Parameters . . . . . Creating the Desktop Solid Geometry . . . . . . . . . Creating the Desk Drawer Base Solid Geometry . . . . Creating the Rolltop Solid Geometry . . . . . . . . . Creating the Drawers Solid Geometry . . . . . . . . . Defining New Furniture Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Baluster Family . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Drawing a Baluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Assigning the New Baluster to a Stair Run . . . . . . . Creating Profile Families . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Drawing a Sweep Profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Drawing a Rail Profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Drawing a Stair Nosing Profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . Drawing a Reveal Profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Drawing a Host Sweep Profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . Applying a Sweep Profile to a 2D Path . . . . . . . . . Applying a Host Sweep Profile to Walls . . . . . . . . Creating a Room Tag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Specifying Room Tag Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating an Annotation Symbol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Custom North Arrow Annotation Symbol . Adding the New North Arrow to a Project . . . . . . . Creating a Titleblock Family . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Drawing Linework for a Titleblock Sheet . . . . . . . Adding Graphics and Text to a Titleblock . . . . . . . Adding the Titleblock to a New Project . . . . . . . . Creating In-Place Families . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating the Dome Roof In-Place Family . . . . . . . Creating the Concave Floor In-Place Family . . . . . . Appendix A - Exploring Family Templates . . . . . . . . . Model Family Templates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Annotation Family Templates . . . . . . . . . . . . . Titleblock Family Templates . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. 540 . 545 . 547 . 548 . 551 . 554 . 561 . 565 . 566 . 567 . 570 . 573 . 574 . 574 . 575 . 575 . 577 . 578 . 579 . 580 . 581 . 582 . 583 . 584 . 591 . 594 . 603 . 609 . 612 . 614 . 614 . 616 . 618 . 618 . 618 . 619 . 620 . 621 . 622 . 624 . 626 . 626 . 628 . 628 . 630 . 631 . 631 . 634 . 642 . 644 . 644 . 650 . 653 . 654 . 668 . 669

Chapter 17 Parametric Component Design Techniques . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 671
Planning a Parametric Component Family . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 672

Contents | ix

Determining Component Needs . . . . . . . . Selecting the Family Template . . . . . . . . . Creating the Component Skeleton . . . . . . . . . Adding Reference Planes . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Dimensions and Constraints . . . . . Creating New Length Parameters . . . . . . . Flexing the Component Model . . . . . . . . Adding Solid Geometry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Solid Extrusions . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Constraints to the Solid Geometry . . Creating Additional Solid Geometry . . . . . . Testing the Family in a Project . . . . . . . . . . . Loading a Family into a Project . . . . . . . . Testing a Family Instance in a Project . . . . . Working with Nested Subcomponents . . . . . . . Adding a Nested Component . . . . . . . . . Creating Formula-controlled Parameters . . . Arraying Nested Subcomponents . . . . . . . Reloading a Family into a Project . . . . . . . Applying Subcategories, Materials, and Parameters . Creating and Applying Subcategories . . . . . Creating Material Parameters . . . . . . . . . Controlling Component Visibility . . . . . . . . . Assigning Detail Level and View Controls . . . Creating Component Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Multiple Component Types . . . . . Creating Conditional Formulas . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. 672 . 673 . 676 . 676 . 682 . 686 . 690 . 693 . 693 . 695 . 698 . 707 . 707 . 708 . 712 . 712 . 716 . 721 . 726 . 728 . 728 . 733 . 735 . 735 . 738 . 738 . 739

Part 7

Using Advanced Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 741
Flat Curtain System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating an Entrance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Mullions to the Curtain System . . . Curved Curtain System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding a Curved Curtain System . . . . . . . Adding a Custom Curtain Panel . . . . . . . . Adding Mullions to the Curved Curtain Panel Additional Curtain Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . Sloped Glazings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Storefront System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Curtain System by Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 744 . 744 . 753 . 755 . 755 . 758 . 760 . 764 . 764 . 765 . 768 . 774 . 774 . 778 . 780 . 782 . 785 . 787 . 788 . 789 . 791 . 792 . 793 . 794

Chapter 18 Curtain Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 743

Chapter 19 Roofs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 773
Creating Roofs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating an Extruded Roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Gable Roof from a Footprint . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Roof with a Vertical Penetration from a Footprint . Creating a Hip Roof from a Footprint . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Shed Roof from a Footprint . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Slope Arrows to a Shed Roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Aligning Roof Eaves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Mansard Roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Fascia, Gutters, and Soffits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Roof Fascia . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Gutters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Soffits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Chapter 20 Area Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 797
Using Area Analysis Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 798 Creating Area Schemes and Plans . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 798

x | Contents

Creating Area Schedules and Color Fill Area Plans . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 804

Chapter 21 Massing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 807
Using Massing Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Massing Elements to a Building Model . . . . . . . . . . Using Massing Tools to Cut Geometry from the Building Model . Using Mass Family Files in a Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating New Mass Family Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Loading and Placing New Mass Families . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Joining Mass Elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Using Mass Elements with Design Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Mass Elements in Design Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Building Components from Mass Elements . . . . . . . . . Creating Walls by Picking Faces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Floors by Picking Faces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Roofs by Picking Faces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Curtain Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Editing Elements Created from Massings . . . . . . . . . . . . . Controlling Mass/Shell Visibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating, Modifying, and Nesting Groups . Creating and Placing a Group . . . . . Modifying a Group . . . . . . . . . . . Nesting Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . Working with Detail Groups . . . . . . . . Creating a Detail Group . . . . . . . . Using Attached Detail Groups . . . . . Saving and Loading Groups . . . . . . . . . Saving and Loading Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 808 . 808 . 813 . 815 . 815 . 816 . 819 . 822 . 822 . 825 . 825 . 828 . 832 . 834 . 837 . 842 . 846 . 846 . 853 . 857 . 859 . 860 . 863 . 866 . 866 . 870 . 870 . 876 . 880 . 882 . 889 . 893 . 895 . 899 . 900 . 904 . 904 . 905 . 913 . 916 . 917 . 921 . 932 . 938 . 939 . 940 . 942 . 942 . 943

Chapter 22 Grouping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 845

Chapter 23 Site . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 869
Using Site Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Toposurface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Property Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modifying Contour Visibility and Site Settings . Creating Topographic Subregions . . . . . . . . Grading the Toposurface . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding a Building Pad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Site Components . . . . . . . . . . . . Tagging Site and Parking Components . . . . . Creating Parking Space Schedules . . . . . . . . Adding Structural Walls . . . . . . . . . . . . . Importing a DWG for Use as an Underlay . Sketching Structural Walls . . . . . . . . . Dimensioning and Modifying Walls . . . . Adding Structural Columns and Beams . . . . . Adding Structural Columns . . . . . . . . Adding Structural Beams and Girders . . . Adding Joists and Purlins . . . . . . . . . Copying Level 1 Structure to Upper Levels . . . Defining New Levels . . . . . . . . . . . . Duplicating the Existing Design . . . . . . Adding Braces in a Framing Elevation . . . . . Creating a Framing Elevation . . . . . . . Adding Structural Braces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Chapter 24 Structural . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 903

Chapter 25 Sharing Projects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 949
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 950

Contents | xi

Using Worksharing in a Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Understanding Worksharing Fundamentals . . . . . . . Enabling Worksharing and Setting Up Worksets . . . . Working Individually with Worksets . . . . . . . . . . Using Worksets with Multiple Users . . . . . . . . . . . Borrowing Elements from the Worksets of Other Users . Creating Multiple Design Options in a Project . Creating the Structural Design Options . . Creating the Roof System Design Options . Managing Design Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . .

. 950 . 950 . 953 . 957 . 961 . 965 . 970 . 970 . 980 . 987

Chapter 26 Creating Multiple Design Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 969

Chapter 27 Project Phasing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 991
Using Phasing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 992 Phasing Your Model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 992 Using Phase-Specific Room Tags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 998

Chapter 28 Linking Building Models and Sharing Coordinates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1001
Linking Building Models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Linking Building Models from Different Project Files . Repositioning Linked Building Models . . . . . . . . . Controlling Linked Building Model Visibility . . . . . Managing Linked Building Models . . . . . . . . . . . Sharing Coordinates Between Building Models . . . . . . . Acquiring and Publishing Coordinates . . . . . . . . . Relocating a Project with Shared Coordinates . . . . . Working with a Linked Building Model . . . . . . . . Managing Shared Locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Scheduling Components of Linked Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1003 . 1003 . 1011 . 1014 . 1017 . 1019 . 1020 . 1021 . 1024 . 1026 . 1027

Part 8

Customizing Project Settings and Templates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1031
Modifying System Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modifying General System Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Specifying File Locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Specifying Spelling Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modifying Snap Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modifying Project Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating and Applying Materials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating and Applying Fill Patterns . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Controlling Object Styles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modifying Line Patterns and Styles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modifying Annotations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Specifying Units of Measurement, Temporary Dimensions, and Detail Level Options . Modifying Project Browser Organization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating an Office Template . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Choosing the Base Template . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modifying Project Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Loading and Modifying Families and Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modifying Views and View Templates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modifying Render Scene Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modifying Import/Export Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Setting up Shared and Project Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Named Print Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1034 . 1034 . 1036 . 1038 . 1039 . 1041 . 1041 . 1045 . 1047 . 1048 . 1053 . 1055 . 1056 . 1059 . 1059 . 1060 . 1064 . 1067 . 1069 . 1071 . 1072 . 1074

Chapter 29 Modifying Project and System Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1033

xii | Contents

Getting Started

1

1

2 | Chapter 1 Getting Started

Introduction

1

This introduction helps you get started with the Revit Architecture 2008 tutorials and presents the fundamental concepts of the product, including:
■ ■ ■ ■

how Revit Architecture works. the terms used when working with the product. how to navigate the user interface. how to perform some common tasks in the product.

3

Using the Tutorials
In this lesson, you learn how to get started with the Revit Architecture tutorials, including where to locate the training files specified in the tutorials and how to create a new Revit Architecture project from a template file. The Contents tab of the Revit Architecture Tutorials window displays the available tutorial titles. Expand a title to display the titles of the lessons in the tutorial, and expand a lesson title to display a list of exercises in the lesson. NOTE You may find it helpful to print a tutorial to make it easier to reference the instructions as you work in Revit Architecture. The tutorials are also available in PDF format by clicking Help menu ➤ Documents on the Web in Revit Architecture.

Accessing Training Files
Training files are Revit Architecture projects, templates, and families that were created specifically for the tutorials. The training files, like the tutorials, are bundled with the product. Training files are provided to help you work through the tutorials. In this exercise, you learn where the training files are located, as well as how to open and save them.

Where are the training files located?
Training files, by default, are located in C:\Documents and Settings\All Users\Application Data\Autodesk\RAC 2008\Training. Training files are grouped into three folders within the training folder:

Common: generic files often used to teach a concept. These files are not dependent on imperial or metric units. Common file names have a c_ prefix. Imperial: files specifically for users working with imperial units. Imperial file names have an i_ prefix. Metric: files specifically for users working with metric units. Metric file names have an m_ prefix.

■ ■

NOTE Depending on your installation, your training folder may be in a different location. Contact your CAD manager for more information.

IMPORTANT Content used in the tutorials, such as templates and families, is located and accessed in the training files location. Although this content may be installed in other locations on your system, all content used in the tutorials is included in the training files location to ensure that all audiences access the correct files.

What is a dataset?
A dataset is a Revit Architecture project that defines a building information model and views of the model that is used to complete the steps in a tutorial. Many tutorials include a Dataset section that references the training file to be used with the tutorial. In other tutorials, you create a project from a template, rather than opening an existing dataset.

Open a dataset
1 Click File menu ➤ Open. 2 In the left pane of the Open dialog, scroll down, and click the Training Files icon. 3 In the right pane, double-click Common, Imperial, or Metric, depending on the type of dataset.

4 | Chapter 1 Introduction

4 Click the dataset name, and click Open.

Save a dataset
5 To save a dataset with a new name, click File menu ➤ Save As. In many cases, the work you do in a project during a tutorial exercise becomes the starting point for the next exercise. In many tutorials, you create a project or modify an existing project, save the changes, and use the saved version of the file to begin the next exercise or lesson. 6 Complete the information in the Save As dialog:

For Save in, select the folder in which to save the new file. You can save the file in the appropriate Training Files folder or in another location. Note where you save the file so you can open it for additional exercises as required.

For File name, enter the new file name. A good practice is to save the dataset with a unique name after you have made changes. For example, if you open c_settings.rvt and make changes, you should save this file with a new name such as c_settings_modified.rvt.

For Save as type, verify that Project Files is selected, and then click Save.

Create a project from a template
7 To create a project from a template, rather than using an existing dataset, click File menu ➤ New ➤ Project.

8 In the New Project dialog, under Create new, select Project. 9 Under Template file, verify the second option is selected, and click Browse. In the left pane of the Choose Template dialog, click Training Files, and open Metric\Templates. 10 In the Choose Template dialog, review the Revit Architecture templates.

Accessing Training Files | 5

Templates are available for specific building types: commercial, construction, and residential. Each template contains predefined settings and views appropriate for the corresponding building type. For most tutorial projects, you will use the default template, and customize the project as necessary. 11 Select DefaultMetric.rte, and click Open. 12 Click OK.

Understanding the Basics
In this lesson, you learn what Revit Architecture is and how its parametric change engine benefits you and your work. You begin with the fundamental concepts that Revit Architecture is built upon. You learn the terminology, the hierarchy of elements, how to navigate the user interface, and how to perform some common tasks in the product.

What is Revit Architecture 2008?
The Revit Architecture platform for building information modeling is a design and documentation system that supports the design, drawings, and schedules required for a building project. Building information modeling (BIM) delivers information about project design, scope, quantities, and phases when you need it. In the Revit Architecture model, every drawing sheet, 2D and 3D view, and schedule is a presentation of information from the same underlying building model database. As you work in drawing and schedule views, Revit Architecture collects information about the building project and coordinates this information across all other representations of the project. The Revit Architecture parametric change engine automatically coordinates changes made anywhere—in model views, drawing sheets, schedules, sections, and plans.

What is meant by parametric?
The term parametric refers to the relationships among all elements of the model that enable the coordination and change management that Revit Architecture provides. These relationships are created either automatically by the software or by you as you work. In mathematics and mechanical CAD, the numbers or characteristics that define these kinds of relationships are called parameters; hence, the operation of the software is parametric. This concept is important because it is this capability that delivers the fundamental coordination and productivity benefits of Revit Architecture: Change anything at any time anywhere in the project, and Revit Architecture coordinates that change through the entire project. The following are examples of these element relationships:

The outside of a door frame is a fixed dimension on the hinge side from a perpendicular partition. If you move the partition, the door retains this relationship to the partition. Windows or pilasters are spaced equally across a given elevation. If the length of the elevation is changed, the relationship of equal spacing is maintained. In this case, the parameter is not a number but a proportional characteristic. The edge of a floor or roof is related to the exterior wall such that when the exterior wall is moved, the floor or roof remains connected. In this case, the parameter is one of association or connection.

How does Revit Architecture 2008 keep things updated?
A fundamental characteristic of a building information modeling application is the ability to coordinate changes and maintain consistency at all times. You do not have to intervene to update drawings or links. When you change something, Revit Architecture immediately determines what is affected by the change and reflects that change to any affected elements. Revit Architecture uses two key concepts that make it especially powerful and easy to use. The first is the capturing of relationships while the designer works. The second is its approach to propagating building changes. The result of these concepts is software that works like you do, without requiring entry of data that is unimportant to your design.

Element behavior in a parametric modeler
Revit Architecture uses five software element classes: host, component, annotation, view, and datum.

Hosts include walls, floors, roofs, and ceilings.

6 | Chapter 1 Introduction

■ ■ ■ ■

Components include windows, doors, and furniture. Annotations are 2D, view-specific elements that help you produce documentation. Views are dynamic representations of the model and are always up-to-date. Datums are reference elements that help you put your building together.

This implementation provides flexibility for designers. Revit Architecture elements are designed to be created and modified by you directly; programming is not required. If you can draw, you can define new parametric elements in Revit Architecture. In Revit Architecture, the elements determine their behavior largely from their context in the building. The context is determined by how you draw the component and the constraint relationships that are established with other components. Often, you do nothing to establish these relationships; they are implied by what you do and how you draw. In other cases, you can explicitly control them, by locking a dimension or aligning two walls, for example.

Understanding Revit Architecture 2008 terms
Most of the terms used to identify objects in Revit Architecture are common, industry-standard terms familiar to most architects. However, there are some terms that are unique to Revit Architecture, and understanding them is crucial to understanding the software. This section defines the basic terms used in Revit Architecture. Project: In Revit Architecture, the project is the single database of information for your design—the building information model. The project file contains all the information for your building design, from geometry to construction data. This information includes components used to design the model, views of the project, and drawings of the design. By using a single project file, Revit Architecture makes it easy for you to alter your design and have changes reflected in all associated areas (plan views, elevation views, section views, schedules, and so forth). Having only one file to track also makes it easier to manage the project. Level: Levels are infinite horizontal planes that act as a reference for level-hosted elements, such as roofs, floors, and ceilings. Most often, you use levels to define a vertical height or story within a building. You create a level for each known story or other needed reference of the building; for example, first floor, top of wall, or bottom of foundation. To place levels, you must be in a section or elevation view.
Level 2 work plane cutting through the 3D view with the corresponding floor plan tiled next to it.

Element: When creating your project, you add Revit Architecture parametric building elements to the design. All elements are considered categories. Revit Architecture classifies elements by model component elements and annotation elements.
■ ■

A model component element, such as a door, desk, or roof, represents the actual 3D geometry of the building. An annotation building element, such as a door tag, elevation symbol, or room tag, helps document the model.

Understanding the Basics | 7

Family: Families are classes of elements in a category that group elements with a common set of parameters (properties), identical use, and similar graphical representation. Different elements in a family may have different values for some or all properties, but the set of properties—their names and meaning—is the same. For example, six-panel colonial doors could be considered one family, although the doors that compose the family come in different sizes and materials. Families are either component families or system families:

Component family files can be loaded into a project and created from family templates. You can determine the set of properties and the graphical representation of the family. System families include walls, dimensions, ceilings, roofs, floors, and levels, and are not available for loading or creating as separate files.
■ ■

Revit Architecture predefines the set of properties and the graphical representation of system families. You can use the predefined types to generate new types that belong to this family within the project. For example, the behavior of a wall is predefined in the system; however, you can create different types of walls with different compositions. System families can be transferred between projects.

Type: Each family can have different types. A type can be a specific size of a family, such as a A0 title block or a 910 x 2110 door. A type can also be a style, such as default aligned or default angular style for dimensions. A family can have several types. For example, a table could come in several different sizes. Each different size would be a new type within the same family. Instance: Instances are the actual items that are placed in the project and have specific locations in the building (model instances) or on a drawing sheet (annotation instances).

Revit Architecture 2008 terms

Navigating the User Interface
One of the advantages of Revit Architecture is its ease of use, specifically its clear user interface. The Revit Architecture window is arranged to make navigation easy. Even the toolbar buttons are labeled, making it easy to understand what each button represents. Revit Architecture uses standard Microsoft® Windows® conventions. If you have used any other product that follows these conventions, learning Revit Architecture is much easier.

8 | Chapter 1 Introduction

In the following illustration, the user interface is labeled. In the steps that follow, you navigate and become familiar with the user interface.

Start a new project
1 On the Standard toolbar, click .

This creates a new project based on the default template.

The Title Bar
2 Place the cursor at the top of the user interface and notice the Title Bar contains the name of the project and the view that is currently open.

By default, new projects are numbered consecutively until saved with a new name. In addition, the Level 1 floor plan view is the default open view. TIP The view opened and the view names are dependent on the template on which the project is based.

The Menu Bar
3 Click View menu ➤ Zoom.

Navigating the User Interface | 9

On the left side of the Options Bar. A context menu appears with a list of all available commands. Notice the bar beneath the toolbars contains wall design options. you simply type the required keystrokes to run the command. Notice the design options available on the Options Bar are now applicable to doors. The buttons on the toolbar represent some of the more common commands. click Toolbar. and View. The Options Bar 5 Click Modelling menu ➤ Wall. The Toolbar 4 On the Window menu. 10 | Chapter 1 Introduction . place the cursor over the menu name. The context menu changes depending on the function you are performing and what is currently selected. While working in the drawing area. the shortcut key for Zoom in Region is ZR. and click. To choose commands. These shortcut keys are listed next to the command on the menu. Then. click the command name to start the command. Another timesaving tool for selecting commands is to place the cursor in the drawing area and right-click. The Options Bar is context-sensitive and varies depending on the tool or selected component. notice a door type is specified. 6 Click Modelling menu ➤ Door. TIP For example. You can control the visibility of the six toolbars and turn the toolbar text labels on or off within the Window ➤ Toolbar menu. There are six toolbars across the top of the window just beneath the Menu Bar. Edit.The Menu Bar across the top of the window includes standard menu names such as File. Many of the commands also have shortcut keys to speed up the design process. You can use the toolbar grips to resize and move each toolbar.

The Type Selector is a context-sensitive drop-down list. You use the Type Selector in two ways. For example. The list of components in the Type Selector is identical to the components listed in the Families branch of the Project Browser under the respective category. you can select any component and then change the type from the Type Selector. First. If you select the Door tool. notice the list of walls that are available. the Type Selector displays a list of doors available within the project. The Design Bar 10 Click Window menu ➤ Design Bars. Select the drop-down list to view the list of doors.The Type Selector 7 The drop-down list on the left side of the Options Bar is called the Type Selector. 8 Click Modelling menu ➤ Wall. if you intend to add a door. you can select a component type before you add it to the building model. 9 In the Type Selector. Navigating the User Interface | 11 . Within the drawing area. the door type active in the Type Selector is the door type that is added when you insert it into the building model. You can also use the Type Selector to change a component type after it has been added to the building model.

11 Click OK. You can control which tabs display by selecting them in the Show Design Bars dialog. Each tab contains frequently used commands that are also available from the menu. ■ ■ ■ ■ Basics tab: includes commands for creating most basic building model components View tab: commands for creating different views in the project Modelling tab: all the commands to create model elements Drafting tab: commands for both adding annotation symbols and creating the sheet details for the project construction documents Rendering tab: commands for creating rendered 3D images ■ 12 | Chapter 1 Introduction . The Design Bar is located on the left side of the interface. containing buttons grouped by function. immediately below the Type Selector. There are 10 tabs in the Design Bar.The Show Design Bars dialog is displayed.

click the tab. family category (doors.■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Site tab: commands for adding site components and producing site plans Massing tab: commands for executing conceptual massing commands Room and Area tab: commands for making room and area schemes and plans Structural tab: commands for adding structural components to your project Construction tab: includes commands for creating construction industry information To access the commands within a tab. The browser is conveniently organized by view type (floor plans. In the Project Browser. sheets. You can use the Project Browser to quickly manage the views. and group name. and groups of your current project: ■ ■ Right-click in the browser to add. delete. select Views (all). and rename views. Expand or compress the browser list by clicking the + or sign next to the name. walls. and the respective commands are displayed on the Design Bar. windows). elevations. reports. TIP You can turn the visibility of each tab on and off by right-clicking on the Design Bar and selecting the tab from the context menu. The Project Browser 12 To the right of the Design Bar is the Project Browser. families. 3D). Navigating the User Interface | 13 . families. schedules. and groups.

click Wall. Do not click. click Cancel. You can also drag and drop from the browser into the drawing area. You can create and modify Project Browser organization schemes for both views and sheets.■ ■ To open a view. double-click the name. 14 | Chapter 1 Introduction . you can instantly change the sorting within the Project Browser by selecting the scheme in the Type Selector. making it easy to add a family or group to the project or add a view to a sheet. 14 Click Settings menu ➤ Browser Organization. The cursor is displayed as a pencil. The browser is dockable. scroll through the sorting options available for the Project Browser. so you can position it wherever you want by dragging the Project Browser title bar to a new location. 15 In the Browser Organization dialog. After you create a browser organization scheme. 17 Place the cursor near the center of the drawing area. ■ 13 In the Type Selector. The Status Bar 16 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar.

you can use the Status Bar and the Tab key to toggle between components and select the desired component. Make sure you place the cursor over the arrow portion of the symbol. In the Status Bar. it highlights and the status bar displays the component name." TIP The tooltip that displays is identical to the note in the status bar. use the Tab key to alternate between nearby components. notice that the name of the preselected component is Views: Elevation: West. 18 On the Design Bar.In the bottom left corner of the window. 19 Place the cursor over the elevation symbol arrow on the left side of the drawing area. Navigating the User Interface | 15 . 20 Press TAB. It highlights when the cursor is over it. TIP When attempting to select a specific component in a crowded or detailed view. click Modify. The elevation symbol consists of two parts. in conjunction with Tooltips. In this case. You can turn the Status Bar visibility on or off from the Window menu. Elevations: Elevation: Elevation 5. it tells you to "Click to enter wall start point. When attempting to select a specific component in a complex or crowded view. and notice that the preselected component switches to the main elevation symbol. Revit Architecture 2008 Help 21 Click Help menu ➤ Revit Architecture 2008 Help. regarding selected components within a view. the main symbol and the elevation directional arrows. notice the Status Bar provides information regarding what you should do next. The Status Bar also provides information. When you place the cursor over a component.

TIP You can control the level of Tool Tip assistance from the Settings ➤ Options menu. search for all instances of a word or phrase on the Search tab. and then click on a specific menu command or command button for Help. Toolbar: From the Toolbar. click . you may be asked to zoom to a specific region of a view or to zoom to fit the entire building or floor plan in the view. Windows: From any window. There are several ways to access zoom options: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ View menu commands Zoom command on the View toolbar Shortcut keys Wheel mouse Dynamic View dialog In the following steps. press F1 to get help on that dialog box. 2 Click File menu ➤ Open. HTML help window to search for information and quickly display it to read or print. After you are familiar with how to complete these tasks. You can access Help in the following ways: ■ Dialog Boxes: Dialog boxes include Help buttons. Understanding how to adjust the view will make it easier to work with the building model in the window. For example. press F1 to get the topic associated with the window. rest the cursor over the Toolbar button until the Tool Tip displays.Help is available online at all times during a Revit Architecture session. Be sure to have the Standard toolbar displayed. you are instructed to use a zoom command to adjust the viewable area in the window. and open Metric\m_Cohouse. 3 In the left pane of the Open dialog. If there is no Help button displayed.rvt. There are several tools that help you find information. you open a dataset and practice adjusting the view with the zoom commands. click Training Files. or save commonly used pages on the Favorites tab. Tool Tips: To see Tool Tips. Performing Common Tasks as You Work in Revit Architecture In this exercise. 16 | Chapter 1 Introduction . You can also press SHIFT+F1. and the topic specific to the dialog box opens. ■ ■ ■ 22 Close the Revit Architecture Help window. Use zoom commands to adjust the view 1 In the tutorials. you learn to perform some of the common Revit Architecture tasks that are included in the tutorials. Context-sensitive help is also available to provide instant help on any menu command. Click the Help button. You can use this tri-pane. find a keyword on the Index tab. You can select a topic on the Contents tab. it will be easier to work in Revit Architecture and focus on the unique tasks for each tutorial.

and the view of the buiding model is sized to fit the available window. Performing Common Tasks as You Work in Revit Architecture | 17 . The zoom menu lists the zoom options and the shortcut keys for each option. NOTE Clicking the Zoom icon itself automatically activates the Zoom In Region command. click the drop-down menu next to the Zoom command to display the zoom options. The cursor becomes a magnifying glass.The 3D isometric view displays: 4 Click View menu ➤ Zoom to display the zoom options menu. 9 Click the upper left corner and lower right corner of the region you wish to zoom. 6 On the View toolbar. 8 Click in the drawing area. 5 Click Zoom Out (2x). this is referred to as a crossing selection. 7 Click Zoom To Fit. and enter the shortcut keys ZR to zoom in on a region.

and double-click 2nd Flr. zoom in on the upper-left corner of the floor plan. click Zoom. expand Floor Plans. Revit Architecture uses the largest snap increment that represents less than 2mm in the drawing area. These are the drag controls. Without clicking in the dialog. display at the ends of selected lines and walls in a plan view. it is important to understand how to adjust the size of components in the drawing area.10 If you use a mouse where the middle button is a wheel. expand Views (all). click Settings menu ➤ Snaps. Cnst. roll the wheel to zoom the view. hold the middle mouse button (or left mouse button on a wheel mouse). When drawing or modifying a building model. The Dynamic View dialog displays in the lower-left corner of the screen. and drag the cursor. as shown: Notice the small blue dots that display at both ends of the wall. click . and select the wall. press and hold CTRL. Small blue dots. Use the wheel mouse to zoom out to see the entire building again. called drag controls. 11 Zoom is also available in Dynamic View mode. To modify or add snap increments. on the View toolbar. To display the Dynamic View dialog in a 2D or 3D view. display along the ends. 18 | Chapter 1 Introduction . you can roll the wheel to zoom the view dynamically. ■ Resize elements using drag controls 13 In the Project Browser. and drag the cursor in the drawing area. 12 Use one of the following methods to zoom: ■ ■ In the Dynamic View dialog. referred to as shape handles. If you do not have a wheel mouse. and tops of selected walls in elevation and 3D views. use a zoom menu command or the Toolbar option to zoom out within the view. NOTE As you zoom in and out within a view. Similar controls. 14 Enter ZR. bottoms. On a wheel mouse.

Move an element 17 Scroll the view down so you can see the couch and table in the floor plan. Performing Common Tasks as You Work in Revit Architecture | 19 . to lengthen the wall. click to specify the starting position. you want to move the table closer to the wall. click (Move). and click again to specify the ending position. 16 Click in the drawing area to deselect the wall. 19 Click the lower-left endpoint of the table. moving the cursor to the left horizontally. for example. Some commands.15 Click and drag the left control. require two clicks to complete the command. After selecting the element to be moved. and on the Edit toolbar. such as Move and Copy. 18 Select the Craftsman02 table. In this case.

you decide that you like the table better where it was placed originally. All commands are canceled up to and including the selected command. 23 On the Undo menu. select the second item in the list. click the drop-down menu next to .20 Click next to the lower wall. Move. All changes you make to a project are tracked. and drag it on top of the table. Undo commands 22 On the Standard toolbar. Selecting the second action in the list will undo the last two actions. In this example. 21 Another way to move an element is to select it and drag it to a new location. The table and plant are returned to their original locations. The table moves down and the lower-left corner is placed at the move endpoint. The Undo command allows you to undo several commands by clicking the drop-down menu next to the Undo command on the Toolbar. as shown. Select the plant. 20 | Chapter 1 Introduction .

Press ESC twice.NOTE To quickly undo the previous action. End a command 24 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. On the Design Bar. click Lines. 25 Click in the drawing area to start the line and click again to end it. 26 To end the command. use one of the following methods: ■ ■ ■ Choose another command. click the Undo command. click Modify. stay active or current until you choose another command or end the current command. Some commands. or press and hold CTRL and enter Z. 27 Close the file without saving your changes. such as the Lines command. on the Standard toolbar. Performing Common Tasks as You Work in Revit Architecture | 21 . Notice that the Lines command is still active and you could continue to place lines.

22 | Chapter 1 Introduction .

Developing Your Designs 2 23 .

24 | Chapter 2 Developing Your Designs .

or “flex the model” by changing parameters. 25 . As you complete the exercises in this tutorial. a central service core. If the grid moves. As you develop the building design. For example. the wall or column will move with it. and a sloped roof over one corner of the building. Parametric design allows you to incorporate design intent into your model. When you constrain Revit Architecture elements to each other. Dimensions and other positional constraints define relationships between elements in the model. a curtain wall. you learn how to constrain elements and how to test the parametric relationships between them. you learn how to use parametric design techniques.Creating a Building Information Model 2 In this tutorial. you learn how to design a building information model (BIM) in Revit® Architecture 2008. it is good practice to test the constraints. a wall or a column can be constrained to grid. You create a retail building that contains 5 floors.

you load any required family type that is not in your project. 26 | Chapter 2 Creating a Building Information Model . subsequent exercises instruct you to open a project dataset. After the beginning exercises. from the product library. You set up the project and create the structural frame and foundation of the building. such as a door or window. The project datasets have pre-loaded family types and represent the correct state for beginning the exercise. you create a Revit Architecture project from a template provided with the software. so there is no dependency on previously completed exercises.Using this Tutorial In the first 6 exercises of this tutorial. In practice.

4 In the left pane of the dialog. expand Views (all). South. change their properties. East. and elevation views created in the project by the template. The new project opens. and settings.rte. and delete them. The Project Browser contains a hierarchical tree structure that you use to navigate the views. To create the project file. sheets. In the drawing space in the right pane. and click Browse. notice four elevation markers. 5 Click OK. Revit Architecture templates are available for specific building types: commercial. reflected ceiling plan views. construction. verify the second option is selected. and residential. locate the Project Browser. These views are customizable: you can rename them. The project is stored as a single file. In views that display elevation markers. you will use the default template. and families in your project. Ceiling Plans. or by opening the view in the Project Browser. Each marker corresponds to an elevation view in the project: North. you design inside the elevation markers. duplicate them. The template file has an RTE extension and provides default project units. 7 If necessary. You can also add views to your project as you develop and document the building information model. click Training Files. Create the project from the default template 1 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Project. NOTE If you create a project without a template. you create the project that will store the retail building design and different views of the building. select Project. For this project. The views that display under each of these branches of the tree are the default floor plan views. and open Metric\Templates\DefaultMetric. Each template contains predefined settings and views appropriate for the corresponding building type. views. with an RVT extension. but contains no geometry. You can access these views by double-clicking the elevation marker arrow. schedules. under Create new. you use a template that is provided with the software. Creating the Project | 27 . 3 Under Template file. and Elevations (Building Elevation). levels. West. expand Floor Plans. Explore the project with the Project Browser 6 On the left side of the drawing screen. and customize the project as necessary.Creating the Project In this exercise. only a single floor plan view and a single ceiling plan view are created. 2 In the New Project dialog.

and Revit Links branches that display at the same level as Views (all). The bold type indicates that the Level 1 Floor Plan view is the current view. 16 Click Save. enter Revit Retail Building. “Adding Project Levels” on page 28. 15 For Save as type. As you design and document your building model. created by the template. you will want to save your work frequently. and click Training Files.Floor Plan: Level 1 to indicate the Level 1 Floor plan view is current. click to scroll down to the bottom of the list. verify that Level 1 displays as bold. the software title bar contains the name of the software and Project 1. double-click Metric. and on the General tab. view the Save Reminder interval. you add the remaining 5 levels using different techniques. heights. You also change the elevation of the two levels lines to the appropriate heights for the first two stories of the building. Schedules/Quantities. will be accessible from the Project Browser. display in the south elevation. notice the Legends. 14 For File name. as well as the corresponding floor and ceiling plan views to create foundation and entry levels for the building. After you modify the two default levels. Groups.rvt) is selected. the view you see in the drawing area. 9 Under Elevations (Building Elevation). You can add. 10 In the Project Browser. You can control how often the software will prompt you to save your work. and other properties. Level lines are finite horizontal planes that you use to define the levels (stories) of your building information model. delete. Sheets (all). 17 Proceed to the next exercise. As you complete the exercises in this tutorial. Families. double-click South. 13 In the file window. You use levels to position Revit Architecture elements in your building model. You change the names of the 2 default levels. This folder contains the Revit Architecture files that you need to complete all of the Revit Architecture tutorials. verify Project Files (*. Two level lines. you modify the 2 default project levels and add 5 levels to the project to define the 7 vertical levels of the building model. 12 In the left pane of the Save As dialog.8 Under Floor Plans. Click Settings menu ➤ Options. and duplicate levels. 28 | Chapter 2 Creating a Building Information Model . Notice that in the top left corner of your screen. Adding Project Levels In this exercise. as well as change their names. content and building model reports. Save the project 11 Click File menu ➤ Save As. such as schedules and legends.

and double-click South. you will use the levels to position building elements such as walls. it is good practice to precede the level names with level numbers so the corresponding views will list sequentially in the Project Browser. When you begin designing. expand Views (all). TIP Because views list alphabetically or sequentially in the Project Browser. or constrained. Modify the two default project levels 1 In the Project Browser. expand Elevations (Building Elevation). 2 Zoom to the level names at the right end of each level line. the other levels move and change with it. 5 In the Project Browser. notice the Level 1 floor and ceiling plan views are now named 00 Foundation. so that when one level moves. and press ENTER. enter 00 Foundation. 8 Click Yes to rename the corresponding views. doors. and press ENTER. enter -1800 mm. Adding Project Levels | 29 . under Floor Plans and Ceiling Plans. enter 01 Entry Level. 3 Double-click the Level 1 text. enter 0 mm. to each other. and press ENTER. 4 Click Yes to rename the corresponding floor and ceiling plan views.You learn how the levels are locked. 7 Double-click the Level 2 text. 6 Click the 00 Foundation elevation height. and press ENTER. 9 Click the 01 Entry Level elevation height. and windows within the building model.

view the Design Bar. 13 On the Options Bar. Next. Use the Draw option to add a level 10 Zoom out so you can see both levels in the view. which should display by default. and click Basics. using a different option. Notice that the bar above the drawing area changes to display new tools and settings. 20 Click Yes to rename the corresponding level and view. enter 3750 mm. and click OK. 15 Move the cursor to the left endpoint of the 01 Entry Level line. 3750 mm above the 02 Level line. Notice that the name of the level line changes to 02 Level in the current view. you add another level. verify and Make Plan View are selected. you add a level by drawing it above the 01 Entry Level. By default. and for Offset. 17 Move the cursor horizontally until a dashed green line displays alignment with the two existing levels. and then move it up. 24 Place the cursor on the 02 Level line. not all the tabs are visible. and move it slightly upward. 3750 mm above 01 Entry Level. 11 On the left side of the Project Browser. and press ENTER to specify the start point of the new level line. Use the Pick option to add a level 22 On Design Bar. The command that you use to add levels is on the Basics tab. The Design Bar provides tabs that provide quick access to many commands. As you move the cursor. The Options Bar displays appropriate options and settings for every command that you select on the Design Bar. verify that you have created an 02 Level ceiling plan view as well. click . place the cursor anywhere on the Design Bar. 16 Enter 3750 mm. 14 Click Plan View Types. 30 | Chapter 2 Creating a Building Information Model .Next. and enter 02 Level. click Level. right-click Level 3. If it does not. right-click. a corresponding ceiling plan and floor plan view will be created. 18 In the Project Browser. A dashed green line indicates where the new level will be drawn. This is the Options Bar. 21 In the Project Browser. a temporary dimension displays the height between 01 Entry Level and the cursor position. and press ESC. When you add the new level. click Level. 19 Click OK. 23 On the Options Bar. 12 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. click to specify the endpoint of the level line. click Rename. verify Ceiling Plan and Floor Plan are selected. under Floor Plans.

31 Clear the box to redisplay the level symbol on the right side only. Name the levels: ■ ■ ■ 04 Level 05 Roof Garden 06 Roof NOTE Do not use the Copy command to create the levels. If you create a level by copying it. as shown. Add the remaining 3 levels 28 Using either the Draw or Pick option. Adding Project Levels | 31 . the associated floor and ceiling plan views are not created. and rename the corresponding views. or on the Design Bar. 26 Rename the level 03 Level. Display a symbol at the left endpoint of the 06 level line 29 Click the 06 Roof Level line. and zoom to the left endpoint of the line. 30 Select the empty blue box on the left to display a level symbol at the left endpoint of the line. click Modify to end the command. Copy levels only when you want to use them for reference. 27 Press ESC.25 Click to place the level line. add 3 levels 3750 mm apart above 03 Level.

3 On the Options Bar. Create vertical column grid lines 1 On the Project Browser. until it is positioned under the top elevation marker. all the levels move. click Grid. you place the building columns at the grid line intersections. Move the cursor up. select . When the grid is complete. under Floor Plans. double-click 00 Foundation. If you select a level and click its lock. By using the grid to control placement of columns. On the Design Bar. you create a structural grid in the 00 Foundation floor plan view of the building model. click Modify. In a later exercise. Creating a Column Grid In this exercise. Verify that the levels are vertically constrained with locks before you continue on to the next exercise. 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. you change the columns to round hollow steel columns. The lock icon that displays indicates that the levels are vertically constrained. you constrain the column heights to the roof level. the levels are no longer constrained. 33 Proceed to the next exercise. and specify the grid line endpoint. In the following exercise.Test the level constraints 32 Select and drag the blue circle to the right or left to shorten or lengthen the level lines. so that if the roof elevation changes. 32 | Chapter 2 Creating a Building Information Model . ■ The number 1 displays inside the bubble at the endpoint of the completed grid line. “Creating a Column Grid” on page 32. the column height changes as well. Notice that by moving the top level. 4 Draw the first vertical grid line: ■ ■ In the lower left corner of the drawing area. and you can move them independently. specify a start point for the grid line. Notice that the status bar prompts you to specify a start point for the grid line. you ensure a level of accuracy early in your design.

and then place the cursor on the grid line to display the location of the second grid line. and for Offset. 7 Add 3 vertical grid lines: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ On the Options Bar. Move the cursor to the right side of grid line B. click Grid. for Offset. enter 7500 mm. You can change what displays in grid bubbles at any point in your project. for Offset. enter 4500 mm. On the Options Bar. 6 Offset a second vertical grid line from the first grid line: ■ On the Design Bar. ■ The first vertical grid bay is created. enter 7500 mm. ■ ■ Move the cursor to the right side of the grid line. Next. Click to place the grid line. Move the cursor to the right side of grid line C. On the Options Bar.5 Change the grid bubble number to a letter: ■ ■ Double-click 1 inside the grid bubble. and press ENTER. Creating a Column Grid | 33 . use the Pick option to create another vertical grid line by offsetting it a specific distance from the existing line. and click to place the line. click . Enter A. and click to place the line. and click to place the line. Move the cursor to the right side of grid line D.

■ ■ ■ On the upper left side of the grid. On the Options Bar. click and specify an Offset of 0 mm. The letter F displays inside the bubble at the endpoint of the completed grid line. click Dimension. Move the cursor horizontally past the vertical grid line E.8 Press ESC. click Grid. and specify the grid line endpoint. Create horizontal grid lines 9 Draw the first horizontal grid line: ■ On the Design Bar. 34 | Chapter 2 Creating a Building Information Model . specify a start point for the grid line just below grid line A. 12 Using the Pick option and offsets of 7500 mm and 4500 mm. add horizontal grid lines to complete the grid. as shown. click Grid. 10 Change the grid bubble letter to 1. 11 On the Design Bar. Dimension the grid and lock the grid bay spacing 13 On the Design Bar.

Two pins display on the grid lines. 16 When you select the last vertical grid line. 15 Starting with grid line A. 23 Click Edit menu ➤ Pin Position. The pins are hidden. click Dimension. click Modify. 21 Press ESC. 18 On the Design Bar. until it is closer to grid line A. 17 Click all 4 lock icons on the dimension string to lock the grid bay spacing. By pinning these central grid lines. 22 While pressing CTRL. and select grid line A.14 On the Options Bar. Creating a Column Grid | 35 . You must select the grid lines to redisplay the pins. 19 Dimension the horizontal grid lines as shown. and press ESC. 25 Adjust the grid: ■ ■ On the Design Bar. The locks ensure that the grid spacing cannot be accidentally changed. select each vertical grid line just under its grid bubble. click and drag the blue circular grip up. select grid lines C and 3. click . until it is closer to grid line 5. and press ESC. click the drawing area to the right of the line to place the dimension. you ensure that the grid remains centered and the building will ''grow'' out from the center if its grid dimensions are changed. click and drag the blue circular grip to the right. 20 Click the 4 lock icons to lock the horizontal grid dimensions. At the left endpoint of the grid line. At the bottom endpoint of the grid line. ■ ■ Select grid line 1. 24 Press ESC.

■ If necessary. adjust the position of the dimension strings by selecting and dragging them. and unlock it. 31 Press ESC. 35 Enter 9000 mm. 40 On the Options Bar. under Floor Plans. and then select the dimension value between grid lines A and B. 36 On the Standard toolbar. and specify a point beyond the last horizontal grid line to place the camera. Columns that span from the 00 Foundation level to the 05 Roof Garden level are added at the grid line intersections of the column grid. 27 In the Type Selector. For Place By. 33 While pressing CTRL. and press ENTER. 32 Select the dimension string between grid line A and B. 34 On the Options Bar. Next. and on the Options Bar. click Camera. select 01 Entry Level. select all of the column grid lines. click (Grid Intersection). 41 Place the camera and select its target point: ■ Zoom to the lower right corner of the column grid. 28 On the Options Bar: ■ Select Height and 05 Roof Garden. 30 Verify that all the grid lines are selected (red). 37 Select the dimension string and verify that it is locked. select grid line A. You want to view the columns as if you were walking toward them. 36 | Chapter 2 Creating a Building Information Model . The columns move to the new location at the intersection of the grid lines. Add columns to the grid 26 On the Structural tab of the Design Bar. ■ 29 While pressing CTRL. create a 3D perspective view with a camera in which to better view the columns. click Finish. select UC-Universal Column: 305x305x97UC. If it is unlocked. lock it. click Activate Dimensions. Create a 3D perspective view of the building 38 In the Project Browser. for From. 39 On the View tab of the Design Bar. double-click 01 Entry Level. click Structural Column. click twice to restore the original locked grid dimension.

The 3D perspective view created by the camera displays. The view frame is highlighted in red and its grips display. Creating a Column Grid | 37 . and click to place the target point of the camera.■ Move the cursor next to grid bubble A.

You begin by adding beams to the 01 Entry Level floor plan. and then copy them to the subsequent levels. displays in bold under 3D Views. Adding Beams In this exercise. 44 Save the drawing. named 3D View 1 by default. In the Rename View dialog. ■ ■ Right-click 3D View 1. and click OK. “Adding Beams” on page 38.42 Resize the view by moving the frame grips until you can view all of the columns. 45 Proceed to the next exercise. and click Rename. 38 | Chapter 2 Creating a Building Information Model . under Views (all). 43 Name the view: ■ In the Project Browser. enter To Building. you add beams to build the structure of the building model. The current view. expand 3D Views.

click Beam. click Finish. Add beams to the first level of the building 1 In the Project Browser. view the icons on the View Control Bar. under 3D Views. 2 At the bottom left corner of the drawing area. 5 On the Structural tab of the Design Bar. 7 On the Options Bar. 9 On the Options Bar. The selected grid lines display as red. The view is currently set to Coarse. double-click To Building to view all of the beams. the icon on the right side of the scale. 8 While pressing CTRL.When you finish adding beams. 3 Click the Detail Level icon . you change the height of the columns so they extend to the 06 Roof level. Adding Beams | 39 . 4 Click Medium. click Grid. The View Control Bar offers graphical shortcuts to view settings and commands. double-click 01 Entry Level. 6 In the Type Selector. under Floor Plans. which displays the structural elements in your view as single lines. 10 In the Project Browser. A flyout menu displays the level of detail in which you can display the elements in the current view. select each grid line. verify UB-Universal Beam: 305x165x40UB is selected.

and click OK. The beams that you copied from the 01 Entry Level are pasted onto each subsequent level of the building. and click Select All Instances. click to view the default 3D view of the structure. select 06 Roof. 13 On the Design Bar. 16 Click Edit menu ➤ Paste Aligned ➤ Select Levels by Name. 15 Click Edit menu ➤ Copy to Clipboard. select 02 Level.Copy beams from 01 Entry Level to levels 02 through 06 11 In the Project Browser. click Modify. When you created the columns. 12 On the View toolbar. press and hold SHIFT. right-click. Notice that top level beams are not connected to the columns. which only extend to the 5th level. 17 In the Select Levels dialog. double-click 01 Entry Level. 40 | Chapter 2 Creating a Building Information Model . under Floor Plans. The default 3D view is a southeast isometric view with hidden lines. NOTE The default 3D view is not available in a perspective or camera view. All of the beams attached to the columns display as red. you specified their height to reach only the 05 Roof Garden level. 14 Select one of the beams.

06 Roof. and click Select All Instances. 24 Press ESC. The columns now extend to the top level of the building. under Constraints. 23 In the Element Properties dialog. right-click. 19 In the Element Properties dialog. under Instance Parameters. and click Element Properties. double-click To Building. click . but it would only change the height of the single selected column. and click OK. The parameter is set to 05 Roof Garden. and if necessary. for Top Level. select 06 Roof. 21 With the column selected. under 3D Views. All of the columns display as red. You could change this parameter to 06 Roof in this dialog to change the height of the column. view the Top Level Constraint parameter. 22 On the Options Bar. right-click. 20 Click Cancel. resize the view to see the entire structure.Change the height of the columns 18 Select one of the columns. 25 In the Project Browser. Adding Beams | 41 .

Click Detail Level. 27 At the lower left corner of the drawing.View the south elevation of the structure 26 In the Project Browser. 42 | Chapter 2 Creating a Building Information Model . You can view the columns and beams in the elevation. double-click South. and click Coarse. and click Hidden line. under Elevations. 29 Proceed to the next exercise. The structural elements (columns and beams) display only as lines. “Adding Braces” on page 43. on the View Control Bar: ■ ■ Click Model Graphics Style. but want to display them in less detail. as lines only. 28 Save the drawing. area.

Add braces in a framing elevation view 5 On the bottom left side of the grid.Adding Braces In this exercise. Each elevation marker aligns perpendicularly to the grid. and press ESC to end the command. 3 On the Options Bar. To better add the braces to the structure. double-click 00 Foundation. you create 8 framing elevation views. 4 Select the outer grid lines to place 8 elevation markers around the outside of the grid as shown. 2 On the Structural tab of the Design Bar. Create framing elevation views 1 In the Project Browser. double-click the elevation marker arrow. verify Attach to Grid is selected. click Framing Elevation. Adding Braces | 43 . you add braces to the four corners of the building structure. under Floor Plans.

verify UB-Universal Beam: 305x165x40UB is selected. 11 Using the same technique.The associated framing elevation view displays. so that you can see vertical columns located on grid lines A and B. The endpoints will display when you move the cursor over them. visible offsets between the beam and the brace connection points displays. 7 On the Design Bar. NOTE Do not copy or array braces. 6 Use the grips that display on the crop region to adjust both sides of the view. 44 | Chapter 2 Creating a Building Information Model . press ESC. but when placed the braces are placed. click to specify the start point of the brace. 9 Move the cursor to the left endpoint of the beam on 01 Entry Level. click Brace. After you add the final brace. 10 Move the cursor diagonally to the right endpoint of the beam on 02 Level. 8 In the Type Selector. and click to specify the endpoint of the brace. and when the endpoint snap displays. NOTE Make sure you snap to the endpoints of the beams when adding braces to ensure proper connectivity in the building model. add 4 braces on the subsequent levels of the building as shown. You must place them one by one to establish the proper connections between elements.

enter 18000 mm. The height of the roof lowers. delete it and redraw it. and press ENTER. Make sure that you use the endpoint snap to connect the brace to the beams.Lower the height of the roof (06 Roof) and the 04 Level to test the connectivity 12 Double-click the 06 Roof level height. IMPORTANT If the brace does not move with the level. Adding Braces | 45 .

Add brace in the remaining views and test the connectivity of the building model structure 18 Add braces to the structure in the remaining framing elevation views. click twice to restore the original level heights. under Floor Plans. double-click 00 Foundation. and press ENTER. but this time add them from right to left. 20 Select the dimension string between grid lines A and B. under Floor Plans. as shown in the 3D view below. double-click 00 Foundation. click Activate Dimensions. enter 10000 mm. 21 Select grid line A. Add braces in another framing elevation view 15 In the Project Browser. 16 On the bottom right side of the grid. 17 Add diagonal braces to the structure. double-click the framing elevation marker arrow. 14 On the Standard toolbar. and press ENTER.13 Double-click the 04 Level height. and click the lock that displays to unlock it. and on the Options Bar. enter 12000 mm. 19 In the Project Browser. 22 Click the dimension value of the first vertical grid bay (the one that you unlocked). 46 | Chapter 2 Creating a Building Information Model .

and drag it away from the structure. lock it. and if necessary. double-click South. 25 Change the height of the 06 Roof level to 24000 mm. click 3 times to restore the locked dimension. Test connectivity of the columns. The connected beams and braces resize as the columns move. under Elevations. 30 Select the dimension string of the first vertical grid bay. double-click 3D. “Creating a Foundation” on page 47. double-click 00 Foundation. 31 Save the drawing. and roof height. under Floor Plans. and braces 27 Select one of the columns in the structure. 26 In the Project Browser. beams. 28 On the Standard toolbar. 24 In the Project Browser. under 3D Views. 29 In the Project Browser. 32 Proceed to the next exercise. Creating a Foundation In this exercise. open the 3D view and notice the change in the size.23 In the Project Browser. Creating a Foundation | 47 . grid size. you place isolated pile caps under the building columns to create a foundation system that distributes the building load to the ground.

The foundation pile cap now displays. and drag it to the drawing area.rfa. 6 Expand M_Pile Cap-Rectangular to display the available pile cap types (sizes). 4 In the left pane of the dialog. The pile cap has been added in the view. you add the pile caps in the 00 Foundation floor plan view. select Unlimited. expand Families. 3 In the Revit dialog that displays. double-click 00 Foundation. but the current depth of the view does not allow you to view it. and click View Properties. A warning displays. After you load the pile cap family. where you must adjust the view range before you can view them. and expand Structural Foundation. under Floor Plans. In the View Range dialog. under Extents. Load a pile cap family 1 In the Project Browser. you must load the appropriate pile cap family into the project. 2 On the Structural tab of the Design Bar. You learn how to access the families that are stored in libraries included with software. 10 Edit the 00 Foundation view range: ■ ■ ■ ■ Right-click in the view. Add the first pile cap 8 At the top left of the grid. In the Element Properties dialog.Before you can add the pile caps. for View Range. click Yes to load a new structural foundation family. The M_Pile Cap-Rectangular family displays in the tree. click the intersection of grid line A and grid line 1. and open Metric\Families\Structural\Foundations\M_Pile Cap-Rectangular. 7 Select 2000 x 2000 x 900 mm. 48 | Chapter 2 Creating a Building Information Model . for Level. Verify the pile cap family is loaded in the project 5 In the Project Browser. and how to load specific families into a project. click Edit. Click OK twice. click Foundation ➤ Isolated. and press ESC. 9 Close the warning dialog. click Training Files. under View Depth.

press ESC. When the final pile cap is placed.Add pile caps to complete the foundation 11 Right-click the pile cap. Creating a Foundation | 49 . double-click {3D} to view the complete foundation. 12 Select each grid intersection to add pile caps that form the foundation. and click Create Similar. under 3D Views. 13 In the Project Browser.

Change the column type 1 In the Project Browser. “Changing Structural Member Types” on page 50. 4 On the Design Bar. 2 Select one of the columns. Changing Structural Member Types In this exercise. Dataset ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. and learn how to select and change multiple structural element types to refine the building structure. beam. You load new column. All of the columns in the building model display as red. It is not available in a perspective or camera view. NOTE The default 3D view is the only 3D view in which the Select All Instances command is available. and open Metric\m_RRB_update_structure. View the round hollow columns in the building model. and brace families into the project. you change the types of the columns. click Training Files. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 50 | Chapter 2 Creating a Building Information Model . 15 Proceed to the next exercise. and braces that you used to create the building structure. beams. right-click. select CHS-Circular Hollow Section-Column: 508x12.rvt.14 Click File menu ➤ Save.5CHS. 3 In the Type Selector. double-click 3D. and click Select All Instances. under 3D Views. click Modify.

Changing Structural Member Types | 51 . click Modify to view the new beam type in the building model. and click OK. select the braces in the elevation one by one. 12 In the Type Properties dialog. 14 In the Type Properties dialog.Change the beam type 5 Select one of the beams. click . for Type. 17 While pressing CTRL. under Dimensions. click Brace. select M_Round Bar: 75 mm. for d. although the framing elevation displays the braces as lines only. the braces as well as the beams change. 13 In the Name dialog.9. 11 In the Element Properties dialog. 18 In the Type Selector. and click OK twice. and changing its size parameter. 19 On the Design Bar.6x15. Change the brace type 8 On the Design Bar. right-click. 10 On the Options Bar. 20 Open the other building elevations and change the braces to M_Round Bar: 75 mm. You need to create a new bar type by duplicating the 25mm bar type. In the following steps. click Duplicate. click Modify. 6 In the Type Selector. This not the size that you want to use. enter 75 mm. select M_Round Bar: 25mm. click . click Modify. click Edit/New. 15 In the Project Browser. enter 75 mm. The brace type changes. double-click Elevation 1-a. 9 In the Type Selector. you change the brace type. under Elevations (Interior Elevation). 7 On the Design Bar. View the building model with the new structural element types 21 On the View toolbar. 16 On the Design Bar. and click Select All Instances. but it is the only size of its type currently available. select M_HSS-Hollow Structural Section: HSS203.2x101. Because the braces that you added were actually a beam type.

Adding Floors In this exercise.NOTE You may close the project with or without saving it. Dataset ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. and railings are also created from sketches. you learn some different techniques that you can use when sketching objects. In this exercise. under Floor Plans. click Floor. stairs. Add the 01 Entry Level Floor 1 In the Project Browser. click Lines. ■ On the Sketch tab. you add floors to the 01 Entry Level through the 05 Roof Garden level of the building.rvt. and elements in the current view display as gray. double-click 01 Entry Level. You are now in the sketch editor. 22 Proceed to the next exercise. To create floors. click Training Files. and open Metric\m_RRB_add_floors. 52 | Chapter 2 Creating a Building Information Model . Some other Revit Architecture elements. such as roofs. 2 Sketch the floor: ■ On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. “Adding Floors” on page 52. In the left pane of the Open dialog. you must sketch them first in a sketch editor. Notice the Design Bar now displays the Sketch tab.

Using a crossing window. The exact dimensions of the sketched floor are not important. the 01 Entry Level floor will resize with it. If the grid changes size. and click above the 1st horizontal grid line to place the dimension. Do not lock the dimensions. click . Do not lock the dimension. 4 Dimension the space between the left floor edge and the first vertical grid line. 3 Place a dimension between the first horizontal grid line and the left floor edge: ■ ■ ■ On the Design Bar. click Dimension. past the first vertical grid line. At the top left corner of the grid. and then the 1st horizontal grid line. as you resize it in the next steps. sketch a rectangular floor inside the extents of the grid.■ ■ On the Options Bar. Adding Floors | 53 . select the top floor line. Leave this dimension unlocked. 5 Dimension the bottom right corner of the grid. Move the cursor to the left.

At the top left corner of the grid. They display on the floor sketch.6 Resize the floor sketch by changing its dimensions: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ On the Design Bar. 8 Select the floor. Select and lock the dimensions. you will add a floor to the 02 Level of the building model. The dimensions are not visible on the finished floor. click Quit Sketch. Select the left floor edge and change the top dimension value to 300 mm. The floor sketch and dimensions redisplay. select the top floor line. 54 | Chapter 2 Creating a Building Information Model . and then press ESC. on the Design Bar. and on the Options Bar. 9 Because you do not need to modify the floor. 7 On the Design Bar. Move the cursor to dimensions at the bottom of the grid. and change their values to 300 mm. and click the temporary dimension value. Next. click . Enter 300 mm. press ENTER. Move the cursor to the right dimension. You use the Pick option to create a floor from the 01 Entry Level floor geometry. click Modify. this is how you would do it. If you needed to modify the floor after you created it. using a different sketching technique. click Finish Sketch to create the floor.

Adding Floors | 55 . click Finish Sketch. dimension the space between the 02 Level floor and the grid. click Lines.Add the 02 Level floor 10 In the Project Browser. Select the three remaining floor lines. ■ 12 At the top left corner of the grid. 11 Sketch the floor: ■ ■ On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. On the Options Bar. and for Offset. 13 At the bottom right corner of the grid. and lock the dimensions. double-click 02 Level. and press ESC. dimension the space between the 02 Level floor and the grid as shown. under Floor Plans. ■ ■ Select the right vertical 01 Entry Level floor line. click . On the Sketch tab. IMPORTANT Make sure you select the 01 Entry Level floor lines and not the grid lines. and move the cursor until the dashed green line displays in the inside of the 01 Entry Level floor. enter 1500mm. The 02 Level floor sketch displays. click Floor. The 02 Level floor displays. 14 On the Design Bar.

The sketched floor line is aligned with the top 03 Level floor line. click Align . and then select the top line of the 03 Level floor sketch. 56 | Chapter 2 Creating a Building Information Model . 19 Sketch a floor inside the 02 Level floor. under Floor Plans. The cursor changes to 2 arrows to indicate the Align command is active. double-click 03 Level. 16 On the Design Bar. 23 Continue to align the remaining 3 floor sketch lines with the 02 Level floor. 17 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. The 02 Level floor is visible in the view. Click the locks to constrain the floors.Add the 03 Level floor 15 In the Project Browser. 22 Click the lock to constrain the 03 Level floor line to the 02 Level floor. 20 On the Tools toolbar. 21 Select the top 02 Level floor line. click Lines. 18 On the Options Bar. click Floor. click . and a lock icon displays.

and constrain the 04 Level floor to the 03 Level floor. 33 At the top left corner of the grid. 34 At the bottom right corner of the grid. under Floor Plans. double-click {3D}. Alternatively. 25 Repeat the previous procedure to create a floor on the 04 Level. under Views ➤ 3D Views. 37 On the View Control Bar. and lock the edges. View the floors in the 3D building model and test connectivity 36 In the Project Browser. Lock the dimensions to constrain the floors. dimension the space between the 05 Roof Garden level floor and the grid. 38 In the Project Browser. 31 In the Project Browser. dimension the space between 05 Roof Garden level floor and the grid. 41 Click the dimension value of the first vertical grid bay. double-click 00 Foundation. and click Activate Dimensions. under Floor Plans. double-click 05 Roof Garden. 27 Select the 01 Entry Level Floor. and on the Options Bar. 30 In the Select Levels dialog. and unlock it. under Floor Plans. click Finish Sketch. Adding Floors | 57 . and enter 4500 mm. and click Shading with Edges. select 05 Roof Garden. 32 Select the floor. and click OK. Click the lock icons that display next to the dimensions to constrain the 05 Roof Garden level floor to the grid. you could place the rectangular sketch on the 04 Level.24 On the Design Bar. click Model Graphics Style. 35 On the Design Bar. 29 Click Edit menu ➤ Paste Aligned ➤ Select Levels by Name. 39 Select the dimension string between grid line A and B. click Finish Sketch. 28 Click Edit menu ➤ Copy to Clipboard. click Edit. double-click 01 Entry Level. 40 Select grid line A. Copy and paste the 01 Entry Level floor to the 05 Roof Garden level 26 In the Project Browser. The 01 Entry Level floor is copied at the same location onto the 05 Roof Garden level.

double-click 00 Foundation. 44 In the Project Browser. and lock the dimension that you unlocked in a previous step. you add a sloped roof over the corner of the building. 58 | Chapter 2 Creating a Building Information Model . NOTE You may close the project with or without saving it. under Floor Plans. under 3D Views. 43 On the Standard toolbar. “Adding a Roof ” on page 58. double-click {3D} to view the grid. click to restore the grid bay size to 7500 mm. 45 Proceed to the next exercise.42 In the Project Browser. Adding a Roof In this exercise.

click Lines. click to place the roof line. and specify which roof edges will define the roof slope. and then move the cursor slightly to the right of the grid line. click Training Files. under Floor Plans. of the roof in a plan view. ■ ■ For Offset. 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. The roof sketch line displays with a slope marker. 5 Move the cursor over grid line E. or the perimeter. You sketch the footprint. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 4 On the Options Bar: ■ Select Defines Slope. you use the Roof by Footprint option in Revit Architecture. Click . Dataset ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. and press ENTER. double-click 06 Roof. Add the roof 1 In the Project Browser. When a green dashed line displays. 3 On the Design Bar. enter 1800 mm.To create the roof. and open Metric\m_RRB_add_roof. click Roof ➤ Roof by Footprint.rvt. Adding a Roof | 59 .

8 Select grid line C to place another roof line. 7 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Clear Defines Slope. and lock it. 10 Press ESC. click to place the roof line. Select the lower portion of the roof line that you created from grid line E (the part you want to keep). 9 Select grid line 3 to place the final roof line. For Offset. Continue to trim the lines until you complete the roof as shown. and when the green dashed line displays. click (Trim/Extend). 11 Trim the rooflines: ■ ■ On the Tools toolbar. move the cursor slightly below the grid line. enter 0 mm.6 Select grid line 5. and then select the right portion of the roof line that you created from grid line 5. and lock it. ■ 60 | Chapter 2 Creating a Building Information Model . The roof sketch line displays with a slope marker.

under Dimensions. for Slope Angle. 13 On the Design Bar. click . and on the Options Bar. and click OK. click . click . place a dimension between the roof slope edges and the grid to constrain them. 15 Click View menu ➤ Orient ➤ Southeast. View the roof 14 On the View toolbar. enter 4.12 Optionally. 17 Select the roof. View the roof 19 On the View toolbar. Adding a Roof | 61 . double-click 06 Roof. Change the roof slope 16 In the Project Browser. under Floor Plans.00. 18 In the Element Properties dialog. click Finish Roof.

and click 4 In the Element Properties dialog. for Type. 20 Proceed to the next exercise. When you duplicate a type. for Spacing. The type is saved in the project. You constrain the curtain wall to the grid. “Adding a Curtain Wall” on page 62. the curtain wall resizes with it. under Floor Plans. 8 On the Options Bar: ■ Click . In the left pane of the Open dialog. click Edit/New.rvt. click Duplicate. enter 1050 mm. you copy an existing family type and change its name and parameters to create a new unique type. you add a curtain wall. 5 In the Type Properties dialog. click 01 Entry Level. Click OK twice. 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 6 In the Name dialog.NOTE You may close the project with or without saving it. Dataset ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. click Training Files. so if you resize the grid. and open Metric\m_RRB_add_curtainwall. Under Horizontal Grid Pattern. enter Retail Storefront. Add curtain wall segments 1 In the Project Browser. Adding a Curtain Wall In this exercise. select Curtain Wall: Storefront. for Join Condition. and click OK. 3 In the Type Selector. 62 | Chapter 2 Creating a Building Information Model . click Wall. Under Construction. select Horizontal Grid Continuous. Under Vertical Grid Pattern. 7 In the Type Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ . enter 2100 mm. for Spacing.

11 Select the 3 remaining outermost grid lines to create 3 more curtain wall segments that are offset 600 mm from the grid lines toward the building interior. If you want to hide them. and lock the dimensions. and trim each curtain wall segment. Adding a Curtain Wall | 63 . click (Trim/Extend). Trim the curtain wall segments 12 On the Tools toolbar. For Offset. you can delete the dimension. 13 On the Design Bar. and move it slightly toward the building interior. enter 600 mm. click Dimension. the locks ensure that the curtain wall will move with it. select 05 Roof Garden.■ ■ ■ For Level. but opt to keep the constraint when prompted. These dimensions are not in a sketch. click to place the 1st curtain wall segment. If the grid moves. so they remain in the view. For Height. 10 When a green dashed line displays. dimension both corners of the curtain wall to the grid. 9 Move the cursor over the grid line 1 near its endpoint. select 01 Entry Level.

double-click To Building. NOTE You may close the project with or without saving it. 15 On the View Control Bar: ■ ■ Click Model Graphics Style. under 3D Views. and click Hidden Line.View the curtain wall 14 In the Project Browser. 64 | Chapter 2 Creating a Building Information Model . and click Shading with Edges. 16 Proceed to the next exercise. “Creating an Entrance” on page 65. Click Model Graphics Style.

and double-click South. 6 Under Visibility. you replace 4 curtain wall panels with doors in the front of the building to create the main building entrance. under the element list. You also modify the panels around the doors so they are solid rather than glass. Dataset ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. click Training Files. you want to change the view so only curtain wall panels and columns display. clear one element to clear all the elements. 2 On the View Control Bar. and open Metric\m_RRB_modify_curtainwall. Creating an Entrance | 65 . select Curtain Panels and Structural Columns.Creating an Entrance In this exercise.rvt. under Views (all). and click Medium. expand Elevations (Building Elevation). In the left pane of the Open dialog. 4 On the Model Categories tab. click All. 5 Under Visibility. All the elements in the list are selected. Modify the South elevation view 1 In the Project Browser. click Detail Level. To better work with the curtain wall panels. 3 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. and click None.

12 With the panels selected. as these usually represent internal pilasters. 13 Click View menu ➤ Apply View Template. and select the other panels around the entrance as shown. 10 Select 1 panel. and click OK. select Architectural Elevation. press and hold CTRL. 11 When all 9 panels are selected. 7 Click OK. 9 On the Design Bar. in the Type Selector. click Modify. click the pin to remove it from each of the panels. select System Panel: Solid.Do not select Columns. in the center of the 01 Entry Level. 14 In the Select View Template dialog. 8 Zoom in to the entrance area. 15 Zoom to the drawing extents. 66 | Chapter 2 Creating a Building Information Model .

16 On the View Control Bar. double-click {3D}. double-click To Building. click Detail Level ➤ Medium. you see that the visibility of many of the Model element categories that you cleared in a previous step are selected. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Shading with Edges. 19 In the Project Browser. The view template applies a collection of visibility graphics appropriate to the view it is named for. 17 In the Project Browser. Creating an Entrance | 67 . If you select View ➤ Visibility/Graphics. under 3D Views. under 3D Views. in this case an architectural elevation. 18 On the View Control Bar.

select another mullion to the right. 22 Move the cursor over the curtain wall mullion as shown. under Elevations (Building Elevation). 26 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. 24 On the Options Bar. 68 | Chapter 2 Creating a Building Information Model . and press ESC to remove the grid lines as shown. 23 Press TAB until you are notified that you have selected a grid line. 21 Zoom to the front of the building.20 In the Project Browser. 25 Select the mullion that you selected previously. double-click South. click Curtain Grid. and click to select it. click Add or Remove Segments.

Creating an Entrance | 69 . select M_Curtain Wall Sgl Glass. 30 On the Design Bar.27 On the Options Bar. 34 On the View toolbar. 33 Repeat for the next 3 panels. click Modify. click . 31 Select the newly created curtain wall panel (press TAB to cycle through selections). select One Segment. and unpin it. 32 In the Type Selector. and view the new entrance. 29 Select the center of the upper horizontal mullion to the right. 35 Zoom in to the front of the building. 28 Select the center of the upper horizontal mullion.

select it. remove the mullions from the 2nd. 70 | Chapter 2 Creating a Building Information Model .36 Zoom in to the first panel. 37 Move the cursor over the bottom mullion. 3rd. and unpin it. press TAB until it is selected. and 4th panels. 38 Press DELETE. 39 Using the same process.

1 In the Project Browser. Dataset ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. 5 Click OK. and click View Properties. under Floor Plans. for Underlay. Creating a Drop Ceiling In this exercise. double-click 01 Entry Level.40 Optionally. In the left pane of the Open dialog.rvt. click Training Files. you create a drop ceiling on the 01 Entry Level of the building. Use the same steps that you used to create the south entrance. NOTE You may close the project with or without saving it. and open Metric\m_RRB_add_drop_ceiling. select 02 Level. 41 Proceed to the next exercise. 4 In the Element Properties dialog. Creating a Drop Ceiling | 71 . under Graphics. 3 Right-click in the view. 2 Zoom in to the lower right corner of the building. open the North elevation. “Creating a Drop Ceiling” on page 71. and add an entrance to the north side of the building.

72 | Chapter 2 Creating a Building Information Model . The cursor changes to a pencil. 8 Select the callout. and specify a point to complete the callout. click Callout. 7 Place the callout: ■ Specify a point above the top left column. select the grip closest to the callout head. ■ Move the cursor horizontally below the bottom right column. and drag the grip down to position the callout head below the grid as shown.6 On the View tab of the Design Bar. which indicates you must draw the callout.

14 Press ESC. and click OK. 16 Select the section box. enter Display Area. Move the cursor horizontally to the left. and drag the top grip down to display only 01 Entry Level and 02 Level. click Section. 11 On the View tab of the Design Bar. ■ ■ Specify the section start point just below the right framing elevation marker. right-click. 12 Draw a section line. right-click Callout of 01 Entry Level. and specify a point past grid line D. and click Flip Section. 13 Select the section line.9 In the Project Browser. Creating a Drop Ceiling | 73 . 15 Double-click the section marker to view the section. under Floor Plans. and click Rename. 10 In the Rename View dialog.

select Wall faces. right-click Section 1. and lock the dimension. and click Rename. Click . double-click 01 Entry Level. 33 On the Options Bar: ■ Click Sketch. and align the exterior faces of the right vertical wall and the bottom horizontal wall with the 02 Level underlay. and then specify a point near the intersection of grid lines D and 4 to draw a 5000 x 5000 mm rectangular wall inside the grid lines. 22 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Click . click Ceiling. select Basic Wall: Interior-135mm Partition (2 hr). 24 On the Tools toolbar. and lock the dimension. 19 In the Project Browser. 32 In the Type Selector. for Prefer. and click OK. enter Section Display Area. 74 | Chapter 2 Creating a Building Information Model . 31 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. 29 Dimension the space between the exterior face of the top horizontal wall and the grid. 30 In the Project Browser. 18 In the Rename View dialog. 20 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 21 In the Type Selector. Lock both alignments. select Compound Ceiling : 600 x 600 mm Grid. click Dimension. click Wall.17 In the Project Browser. 25 Press ESC. 26 On the Design Bar. under Ceiling Plans. 27 On the Options Bar. ■ 23 Select the bottom corner of the overhead floor. under Floor Plans. select Finish Face: Exterior. click (Align). expand Sections (Building Section). 28 Dimension the space between the exterior face of the left vertical wall and the grid. For Loc Line. double-click 01 Entry Level.

and click to select the walls. double-click Section Display Area. 36 Press ESC. 38 In the Project Browser under Sections (Building Section). . 41 On the Options Bar. The ceiling grid displays inside of the walls. 35 Align and lock each ceiling line to the interior wall faces. 39 On the View Control Bar. ■ 34 Sketch the ceiling within the walls. Creating a Drop Ceiling | 75 .■ Click Click . click . click Model Graphics Style ➤ Wireframe. 37 On the Design Bar. press TAB until the chain of walls is selected. 40 Move the cursor over one of the walls. click Finish Sketch.

double-click 01 Entry Level. click Move. under Ceiling Plans. click Attach. 47 In the Project Browser. and drag it to the interior face of the horizontal or vertical wall.42 In the Element Properties dialog. 48 Modify the ceiling grid: ■ To start the tiles on a wall edge. 46 Attach the walls to the 02 Level floor: ■ Select one of the vertical walls above the ceiling. ■ 76 | Chapter 2 Creating a Building Information Model . on the Tools toolbar. On the Options Bar. Select the 02 Level Floor. for Base Offset. under Constraints. and click OK. press TAB until you select the wall chain. and specify a distance. and click OK. enter 2700 mm. 44 Select the ceiling. click Modify. and click to select the walls. ■ ■ The walls attach to the 02 Level floor. under Constraints. 45 In the Element Properties dialog. select any horizontal or vertical ceiling grid line. 43 On the Design Bar. for Height Offset From Level. enter 2700 mm. for Top/Base. and click . select a grid line. To position the grid.

55 In the Element Properties dialog. click Edit/New. and click . 52 In the Edit Assembly dialog. Creating a Drop Ceiling | 77 . view the ceiling structure. 53 Click OK. Rotate the ceiling grid 56 Select the center ceiling grid line. click Cancel. 58 Move the cursor toward the top left corner of the grid. 51 In the Type Properties dialog. 57 On the Options Bar. click Cancel. under Construction. 50 In the Element Properties dialog. click (Rotate). click Edit. for Type. for Structure.View the ceiling structure 49 Select the ceiling. 54 In the Type Properties dialog.

and press ENTER.59 Click. 78 | Chapter 2 Creating a Building Information Model . 61 Select and drag the diagonal center grid line until it spans the corners of the ceiling grid. enter 45. 60 Press ESC.

under 3D Views. You begin by creating a flight of stairs and stairwell on the 01 Entry Level of the building. copy the drop ceiling to the other building levels. Creating Multi-Level Stairs In this exercise. “Creating Multi-Level Stairs” on page 79. click Shadows Off. 63 On the View Control Bar.View the building in 3D with shadows 62 In the Project Browser. After the stairs and stairwell have been copied to levels 01-05. and then copying it to the 05 Level. you create multi-level stairs and a stairwell that span the levels of the building. double-click To Building. NOTE You may close the project with or without saving it. 66 Proceed to the next exercise. 65 Optionally. Creating Multi-Level Stairs | 79 . you must cut an opening through the floors on each level. click Shadows On. 64 On the View Control Bar.

C. Create the stair 1 In the Project Browser. under Floor Plans. When the temporary dimensions indicate the cursor is 1500 mm from the grid line intersection. 2.rvt. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 4 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. click Detail Level ➤ Coarse. click Training Files.Dataset ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. and specify the reference plane endpoint on grid line B. double-click 01 Entry Level. click Ref Plane. 3 On the View Control Bar. 2 Zoom in to the area defined by grid lines B. and open Metric\m_RRB_add_stair_. and 3. Move the cursor to the left along grid line 3. click to specify the start point of the reference plane. ■ 80 | Chapter 2 Creating a Building Information Model . You will create the stair in the area between these columns. Move the cursor vertically. 5 Draw 2 reference planes that you will use to locate the flight of stairs: ■ ■ ■ Move the cursor over the intersection of grid lines C and 3.

Creating Multi-Level Stairs | 81 . 7 Sketch the stair: ■ ■ Select the bottom endpoint of the right reference plane. click Stairs. Move the cursor vertically along the reference plane until the text below the stair flight displays an equal number of risers created and risers remaining.■ Draw another reference plane 1500 mm from grid line 2. 6 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. and specify a point to create first stair flight.

The complete stair displays. 14 Move the cursor over the top horizontal outside edge of the stair.225mm Masonry. including its handrails. ■ 12 Draw walls around the stair. beyond the end of the stair. and lock the alignment. align the 2 vertical side edges of the stair with the 2 vertical walls and lock the alignments. click Align. 13 On the Tools toolbar. click Finish Sketch to create the complete stair. with a message that 20 risers have been created and that 0 remain. Click . and click to select it.■ ■ Move the cursor horizontally to the left. 11 On the Options Bar: ■ For Loc Line. and specify a point. click Wall. 10 In the Type Selector. 16 Using the same technique. select Basic Wall: Generic . select Finish Face: Interior. press TAB until the stair edge is selected. 15 Select the interior face of the top horizontal wall. Make sure you select the stair and not the railing. 9 On the Design Bar. and select the 2nd reference plane. 82 | Chapter 2 Creating a Building Information Model . 8 On the Options Bar. Move the cursor down.

20 Click OK to delete the dimension. 22 On the Standard toolbar.17 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. The stair and walls move to the left. Select the wall. Select the bottom of the stair. click Dimension. and press ENTER. Click Modify. select the dimension value. 21 Select the stair. select Wall faces. Lock the dimension. but leave the stair and wall constrained to each other. click . Select the interior face of the wall. 23 While pressing CTRL. and press DELETE. and press DELETE. 19 Select the dimension. and specify a point away from the wall. 18 Dimension the distance from the bottom of the stair to the interior face of the bottom horizontal wall: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ On the Options Bar. for Prefer. a warning displays. Because the dimension is constrained. and drag it to the left to test the stair and wall constraints. enter 1200 mm. Creating Multi-Level Stairs | 83 . select both reference planes.

click 34 On the View toolbar. press the SPACEBAR before you place the door. 35 Press SHIFT. 25 In the Type Selector. Click OK. 26 On the Options Bar. The Dynamic View dialog displays in the left corner of your screen. 29 While pressing CTRL. click Door. click Modify. Click OK. and move the cursor to spin the building model. 32 In the Element Properties dialog: ■ ■ Under Constraints. You must cut an opening through the building to accommodate the multi-level stairs. click . 84 | Chapter 2 Creating a Building Information Model . . and click 30 In the Element Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ . select 00 Foundation. and click . select M_Single-Flush: 0915 x 2134mm. for Multistory Top Level. TIP To flip the door swing. 28 On the Design Bar. For Top Constraint. for Base Constraint. select 05 Roof Garden. clear Tag on Placement.Add a door to the stairwell 24 On the Design Bar. You can see that the walls and stairs span the vertical height of the building. verify Up to level: 06 Roof is selected. but if you view the top level of the building. Under Constraints. press and hold the left mouse button. 33 On the View toolbar. 27 Select the right side of the lower horizontal wall to place the door. select all 4 walls. you can see that the stair railings penetrate the floors. 31 Select the stair.

Create a shaft opening 36 In the Project Browser. 47 Click Edit menu ➤ Copy to Clipboard. 44 Align the bottom horizontal shaft sketch line with the bottom tread of the stair. 39 On the Options Bar: ■ Click Click . 45 Click Finish Sketch to complete the shaft. 42 Align the top horizontal shaft sketch line with the top horizontal interior wall face and lock the alignment. double-click 01 Entry Level. 41 On the Tools toolbar. 43 Align the 2 vertical shaft sketch lines with the interior face of the 2 vertical walls. . ■ 40 Draw a rectangular shaft opening around the stairs. 37 Zoom in to the stairs. click Align. and lock the alignments. under Floor Plans. and lock the alignment. 48 Click Edit menu ➤ Paste Aligned ➤ Select Levels by Name. click Opening ➤ Shaft Opening. 38 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. Creating Multi-Level Stairs | 85 . Copy the door to multiple levels 46 Select the door.

select 02 Level through 05 Roof Garden. and click 54 In the Element Properties dialog: ■ . click . under Floor Plans. Look at the top of building and notice that the shaft is not cutting an opening. 55 On the View toolbar. click 56 On the View toolbar. and spin the building so you can see the roof.49 In the Select Levels dialog. enter 300 mm. double-click 01 Entry Level. click 51 On the View toolbar. . . 86 | Chapter 2 Creating a Building Information Model . View the shaft and stair 50 On the View toolbar. Under Constraints. and click OK. 52 In the Project Browser. for Base Offset. 57 Spin the building so that you can see the shaft opening. click . The shaft opening will cut through any level it touches. and click OK. 53 Select the shaft. ■ For Top Constraint. you prevent it from cutting through the 01 Entry Level floor. select Up to Level: 06 Roof. By offsetting the base.

Creating a Wall with a Non-Uniform Height | 87 .58 Click View menu ➤ Orient ➤ Southwest.rvt. 59 Proceed to the next exercise. and open Metric\m_RRB_wall_profile. You learn how to access and modify the profile and height of the wall to create a decorative wall that extends past the height of the 06 Roof Level. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Dataset ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. NOTE You may close the project with or without saving it. you create a wall on the 05 Roof Garden level. Creating a Wall with a Non-Uniform Height In this exercise. click Training Files. “Creating a Wall with a Non-Uniform Height” on page 87.

6 On the Options Bar. for Underlay. 8 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 5 In the Type Selector. 9 Dimension the space between grid line C and the left face of the wall on grid line 3. select 06 Roof. select Basic Wall: Generic . and click View Properties. for Loc Line.225mm Masonry. under Graphics. click Modify. and draw a 10650 mm wall along grid line 3. 4 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. You must draw the wall from left to right to position it on the correct side of grid line 3. double-click 05 Roof Garden. Enter 1050 mm. 7 Move the cursor near the column at the intersection of grid lines C and 3.Add a basic wall to the 05 Roof Garden level 1 In the Project Browser. 2 Right-click in the view. 3 In the Element Properties dialog. and press ENTER. under Floor Plans. 10 Change the dimension value: ■ ■ ■ ■ On the Design Bar. 88 | Chapter 2 Creating a Building Information Model . Select the dimension value. click Dimension. select Core Face: Interior. Select the wall. and click OK. click Wall.

12 Select the floor on the right side of the wall. click Lines.11 On the Tools toolbar. click Lines. 17 On the Design Bar. 16 In the Go To View dialog. move the cursor up 4500 mm. The profile of the wall that you just modified displays as a purple sketch. Modify the profile of the wall 14 On the Design Bar. 21 Select the top endpoint of the right vertical profile line. double-click Elevation: South. click Edit Profile. 19 Press ESC. 18 Select the top endpoint of the left vertical profile line. 15 Select the wall. click Modify. and click to place a line. 23 Press ESC. and click to place a line. and click to place a line. and then select the right face of the wall. Creating a Wall with a Non-Uniform Height | 89 . click (Align). The South elevation displays. 22 Move the cursor horizontally 1520 mm to the left. and on the Options Bar. 20 On the Design Bar. move the cursor up 6000 mm. 13 Click the lock that displays to constrain the 2 elements.

24 On the Design Bar. 29 On the Options Bar. and click (Circle). Select the top right portion of the circle. Select the top right portion of the circle. 90 | Chapter 2 Creating a Building Information Model . 28 On the Design Bar. and select it. 27 Press ESC. click Lines. and click to place it. snap to the top of the circle. 33 Trim the profile lines: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ On the Tools toolbar. and select the endpoint of the left vertical profile line. 32 Click Modify. 26 Snap to the endpoint of the line that you just drew. Press ESC. click . Select the short right profile line. move the cursor out until a circle with a radius of 1520 mm displays. 31 Move the cursor to the left. 25 On the Options Bar. Select the top horizontal profile line. click Lines. 30 Using the Quadrant snap. click (Trim/Extend). click the drop-down arrow that displays next to the sketching tools.

34 On the Design Bar. 40 On the Design Bar. 47 Click Cancel. Up to level: 06 Roof is selected. click . By adding extra height to the wall. select the short horizontal line on the right. click Modify. click Continue. and press DELETE. click Lines. 44 On the Design Bar. click Finish Sketch. under Constraints. you maintained the relationship to the roof level. instead of lengthening the existing edge. 45 On the Options Bar. Creating a Wall with a Non-Uniform Height | 91 . 36 Snap to the endpoint of the short horizontal line. and press DELETE. 38 On the Design Bar. click . move the cursor out until a circle with a radius of 1000 mm displays. click Modify. note that for Top Constraint. click Finish Sketch. You need a closed sketch to complete the profile. 37 On the Design Bar. and select the wall. and click to place it. 35 On the Options Bar. click the Close button. unlock it. 39 In the Error dialog. 43 In the Warning dialog. 46 In the Element Properties dialog. click Modify. 42 On the Design Bar. 48 Change the 06 Roof level height to 19000 mm. 41 Select the horizontal line across the middle of the profile sketch.

Adding Entourage and Site Components In this exercise. “Adding Entourage and Site Components” on page 92. create a sidewalk on 2 sides of the building. You learn how to load these components into the project.49 On the Standard toolbar. 92 | Chapter 2 Creating a Building Information Model . double-click 3D. 51 Click View menu ➤ Orient ➤ Northwest. click to restore the original height of the roof. 52 Proceed to the next exercise. under 3D Views. and how to place and adjust them in project views. NOTE You may close the project with or without saving it. you place planters on the 05 Roof level to create a roof garden. and place people and a car on and next to the sidewalk. View the wall 50 In the Project Browser.

Adding Entourage and Site Components | 93 .Dataset ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. 3 In the Type Selector.rvt. as shown. 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. click Training Files. 4 Add 3 planters on the inside of the floor and grid line 5. and open Metric\m_RRB_host. between grid lines C and D. select M_Planter : 1200 x 1200mm. double-click 05 Roof Garden. TIP After you place the 1st planter. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Create the roof garden 1 On the Project Browser. click Component. under Floor Plans. move the cursor over the planter and move it to the right to display a dashed green line that helps you to place the next planter.

select Tree .5 Meters. and on the Options Bar. 12 Select 1 of the trees. under Floor Plans. 16 In the Type Properties dialog. 15 In the Name dialog.5. under Floor Plans. and press ESC. 8 On the View toolbar. enter 1500 mm. 13 In the Element Properties dialog.Deciduous: Cornus Florida 1. click . double-click 01 Entry Level. for Type. under Other. 94 | Chapter 2 Creating a Building Information Model . and notice that the trees that you placed in the planters protrude through the roof. click Duplicate. 6 In the Type Selector. 7 Click to place a tree in the center of each planter. click . and in the Type Selector. double-click 05 Roof Garden.Deciduous: Cornus Florida 4. and click OK. The height of the trees no longer extends past the roof. 19 In the Project Browser. Create a sidewalk outside of the building 20 In the Project Browser. under 3D Views. click Component. enter Cornus Florida 1.5 On the Basics tab. 9 Click View menu ➤ Orient ➤ Southwest.5 Meters. for Plant Height. 14 In the Type Properties dialog. 18 While pressing CTRL. click Edit/New. 17 Click Apply. 10 View the roof. double-click {3D}. 11 In the Project Browser. and then click OK twice. select the 2 remaining trees. select M_Tree .

and click to sketch a line. and click to sketch a line. 23 On the Options Bar: Click . 25 Press TAB until a line that is offset 2400 mm below grid line 5 displays between grid lines A and B. 22 On the Design Bar. ■ ■ For Offset. 29 Select the right vertical floor line. 24 Move the cursor over grid line 5 between grid lines A and B. Adding Entourage and Site Components | 95 . enter 0 mm. enter 2400 mm. 28 Select the bottom horizontal floor line. click Lines. 26 Using the same method. click Floor. for Offset. and click to place the line.21 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. sketch a line between grid lines 4 and 5. 27 On the Options Bar.

31 On the Options Bar. click (Trim/Extend). click . 33 Select the left endpoint of the line between grid lines A and B. move the cursor up 900 mm. and then select the horizontal line near grid line 1.30 On the Options Bar. and click to finish the line. The completed sidewalk displays. clear Chain. and click to finish the line. and then select the line that you sketched between grid lines 4 and 5. 35 Select the line that you just drew. click Finish Sketch. and then select the line that you sketched along the bottom horizontal line of the floor. 96 | Chapter 2 Creating a Building Information Model . 37 Select the line that you sketched between grid lines 4 and 5. move the cursor to the right approximately 1200 mm. 38 On the Design Bar. 32 Select the top endpoint of the right vertical line. 36 Select the line between grid lines A and B. 34 On the Tools toolbar.

select Rotate after placement. for Type. 49 On the Options Bar. and specify a point to rotate him so he is facing the column. and on the Options Bar. 52 Move the cursor toward the column. as it is currently a floor element. 51 Move the cursor so the rotation line displays along Alex’s line of sight and specify a point. under Constraints. 45 Click OK. 39 Select the sidewalk. click Duplicate. 47 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. select M_RPC Male: Alex. 48 In the Type Selector. 44 In the Element Properties dialog. 42 In the Name dialog. create a new type for the sidewalk element.Next. 40 In the Element Properties dialog. In plan view. and second line inside the circle indicates the person’s line of sight. enter Sidewalk. The circle is divided in half by a line. for Height Offset from Level. and click to place her on the sidewalk. click Component. 43 Click OK twice. RPC people are represented by a circle. Place 2 people on the sidewalk 46 Zoom to the lower right corner of the sidewalk. 41 In the Type Properties dialog. enter -250 mm. near Column E5. click Edit/New. 53 In the Type Selector. Adding Entourage and Site Components | 97 . select M_RPC Female: Cathy. 50 Click to place Alex on the sidewalk. click .

98 | Chapter 2 Creating a Building Information Model . click Camera. 55 In the Type Selector. select M_RPC Beetle. under Constraints. 64 Select Cathy. and place it along the sidewalk behind him.54 Rotate Cathy so she is facing Alex. 61 In the Project Browser. click the car. click Pick Host. and place it in the corner of the scene as shown. and on the Options Bar. 60 In the Element Properties dialog. 62 Zoom in to the area where Alex and Cathy are standing. you ensure that the components remain on the same plane as the host. 56 Press the spacebar to rotate it until it is facing away from Alex. 57 Press ESC. Next. 63 Select and drag both Cathy and Alex above the sidewalk. under Elevations. double-click West. you select the sidewalk as a host for both the Alex and Cathy RPC components. When you select a host for a component. for Offset. and click . 58 On the View tab of the Design Bar. 59 In the camera view (3D View 1). enter -300 mm. and click OK.

71 Proceed to the next exercise. “Linking a Service Core to the Building Project” on page 99. under 3D Views. and on the Options Bar. Linking a Service Core to the Building Project In this exercise. click Pick Host. NOTE You may close the project with or without saving it. View the front of the building 70 In the Project Browser. 66 Select Alex. 69 Using the same method. double-click To Building. both Cathy and Alex will move with it. 67 Click the sidewalk.65 Click the sidewalk. and replace them with a service core. If the sidewalk changes height. you remove the multi-level stairs and stairwell that you created in a previous exercise from the building. pick the sidewalk as the host for the car. 68 Select and move both Cathy and Alex until they are standing on the sidewalk. Linking a Service Core to the Building Project | 99 .

Notice that there is no longer a stairwell in the building. . 4 On the View toolbar. press SHIFT.rvt. 2 Zoom in to the stairwell. By deleting the stairwell from the 06 Roof. so it will cut through the floors of the building. you delete the entire stairwell. click Training Files. you must cut another shaft opening around it. including the stairs. 100 | Chapter 2 Creating a Building Information Model . under Floor Plans.The service core is contained in an external file that you link to your current project. 3 Select the entire stairwell. click 5 On the View toolbar. and spin the building. Remove the stairwell from the building model 1 On the Project Browser. After the service core is linked to your project. and shaft opening. walls. click . In the left pane of the Open dialog. double-click 06 Roof. and press DELETE. Dataset ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. and open Metric\m_RRB_add_host_style_railings.

select m_RRB_link. under Positioning: ■ ■ Select Manually place. click (Align). 9 In the Metric folder. Do not click the lock to constrain the core and floor. 8 In the left pane of the Add Link dialog. 14 Select the top horizontal floor line. 13 On the Tools toolbar. double-click 01 Entry Level. The building service core displays in your drawing. click Training Files.rvt. 12 Specify a point to place it between grid lines B-D. 7 Click File menu ➤ Import/Link ➤ Revit.Link a new service core into the building model 6 In the Project Browser. You cannot constrain elements in the current project to elements in linked models. and then select the top horizontal core wall. 11 Click Open. Select Cursor at center. 10 At the bottom of the dialog. under Floor Plans. Linking a Service Core to the Building Project | 101 .

click Opening ➤ Shaft Opening. select Up to level: 06 Roof. Click OK. 16 On the Design Bar. enter 300 mm. 21 Select the shaft opening and click 22 In the Element Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ . 19 Trace the outer edges of the core elements to sketch the service core as shown: 20 On the Design Bar. select Chain. for Base Offset. click Lines. View the service core in the building model 23 On the View toolbar.Create a shaft opening for the service core 15 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. click Finish Sketch. 102 | Chapter 2 Creating a Building Information Model . 17 On the Options Bar. click . 18 On the Options Bar. click 24 On the View toolbar. For Top Constraint. Under Constraints. click .

expand Renderings. Dataset ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open.rvt.rvt. you add glass railings around the floor edges. Modifying a Floor and Adding Railings | 103 . where it is hosted within a railing family. Notice the glass railing in the foreground. “Modifying a Floor and Adding Railings” on page 103. and double-click Lounge Perspective. The rendering displays. After you modify it. you cut away a portion of the floor on the 02 Level of the building. press SHIFT. In the left pane of the Open dialog. and spin the building to get a better view of the core. Modifying a Floor and Adding Railings In this exercise. click Training Files. You copy the railing type into your project from another project. Open a different project and view a rendering of the building lounge 1 Click File menu ➤ Open. You can see that the service core cuts through the floors of the building. and open Metric\m_Conference. 25 Proceed to the final exercise. 3 In the new project. NOTE You may close the project with or without saving it. 2 In the left pane of the dialog. click Training Files. in the Project Browser. and open Metric\m_RRB_modify_floor_add_railings_. This is the railing that you want to add to your model..

and Parapet. 104 | Chapter 2 Creating a Building Information Model . click OK. 6 Click Edit menu ➤ Copy to Clipboard.rvt or m_RRB_modify_floor_add_railings. Modify the 02 Level floor 11 In the Project Browser. press and hold CTRL. The floor sketch displays. click (Split). 12 Select the floor. and click to split the floor. click Edit. 14 Select the bottom horizontal floor 700 mm to the left of grid line C. 9 In the Duplicate Types dialog. and drag it to the right until it intersects with grid line D. double-click 02 Level. expand Families. 5 Expand Railing. 10 Close the warning dialog that displays. 15 On the Design Bar. 13 On the Options Bar.rvt. and on the Options Bar. click Modify. under Floor Plans. and select Glass. 8 Click Edit menu ➤ Paste from Clipboard. 16 Select the left endpoint of the floor where you split it. 17 Select the right endpoint of the floor where you split it. and expand Railings. Handrail only. and drag to the left until it intersects with grid line B. 7 Click Window menu ➤ Revit Retail Building.Copy the railing types into the retail building project 4 In the Project Browser.

click .18 On the Design Bar. move the cursor vertically 1500 mm. 21 Sketch the same lines in the opposite direction on the right side of the floor sketch. 25 Select grid line B. 27 On the Tools toolbar. select the left vertical sketch line along grid line B. 19 Select the left endpoint of the floor. and lock the alignment. Modifying a Floor and Adding Railings | 105 . and click to draw another line. and click the lock to lock the alignment. move the cursor vertically until the line is 1500 mm long. and click the lock to lock the alignment. click (Align). and click to place it. 26 Select grid line D. 24 On the Tools toolbar. 22 Select the endpoint of the right horizontal line that you just sketched. click Lines. 23 Complete the sketch as shown. 28 Align the horizontal sketch lines with each other as shown. select the right vertical sketch line along grid line D. 20 Move the cursor horizontally to the right 1500 mm and click to draw another line.

33 On the Design Bar. For Offset. 37 On the Design Bar. click Railing. enter 100 mm. 106 | Chapter 2 Creating a Building Information Model . click Yes to attach the top of the walls on 01 Entry Level to the bottom of the 02 Level floor. Lock the dimensions. 31 In the Revit dialog.29 On the Design Bar. 35 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Click . 38 Dimension the railing sketch to the edge of the floor and lock the dimension. click Dimension. click Dimension. and click OK. click Finish Sketch. click Railing Properties. Add railings around the floor 32 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. 36 Select the floor lines to sketch the railing around the inside of the floor line as shown. for Type.rvt project. select Glass. 30 On the Design Bar. 34 In the Element Properties dialog. This is the railing type that you copied from the Conference. and dimension the floor sketch lines as shown.

click Camera.39 Click Finish Sketch. 41 Place the camera and camera target as shown. You can view the railing that you just added. Click Model Graphics ➤ Shading with Edges. 42 On the View Control Bar: ■ ■ Click Model Graphics ➤ Hidden Line. View the floor and railings 40 On the View tab of the Design Bar. Modifying a Floor and Adding Railings | 107 . A new 3D view of the interior of the 02 Level displays.

43 Close all project drawings. 108 | Chapter 2 Creating a Building Information Model .■ Click Crop Region ➤ Hide Crop Region to hide the frame around the view.

As the building is slated to receive historic tax credits. exterior fire stairs. the Freighthouse Flats project is an exciting renovation of an historic three-story warehouse into new urban luxury loft living spaces. and a roof garden. you learn to create construction documentation in Revit Architecture 2008. lofty ceilings. a Kansas City-based architectural firm for providing their Freighthouse Flats renovation project to use for the tutorial datasets in this section. balconies. The additional 4th floor and non-historic north facade will be modernized to include a 4th floor penthouse.Documenting Your Projects 3 In this section of the tutorials. the existing building shell will be maintained and restored. and north facing balconies for the 2nd and 3rd floor units. Located in Kansas City’s popular Crossroads Arts District. 109 . BNIM Architects was selected to convert the existing building into a 22-unit condominium featuring concrete floors. We wish to thank BNIM Architects.

110 | Chapter 3 Documenting Your Projects . slight modifications to the building design have been made.NOTE For training purposes.

You learn to: ■ ■ ■ Create new project views. including plan. you begin the construction documentation for the Freighthouse Flats project.Adding Views and Sheets to a Project 3 In this tutorial. and detail views Modify the appearance of tags and other annotation on plans Set visibility and graphic controls in views to produce different presentation effects Create projects sheets that contain project views ■ 111 . section. elevation.

Duplicating Plan Views In this exercise.Creating Views In this lesson. You learn how to create new views from existing views. you learn how to create views from a building model. Level 1 Furniture Plan created from the Level 1 floor plan Vicinity Plan created from the Site plan Dataset ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. you create new plan views of the building model by copying existing views and then modifying the copied views. You also duplicate the project site plan to create a vicinity plan. how to create section and elevation views. 112 | Chapter 3 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . You duplicate the Level 1 and Level 2 floor plans to create Level 1 and Level 2 furniture plans. and how to create views from callouts that you place in other views.

double-click Level 1 Furniture Plan. and click OK. click Training Files. under Floor Plans. right-click Copy of Level 1 ➤ Rename. right-click Copy of Level 2 ➤ Rename. enter Level 1 Furniture Plan. 8 In the Rename View dialog. and open Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Creating Views. and click OK. Duplicating Plan Views | 113 .■ In the left pane of the Open dialog. 2 In the Project Browser. under Floor Plans. and right-click Level 1 ➤ Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. 7 In the Project Browser. Duplicate the Level 1 floor plan to create a Level 1 furniture plan 1 In the Project Browser. 6 Click View menu ➤ Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate.rvt. double-click Level 2 Furniture Plan. select Level 2. Use an alternate method of view duplication to create a Level 2 furniture plan 5 In the Project Browser. 4 In the Project Browser. expand Floor Plans. enter Level 2 Furniture Plan. 9 In the Project Browser. 3 In the Rename View dialog.

right-click Site ➤ Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. right-click Copy of Site ➤ Rename. 11 Under Floor Plans. under Floor Plans. 114 | Chapter 3 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . double-click Vicinity Plan. 12 In the Rename View dialog. and click OK. 13 In the Project Browser. hide the display of the elevation markers in the view. and click 1: 1000. click the current scale. 14 On the View Control Bar.Duplicate a view and change the scale as required 10 In the Project Browser. 15 Select the body of the south elevation marker. enter Vicinity Plan. Next.

and click Hide in view ➤ Category. Creating Elevation and Section Views In this exercise. 18 Save the file as Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Creating Views_in_progress. All of the elevation markers on the plan are hidden. 17 Click File menu ➤ Save As. you create an additional section and elevation view of the building model.16 Right-click.rvt. Creating Elevation and Section Views | 115 .

rvt. select1:100. 5 Specify a point in the drawing in front of the angular wall to place an elevation marker. Add an elevation marker to the Level 1 floor plan 1 In the Project Browser. select Elevation: Building Elevation. 3 In the Type Selector. under Floor Plans. NOTE Elevation markers are context sensitive and will automatically try to align parallel to model geometry. Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Creating Views_in_progress. 4 On the Options Bar. click Elevation. double-click Level 1.South East elevation view Section view Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous lesson. 116 | Chapter 3 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar. for Scale.

7 Select and move the upper horizontal line of the elevation until it extends past the upper-left corner of the building. right-click Elevation 1-a ➤ Rename. and select the head of the elevation marker that you just placed. 10 In the Rename View dialog.Modify the elevation extents 6 On the Design Bar. 8 On the Design Bar. 11 In the Project Browser. Rename and view the new elevation 9 In the Project Browser. click Modify. under Elevations (Building Elevation). Creating Elevation and Section Views | 117 . under Elevations. double-click South East. click Modify. and click OK. enter South East.

■ Move the cursor down. Modify the section line 17 Click the blue arrows below the section line head to reverse the direction in which the section is cut through the building. under Views (all). 14 In the Type Selector. click Section.Draw a section line on the Level 1 floor plan 12 In the Project Browser. 13 On the View tab of the Design Bar. select Section: Building Section. and specify the section line endpoint between the endpoints of grid lines 2 and 3. for Scale. 15 On the Options Bar. and double-click Level 1. select 1:100. expand Floor Plans. 16 Draw a section line through the building: ■ Specify a point above the top wall of the building between grid lines 2 and 3. 118 | Chapter 3 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project .

18 Select the blue triangular grips on the left side of the section extents. 19 Click the blue arrows below the section tail twice to cycle through the section tail options and add a section head to the section line endpoint. Creating Elevation and Section Views | 119 . click Split Segment. Click the midpoint of the section line. and move them to just outside of the left side of the building. and click to place it. 20 Add a jog to the section line: ■ ■ On the Options Bar. drag it to the right until it cuts through the stair.

select the blue break mark that displays under the grid bubble. 24 Select gridline F. 120 | Chapter 3 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . click Modify. 23 On the View Control Bar. expand Sections (Building Section). click Detail Level: Coarse ➤ Medium. View the new section 22 In the Project Browser.21 On the Design Bar. and double-click Section 1. and drag the top segment of gridline F to the right.

click Modify. Creating Callout Views | 121 . 26 Click File menu ➤ Save. Creating Callout Views In this exercise.rvt. you create new views: an enlarged stair plan view and a detail view. you draw a callout around the geometry in another view to specify the contents of the each new callout view. To create each view. Stair callout on the Level 1 floor plan Resulting callout view .25 On the Design Bar. Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Creating Views_in_progress.Enlarged Stair Plan Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous lesson.

3 In the Type Selector. select Floor Plan. click Modify. 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar. click Callout. under Floor Plans. and select the callout boundary. double-click Level 1. 6 Modify the callout leader: ■ ■ On the Design Bar. ■ Move the cursor to the lower-left of the stair. Select the grip on the leader line that is closest to the callout head. select 1:50.Create a floor plan callout 1 In the Project Browser. 4 On the Options Bar. 5 Draw the callout around the large stair in the center of the plan: ■ Specify a point to the upper-right of the stair. 122 | Chapter 3 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . for Scale. and move it to the left side of the callout boundary. and specify a point to complete the callout.

9 In the Rename View dialog. 7 On the Design Bar. and drag it down slightly to create a jog in the leader line. Creating Callout Views | 123 .■ Select the middle grip. 8 In the Project Browser under Floor Plans. and click OK. The Enlarged Stair Plan view displays. Open the callout view 10 Double-click the callout head. enter Enlarged Stair Plan. click Modify. right-click Callout of Level 1 ➤ Rename.

13 In the Type Selector. click Callout. 124 | Chapter 3 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project .Create a detail view callout 11 In the Project Browser. select Detail View: Detail. 15 Create the callout: ■ Zoom in to the upper-left corner of the building. double-click Section 1. under Sections (Building Sections). and specify a point above and to the right of the roof overhang. 14 On the Options Bar. select 1:50. 12 On the View tab of the Design Bar. for Scale. ■ Move the cursor diagonally down. and specify a point to the left and below the roof overhang.

expand Detail Views (Details). 17 In the Project Browser. Open the detail callout view 19 In the Project Browser. Creating Callout Views | 125 . and click OK. and right-click Detail 0 ➤ Rename.16 Modify the callout leader as shown. under Detail Views (Details). 18 In the Rename View dialog. enter Roof Overhang Detail. double-click Roof Overhang Detail.

You change the appearance of the section mark head. the elevation markers. and the callout head and boundary that you placed in previous exercises. Existing stair callout head and boundary 126 | Chapter 3 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . you modify the appearance of tags in a view so that they conform to office CAD standards. Modifying View Tag Appearance In this exercise.20 Click File menu ➤ Save.

. Modify the section mark head 1 In the Project Browser. and click OK. Section Tail – Filled. and click 11 In the Element Properties dialog. click Duplicate. for Section Head. 5 In the Load into Projects dialog. Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Creating Views_in_progress. 15 Under Category. open Metric\Families\Annotations. and click OK twice. 7 In the Type Properties dialog. and can be applied to the section line. select Section Head . 3 In the left pane of the Open dialog. under Floor Plans.rvt. Section Tail . 10 On the floor plan. Modify the line weight of the section line and mark 13 Click Settings menu ➤ Object Styles.rfa. select Custom-Section Head: Section Head – Open.Filled. 6 Click Settings menu ➤ View Tags ➤ Section Tags. 2 Click File menu ➤ Open. 9 In the Type Properties dialog. 14 In the Object Styles dialog.Custom. click the Annotation Objects tab. double-click Level 1. Modifying View Tag Appearance | 127 . click Load into Project. select the section line. and click Open. 4 On the Design Bar. The new section mark head that you want to apply to either endpoint of the section line displays. scroll to Section Line. select Custom-Section Head. select the current project. The Custom-Section Head family is now loaded in the project. click Edit/New.Modified stair callout head and boundary Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous lesson. enter Section Head – Custom. and click OK. clear any others. click Training Files. and click OK. 8 In the Name dialog. 12 For Section Tag.

click Edit/New. 29 In the left pane of the Open dialog. Click OK. 27 Click OK twice. For Line Weight. 19 Click OK. enter 12. enter 12. 17 Under Category. 32 Click Settings menu ➤ View Tags ➤ Callout Tags. On the floor plan. and on the Options Bar. clear all others. and click Open. and select 3. click Training Files. 21 In the Type Properties dialog. 26 In the Type Properties dialog. notice the updated section marks that display at each endpoint of the section line. 128 | Chapter 3 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . For Dimensions ➤ Width. click Load into Project. select the current project. select 12. 18 Click in the Line Weight/Projection field.rfa. scroll to Section Marks. notice the square elevation markers that display. 24 Select an elevation marker in the drawing.5mm Square. Modify the shape and weight of the elevation markers 20 Click Settings menu ➤ View Tags ➤ Elevation Tags. Modify the callout head 28 Click File menu ➤ Open. for Elevation Tag. On the floor plan. 31 In the Load into Projects dialog.16 Click in the Line Weight/Projection field. under Graphics: ■ ■ ■ ■ For Shape. 22 In the Name dialog. select 3. select Square. 30 On the Design Bar. click Duplicate. . and click OK. and select 2. and click OK. click 25 In the Element Properties dialog. select Custom-Callout Head. The new callout head that you want to apply to the callout displays.5mm Square. open Metric\Families\Annotations. 23 In the Type Properties dialog.5 mm.

Click OK. 34 In the Name dialog.33 In the Type Properties dialog. 47 Select Callout Leader Line. 45 For Line Pattern. The custom callout head displays on the floor plan. click 37 In the Element Properties dialog. 38 In the Type Properties dialog. scroll down to Callout Boundary. select . expand Callout Boundary. 42 In the Objects Styles dialog. select Custom – Callout Head: Callout Head. 44 Click in the Line Weight/Projection field. click Duplicate. 36 In the drawing. 35 In the Type Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Callout Head. For Corner Radius. 39 Click OK twice. . 43 Under Category. 49 Click OK. enter . click Edit/New. Custom – Callout Head w/ 6mm Corner Radius. select the callout. Custom – Callout Head w/ 6mm Corner Radiusand click OK. 46 Under Category. and select 4. and on the Options Bar. 48 Click in the Line Weight/Projection field. select Dash. click the Annotation Objects tab. 40 Press ESC. for Callout Tag. and select 7. enter 6 mm. Modifying View Tag Appearance | 129 . The new callout boundary displays on the floor plan. Modify the callout boundary 41 Click Settings menu ➤ Object Styles.

Setting Visibility and Graphics Options in Views In this lesson. You learn to create view templates. The crop region displays as red.50 Click File menu ➤ Save. In the left pane of the Open dialog. view regions. click Training Files. View templates provide and easy way to transfer visibility settings to multiple drawings. filters.rvt. and double-click East. you create a view template containing specific presentation quality visibility settings. 2 Select the outer crop region that displays around the view. you create presentation views that feature elevations of the building. Creating a View Template In this exercise. To accomplish this. and visual overrides. and features blue triangular grips and break marks. 130 | Chapter 3 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . masking regions. and apply it to multiple elevation views. Set a crop region for the view 1 In the Project Browser. under Elevations. you learn how to control the visibility and graphic characteristics of elements in views. and open Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-VG. Presentation view Dataset ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open.

5 On the View Toolbar. 13 Under Visibility. under Elevations. click Modify to hide the crop region grips and display it as black. Create and apply a view template to an elevation drawing 9 On the View Control bar. 8 Click OK. click Zoom to Fit. right-click East. 10 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. and click Properties. under Visibility. under Extents. clear Entourage.3 Select and move the blue triangular grips to resize the crop region as shown. 4 On the Design Bar. click Detail Level: Coarse ➤ Medium. 7 In the Element Properties dialog. 6 On the Project Browser. clear Crop Region Visible. 11 In the Visibility/Graphic Overrides dialog. 12 Click the Annotation Categories tab. clear: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Callouts Elevations Grids Levels Sections Creating a View Template | 131 .

132 | Chapter 3 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . enter Black and White Presentation Elevation. right-click East. 21 In the Select View Template dialog. The settings in the view template create a presentation-quality elevation view. and click Create View Template From View. click Apply. click Shadows Off ➤ Shadows On. 16 In the Project Browser. Callouts. double-click North. levels. elevation markers. and click OK. right-click North. 18 In the View Templates dialog. under Elevations. under Elevations. and section lines are now hidden in the view. 20 In the Project Browser.14 Click OK. click OK. 17 In the New View Template dialog. and click Apply View Template. 19 In the Project Browser. and click OK. select Black and White Presentation Elevation. grids. 15 On the View Control bar.

2 In the Project Browser. double-click Penthouse.rvt. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous lesson. View Range and Plan Regions In this exercise. Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-VG_in_progress.rvt. 23 Save the file as Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-VG_in_progress. Click OK twice. You want to display the exterior roof terraces from Level 4 on the penthouse and roof plan. 4 In the View Range dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Primary Range. under Floor Plans. select Level Below (Level 4). as this structure has not yet been documented in any of the views. you modify the view range and create view plan regions to adjust the display of elements in the building Penthouse and Roof Plan. 3 In the Element Properties dialog. select Penthouse. select Level Below (Level 4). for View Range. under Extents. Adjust the view range of the Penthouse plan 1 In the Project Browser. Under View Depth. right-click. NOTE The Penthouse plan now shows the level below to provide additional context to the view. for Bottom. and the exterior area on the south side of the building. View Range and Plan Regions | 133 .22 Click File menu ➤ Save As. and click Properties. for Level. click Edit.

double-click Roof Plan. for View Range. 6 In the Project Browser. select Level 4. for Bottom. under Floor Plans. Click OK twice. under Extents. for Level. 8 In the View Range dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Primary Range. click Edit. 7 In the Element Properties dialog.Adjust the view range of the Roof plan 5 In the Project Browser. 134 | Chapter 3 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . and click Properties. select Roof Plan. right-click. Under View Depth. select Level 4.

for Level. click 12 Sketch a plan region: ■ ■ (Rectangle). View Range and Plan Regions | 135 . NOTE A Plan Region allows you to modify the view range of a specified area defined by the extents of the Plan Region. and select the endpoint the gridline shown below. Move you cursor diagonally. 11 On the Options Bar. click Plan Region. 15 In the View Range dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Primary Range. click Modify. for Bottom. click Lines. click Finish Sketch. 13 On the Design Bar. select the left endpoint of the outer wall. 16 On the Design Bar. 10 On the Design Bar. click Region Property. for View Range. 14 In the Element Properties dialog.Create a plan region to show exterior space on the south side of the building 9 On the View tab of the Design Bar. Under View Depth. under Extents. select Unlimited. click Edit. In the left corner of the building. select Unlimited. 17 On the Design Bar. Click OK twice.

3 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog. in this case. the fire-rated walls on the floor plan display with a solid red fill. select Walls. 5 In the Filters dialog. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous lesson. Using Filters to Control Visibility In this exercise. 2 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. under Views (all). You use a filter to quickly apply visual changes to the walls based on defined parameters. expand Floor Plans. under Filters. After you apply the filter. and double-click Level 1. 8 Under Filter Rules: ■ For Filter by. click Edit/New.rvt. select Fire Rating. 136 | Chapter 3 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . under Categories. click (New). 1 In the Project Browser. 4 At the bottom of the Visibility/Graphics dialog. 7 In the Filters dialog. 6 In the Filter Name dialog. and click OK. enter Rated Walls. you visually audit the drawing to make sure the fire-rated walls are placed correctly. the fire rating of the walls. Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-VG_in_progress.18 Click File menu ➤ Save. click the Filters tab.

On the Filters tab of the Visibility Graphics dialog. 13 In the Fill Pattern Graphics dialog. 9 Click OK. for Pattern. 11 Select Rated Walls. click OK. select Solid Fill.■ ■ Select contains. click Override under Patterns. select the red color. apply the red solid fill override to Cut Patterns as well. 20 Click File menu ➤ Save. To accomplish this. and click OK. under Basic colors. 18 In the Visibility/Graphics Overrides dialog. for Color. 19 Remove the filter: ■ ■ Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. 17 Using the same method. and click OK. click Remove. The fire-rated walls now display without the solid red fill. The Rated Walls filter can be reapplied to the drawing at any time. but the overrides associated with the filter must be reapplied as well. you obscure or ''wipe out'' geometry in portions of a view. click Add. Masking Portions of a View In this exercise. you use masking regions that you sketch over the areas that you want to hide. and click OK. 16 Click OK. 12 On the Filter tab. Masking Portions of a View | 137 . for Rated Walls. 10 On the Filter tab. Enter Hr. click No Override. 14 In the Color dialog. under Projection/Surface. 15 In the Fill Pattern Graphics dialog.

click Show Crop Region. 4 On the View Control Bar. and click OK. 3 In the Rename View dialog.rvt. as shown. under Floor Plans. 6 Modify the crop region to get close to the desired view at the bottom left. 2 Select Copy of Level 1. 138 | Chapter 3 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . and click Rename. 5 On the View menu. enter Unit 18 Plan – Level 1. Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-VG_in_progress. 1 In the Project Browser.Masking regions sketched over the upper corners of a view Unit plan view with upper corners masked Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous lesson. click Zoom ➤ Zoom to Fit. right-click Level 1 ➤ Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. right-click.

12 On the Options Bar. 13 Sketch 2 masking regions as shown. click (Rectangle). and adjust the view again until it displays as shown. NOTE This specifies the line type for the border of the masking region. click Zoom ➤ Zoom to Fit. 11 In the Type Selector. 9 On the View Control Bar. Use a masking region to hide additional model geometry that does not need to be shown 10 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. click Show Crop Region ➤ Hide Crop Region.7 On the View menu. click Masking Region. 8 Select the crop region. Masking Portions of a View | 139 . select Invisible lines.

Level 1. You create poche for the walls and you hide and modify the display of certain elements on the presentation plan.rvt. Working with Visual Overrides In this exercise. and apply different visual overrides to create presentation effects. 140 | Chapter 3 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . 15 View the effects of the masking regions on the floor plan. under Floor Plans. 1 In the Project Browser.14 On the Design Bar. right-click Unit 18 Plan . click Finish Sketch. 16 Click File menu ➤ Save. Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-VG_in_progress. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate with Detailing. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous lesson. you create a presentation plan of one of the residential units on the Level 1 floor plan.

click in the Patterns field. Working with Visual Overrides | 141 . and click OK. and click Override. 9 On the left side of the Color dialog. click black. and click OK. click No Override. right-click.NOTE Duplicate with Detailing is selected so that the masking regions are retained in the new view. for Color. Create poche for walls 5 Select the diagonal bottom wall. 10 In the Fill Pattern Graphics dialog. under Pattern Overrides. select Solid fill. and click 1: 50. 4 On the View Control Bar. 6 In the Visibility/Graphic Overrides dialog. select Walls. for Pattern. under Visibility. and click Rename. 3 In the Rename View dialog. 8 In the Fill Pattern Graphics dialog. 11 Click OK twice. 2 Select the Copy of Unit 18 Plan – Level 1. enter Presentation Unit 18 Plan – Level 1. click the current scale. 7 Under Cut. and click Override Graphics in View ➤ By Category. right-click.

Hide elements in the view by category 17 Select the lamp on the table on the floor plan as shown. click Modify. under Visibility. clear Floors. 142 | Chapter 3 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . clear Grids. 14 In the Visibility/Graphic Overrides dialog. 15 Click the Annotation Categories tab. 13 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics.Set the visibility and graphics of other categories in the view. 16 Under Visibility. 12 On the Design Bar. and click OK.

and click Hide in View ➤ Category.18 Right-click. 19 Select 1 of the chairs around the long table on the floor plan as shown. Working with Visual Overrides | 143 .

and click Override Graphics in View ➤ By Category. click No Override. Modify visibility and graphics by element 26 On the floor plan. 21 Under Projection/Surface. click a purple color. and click OK twice.20 Right-click. 27 In the View-Specific Element Graphics dialog. right-click. 22 In the Line Graphics dialog. the Visibility/Graphics dialog opens to the category of the object (Furniture) selected by default. select Dash. under Lines. and click Override Graphics in View ➤ By Element. for Color. 25 Click OK twice. 29 In the Color dialog. select a bright green color. 24 In the Line Graphics dialog. 144 | Chapter 3 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . By using the previous method to make the selection. click Override. 23 In the Color dialog. click By Category Override. click Projection Lines. 28 For Color. select the sofa. and click OK. for Pattern.

33 On the View Control Bar. The lighting fixtures and grid lines that you hid previously display in a dark red color. click Modify. right-click. Reveal hidden elements in a view 31 On the View Control Bar. The hidden crop region is also revealed. 32 Select one of the lamps. click . click .30 On the Design Bar. Working with Visual Overrides | 145 . and click Unhide in view ➤ Category.

146 | Chapter 3 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . right-click. 2 In the Select a Titleblock dialog. In the left pane of the Open dialog. click Training Files. how to add views to the sheets.34 Click File menu ➤ Save. you create project drawing sheets that report the project information in the sheet titleblocks. TIP If the View tab is not displayed in the Design Bar. you learn how to create sheets within a Revit Architecture project. click Sheet. and open Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats. Create a project sheet 1 On View tab of the Design Bar.rvt. and click OK. select A0 metric. and how to make changes to the building model from a view on a sheet. and click View. Creating Drawing Sheets In this exercise.Creating Sheets. Creating Drawing Sheets in a Project In this lesson. Dataset ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open.

The title block that you selected is a family that has already been loaded into the project. Creating Drawing Sheets | 147 . click 6 In the Element Properties dialog. The new sheet is displayed in the Project Browser with the name A102 . and select the title block.A title block and drawing borders are displayed on the drawing sheet. under Identity Data: ■ ■ (Properties). The text fields in the titleblock family (shown below) contain labels that associate the project information parameters with the appropriate text fields. NOTE The vertical time and date stamp in the lower-right corner of the sheet view automatically updates every time the project file is saved. expand Sheets (all). click Modify. 5 When the title block highlights. For Sheet Name. on the Options Bar.Unnamed. For Sheet Number. enter A101. Change the sheet name and number 4 On the Design Bar. 3 In the Project Browser. enter Site Plan.

Site Plan displays in the title block as the sheet name and is appended to the sheet name in the Project Browser. enter For Approval. enter 15 May. For Project Status. For Project Name. 8 Zoom in to the lower-right corner of the title block. enter the following address: ■ ■ 123 Main Street Anytown. continue to add project information: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ For Project Issue Date. The new project information displays in the titleblock. The Sheet Number has been updated to display A101. under Other. enter Freighthouse Flats. enter 2007-1. Smith. 2007. click Edit.■ Click OK. 13 In the Element Properties dialog. 7 On the Design Bar. enter J. MA 12345 12 Click OK. For Client Name. click Modify. 10 In the Element Properties dialog. 148 | Chapter 3 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . 11 In the Edit Text dialog. For Project Number. 14 Click OK. Display additional project information in the sheet title block 9 Click Settings menu ➤ Project Information. for Project Address.

right-click Sheets (all) ➤ New Sheet. 18 In the Sheet Title dialog. 3 Move the cursor to position the lower-right corner of the view in the lower-right corner of the sheet. select Level 1. Dataset ■ Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous lesson. under Sheets (all). Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Creating Sheets_in_progress. under Floor Plans.Stairs In the following exercise.Elevations A105 . and click OK. enter Floor Plan. and drag it to the sheet. double-click A102 . and click OK. click Modify. and click Save.Layout Plan A104 . 21 Save the file as Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Creating Sheets_in_progress.rvt. Drag the Level 1 floor plan onto a sheet to create a floor plan 1 In the Project Browser.Sections A108 .Floor Plan. right-click. 20 Click File menu ➤ Save As. and click to place the view. select the new sheet name. and click Rename. 17 In the Project Browser.Elevations A107 .Create a floor plan sheet 15 In the Project Browser.rvt. for Name. Adding Views to Sheets | 149 .Elevations A106 . select A0 metric. 2 In the Project Browser. 4 On the Design Bar. you add views to these sheets. The border of the view displays as red to indicate that you can reposition it on the sheet. create the following new project sheets: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ A103 . Adding Views to Sheets In this exercise. 16 In the Select a Titleblock dialog. Create additional sheets 19 Using the same method as you did in the previous steps. you add views to the sheets that you created in the previous exercise.

drag East to the upper-right corner of the sheet. under Elevations (Building Elevation). 7 Drag the North elevation to the lower-right corner of the sheet.The red border around the view no longer displays. 8 On the Design Bar.Elevations. double-click A104 . 6 In the Project Browser. 150 | Chapter 3 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . Add elevation views to the A104-Elevation sheet 5 In the Project Browser. align it with the East elevation. and click to place it. and click to place it. under Sheets (all). click Modify.

for View Scale. 10 Under Sections (Building Sections). and click to place it. Change the scale of the detail view 13 Select the Roof Overhang Detail on the sheet. 11 Under Detail Views (Detail). 16 Select title bar. Adding Views to Sheets | 151 .Sections. select 1:5. 12 On the Design Bar. drag Building Section to the upper-right corner of the sheet. click 14 In the Element Properties dialog. and use the blue endpoint grips to resize it so that it spans the length of the view.Add the Building Section view to the A107-Sections sheet 9 In the Project Browser. and on the Options Bar. . 15 Drag the view to reposition it next to the Building Section view. drag Roof Overhang Detail to the left of the Building Section view on the sheet. double-click A107 . and click to place it. and click OK. click Modify. Notice the title bar also needs to be resized. under Sheets (all).

Notice that the callout tag has been automatically updated to reference the correct sheet. and press TAB until it highlights. 21 Zoom to the stair callout. 18 Under Floor Plans. move the cursor over it. and click to place it. click Modify.NOTE If you find it difficult to select the left grip on the title bar. 19 On the Design Bar. double-click A108 . under Floor Plans. 152 | Chapter 3 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project .Stairs. View updated annotation on referenced views 20 In the Project Browser. double-click Level 1. drag Enlarged Stair Plan to the upper-right corner of the sheet. Create a sheet with stair and stair detail views 17 In the Project Browser. zoom in to the grip. under Sheets (all).

22 Zoom in to the section line heads and the east and north elevation markers. and notice they also reference the correct sheet numbers. Modifying the Building Model from a Sheet View | 153 . Change the roof elevation 1 In the Project Browser. and then make changes and deactivate the view. In order to do this. Modifying the Building Model from a Sheet View In this exercise.Sections. under Sheets (all). 23 Click File menu ➤ Save. Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Creating Sheets_in_progress. Dataset ■ Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous lesson. you learn how to modify a building model directly from the drawing sheets that you created from its views. you must first activate the view on the sheet. double-click A107 .rvt.

5 On the Design Bar. and click Deactivate View. 7 In the Project Browser. 3 At the right end of the Roof level line.2 Select the building section view. and press ENTER. 154 | Chapter 3 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . and click Activate View. double-click North. 4 Double-click the Roof elevation height. zoom in to the name and elevation of the level. right-click. click Modify. 6 Right-click. 8 Click File menu ➤ Save. enter 16700 mm. under Elevations (Building Elevation). Notice that the Roof Plan elevation has been updated.

Creating and Modifying a Title Sheet | 155 . After you create the sheet. 2 In the Select a Titleblock dialog. right-click Sheets (all) ➤ New Sheet. and click OK. select the new sheet name. For Sheet Name. enter Title Sheet. double-click Level 1. and click Properties. as it is not necessary to display it on the title sheet. you create a title sheet for your drawing set. 3 In the Project Browser. select A0 metric. Create a new sheet 1 In the Project Browser. 7 Place the camera as shown. Click OK.Creating and Modifying a Title Sheet In this exercise. click Camera. 4 In the Element Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Sheet Number. enter T. Create a view of the building to place on the title sheet 5 In the Project Browser. Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Creating Sheets_in_progress. The camera view displays. under Floor Plans. Dataset ■ Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous lesson. you create a perspective view of the building and place it on the sheet. You modify the view to hide the view title. 6 On the View tab of the Design Bar. right-click.rvt.

Title Sheet. Under Extents. for Eye Elevation. select Far Clip Active. double-click T . For Target Elevation. 12 On the View Control Bar. click 9 In the Element Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ . under Sheets (all). drag 3D View 1 onto the sheet. enter 18000 mm. enter 1500 mm. Under Camera. 13 In the Project Browser. Click OK. and click to place it in the center of the sheet. 10 Select the crop region and adjust the view to fit the building.8 On the Options Bar. click Show Crop Region ➤ Hide Crop Region. For Far Clip Offset. enter100000 mm. click Shadows off ➤ Shadows on. 156 | Chapter 3 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . 11 On the View Control Bar. 14 Under 3D Views.

and on the Options Bar. select No. 25 On the Design Bar. . click Size. 16 In the Crop Region dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Change. 21 In the Type Properties dialog. on the Options Bar. 24 Click OK twice. Remove the title bar on the view 18 On the Design Bar. click Modify. 19 Select the view on the sheet. and click OK. select Scale (locked proportions). for Height. click 20 In the Element Properties dialog. enter Viewport/no title mark. for Show title. 17 Reposition the view on the title sheet. under Graphics. Click Apply. and then click OK. Creating and Modifying a Title Sheet | 157 .15 With the view selected. enter 635 mm. The title bar no longer displays on the sheet. click Edit/New. click Modify. 23 In the Type Properties dialog. 22 In the Name dialog. click Duplicate. Under Model Crop Size.

158 | Chapter 3 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . and close the exercise file.26 Click File menu ➤ Save.

you learn how to tag rooms and other components of floor plans. such as room and window schedules. 159 .Tagging and Scheduling 4 In this tutorial. such as doors and windows. in your Revit Architecture 2008 projects. You also learn to create different types of schedules.

3 On the Room and Area tab of the Design Bar. 2 Zoom in to the upper area of the floor plan. NOTE If the Room and Area tab of the Design Bar is not active. and open Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Tagging Objects. click Training Files. The Room command with the Tag on placement option selected allows you to place and tag rooms with one command. right-click in the Design Bar. you need to create room separation lines to define the rooms to be tagged. you sequentially place and tag the rooms on the floor plan. Dataset ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. you learn how to use some of the annotation features included in Revit Architecture. Adding room separation lines breaks up an open space to make it easier to add rooms. and click Room and Area. and double-click Unit 18 Plan . You learn how to ■ ■ ■ ■ Sequentially tag rooms on a floor plan Tag doors and windows Modify tag placement and mark text Tag other objects.Level 1.Tagging Objects In this lesson. In the left pane of the Open dialog. click Room Separation. Add room separations 1 In the Project Browser. such as furniture Sequentially Placing and Tagging Rooms In this exercise. 160 | Chapter 4 Tagging and Scheduling . Because of the open style floor plan. expand Floor Plans.rvt.

move the cursor to the right. Sequentially Placing and Tagging Rooms | 161 .4 Click the endpoint of the short horizontal wall on the left. as shown: 6 Use the same method to create a horizontal separation above the stair to divide the dining area from the living area. and click the opposite wall to create a horizontal room separation dividing the kitchen from the dining area (top area of the drawing). as shown: 5 Use the same method to create a vertical separation to divide the kitchen from the entry area on the right.

click Modify.rfa. and the rectangle contains the room tag. click OK. 14 Move the cursor to the room at the upper right of the plan view. verify that Tag on placement is selected. 13 On the Options Bar. click Load. click Modify. and click to place the room and tag. 9 In the Tags dialog. click Room. 10 In the left pane of the Open dialog. 162 | Chapter 4 Tagging and Scheduling . and select the room tag. The crosshair graphic represents the room area being tagged. and open Metric\Families\Annotations\M_Room Tag. 15 On the Design Bar. The room tag number displays in blue. Tag rooms sequentially 12 On the Room and Area tab of the Design Bar.7 On the Design Bar. 11 In the Tags dialog. Load room tag annotation family 8 Click Settings menu ➤ Annotations ➤ Loaded Tags. indicating that it can be edited. click Training Files.

enter Entry. and press ENTER. Click to place the new room and tag. 19 Place another room and tag: ■ ■ ■ On the Design Bar. click Room. click Modify. Align the tags by moving the cursor until a dashed green line displays between the placed tag and the one that displays at the tip of the cursor. 18 On the Design Bar. click it. enter U18-1. and press ENTER. Move the cursor into the room to the left of the one previously tagged. 17 Click the room text label. ■ Sequentially Placing and Tagging Rooms | 163 .16 Zoom in on the tag number.

and edit the tags as shown (Toilet. and press ENTER. 20 On the Design Bar. 164 | Chapter 4 Tagging and Scheduling . 21 Click the room text label. 22 Use the same method to place rooms and tags. Sequential letters are also supported. Dining. and Living): Hide the room separations 23 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. enter Kitchen.NOTE The second tag that you place displays the sequential number U18-2. click Modify.

Tag Level 1 doors 1 If necessary. You learn how to add tags to the floor plan and how to simultaneously tag multiple untagged doors and windows. expand Floor Plans. Tagging Doors and Windows | 165 . and click OK. expand Lines.24 In the Visibility/Graphics Overrides dialog.rvt. 27 Starting with the Balcony (area near the stair). click Room Tag. 30 Save the file as Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Tagging Objects_in_progress. and double-click Unit 18 Plan . Tag rooms on upper level 25 In the Project Browser. 28 On the Design Bar. 26 On the Design Bar. Dataset Continue using the dataset you saved in the previous exercise. you learn how to place door and window tags. Tagging Doors and Windows In this exercise. and moving clockwise. Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Tagging Objects_in_progress. clear Room Separation. under Floor Plans. The rooms are already placed.Level 2. in the Project Browser. 29 Click File menu ➤ Save As.rvt. click to place a room tag in each of the 5 rooms. click Modify. Model Categories tab. double-click Unit 18 Plan . but they need to be tagged.Level 1.

for Mark. click Tag ➤ By Category. enter U18-1. click Modify. 6 Click the door tag for the entry door. under Identify Data. 7 Select the kitchen pantry door to the left. 3 On the Options Bar. 166 | Chapter 4 Tagging and Scheduling . clear Leader. 4 Select 5 doors in the upper area of the floor plan: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Entry door Kitchen pantry door Pocket door in toilet Closet door in dining room Living room door 5 On the Design Bar.2 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. and press ENTER. and click OK. and on the Options Bar. click (Properties). 8 In the Element Properties dialog. enter U18-2.

and click OK. rename the other 3 door tags to match the corresponding room tags. 10 Select the tag for the pocket door on the right. 11 Select the tag for the closet door and move it to the right of the door. double-click Unit 18 Plan . and drag it down to center it in the doorway. Tagging Doors and Windows | 167 . 14 In the Tag All Not Tagged dialog. 13 On the Design Bar. Tag Level 2 doors 12 In the Project Browser.Level 2. under Category.9 Using one of the methods you just learned. click Tag All Not Tagged. select Door Tags.

rfa. click Load. select Window. click Tag All Not Tagged. click Training Files. 20 In the left pane of the Open dialog. 21 Click OK. and click OK. expand Floor Plans. 19 In the Tags dialog. 22 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. 168 | Chapter 4 Tagging and Scheduling . 23 In the Tag All Not Tagged dialog. 18 Click Settings menu ➤ Annotations ➤ Loaded Tags. 16 Edit the numbers of the door tags as shown: Place window tags 17 In the Project Browser. and open Metric\Families\Annotations\M_Window Tag.15 Move the door tags to center them in the doorway. and double-click Level 1.

27 On the Design Bar.24 Zoom to the lower-right area of the drawing to view the window tags.rfa. Window tags are placed in the Level 2 plan view. select Leader. Tagging Other Objects In this exercise. 3 On the Options Bar. 4 Select a dining room chair. and modify the tag placement and display. Add furniture tags 1 In the Project Browser. and click OK. click Zoom To Fit to see the entire drawing. 25 Under Floor Plans. and open Metric\Families\Annotations\M_Furniture Tag.rvt. 7 Select each of the chairs and the table to place tags. 28 Select Window Tags. 26 On the View toolbar. and double-click Unit 18 Plan . double-click Level 2. 6 In the left pane of the Open dialog. click Tag All Not Tagged. 2 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Tagging Objects_in_progress. Tagging Other Objects | 169 . you learn how to tag furniture objects. 5 At the confirmation prompt.Level 1. expand Floor Plans. Dataset Continue using the dataset you saved in the previous exercise. 29 Click File menu ➤ Save. Zoom flyout. click Tag ➤ By Category. click Yes to load a tag. click Training Files.

170 | Chapter 4 Tagging and Scheduling . and drag it up to form an angled leader. modify the position of the chair tags to move them closer to the chairs. 15 Select the tag for the table (TBL-1).8 Select the furniture in the living room. 12 Click the elbow control. 13 Optionally. 11 Select the tag for the table. and drag it above the chair tag. 9 Click Modify. Modify tag placement 10 Zoom to the dining table. and on the Options Bar. 14 Click Modify. Notice that the chair and table tags overlap. clear Leader.

Tagging Other Objects | 171 . Tag furniture on Level 2 17 In the Project Browser. and click OK. under Floor Plans. and on the Design Bar. Change tag style 19 Draw a selection box around the top area of the drawing to select the furniture. click Modify. select M_Furniture tag : Standard. click Tag All Not Tagged. double-click Unit 18 Plan . 20 On the Options Bar.Level 2.16 Drag the table tag to the center of the table. 18 On the Design Bar. All furniture in the floor plan is tagged. click (Filter Selection).

Defining Schedules and Color Diagrams In this lesson. 23 Click File menu ➤ Save. You also learn to add schedule keys to a project by creating a room schedule and room color diagram. click Check None. select Furniture Tag: Boxed. you create a window schedule for the building model shown below. select Furniture Tags. 22 In the Type Selector. and click OK. you learn to add schedules. Schedule keys allow you to define common items that can be used by multiple objects within a schedule.21 In the Filter dialog. and click Modify. Creating a Window Schedule In this exercise. 172 | Chapter 4 Tagging and Scheduling .

click Training Files. Creating a Window Schedule | 173 .You begin by creating a window instance schedule. You then select a window in the instance schedule and use the Show command to locate it in a view of the building model. you change the window instance schedule to a type schedule. that is. a schedule that lists every window in the building. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Finally.rvt. Dataset ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. Next. in which windows are listed by window type. and open Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Schedules-Color Diagrams. you group and sort the windows in the instance schedule.

9 Click OK. The Comments field is moved under Scheduled fields. Define the fields to display as columns in the window schedule 5 In the Schedule Properties dialog. select Comments and click Add. select Windows. expand Floor Plans. and click View. 3 In the New Schedule dialog. right-click in the Design Bar. and double-click Level 1. under Category. 4 For Name. 7 Using the same method. add the following fields to the schedule: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Count Height Level Type Mark Width 8 Under Scheduled fields. click Schedule/Quantities. click the Fields tab. TIP If the View tab of the Design Bar is not active. 6 Under Available fields. order the fields as shown in the following illustration by selecting them and clicking Move Up or Move Down. 174 | Chapter 4 Tagging and Scheduling . enter Building Window Schedule. and click OK. 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar.Create a window schedule 1 In the Project Browser.

11 If the confirmation dialog displays. for Sorting/Grouping. right-click the schedule. Select a window in the schedule and locate it in the building model 10 Select a cell in the window schedule with the C14 Type Mark. Creating a Window Schedule | 175 . However.A schedule is created that contains every window in the building model. for Sort by. and double-click Building Window Schedule to redisplay the window instance schedule. you are prompted to open one that does. Group and sort the window schedule by type mark 14 In the drawing area. click Close. you can display other views of the building model that include the selected window. in large building models with many views. this can be a time-consuming process. and click View Properties. 12 In the Show Element(s) in View dialog. and click OK twice. and on the Options Bar. under Other. 16 On the Sorting/Grouping tab of the Schedule Properties dialog. If no open view shows the selected element. NOTE By clicking Show. expand Schedules/Quantities. 15 In the Element Properties dialog. select Type Mark. The window that corresponds to the information in the schedule row is displayed in a relevant view of the building model. click Edit. 13 In the Project Browser. click OK to search through relevant views of the building model. click Show.

23 Change the Type Mark for the other window types. and press ENTER. for Sorting/Grouping. 18 Click OK to confirm that you want to change the type mark for all windows of this type. under Floor Plans. as shown: 24 In the Project Browser.The window schedule is displayed. The window type schedule is displayed. sorted by type mark. under Other. clear Itemize every instance. click Edit. The type mark is changed to A and the schedule is resorted. Change the schedule from an instance schedule to a type schedule 19 Right-click on the schedule. 176 | Chapter 4 Tagging and Scheduling . so that the types are sequentially named from A to H. change the Type Mark in the first row from 19 to A. 20 In the Element Properties dialog. 22 Click OK twice. 21 In the Schedule Properties dialog. Change type mark from the schedule 17 In the window schedule. double-click Level 2. and click View Properties.

Under Parameter Data. 5 Click OK. and sill conditions for a window can be found. click OK. In this case. enter Head Detail. and double-click Building Window Schedule. you add schedule columns for parameters that are not standard for the scheduled object. select Type. you want to add columns to the window schedule to describe the detail where head. These parameters cannot be shared with other projects and. unlike shared parameters. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Schedules-Color Diagrams_in_progress. Adding Project Parameters to a Window Schedule | 177 . 2 Click Settings menu ➤ Project Parameters.25 Zoom to the lower area of the floor plan to see that the window tags have changed. specify the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Categories. and save the exercise file as m_Freighthouse_Flats-Schedules-Color Diagrams_in_progress. you cannot use them to tag objects. 3 In the Project Parameters dialog. Dataset Continue using the dataset you saved in the previous exercise. The new project parameter Head Detail is displayed in the Project Parameters dialog. for Name. 26 Click File menu ➤ Save As. 6 Use the same method to create 2 more window parameters: Jamb Detail and Sill Detail. For Group parameter under. expand Schedules/Quantities. 7 In the Parameter Properties dialog. jamb. select Construction. For Discipline. click Add to create the new parameter. 4 In the Parameter Properties dialog.rvt. select Windows to associate the parameter with the Windows category. Create project parameters 1 In the Project Browser.rvt. Adding Project Parameters to a Window Schedule In this lesson.

for Fields. 12 Click OK twice.Add project parameters to the schedule 8 In the Project Browser. enter Window Details. TIP To select all 3 headers. move the cursor over the Jamb Detail and Sill Detail headers. click in the Head Detail header. so that they are listed before Comments. and click Properties. and while pressing the left mouse button. under Available fields. 9 In the Element Properties dialog. Jamb Detail. click Group. click Edit. under Other. 178 | Chapter 4 Tagging and Scheduling . 15 In the grouping field above the detail headers in the schedule. 14 On the Options Bar. select the following fields. select Head Detail. and Sill Detail. Group headers in the schedule 13 In the schedule. and click Add to add them to the schedule in order: ■ ■ ■ Head Detail Jamb Detail Sill Detail 11 Use the Move Up control to move the new parameters up in the list. 10 On the Fields tab of the Schedule Properties dialog. right-click Building Window Schedule.

click Schedule/Quantities. Verify Schedule building components is selected. This filter checks each door in the project to see which unit it is associated with. For example. you create a unit-based door schedule and use a filter to limit the selection of doors to a single unit. enter 2/A107. select the following fields. expand Floor Plans. You then hide the column used for the filter. select Doors. enter 1/A107. click the Fields tab. Enter U18 in the third field. 6 Under Available fields. enter 3/A107. 3 In the New Schedule dialog. for Jamb Detail. and produces a schedule that includes only the doors in Unit 18. Creating a Unit-Based Door Schedule with a Filter | 179 . under Type Mark A. for Head Detail. and double-click Unit 18 Plan . and place the unit-based door schedule on a sheet with the unit plans. Verify the Phase is Phase 1. 17 Click File menu ➤ Save. 4 Click OK. Select contains in the second field. enter Unit 18 . Dataset Continue using the dataset you saved in the previous exercise. View Level 1 of the building 1 In the Project Browser. 5 In the Schedule Properties dialog.16 You can add values for the new project parameters directly in the schedule. Create a new door schedule for Unit 18 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar. and for Sill Detail. specify the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Category. Under Name. and click Add to add them to the schedule in order: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Count Family and Type Head Height Sill Height Width Mark 7 Click the Filter tab.Door Schedule. Creating a Unit-Based Door Schedule with a Filter In this exercise.rvt.Level 1. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Schedules-Color Diagrams_in_progress. and specify the following values for Filter by: ■ ■ ■ Select Mark in the first field.

and double-click A102 . click Modify. 13 In the Project Browser. 180 | Chapter 4 Tagging and Scheduling . and drag it to the sheet. Clear Itemize every instance (to group the like door types into one row). click Unit 18 . select Hidden Field. 9 Click the Formatting tab. 11 Under Field formatting. select Family and Type. and specify the following options: ■ ■ For Sort by. Place the schedule on a sheet 12 In the Project Browser. The schedule includes the count and type for doors in Unit 18 only. but is not included as a column in the schedule. and click OK.Door Schedule. The Mark field is used to filter the entries in the schedule.8 Click the Sorting/Grouping tab. 16 Zoom in to see the details of the door schedule. 10 Under Fields. expand Sheets (all). 14 Click to place the schedule in the upper-left corner of the sheet.Unit 18. 15 On the Design Bar. select Mark.

add the following fields to the schedule in order: ■ ■ ■ Name Level Area 6 Click the Appearance tab. select Bold to display the schedule headers in bold font. and click Add. 20 Click File menu ➤ Save. 19 On the Design Bar. Creating a Room Schedule In this exercise. 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar. 18 Select the control at the top of the schedule for the Family and Type column and drag it to the right to expand the column width. Dataset Continue using the dataset you saved in the previous exercise.rvt. partial schedules are shown for illustration purposes. click Modify. select Number. Creating a Room Schedule | 181 . double-click Level 1.Modify the width of a schedule column on the sheet 17 Select the door schedule on the sheet. select Rooms. click Schedule/Quantities. you create a room schedule for the first floor plan. under Floor Plans. Select the fields to display as columns in the room schedule 4 On the Fields tab of the Schedule Properties dialog. under Category. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Schedules-Color Diagrams_in_progress. 3 In the New Schedule dialog. The Number field is moved under Scheduled fields. right-click in the Design Bar. 7 To the right of Header text. and click OK. Notice that several rooms have been defined in the floor plan. 8 Click OK. You also add programmed rooms to the schedule for the public spaces in the building. 5 Using the same method. NOTE In some cases in this tutorial. under Available fields. Create a room schedule 1 In the Project Browser. The wider column makes it easier to read the door descriptions. TIP If the View tab of the Design Bar is not active. and click View.

enter Corridor. for Name. enter Building Entry. select Storage. The bold header is not noticeable until you place the schedule on a drawing sheet.NOTE The Appearance settings only take effect when the schedule is placed on a drawing sheet. click New. The rooms are displayed at the bottom of the list and numbered sequentially. For 105. enter Storage. Add new rooms to the schedule 9 On the Options Bar. 11 Using the same method. next to Rows. For 102. 12 Edit the room names in the schedule: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ In the schedule. A new row is displayed at the bottom of the schedule. and press ENTER. select Corridor. and press ENTER. and press ENTER. 10 Edit the number to be 101. for room 101. add 5 more rooms. For 104. and the Level and Area values are displayed as Not Placed because the room is not placed in the floor plan. The room Number is U17-9. 101-106. 182 | Chapter 4 Tagging and Scheduling . For 103.

place rooms from a program list. In the Lines field. Under Custom colors.rvt. click the bright green swatch. you add room separation lines. click the Color field.■ For 106. and press ENTER. and click OK. Specify style for room separation lines 1 In the Project Browser. Scheduling Rooms from a Program List | 183 . 6 On the Room and Area tab of the Design Bar. click the Lines field. Dataset Continue using the dataset you saved in the previous exercise. double-click Level 1. In the Line Graphics dialog. and click OK. enter Stair. For Room Separation. expand Lines. click Override. You also change the bounding behavior of walls in the storage areas of the plan. under Floor Plans. 13 Click File menu ➤ Save. ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ 4 Click OK. click Room Separation. and modify room names. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Schedules-Color Diagrams_in_progress. Scheduling Rooms from a Program List In this exercise. Add room separation lines 5 Zoom in to the center of the building. 2 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. 3 Change the display of room separation lines: ■ In the Model Categories tab of the Visibility/Graphics dialog. under Projection/Surface. select 9. For Weight. under Visibility/Graphics Overrides.

draw the horizontal line. click Room. 8 On the Design Bar. Place rooms from a program list 9 On the Design Bar.7 Click to add 2 room separation lines to the right side of the drawing in the corridor. First. click Modify. 184 | Chapter 4 Tagging and Scheduling . Draw a vertical separation line from the wall endpoint to the new corridor separation line.

enter 2400 mm.Placed rooms are indicated with a crosshair graphic in the drawing. 11 Click to place the room in the newly-defined entry area (lower-right). select 101 Building Entry. Scheduling Rooms from a Program List | 185 . for Room. select 102 Storage. for Room. 13 For Offset. 10 On the Options Bar. 12 On the Options Bar.

14 Click to place the room in the area to the left of Building Entry. Place 106 in the space with the stairs. Notice the area values for the Storage rooms in the schedule. These values will change after you change the room bounding behavior of walls in the storage areas. Change the room bounding behavior of walls 17 In the Project Browser. 186 | Chapter 4 Tagging and Scheduling . double-click Level 1. double-click Room Schedule. 16 On the Design Bar. as shown: ■ ■ ■ ■ Place 103 in the space above room 101. and zoom in to the Corridor. 18 In the Project Browser. under Schedules/Quantities. click Modify. Place 105 in the lower space to the left of the kitchen. 15 Use the same method to place the following rooms. under Floor Plans. Place 104 in the space to the left of 103.

clear Room Bounding. 26 Select Schedule keys. click Schedule/Quantities. under Constraints. and click OK. Create key schedule 24 On the View tab of the Design Bar. Scheduling Rooms from a Program List | 187 . Floor Finish. 21 In the Element Properties dialog. select Rooms. under Available fields. and for all 3 finishes. and Wall Finish. double-click Room Schedule. 23 In the Project Browser. 22 On the Design Bar. 28 Click OK to create the new room style schedule. select the 3 small walls (in the 2 storage areas). 27 In the Schedule Properties dialog. enter As Selected. 25 In the New Schedule dialog. as shown: 20 On the Options Bar. while pressing CTRL. The Room Style Schedule displays without data. and click Add. click Modify. select Base Finish. 30 For Key Name. click (Properties). under Category.19 While pressing CTRL. Notice that the area for the storage rooms has increased as a result of the change in the room bounding behavior of the walls. enter Units. click New to add a new row. and click OK. 29 On the Options Bar.

select Rooms. and click OK. 32 In the Project Browser. 41 On the Options Bar. right-click Room Schedule. 37 Under U17-8. 34 In the Schedule Properties dialog. All rooms are selected in the floor plan. and click Add. 35 Click OK twice. select Units. 42 In the Filter dialog. and click Properties. 40 Draw a selection box around floor plan. under Floor Plans. Zoom flyout. The Room Style column is added to the Room Schedule. for Available fields. under Schedules/Quantities. add 2 more key names: Service and Public.31 Using the same method. for Room Style. 39 On the View toolbar. under Other. 33 In the Element Properties dialog. click Room Style. 188 | Chapter 4 Tagging and Scheduling . double-click Level 1. Specify the Room Style for Level 1 rooms 38 In the Project Browser. double-click Room Schedule. click (Filter Selection). click Check None. click Edit. for Fields. click Zoom To Fit. 36 In the Project Browser.

44 In the Element Properties dialog. The Room Style specification will be used later to determine color fill in a room color diagram. 11 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog. enter Room Type. under Identity Data. 10 In the Element Properties dialog. click (Duplicate). Create a room color scheme 1 In the Project Browser. 7 Since you are creating a new color scheme. and click OK. double-click Room Schedule. Creating a Room Color Diagram In this exercise. right-click Level 1. 45 In the Project Browser. Creating a Room Color Diagram | 189 . and apply it to the Level 1 view. 103. and double-click Level 1. enter Room Type. click the Color Scheme field. select Service. click OK. click (Properties). All rooms on Level 1 now have the room style defined. at the warning prompt. 47 Click File menu ➤ Save. 2 Click Settings menu ➤ Color Fill Schemes. under Floor Plans. For rooms 102 and 105. and 106. select Room Type. 3 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog. under Views (all). select Units. under Schedules/Quantities. and click Properties. 104. 8 Click OK. you create a room color scheme (based on the type of the rooms in the floor plan). m_Freighthouse_Flats-Schedules-Color Diagrams_in_progress. and click OK. 5 For Title. for Name. select Public. 46 Edit the Room Style for rooms 101 through 106: ■ ■ For rooms 101. You also edit the colors used in the color scheme and modify the properties of the color scheme legend. 9 In the Project Browser. Dataset Continue using the dataset you saved in the previous exercise. 6 For Color. for Room Style.43 On the Options Bar. select Room Style. 4 In the New Color Scheme dialog. Notice that the Room Style is Units for all rooms on Level 1. and click OK. expand Floor Plans.rvt.

16 On the Design Bar. 15 Click in the lower right of the drawing area to place the legend. 18 On the Options Bar. and click OK. select the color legend. and clear Room Separation. 13 In the Visibility/Graphics Overrides dialog. 21 In the second row of the table (Public). and click OK twice. click Edit Color Scheme. select blue. 19 In the first row of the Scheme Definition table (none). A legend displays at the tip of the cursor. 20 In the Options panel at the bottom of the dialog. 190 | Chapter 4 Tagging and Scheduling . click Edit. expand Lines. under Custom color. Change the fill colors applied to the rooms 17 In the drawing area. Add a color scheme legend 14 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. click the value in the Color column. click Color Scheme Legend. click Modify. clear Visible. for Display Color Fill in. 22 In the Color dialog.12 For Visibility/Graphics Overrides. select Foreground.

for Swatch Width. enter 5 mm. for Size. Specify properties for the legend colors and title 25 With the legend still selected. click 26 In the Element Properties dialog. enter 25 mm. on the Options Bar. (Properties). Creating a Room Color Diagram | 191 . 27 In the Type Properties dialog. 28 Under Title Text. 24 Click OK.23 Use the same method to change the colors for Service and Units to cyan and gray respectively. and click OK twice. under Graphics. click Edit/New.

You learn to change the roof family type and create a material takeoff schedule for the roofing materials. you have already determined the roof configuration for the building.29 On the Design Bar. Creating a Material Takeoff In this exercise. click Modify. 2 Zoom in to the roof area of the building. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Schedules-Color Diagrams_in_progress. You then add formulas to the material takeoff to produce cost estimates.rvt. double-click {3D}. 192 | Chapter 4 Tagging and Scheduling . 30 Click File menu ➤ Save. Create a material takeoff 1 In the Project Browser. Dataset Continue using the dataset you saved in the previous exercise. under 3D Views.

5 On the Design Bar. 4 In the Type Selector. 9 Using the same method. click Modify. 11 Click the Formatting tab. select Family and Type. Select Grand totals. select Calculate totals. select Material: Area. Under Field formatting.Insulation on Plywood Deck . The Roof Materials Takeoff Schedule displays. 10 Click the Sorting/Grouping tab. select Basic Roof : Wood Joist . 12 Click OK. 13 Expand the column widths to see all of the information. Creating a Material Takeoff | 193 . and specify the following values: ■ ■ ■ ■ For Sort by. under Category. under Available fields. For Then by. and click OK.EPDM. select Material: Description. click Family and Type. 8 On the Fields tab of the Material Takeoff Properties dialog.3 While pressing CTRL. 6 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Material Takeoff. select Roofs. add Material: Description and Material: Area to the Scheduled fields. and specify the following values: ■ ■ Under Fields. 7 In the New Material Takeoff dialog. Clear Itemize every instance. and click Add. select the roof of the building and the smaller roof for the elevator penthouse.

23 In the Material Takeoff.80 5. right-click Roof Material Takeoff. for Fields. The /(1000mm^2) is required to remove the formatting of the fields so the cost estimate value can be calculated. enter Estimated Cost. for Name. and under Fields. 194 | Chapter 4 Tagging and Scheduling . 19 For Formula. under Other. 24 In the Project Browser. enter Material: Area*Material: Cost /(1000mm^2). and click Properties. select Calculate totals. 20 Click OK. enter the following values: Material: Description EPDM Plywood Rigid Insulation Wood Joist Value 16 13. 15 In the Element Properties dialog. and click Add.40 50. right-click Roof Material Takeoff. 22 For Field formatting. 21 Click the Formatting tab. click Material: Cost. 17 Click Calculated Value. and click OK twice. click Estimated Cost.TIP Double-click the column dividers to expand the columns to fit the text. click Edit.35 The Estimated cost is calculated. 16 In the Material Takeoff Properties dialog. 18 In the Calculated Value dialog. under Available fields. and click Properties. for the Material: Cost field. Add cost information and a formula to calculate estimated cost 14 In the Project Browser.

Scheduling Shared Parameters | 195 .25 In the Element Properties dialog. you create an exiting plan for the building. Creating a Shared Parameter File In this exercise. under Fields. Dataset ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. In the left pane of the Open dialog. either within family components or within the project template. and specify the following: ■ ■ ■ Clear Use default settings. and are defined and stored in an external file. ensuring consistency across families and projects. you learn how to use shared parameters to define additional parameters that are not included in predefined instance and type parameters. click Edit. and reporting the shared parameters. These shared parameters can be added to any family. For Units. You draw a travel path line. adding the shared parameters to a family. creating a generic tag to tag the family. click Estimated Cost. you create a shared parameter file. and open Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Shared Parameters. tag the line. for Formatting. and schedule the total distance of each path. Their values may also be aggregated and reported within Revit Architecture multi-category schedules. In this lesson.rvt. select Fixed. select 2 decimal places. 29 Click File menu ➤ Save. click Training Files. This lesson demonstrates the solution for this situation and covers the process of setting up shared parameters. regardless of category. Scheduling Shared Parameters In this lesson. 28 Click OK 3 times. 27 Click Field Format. 26 On the Formatting tab of the Material Takeoff Properties dialog. An example of the use of shared parameters is the need to add specific parameters to a family component for scheduling and tagging when those parameters are not present by default. Adding shared parameters to a family allows you to create a tag and schedule to track this specific information. For Rounding.

5 In the Edit Shared Parameters dialog. click Create. click New. and click OK. for File name. 3 In the Edit Shared Parameters dialog. Adding Shared Parameters to a Family In this exercise. click New. click Training Files.rvt. and click Save. 4 In the left pane of the Save As dialog. 2 Click File menu ➤ Shared Parameters. for Name. Dataset Continue using the dataset you saved in the previous exercise. 12 Click File menu ➤ Save As. under Groups. and click OK. 10 In the Parameter Properties dialog. under Floor Plans. enter Path ID.txt. click New. NOTE Shared parameter files are typically stored at a network location for use in all projects. for Name. and click OK.rvt. for Type of Parameter. enter Exiting. enter Travel Distance. you add the shared parameters you created to a family file. for Name. select Length. enter OfficeStandardsParameters. 1 Click File menu ➤ Open. 9 Under Parameters. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Schedules-Shared Parameters_in_progress. You then create a generic tag to tag the family. double-click Exiting Plan-Level 1. 8 In the Parameter Properties dialog. 7 Under Parameters. and save the exercise file as m_Freighthouse_Flats-Shared Parameters_in_progress. 11 Click OK. 196 | Chapter 4 Tagging and Scheduling .1 In the Project Browser. 6 In the New Parameter Group dialog.

group it under Dimensions. otherwise the family loads into the current project. select Shared parameter. and click OK. 11 In the Family Types dialog. click Add. under Dimensions. 3 On the Design Bar. click Load into Projects. 10 Use the same method to add Travel Distance as a shared parameter. 9 In the Family Types dialog. Adding Shared Parameters to a Family | 197 . and open Metric\Families\Annotations\M_Travel Line. Click Training Files. verify that Parameter group is Exiting and that Path ID is selected. and click OK. and click Select.2 In the Left pane of the Open dialog. 8 Select Instance. click Family Types. for Travel Distance Formula. under Parameters. select Constraints. 12 Click Apply. and click OK. Create a tag using shared parameters 15 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Annotation Symbol. 6 In the Shared Parameters dialog. If you have multiple projects open. The Family Types dialog displays the parameters that are currently available for this family category. 4 In the Family Types dialog. in the Load into Projects dialog. enter Length. 7 For Group parameter under. 13 On the Design Bar.rfa. and click OK. following the equals symbol (=). select m_Freighthouse_Flats-Shared Parameters_in_progress.rvt. click Add. 5 In the Parameter Properties dialog. and select Instance. 14 If necessary. under Parameters. the Load into Projects dialog displays for you to select the project.

19 On the Design Bar. and open Metric\Templates\M_Generic Tag. select Travel Distance. 26 On the Design Bar. click Select. and click OK 3 times. 25 Click above the intersection of the reference planes. 17 Select Generic Tag. and use the same method to select the Path ID parameter. 23 In the Shared Parameters dialog. click Add. and click Open.rft. 20 Click the intersection of the reference planes in the drawing window to display the Select Parameter dialog. 22 In the Parameter Properties dialog.16 In the left pane of the Open dialog. 18 Zoom in to the intersection of the reference planes. click Label. under Parameters.rft. click Training Files. click Modify. 198 | Chapter 4 Tagging and Scheduling . 24 On the Design Bar. 21 In the Select Parameter dialog. click Label.

Tagging. you place the travel line family in the Level 1 and Level 2 exiting plans. 32 On the Load into Projects dialog. Create Level 1 exiting travel path 1 In the Project Browser. 31 On the Design Bar. and Scheduling a Family with Shared Parameters | 199 . Dataset Continue using the dataset you saved in the previous exercise. Placing. You then tag the travel lines and give them a path ID. click Load into Projects. and Scheduling a Family with Shared Parameters In this exercise. double-click Exiting Plan . and click OK.Tagging. After the lines are tagged. 33 Click File menu ➤ Save. 30 In the Save As dialog. under Floor Plans. Placing. so that it is positioned just above Travel Distance.27 In the drawing window. for File Name.rvt is selected. select Path ID. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Schedules-Shared Parameters_in_progress. and press DELETE.rfa. verify that m_Freighthouse_Flats-Shared Parameters_in_Progress. and click Save. and move it down. enter M_Travel Distance Tag. 29 Click File ➤ Save As.rvt. 28 Select the Note in the upper-left area of the drawing window. you create a schedule that totals the travel distances in each exiting plan for each path ID.Level 1.

above the exterior door as shown. and click in the center of the corridor. click Component. 6 Move the cursor to the right. 5 Specify a start point for the path at the left end of the corridor as shown. 200 | Chapter 4 Tagging and Scheduling . 4 On the Options Bar. 3 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. select Chain.2 Zoom in to the corridor.

select the 2 dashed travel lines. under Constraints. 11 Select each of the travel path lines. and click OK.7 Move the cursor down. 9 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. enter 1-1. under Floor Plans. Placing. double click Exiting Plan . 17 On the Options Bar.Tagging. click Modify. click Modify. verify that Chain is selected. click Tag ➤ By Category. for Path ID. clear Leader. and Scheduling a Family with Shared Parameters | 201 .Level 2. 13 While pressing CTRL. and click outside of the building. Create Level 2 exiting travel path 15 In the Project Browser. 8 On the Design Bar. through the door. 12 On the Design Bar. 10 On the Options Bar. 14 In the Element Properties dialog. click Component. 16 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. and click (Properties).

18 Click in the horizontal corridor below the door on the right side of the floor plan. and click. and click to specify the first segment of the path as shown. 22 Click at the center starting point. click Modify. 202 | Chapter 4 Tagging and Scheduling . move the cursor near the right corner. move the cursor to the left. 19 Move the cursor up through the door. 21 On the Design Bar. and click above the door to the stair. click Component. 20 On the Design Bar.

enter Level 1 Exit Distance. Placing. for Path ID. and click 29 In the Element Properties dialog. verify that <Multi-Category> is selected. click Modify. 33 For Name. click Tag ➤ By Category. enter 2-1. 27 On the Design Bar. (Properties). and click OK. under Category.Tagging. click Modify. 32 In the New Schedule dialog. Create a schedule to total the paths on each plan 31 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Schedule/Quantities. 30 Use the same method to specify the Path ID for the right exit path to 2-2. and Scheduling a Family with Shared Parameters | 203 . 25 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. 24 On the Design Bar.23 Move the cursor down. 26 Select each of the travel path lines. and click OK. select the 2 dashed travel lines for the left exit path. under Constraints. 28 While pressing CTRL. and click in the stair.

and click Add. in the third field. select Travel Distance. 39 Clear Itemize every instance. and under Field formatting. while pressing CTRL. The Level 1 Exit Distance schedule displays. 47 In the Element Properties dialog.34 On the Fields tab of the Schedule Properties dialog. under Available fields. and open Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Uni-Format. select Path ID. 36 For Filter by. enter 2-. right-click Level 1 Exit Distance. 48 In the Schedule Properties dialog. 44 In the Project Browser. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. Scheduling Uniformat Assembly Codes In this lesson. 42 Click OK. Dataset ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. click Schedule/Quantities. 35 Click the Filter tab. Scheduling Uniformat Assembly Codes and Descriptions In this exercise. for Filter by. right-click Copy of Level 1 Exit Distance.rvt. for Filter. select Path ID. The Level 2 Exit Distance schedule displays. select Calculate Totals. you create a wall schedule that includes columns for the Uniformat Assembly Codes and assembly descriptions of the scheduled walls. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 49 Click File menu ➤ Save. select contains. 40 Click the Formatting tab. under Other. Create a wall schedule 1 On the View tab of the Design Bar. and click Rename. click Edit. click Training Files. 204 | Chapter 4 Tagging and Scheduling . select Path ID and Travel Distance. enter 1-. right-click Level 2 Exit Distance. in the first field. 38 For Sort by. and click Properties. and click OK. and click View. 43 In the Project Browser. TIP If the View tab of the Design Bar is not active. 41 Under Fields. enter Level 2 Exit Distance. under Schedules/Quantities. and click OK twice. 45 In the Rename View dialog. and in the third field. 37 Click the Sorting/Grouping tab. 46 In the Project Browser. in the second field. right-click the Design Bar. you schedule Uniformat Assembly Codes as they are applied to Revit Architecture components.

select Walls.Drywall w/ Metal Stud. and click Add to add them to the schedule in order: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Area Volume Width Length Assembly Code Assembly Description 5 Click OK to complete the schedule. and click Properties. Assign an assembly code to a wall type in the project 6 In the Project Browser. and click the browse button. select the following fields. Scheduling Uniformat Assembly Codes and Descriptions | 205 . for Assembly Code.2 In the New Schedules dialog. 8 In the Choose Assembly Code dialog.Fixed Partitions. 3 In the Schedule Properties dialog. click the Fields tab.Interior Construction\C1010 Partitions\C1010100 . expand C . under Categories. expand Families\Walls\Basic Wall. click C1010145 . and click OK. right-click Generic .152 mm. click the Value field.Partitions .Interiors\C10 . and click OK twice. 7 In the Type Properties dialog. 4 Under Available fields.

6 Click Finish. click Create. and click Next. 2 In the Select Data Source dialog. Dataset ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. The process that you use to export the database is similar for any other ODBC-compliant database.9 In the schedule. click Export ➤ ODBC Database. and click OK to create the database. and open Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Uni-Format. 12 Click OK in the remaining dialogs. click OK. expand the Assembly Description column to see the description. you learn how to export project information into a Microsoft® Access 2000 database. 5 Enter RevitDSN for the name of the DSN. select a location for the database file. Additionally. 206 | Chapter 4 Tagging and Scheduling . click the File Data Source tab. and open the database in Microsoft Access. 9 Under Directories. 10 Close the exercise file. you learn how to export project information to an ODBC (Open DataBase Connectivity) compatible database.rvt. under Database Name. 11 In the OBDC Microsoft Access Setup dialog. click OK in the dialog. Revit Architecture creates 2 tables for the following categories of elements (see below): one that lists all of the element instances in a project and one that lists all of the element types in a project. enter Revit_Project. and click Next.mdb for Database Name. 4 In the Create New Data Source dialog. click Training Files. 7 In the ODBC Microsoft Access Setup dialog. 10 When the confirmation displays. Exporting Project Information with ODBC In this lesson. 1 On the File menu. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 3 Click New. under Database. tables that list instances only are created for levels and rooms because these categories do not have types. select the Microsoft Access driver (*mdb). Exporting Schedule Information to Microsoft Access In this exercise. 8 In the New Database dialog.

13 Close the exercise file. in addition to the Id column. This table contains one row for each Uniformat Assembly Code. instance tables include a TypeId column containing the ID of the instance’s type. The table of types includes an Assembly Code column that references the Assembly Codes table. The exported columns are the same as the columns in the key schedule. In addition to the tables for instances and types in a category. a table is also created for each key schedule in a project. as long as the category is one of the categories that Revit Architecture exports. Elements IDs are also used to establish relationships between elements in different tables. which is used for choosing one of the keys from the key schedule. For example. so that each table of elements includes an Id column. Each key schedule gives elements in its category a new parameter. These parameters are also exported and contain the ID of the key element. and some instance tables include a RoomId column containing the ID of the room that the instance is in. Exporting Schedule Information to Microsoft Access | 207 . The columns of the table are Assembly Code and Assembly Description.A unique element ID is used to identify exported elements. One final table is also exported: Assembly Codes.

208 | Chapter 4 Tagging and Scheduling .

209 .Annotating and Dimensioning 5 In this tutorial. and how to annotate and dimension your Revit Architecture 2008 projects. you learn how to change the base elevation of a project.

You can change the base elevation without changing the elevation value of every other level in the project. you learn how to relocate the base elevation of a project. You accomplish this in Revit Architecture by defining levels as either project or shared levels. or you can change the base elevation and add its value to the levels above it.Changing the Base Elevation of a Project In this lesson. as the base elevation of most projects is rarely at 0 mm. Project levels report elevation relative to other levels in the project 210 | Chapter 5 Annotating and Dimensioning .

Relocating a Project | 211 . Dataset ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open.Relocating a Project In this exercise. you relocate the base elevation of a building from 0 m to 10000 m. and open m_Freighthouse_Flats-Anno_Dim. click Training Files. the height of the elevations above Level 1 report height relative to Level 1.rvt. After you define the building levels as shared and relocate the project. In the left pane of the Open dialog.

enter8 mm Head . However. 8 Select the Level 1 line. and you create a new shared level type for only Level 1. By selecting the Level 1 line. By entering 10000 mm in this step. to better demonstrate how shared levels work. Under Constraints. In order for the levels to report height relative to the new base elevation after the project is relocated. 2 Select the Level 1 line to display it as red. you specify the new location of the project.Shared Elevation. the parameter for all the levels in the project would change. you specify the point (0 mm) from which you want to relocate the project. click Edit/New. The south elevation is displayed. so changing the height Level 1 would change it only in relation to the other levels in the project. The base elevation now reads 10000 mm. In the Name dialog. for Elevation Base. select Shared.Define Level 1 as a shared level 1 In the Project Browser. 5 In the Type Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ Click Duplicate. you must set the Elevation Base parameter to Shared. 212 | Chapter 5 Annotating and Dimensioning . 9 Move the cursor above the elevation line. and double-click South. expand Elevations (Building Elevation). The elevation of the other levels remains the same. enter 10000 mm. and click OK. The levels in the project are not shared. 10 On the View menu. 3 On the Options Bar. click (Properties). expand Views (all). click Zoom ➤ Zoom All To Fit. and press ENTER. If you did that now. only the Elevation Base parameter of Level 1 is shared at this time. Relocate the project 7 Click Tools menu ➤ Project Position/Orientation ➤ Relocate this Project. 4 In the Element Properties dialog. 6 Click OK twice. Level 1 displays an elevation value of 0 mm.

double-click North. click Modify. 14 In the Project Browser.Define the remaining project levels as shared 11 Select the Loft level line. as well as other views of the building model. The changes in elevation have propagated to this view. 12 In the Type Selector. The reported value of the Loft level changes to take the new base elevation value into consideration. under Elevations. 13 On the Design Bar. select Level : 8 mm Head . Relocating a Project | 213 .Shared Elevation.

click Modify. and the Roof Plan level.Shared Elevation.15 Define the remaining levels as shared: ■ ■ ■ Press and hold CTRL. select Level : 8 mm Head . 214 | Chapter 5 Annotating and Dimensioning . In the Type Selector. All the building levels now report elevations relative to the base elevation. the Penthouse level. and select Levels 2-4. On the Design Bar.

there are 2 types of dimensions: temporary and permanent.16 If you want to save your changes. radial. 17 Proceed to the next lesson. Dimensioning In this lesson. Permanent dimensions must be explicitly created. click File menu ➤ Save As. you learn how to use dimensioning tools and constraints in Revit Architecture to dimension and space planter boxes on the north side of the building. In this case. Creating Dimensions In this exercise. Dimensioning | 215 . expand Views (all). except when you sketch profiles to complete families. although you must turn on their visibility to view them. and save the exercise file with a unique name.rvt Place an overall linear dimension 1 In the Project Browser. and learn to work with dimensioning constraints to control placement of elements in the model. Temporary dimensions display automatically when you create and insert components. “Dimensioning” on page 215. In Revit Architecture. Linear and multi-segmented dimensions Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. permanent dimensions are created automatically. multi-segmented. Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Anno_Dim. expand Floor Plans. and double-click Level 1. and angular dimensions. you learn how to create permanent dimensions to control and document your building models. You place linear.

By default. snap to wall centerlines. click Dimension. dimensions are aligned. The default dimensioning options display on the Options Bar.2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. and when a green dashed line displays along the left side of the curtain. select it. and are created by selecting individual reference points. select it. 216 | Chapter 5 Annotating and Dimensioning . 3 Move the cursor over the curtain wall on the top left side of the view. 4 Move the cursor over the curtain wall on the top right side of the view. and when a green dashed line displays along the right side of the curtain wall.

Creating Dimensions | 217 . The lock displays as locked. Only aligned and angular permanent dimensions can be constrained in this way.5 Move the cursor above the view. 6 Click the lock that displays on the dimension string to lock the dimension. 7 On the Design Bar. and click to place the dimension. click Modify. indicating that you cannot change the distance between the curtain walls without first unlocking the dimension. click Dimension. Place a multi-segmented dimension 8 On the Design Bar.

and move the cursor over the left endpoint of the first planter to the right. above the plan view of the building. and select its left exterior face. 11 Using the same method. select the right endpoint of the planter. 15 Move the cursor to the right. but below the first dimension that you placed. 16 After you select the reference points on the final planter. 12 13 On the Options Bar.9 Select the left side of the left curtain wall as you did in a previous step. for Prefer. and select it. and continue to select the endpoints and faces of the planters. 17 Move the cursor up. select Wall Faces. Make the dimension segments equal to space the planters at equal distances 18 With the multi-segmented dimension selected. select the right side of the curtain wall. 218 | Chapter 5 Annotating and Dimensioning . 14 Move the cursor to the planter on the right. 10 Press TAB until the left endpoint of the planter displays. click to make all the dimension segments equal and reposition the planters equal distances apart from one another. and click to place the multi-segmented dimension.

and specify a point to place the dimension. 24 Move the cursor outside the wall. and select it. click Modify. 22 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Click (Radial). 26 Select the radial dimension. Creating Dimensions | 219 . For Prefer. 25 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. suffix 20 Zoom to the planter between grid lines 3 and 4. select Wall faces. click Modify. 21 On the Design Bar. click Dimension. 27 Select the blue square grip that displays under the dimension value and drag it slightly up and to the right. Place a radial dimension with a Typ. 23 Move the cursor over the left exterior curved face of the planter until it highlights.19 On the Basics tab.

220 | Chapter 5 Annotating and Dimensioning . 32 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 33 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Click (Angular). click Modify. For Prefer. click Dimension.. for Suffix. enter Typ.28 With the dimension still selected. 34 Select the horizontal line. 29 In the Element Properties dialog. verify Wall faces is selected. 30 On the Basics tab. Place an angular dimension 31 Zoom to the planter near grid line 5. click (Properties). and click OK. on the Options Bar.

38 Proceed to the next exercise. instead of the wall and each individual opening reference point. and click to place the dimension. 36 Move the cursor to the left to resize the dimension arc. This automatic dimensioning option provides a convenient way to quickly dimension walls with multiple openings. you learn to automatically dimension a linear wall and its openings (windows) on the Level 3 floor plan of the building. 37 On the Basics tab. Creating Automatic Wall Dimensions | 221 . you select only the wall. click Modify.This line is the edge of a mass that represents the neighboring building. Creating Automatic Wall Dimensions In this exercise. When you dimension the wall. “Creating Automatic Wall Dimensions” on page 221. 35 Select the left exterior face of the planter.

Click Options. select Openings. Click OK. 222 | Chapter 5 Annotating and Dimensioning . and select Widths. 3 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ ■ For Prefer.rvt Open the Level 3 floor plan view 1 In the Project Browser. expand Views (all). and double-click Level 3. For Pick. expand Floor Plans. and that the opening widths are referenced in the overall dimension string. You will dimension the short bottom horizontal wall that includes 3 windows. select Wall centerlines. Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Anno_Dim. Select automatic dimensioning options 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. click Dimension. select Entire Walls.Automatic wall dimension Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. These options ensure that the wall dimension includes the openings. 4 In the Automatic Dimension Options dialog: ■ ■ Under Select References.

where the witness lines referring to interior walls would be located on the centerline of each wall. 6 Move the cursor down below the plan view. Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Anno_Dim. in some cases. and click to place the automatic dimension string. for a multi-segmented dimension. 2 Zoom to the planter on which you placed a radial dimension.Place the dimension 5 Select the bottom exterior wall.rvt Override default dimension witness lines 1 In the Project Browser. you specify their origin on the Options Bar. Controlling Witness Lines | 223 . you learn to override dimension witness line settings as you place dimensions. click Modify. and learn how to change the location of witness lines after you place dimensions. 7 On the Basics tab. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. For example. When you place dimensions. expand Floor Plans. Controlling Witness Lines In this exercise. However. 8 Proceed to the next exercise. expand Views (all). you may want to locate the two outermost witness lines on the exterior face of each wall. “Controlling Witness Lines” on page 223. you may need to override their settings on an instance basis. and double-click Level 1.

3 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. select the right edge of the planter. 4 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ For Prefer. click Dimension. move the cursor down. and select it. 224 | Chapter 5 Annotating and Dimensioning . 7 Using the same method. and click to place the dimension. verify Wall centerlines is selected. 5 Move the cursor over the left side of the planter. select Individual References. For Pick. 6 Press TAB to cycle through the selection options until the left face of the planter highlights.

9 Press TAB until the bottom left endpoint is highlighted. 11 Move the cursor down. and select it.8 Move the cursor over the bottom of the planter on which you placed the angular dimension. 10 Using the same method. Controlling Witness Lines | 225 . and specify a point to place the dimension. select the bottom right endpoint.

select it. click Modify. 15 Moving the cursor to the right. 14 Move the cursor over the left partition wall in the top left corner of the plan. 226 | Chapter 5 Annotating and Dimensioning . 13 On the Options Bar.Dimension the partition walls to center lines 12 On the Basics tab. select Wall centerlines. and click to place the dimension. Adjust the witness line location on the end dimensions to align them to the faces of wall 17 Select the dimension that you just placed. 18 Press and hold SHIFT. for Prefer. and when the wall centerline highlights. select the green grip that displays in the middle of the tick mark. click Dimension. 16 On the Design Bar. and zoom in on the right end of the dimension. select the centerline of each of the 6 remaining partition walls. and drag the dimension down the wall.

you change the Creating an Office Standard Dimension Type from Existing Dimensions | 227 . select the top blue grip and drag it up to create a witness line gap. click Modify. 21 Zoom to the partition wall on the left side of the plan. Creating an Office Standard Dimension Type from Existing Dimensions In this exercise. “Creating an Office Standard Dimension Type from Existing Dimensions” on page 227. you learn how to duplicate the dimension family type of dimension on the floor plan and then modify its parameters to create an office standard dimension style. 22 On the Basics tab. 20 Release SHIFT. create a witness line gap and align the dimension to the outer left face of the wall. and click the blue middle grip until the dimension aligns with the outer face of the partition wall. After you create the new family type.19 Release SHIFT. 23 Proceed to the next exercise. and using the same methods.

2 mm. For Text Font. 228 | Chapter 5 Annotating and Dimensioning . 4 In the Type Properties dialog. for Text Size.dimension tick mark. select CityBlueprint. 3 In the Element Properties dialog. Modify the parameters of the new Office Standard type 6 In the Type Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Graphics. select Arrow 30 Degree. zoom to the planter between grid lines 3 and 4. and click OK. Under Text. Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Anno_Dim.rvt Duplicate an existing dimension type 1 On the Level 1 floor plan. and select the lower dimension. and text size parameters to create dimensions that better conform to your office standards. 5 In the Name dialog. for Tick Mark. enter 3. text font. Angular and linear dimensions with office standard text and arrows Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. enter Office Standard. click Edit/New. click Duplicate. 2 Click (Properties).

NOTE Fonts that are available in this list are the Windows fonts installed on your system. The dimension that you selected previously now displays the new Office Standard family type. 7 On the Basics tab. and select the bottom dimension. click Modify. If CityBlueprint does not display in the list. ■ Click OK twice. 10 On the Basics tab. select Linear Dimension Style: Office Standard. click Modify. select another font. 9 In the Type Selector. Creating an Office Standard Dimension Type from Existing Dimensions | 229 . 8 Move the cursor to the planter on the right.

Creating Text Annotation In this lesson. 230 | Chapter 5 Annotating and Dimensioning . 12 Proceed to the next lesson. select the angular dimension on the planter. create a new angular dimension type. You learn how to change the text font and size of text notes. You create a new office standard text note type by duplicating the family type of a note on the floor plan. and how to add leaders to the text notes. and modify it to use the office standard parameters. “Creating Text Annotation” on page 230.11 Using the same method. you add text notes on the Level 1 floor plan of the building.

4 Move the cursor above grid line 4.Adding Text Notes to the Floor Plan In this exercise. Adding Text Notes to the Floor Plan | 231 . but below the upper dimension string. 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise.rvt Add a text note 1 On the Level 1 floor plan. you add text notes to the Level 1 floor plan. zoom to planter near grid line 5. click Text. 3 On the Options Bar. click (None). for Leader. Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Anno_Dim. and click and drag to create a text box.

select Arc Leaders. for Text Size. 11 Under Text. under Graphics.5 In the text box. and click OK. You may have to move the text box to avoid overlapping other elements on the floor plan. If so. 8 In the Element Properties dialog box. Create a new text note family type by duplicating the existing type 6 On the Design Bar. and click . enter 6 mm Arial Notes. enter 6 mm. 232 | Chapter 5 Annotating and Dimensioning . 10 In the Name dialog box. click Modify. 7 Select the text box. 12 In the Element Properties dialog. enter EXISTING BUILDING. select and drag the top left blue symbol to relocate the text box. click Edit/New. and click OK. click Duplicate. and click OK. 9 In the Type Properties dialog.

17 On the Options Bar: ■ Click (Add Right Arc Leader). A downward pointing leader displays on the right side of the Planting Bed text box. 14 Create another text box to the right of grid line 4.Create a text box with leaders 13 On the Design Bar. click Modify. 15 On the Design Bar. 16 Select the Planting Bed text box. click Text. Adding Text Notes to the Floor Plan | 233 . and enter Planting Bed.

for Leader Arrowhead. click Modify. enter Standard Notes.■ Click (Add Left Arc Leader). 19 Select the blue grip at the end of the left leader. 234 | Chapter 5 Annotating and Dimensioning . select CityBlueprint. click Edit/New. 23 In the Type Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ . Under Text. Reposition the leaders 18 Select the blue grip at the end of the right leader. and drag it down to point to the bottom of the planter. 24 On the Design Bar. Click Rename. Another leader displays on the left side of the Planting Bed text box. 21 Select the Planting Bed text box to select both the text and leaders. and drag it down to point to the bottom of the planter. Under Graphics. and click 22 In the Element Properties dialog. Click OK twice. and click OK. for Text font. In the Rename dialog. 20 On the Design Bar. for New. select Arrow 30 Degree. click Modify.

27 On the Options Bar. click to place the text box.Add another note using the Standard Note type 25 On the Design Bar. 28 Click the inside bottom face of the rounded planter near grid line 3. Adding Text Notes to the Floor Plan | 235 . for Leader. over the Planting Bed text. click Text. 26 In the Type Selector. 30 When green dashed lines that indicate it is aligned with the Planting Bed text. 29 Move the cursor up and to the right. select Text: Standard Notes. click (Arc).

and enter 457 mm Conc. Wall. click File menu ➤ Save As. 33 Close the exercise file without saving your changes. 32 If you want to save your changes.31 Click in the text box. 236 | Chapter 5 Annotating and Dimensioning . and save the exercise file with a unique name.

you learn how to create details in Revit Architecture 2008. you use a separate drafting view in which to create the detail. using detail components to represent materials like lumber.Detailing 6 In this tutorial. The "drafted" detail that you create is not parametrically linked to the building model. You can detail directly in a view of the building information model. plywood. These components display at the required scale. For a detail that you do not want to associate with the model. like a standard door header condition. and metal studs. 237 .

region objects. In the callout view. add detail components. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Detailing the View In this exercise. 238 | Chapter 6 Detailing . you trace over the building model geometry. as well as detail lines. click Training Files. After you add components. and open Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Detailing.rvt. In order to detail from the building model.Creating a Detail from a Building Model In this lesson. you must define the view in which you want to create a detail. The detail components that you add to the view are two-dimensional family objects. which means that all detail components. They are also view specific. You load detail components. you add notes and dimensions to the detail view. You define that view by creating a callout view within a section view. and insulation objects. Dataset ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. and use the model as an underlay for the detail. you detail the view of the roof edge. that you add to the view are visible only in this view. and then complete the detail by adding break lines and text notes. you detail the roof overhang of a project building.

enter 406. for Pattern ➤ Detail. 14 In the Type Properties dialog. select Corrugated Metal. Load and place a detail component 4 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar.rfa. You load and place the component so that it is in the project to use in a repeating detail. and click OK. 13 In the Name dialog. 11 In the Element Properties dialog. 15 For Spacing. 10 On the Options Bar. enter Corrugated Metal Siding. and click OK. The roof overhang detail displays. click the bottom of the exterior wall to select the start point. click in the space below the roof overhang to place the component. click Detail Component. 2 Click View menu ➤ View Properties. 17 In the drawing area. Place a repeating detail 9 On the Design Bar. 12 In the Type Properties dialog.Display a detail view 1 In the upper left corner of the building model.5mm. click Training Files. Detailing the View | 239 . for Graphics ➤ Display Model. select As underlay. click Duplicate. click Repeating Detail. navigate to Metric\Families\m_Corrugated Metal. click . 6 In the left pane of the Open dialog. click Yes to load a Detail Items family. click Edit/New. 7 In the drawing area. 5 In the alert dialog. 3 In the Element Properties dialog. double-click the detail callout head. Exact location is not important. 8 Delete the component. and click Open. 16 Click OK twice.

click (Move). Select the endpoint of the geometry of the corrugated metal component as the move start point. and on the Edit toolbar. 20 Move the component end point: ■ ■ ■ Select the corrugated metal component.18 Move the cursor up to generate the graphics for the repeating detail. Specify a point high enough so the siding reaches the underside of the roof overhang. click Load. 19 On the Design Bar. and press DELETE. ■ Click Modify. Select the bottom edge of the roof joist as the move end point. Add lumber detail components 22 On the Design Bar. 23 On the Options Bar. 240 | Chapter 6 Detailing . NOTE The detail component endpoint may not coincide with the geometry extents. click Detail Component. 21 Select the original instance of the corrugated metal component. click Modify.

navigate to Metric\Families\Detail Components\Div 06-Wood and Plastic\06100-Rough Carpentry\06160-Sheathing\M_Plywood-Section. 31 In the Type Selector. and place it in the detail view as shown. TIP You may need to use the Move command to adjust the position of the plywood. and click Open. 28 In the left pane of the Load File as Group dialog.rvt.24 In the left pane of the Open dialog. verify that M_Plywood-Section 19mm is selected. click OK. Because you still have several components to load. Load components as a group 27 Click File menu ➤ Load from Library ➤ Load File as Group. Detailing the View | 241 . 26 Place the plywood component to the right of the metal component as shown in the following illustration. 29 In the Duplicate Types dialog. click Training Files. click Detail Component. select M_Nominal Cut Lumber-Section : 50 x 200mm Nominal. select M_Nominal Cut Lumber-Section : 50 x 150mm Nominal. and click Open.rfa. press SPACEBAR 3 times. 30 On the Design Bar. you load them as a group from a single file. 32 To properly orient the component. click Training Files. 25 In the Type Selector. 33 Click the top right corner of the plywood to select the insertion point. 34 In the Type Selector. navigate to Metric\Families\Detail Components\m_Roof Edge Components.

Add insulation 40 On the Design Bar. 38 Click Modify. The wallboard segment is now on the underside of the roof joist. click Insulation. 242 | Chapter 6 Detailing . select M_Gypsum Wallboard-Section : 16mm. NOTE You can also press SPACEBAR as you place the component to flip the justification.Add wallboard detail component 35 In the Type Selector. and click Modify. 36 On the Options Bar. select Chain. click the Flip instance arrows. 37 Place the wallboard component as shown. 39 Select the horizontal segment.

43 Click Modify. Detailing the View | 243 . select M_Nominal Cut Lumber-Section : 50 x 300mm Nominal. click Detail Component. Add lumber components 45 On the Design Bar. 42 Place 2 segments of insulation. as shown. and on the Edit toolbar. enter 140mm. ■ Click Modify.41 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ For Width. click (Move). 46 In the Type Selector. For Offset. select to near side. Select the left midpoint of the 50 x 200mm component as the move start point. 44 Move the upper segment: ■ ■ ■ Select the upper segment of insulation. 47 Click to place the component at the lower left corner of the roof overhang as shown. Select the right midpoint of the 50 x 200mm component as the move end point.

3 Sketch a detail line from the lower right corner of the 50 x 300mm component to the lower left corner of the 50 x 200mm component. as shown. select M_Rigid Insulation-Section : 63mm. select M_Plywood-Section : 19mm. Adding Detail Lines In this exercise. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. “Adding Detail Lines” on page 244. meaning they display only in this view. 2 In the Type Selector.48 In the Type Selector. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Detailing. 244 | Chapter 6 Detailing . Add rigid insulation 50 In the Type Selector. Add detail lines 1 On the Design Bar. and lock the component. 52 Click Modify.rvt. 49 Place the component directly above the 50 x 200mm component. drag the endpoint up to the top of the 50 x 200mm component. they are view specific. 53 Proceed to the next exercise. click Detail Lines. 51 Add the insulation above the plywood you just placed. 4 Click Modify. select Thin Lines. 5 Select the vertical plywood component. Like detail components. you add lines to your detail.

13 Add detail lines around the 50 x 300mm component. 11 In the Type Selector. Trim and extend the lines as necessary to get the desired result. enter 10mm. 8 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Click (Pick Lines). as shown. select Medium Lines. 7 In the Type Selector. 12 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Click (Pick Lines). 10 On the Design Bar. For Offset. and press ENTER. 9 Select the lines at the top of the 50 x 300mm component and the roof joist. For Offset. as shown. and press ENTER. enter 10mm. click Detail Lines. Adding Detail Lines | 245 .Add offset lines 6 On the Design Bar. select Thin Lines. click Detail Lines.

19 Zoom in to the area where the roof joist and the corrugated metal component abut. click (Draw). 18 In the Type Selector. 17 Draw a horizontal line as shown. 16 On the Options Bar. select Thin Lines. 246 | Chapter 6 Detailing .Draw detail lines 14 On the Options Bar. 15 Draw a small diagonal line at the bottom left corner of the 50 x 300mm component. as shown. draw the detail lines as shown. and clear Chain. select Chain. and draw the detail lines as shown.

When you turn the display model off. click ➤ Hide Crop Region. 24 On the View Control Bar. 26 In the Type Selector. Modify display properties 21 In the drawing area. What remains are the detail components and lines that you added. for Graphics ➤ Display Model. and click OK. and then select the interior edge of the horizontal segment. and press ENTER. right-click. select the Penthouse level line. Adding Detail Lines | 247 . select Do not display. the model elements such as walls and floors no longer display in this view. under Views ➤ Detail Views (Detail). and click Hide in view ➤ Elements. enter 10mm. Add a vapor barrier 25 On the Design Bar. 28 Select the interior edge of the vertical segment of gypsum wallboard. click Detail Lines. right-click Roof Overhang Detail. and click Properties. select Vapor Barrier. 27 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Click (Pick Lines). 22 In the Project Browser. 23 In the Element Properties dialog.20 Move the top horizontal line down so that it overlays the Penthouse level line. For Offset.

“Adding Text Notes” on page 248. select the break line and use the shape handle grips to modify it. press SPACEBAR as necessary. click Detail Component. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise.29 On the Design Bar. 33 If a break line does not completely mask the portion of the detail that it is intended to mask. select M_Break Line. 31 Add break lines at the bottom and the right of the detail. 32 Click Modify. Adding Text Notes In this exercise. 30 In the Type Selector. click Text. 34 Proceed to the next exercise. TIP To rotate the break line as you place it.rvt. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Detailing. Add text notes to the detail 1 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. 248 | Chapter 6 Detailing . you add text notes to complete the detail.

enter Typ. and click OK. click Dimension. and click the left edge of the corrugated metal component. Click again to specify the location of the text box. Enter the text. Click in the drawing area to end the text insertion command. 7 Select the dimension line. 3 Add the leaders and notes as shown: ■ ■ ■ ■ Click in the detail to specify the location of the arrow. 6 Click Modify. 8 In the Element Properties dialog. 5 Click the left outer edge of the 50 x 300mm component. for Text ➤ Suffix.2 On the Options Bar.. Add a dimension to the detail 4 On the Design Bar. and click (Properties). Adding Text Notes | 249 . click (Arc) to create an arced leader.

Keynotes.rvt. and press DELETE. right-click. select all the coping linework. Remove text notes 4 In the drawing area. click Select All Instances. Convert detail lines to components 5 Use a window to select the entire roof detail. while pressing CTRL. and save the exercise file. and selecting the chain. under Views (all) ➤ Detail Views (Detail). 2 Select Copy of Roof Overhang Detail. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Detailing. (Filter Selection). you modify the previously drawn detail so that you can annotate it with keynotes rather than text notes. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise.9 Click File menu ➤ Save. clear Detail Items and Dimensions. 250 | Chapter 6 Detailing . “Creating Detail Components” on page 250. and click OK. 10 Proceed to the next exercise. 3 In the Rename View dialog. enter Roof Overhang Detail . Create a duplicate drawing 1 In the Project Browser. The selected lines need to be replaced with detail components in order for them to accept a keynote. and click Rename. pressing TAB. right-click. click Roof Overhang Detail. and click OK. You can also select all the linework by highlighting a segment. on the Options Bar. select a text note. 7 Click Modify. right-click. Creating Detail Components In this exercise. 8 Zoom in to the metal coping. click 6 In the Filter dialog. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate with Detailing.

clear Detail Items. and click OK. 14 Click Modify. 12 Click Edit menu ➤ Paste from Clipboard. 18 In the Save As dialog. 22 Click Modify. click Load into Projects.9 Click Edit menu ➤ Copy to Clipboard. Creating Detail Components | 251 . and the component can be placed in the detail. While pressing SHIFT. double-click it in the Project Browser. The component family is now part of the roof overhang detail. and click Open. click Training Files. 13 Click the intersection of the reference planes to place the linework. 20 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. click Detail Component. 21 To place the component. The original linework remains selected. navigate to your preferred location. 17 Click File menu ➤ Save As. and click Save. in the Type Selector. deselect any extraneous lines that are also selected. 10 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Family.Keynotes view is not the open view. NOTE If the Roof Overhang Detail . 25 In the Filter dialog. select Medium Lines. for File name. Add components to the detail 19 On the Family tab of the Design Bar. 15 Use a window to select all linework. click . click the bottom left endpoint of the metal coping. 24 On the Options Bar. 23 Using a window. 11 In the left pane of the New dialog. enter Roof Edge.rft. navigate to Metric\Templates\Metric Detail Component. select the coping. 16 Click Modify.

30 In the drawing area. click Load. 29 In the left pane of the Open dialog. 252 | Chapter 6 Detailing . Adding Keynotes In this exercise.rfa. click on the upper end point of the drip edge to place the component. navigate to 07000 ➤ 07200 ➤ 07210 ➤ 07210. In the Keynotes dialog. Add keynotes to components 1 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. and click Open. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise.B5. Click to place the leader arm.rvt. select the rigid insulation as the object to tag. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Detailing. 3 In the left pane of the Open dialog. 2 In the alert dialog. navigate to Metric\Families\Annotations\M_Keynote Tag. delete the underlying linework. 27 On the Design Bar. The underlying linework is deleted and the detail component remains in the drawing.rfa. navigate to Metric\Families\Detail Components\m_Metal Fascia w_Drip Edge. click Detail Component. 31 Using the same method used previously. 4 Add the tag: ■ ■ ■ ■ In the drawing area. “Adding Keynotes” on page 252. and add keynote data to components that do not have data associated with them. and click OK. you place keynotes on objects. click Yes to load a Keynote Tag family to the project. click Keynote ➤ Element. and click Open. 28 On the Options Bar.26 Press DELETE. 32 Proceed to the next exercise. 63mm Rigid Insulation. Click the rigid insulation on the roof to place the tag. click Training Files. click Training Files.

use keynote 07645. For the 19mm Plywood Siding.D11. Because you defined the keynote parameter as part of the component properties. 19mm Plywood.G1.F1. click Edit/New. for Identity Data ➤ Keynote. 13 Tag components: ■ (Properties). use keynote 06110. ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ For the 50 x 300. use keynote 09250. 9 In the Type Properties dialog. click Keynote ➤ Element.C1. Assign keynote parameter to a component 7 In the drawing area. 11 Click OK 3 times. use keynote 06160. Roof Edge4.F1. use keynote 06110. 12 On the Design Bar. Adding Keynotes | 253 .D1. Tag the metal fascia with drip edge. FasciaProfile_1. use keynote 06110. For the metal coping. use keynote 06160. For the 50 x 150.D11. For the 2 instances of the 16mm Gypsum Wallboard.I1. select the metal fascia with drip edge. navigate to 07645. 6 Click Modify. For the 50 x 200. click in the Value column.5 Tag additional components: ■ ■ For the plywood decking. and click 8 In the Element Properties dialog. the keynote is automatically read when you place the tag. 10 In the Keynotes dialog.

using keynote 07460.14 On the Design Bar. enter m_Medium Line Detail Component. 15 In the Type Selector. 254 | Chapter 6 Detailing . 22mm Corrugated Steel . navigate to your preferred location. 9 On the Design Bar. and click Modify. and click Open. 4 In the Type Selector. Create a detail component 1 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Family. for File name. 8 In the Save As dialog. select the left end point of the reference line. “Creating Line-based Detail Components” on page 254. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. 5 In the drawing area. navigate to Metric\Templates\Metric Detail Component line based.A8. 6 Lock the line. 17 Keynote the component.rft. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Detailing. You do this in order to keynote the component. and select the right end point. 18 Save the file.20 Ga. 2 In the left pane of the New dialog. Creating Line-based Detail Components In this exercise. 7 Click File menu ➤ Save As. 19 Proceed to the next exercise.rvt. click Detail Component. click Training Files. and click Save. Convert detail lines to components 10 In the drawing area. 3 On the Family tab of the Design Bar. 16 Place an instance of the component directly on top of the bottom segment of the corrugated metal repeating component. click Load into Projects. select Medium Lines. a repeating detail cannot be keynoted. select Corrugated Metal. click Lines. you convert detail lines to detail components so that you can add keynotes to them. select the horizontal line under the roof overhang as shown.

click in the Value column. Single-Ply Membrane Roofing. navigate to Metric\Families\Detail Components. and click Open. 13 In the Type Selector. Load line-based detail components 21 On the Design Bar.A1. 37 Click OK 3 times. and hidden) used in the view. click Detail Component. click Duplicate. 14 Add the component in the location of the previously deleted horizontal line. click Duplicate. 23 In the left pane of the Open dialog. The deleted line needs to be replaced with a detail component in order for it to accept a keynote. 24 While pressing CTRL. Creating Line-based Detail Components | 255 . select Medium Line Detail Component. 35 In the Type Properties dialog. and click . click Edit/New. 16 Select the component. click the end points at the top of the roof. and m_Light Line Detail Component. 25 Next. m_Invisible Line Detail Component. enter EPDM Membrane. 28 In the Type Selector. 19 In the Name dialog. 18 In the Type Properties dialog. 27 On the Design Bar. navigate to 07000 ➤ 07500 ➤ 07530 ➤ 07530. for Identity Data ➤ Keynote. select m_Hidden Line Detail Component. 15 Click Modify. 30 Click Modify. Add light line components 26 Zoom to the roof overhang. 36 In the Keynotes dialog. 34 In the Name dialog. enter Prefinished Metal Soffit Panel. 32 In the Element Properties dialog. 22 On the Options Bar. click Training Files. 20 Click OK 3 times. 31 Select the component.11 Press DELETE. and click (Properties). 29 In the drawing area. You add the components to the project and keynote them. you create line-based detail components for other line weights (light. click Detail Component. and click OK. click Load. select m_Light Line Detail Component. invisible. 33 In the Type Properties dialog. click Detail Component. 17 In the Element Properties dialog. 12 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. click Edit/New.

select m_Hidden Line Detail Component. and click . name the component 50 x 200 Framing. 49 With the component selected. 42 Using the same method used previously. Add a vapor barrier component 51 On the Design Bar. click Detail Component. and assign it keynote 07260. 44 On the Design Bar. click Detail Component. 43 Zoom to the repeating component. 48 Using the same method used previously. click Detail Component. 46 Click Modify. on the Edit toolbar. 54 Create the component by drawing over the vertical and horizontal dashed detail lines that represent the vapor barrier.38 On the Design Bar. 256 | Chapter 6 Detailing . 52 In the Type Selector. select Chain. and assign it keynote 06110. 41 Select the component just added. 45 Click the upper end of the repeating detail.A5. and click . 40 Click Modify.G1. 47 Select the component. and click the lower end at the break line. click 50 Move the air barrier to the right. name the component Air Barrier. 53 On the Options Bar. against the 3/4" plywood. 39 Add the Light Line Detail Component to the underside of the overhang. (Move).

58 Using the method used previously.55 Click Modify. Creating Line-based Detail Components | 257 . leaving the detail component lines. and assign it keynote 07260. 60 On the Design Bar. name the component Vapor Barrier. and Vapor Barrier. 57 Select the vertical hidden line component. click Keynote ➤ Element. Add keynotes 59 Zoom to the drawing extents. 50 x 200 Framing. add keynotes for the EPDM Membrane.A4. 61 In the drawing area. Air Barrier. and click . 56 Delete both dashed detail lines.

click Load into Projects. 3 In the text editor. select the component. and press ENTER. 72 Proceed to the next exercise.A1.rfa. and double-click m_Example_RevitKeynotes.txt. Enter 07463. 69 Using the method used previously. 64 Save the file as m_Invisible Line Detail Component. 65 On the Family tab of the Design Bar. and assign it keynote 07210. select Invisible Lines. 71 Save the file.rvt. you add keynote information for a detail component to the database text file. 67 In the drawing area.. The database file opens in a text editor. and press TAB. and close the text editor. “Modifying a Keynote Database” on page 258. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. Enter Pre-Finished Metal Soffit.rfa. 66 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. and press TAB. 258 | Chapter 6 Detailing . Modifying a Keynote Database In this exercise. 63 In the drawing area.A4. 70 In the drawing area. Add information to the text file 1 In Windows Explorer.Create an invisible line component 62 Click Window menu ➤ m_Medium Line Detail Component. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Detailing. 68 Select the component. click File menu ➤ Save.A9. in the Type Selector. Enter 07460. navigate to Documents and Settings\All Users\Application Data\Autodesk\RAC 2008\Training\Metric. draw a line in the center of the large vertical segment of insulation. and click . name the component Batt Insul. 2 Add keynote information for the metal soffit: ■ ■ ■ ■ Position the cursor at the end of the line that begins with 07460. You are then able to assign the keynote to the component in the drawing. add a keynote for the component. click Detail Component.

and click OK. After you create a drafting view. and click OK. select the metal soffit (horizontal line under the overhang). navigate to 07463. 7 In the Keynoting Settings dialog. 9 In the drawing area. In the Type Selector. ■ Change the keynote style back to the boxed number type. and click Open. click to place the leader.Update keynote settings 4 In Revit Architecture. you can reference it within the model and place it on a sheet. 11 Click Modify. Drafted details are created in drafting views and are not directly based on building model geometry. select M_Keynote Tag : Keynote Number. Creating a Drafted Detail | 259 . and click to place the note.txt. You can create drafted details using the drafting tools in Revit Architecture or by importing details from an existing detail library. 6 In the Select Keynote File dialog. Creating a Drafted Detail In this lesson. 10 In the Keynotes dialog. as there is no parametric linkage to any building model components. under Keynote Table. click Keynote ➤ Element. 12 Apply various keynote styles: ■ ■ In the drawing area. You can create details in drafting views when you do not need to create callout views from the building model. Each keynote displays as a simple number. select all the keynotes. Work with keynotes 8 On the Design Bar. ■ Select Keynote Tag : Keynote Text. 14 Save the file. click Settings menu ➤ Keynoting. 13 Click Modify. click Browse.A1. select Absolute. navigate to m_Example_RevitKeynotes. under Path Type. These details do not update with changes to the building model. 5 In the Keynoting Settings dialog. you learn how to create a drafted detail. The descriptive text for each keynote displays.

Navigate to Metric\m_Roof Edge Detail. click Callout. double-click Roof Overhang Detail to open it in the drawing area. click Training Files. For Positioning ➤ Automatically place. Create the callout view 1 In the Project Browser. 6 In the Project Browser. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. select Black and white. expand Views (all) ➤ Drafting Views (Detail). m_Freighthouse_Flats-Detailing. enter EPDM Metal Coping. 260 | Chapter 6 Detailing . for Scale. select Center-to-center. 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar.rvt. Import a complete detail in DWG format 3 Click File menu ➤ Import/Link ➤ CAD Formats. 7 In the Rename View dialog. For Layer/Level Colors. you place an existing detail in a new drafting view to create a drafted detail. Creating a Reference Callout In this exercise. select 1 : 5. 3 On the Options Bar. under Views (all) ➤ Detail Views (Detail). The detail is imported as an import symbol. right-click Drafting 1. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Detailing. 2 In the New Drafting View dialog.Importing a Detail into a Drafting View In this exercise. 8 Proceed to the next exercise. Click Open. and click OK. “Creating a Reference Callout” on page 260. 5 Enter zf to zoom to the detail. 4 In the Import/Link dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ In the left pane. Dataset Use the dataset you used in a previous exercise. you create a callout in the section view of the building model to reference the metal coping detail that you previously imported. and click OK. select Reference other view. and select Drafting View: EPDM Metal Coping.rvt. and click Rename. The detail that you import is in DWG format. Create a new drafting view 1 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Drafting View.dwg.

The metal coping detail that you imported previously displays. and click OK. click Rename. 6 Select the callout. Creating a Reference Callout | 261 . click Edit/New. for New. 10 In the Rename dialog. 8 In the Element Properties dialog. and click Properties. enter Detail . 5 Click Modify. 12 Click OK twice. The callout head no longer displays a reference label. right-click EPDM Metal Coping. 11 In the Type Properties dialog. and double-click the callout. and use the callout grips to move the callout head.4 Add the callout bubble by dragging a rectangular bubble around the metal coping. Display the reference view 13 On the Design Bar. click Modify. Modify detail view properties 7 In the Project Browser. 9 In the Type Properties dialog.No Reference. delete the existing value. for Graphics ➤ Reference Label.

No Reference). drag EPDM Metal Coping onto the sheet./Det. “Creating a Detail in a Drafting View” on page 262 Creating a Detail in a Drafting View In this exercise.Add the drafting view to a sheet 14 In the Project Browser. 19 Proceed to the next exercise. under Views (all) ➤ Sheets (all). enter Header @ Sliding Door. 18 Save the file. 2 In the New Drafting View dialog. verify that the scale is 1 : 5.Elev. Modeling elements at this level of detail may be time consuming and can reduce the overall performance of the product. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Detailing. for Name. 3 On the View Control Bar. and click OK. 15 Under Drafting Views (Detail . The callout is updated with the sheet information./Sect. Create a drafting view 1 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Drafting View. double-click A105 . 16 Click on the sheet above the Roof Overhang Detail to place the drafting view. 262 | Chapter 6 Detailing .rvt. so you use Revit Architecture tools to draft the detail. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. There is no existing DWG file for this door detail. 17 Click Window menu ➤ Detail View: Roof Overhang Detail. you create a door head condition in the new drafting view.

select Wide Lines. select the width dimension. Create a filled region 7 On the Design Bar. 10 In the Type Properties dialog. enter Gyp. click Edit/New. for Name. Creating a Detail in a Drafting View | 263 . select M_Nominal Cut Lumber-Section : 50 x 150mm Nominal. 12 In the Type Properties dialog. click Region Properties. 17 Click Modify. and enter 20. for Graphics ➤ Fill Pattern. click Filled Region. 15 Draw the region: On the Options Bar. select the left and bottom edges of the region. You sketch filled regions to represent gypsum wall board. click . 6 Click in the drawing area to place 2 instances as shown.5mm. and click OK. ■ ■ ■ Select the lower left corner of the 2x6 lumber as the start point. Board. Press SPACEBAR to rotate the component as you place it. . 5 In the Type Selector. 18 While pressing CTRL. 19 In the Type Selector. select Gypsum-Plaster.Add a detail component 4 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. click 13 In the Fill Patterns dialog. 9 In the Element Properties dialog. 16 Select the left edge of the region. 14 Click OK 3 times. 11 In the Name dialog. click Duplicate. 8 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. Draw a rectangle as shown. click Detail Component.

(Draw). click Finish Sketch. and on the Edit toolbar. 24 Select the mirrored region. Move the cursor up. and drag the bottom up to just below the top of the upper 50 x 150. and click above the top of the region as the end point.20 On the Design Bar. click 23 Draw the mirror line: ■ ■ (Mirror). Mirror the region 21 Select the filled region. click 22 On the Options Bar. 264 | Chapter 6 Detailing . Select the midpoint of the upper 50 x 150 as the start point.

and select the right edge of the wood region. 31 In the Type Properties dialog. and click OK. 27 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. click Edit/New. click (Align). Draw a rectangle as shown. ■ ■ ■ Select the lower left corner of the left gypsum board region as the start point. in the Type Selector. 33 Click OK 3 times. 36 Align the wood region to the 50 x 150: ■ ■ On the Tools toolbar. for Graphics ➤ Fill Pattern.Finish. Creating a Detail in a Drafting View | 265 . 34 Draw the region: On the Options Bar. click Finish Sketch. select Medium Lines.Finish. for Name. 35 Select all the linework for the wood region. click . 30 In the Name dialog. enter Wood . click Filled Region. select Wood . verify that the thickness is 19mm. 29 In the Type Properties dialog.25 Click Modify. click Duplicate. Add wood filled regions 26 On the Design Bar. click Region Properties. click 32 In the Fill Patterns dialog. . Select the right edge of the lower 50 x 150. 28 In the Element Properties dialog. 37 On the Design Bar.

5mm. click (Align). 41 Beginning at the lower right of the wood region. click Ref Plane. 45 Select the top of the vertical wood region to place the reference plane above it. and press ENTER. 266 | Chapter 6 Detailing . enter 6mm. select Medium Lines. click .38 On the Design Bar. click Finish Sketch. 40 On the Options Bar. 42 On the Design Bar. sketch the new region as shown. For Offset. 46 On the Tools toolbar. 39 In the Type Selector. verify that the width is 19mm and the height is 63. You use the reference plane as an alignment reference for the gypsum board region above it. click Filled Region. 44 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Click (Pick). Add a reference plane 43 On the Design Bar.

enter 0. and click the bottom of the gypsum board region. 56 On the Design Bar. Add a door panel 49 On the Design Bar.47 Click the reference plane. Creating a Detail in a Drafting View | 267 . 54 On the Tools toolbar. and click to select the point. and press ENTER. ■ ■ ■ For Offset. For Offset. and press ENTER. enter 10mm. click (Trim/Extend). Move the cursor down 305mm. Move the cursor right 25mm. Move the cursor left 25mm. and select the bottom horizontal line. click Finish Sketch. 50 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Click (Pick Lines). and click to select the point. 48 Click Modify. 52 On the Options Bar: Click (Draw). Select Chain. 51 Select the left edge of the horizontal wood region. and click to select the point. 55 Select the small vertical line of the door panel sketch. 53 Draw the door panel outline: ■ ■ ■ ■ Click the top endpoint of the offset line. click Filled Region.

61 Click Modify. select Medium Lines. enter 76. select the height dimension. enter 3mm. 268 | Chapter 6 Detailing .rfa. 67 Add the bolt to the right side of the lower wood region as shown. 63 Repeat for the right detail line. click Training Files. and press ENTER. click Detail Lines. 59 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Click (Pick Lines). 60 Select the left.2mm. and press ENTER. navigate to Metric\Families\Detail Components\Div 05-Metals\05090-Metal Fastenings\M_A307 Bolts-Side. click Detail Component. For Offset.Add mounting/sliding hardware 57 On the Design Bar. click Load. and click Open. 66 In the left pane of the Open dialog. 62 Select the left detail line. 65 On the Options Bar. 58 In the Type Selector. and right edges of the door panel region. top. Add mounting/sliding hardware 64 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar.

TIP Press the SPACEBAR as necessary to rotate the bolt to the correct orientation. 72 In the left pane of the Open dialog. 77 Draw a line at the base of the bolt head as shown. select Wide Lines. click Detail Lines. use the images as a guide. click Detail Component. Creating a Detail in a Drafting View | 269 . and click Open. 71 On the Options Bar. click Load. 76 In the Type Selector. click Training Files. 73 Add the component to the left side of the lower 50 x 150. 68 Click Modify. 69 Select the bolt. drag the right shape handle until the bolt end is just past the midpoint of the 50 x 150. NOTE Exact sizes and positioning are not critical when creating the remainder of the detail. navigate to Metric\Families\Detail Components\Div 05-Metals\05090-Metal Fastenings\M_Expansion Bolts-Side. 74 Select the expansion bolt. Add detail lines 75 On the Design Bar. drag the left shape handle until the nut is against the detail line. 70 On the Design Bar.rfa.

85 On the Options Bar. and on the Edit toolbar. 82 Select the rectangle. click 83 Select the wide detail line as the axis of reflection. 86 Draw a small rectangle between the mirrored rectangles as shown. 84 On the Design Bar. click Detail Lines. 270 | Chapter 6 Detailing . 81 Draw the rectangle to the left of the wide line as shown. 79 In the Type Selector. 80 On the Options Bar. select Thin Lines. click . (Mirror). click Detail Lines.78 On the Design Bar. click .

Do not extend the line to the vertical detail line.87 Click Modify. 89 On the Design Bar. select Medium Lines. 90 In the Type Selector. as shown. click Detail Lines. 88 Select the detail line to the left of the lower wood region. 91 Draw a small line from the midpoint of the left mirrored rectangle to the left. drag the top end above the mirrored rectangles as shown. Creating a Detail in a Drafting View | 271 .

98 Click the end of the detail line on the left.92 Select the line. 93 Select the wide detail line as the axis of reflection. and click to place the arc as shown. draw a line up to the height of the other detail line. 97 On the Options Bar. and press ENTER. enter 3mm. select the length dimension. and on the Edit toolbar. click Detail Lines. 95 On the Design Bar. 272 | Chapter 6 Detailing . 96 Beginning at the end of the 3mm line. click (Mirror). click . 94 Select the mirrored line on the right.

select M_Break Line. and click Modify. 105 In the drawing area.99 Click Modify. click Detail Component. click Dimension. 101 On the Design Bar. 103 Add two break lines as shown. 102 In the Type Selector. Add dimensions 104 On the Design Bar. Creating a Detail in a Drafting View | 273 . select the left edge of the horizontal wood region. 106 Click to place the dimension. and select the right edge of the adjoining vertical region. TIP Rotate and move the break lines as necessary to adjust the masking elements. Add two break lines 100 Zoom to the drawing extents.

click Dimension.107 On the Design Bar. drag the text for the smaller dimension. 112 In the Options Bar. Board. and on the Options Bar.5mm Arial. and click to place the text. click to create an arced leader. and click Modify. 110 Select the dimension line. 116 Drag the end of the new leader to the other gypsum board region. click (Add Right Arc Leader). select Linear Dimension Style : Linear 2. 113 In the drawing area. 114 Enter Gyp. 115 Select the note. 108 In the Type Selector. click Text. select the gypsum board region on the left. and click Modify. 274 | Chapter 6 Detailing . using the Drag Text grip. 109 Add a multi-segment dimension line as shown. Add text notes to complete the detail 111 On the Design Bar.

119 Save the file.117 Add leaders and text notes to the detail as shown. click Modify to end the command. Creating a Detail in a Drafting View | 275 . 118 On the Design Bar.

276 | Chapter 6 Detailing .

you perform tasks to provide finishing touches on your project documentation.Finishing the Sheets 7 In this tutorial. such as images and text into project sheets ■ ■ ■ 277 . including: ■ ■ Creating a note block containing typical construction notes Creating a drawing list that is automatically populated based on filter selections Creating the 2 most common types of legends produced for construction: annotation legends and building component legends Tracking and documenting revisions in the project Importing resources from other applications.

8 Drag the endpoint of the leader to position it on the right front door.Hexagon. 6 Click in the drawing area to the right of the building to place a hexagon tag. and double-click East. click Modify. expand Elevations (Building Elevation). Creating a Note Block In this exercise. click Training Files. click Symbol. Load a generic annotation family 1 In the Project Browser.rvt. 5 On the Options Bar. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 7 On the Design Bar.Finishing-Sheets. The note block can be used to schedule parameters assigned to a generic annotation family. 278 | Chapter 7 Finishing the Sheets . 3 Click Yes to load a generic annotation family into the project. 4 In the left pane of the Open dialog.Using Note Blocks In this lesson. and open Metric\Families\Annotations\Sheet Keynote . 2 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. for Number of Leaders. and open Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats. you create a typical note block to annotate repairs and renovations to the exterior of the building. you add typical construction notes to sheets and then create a note block to expose the notes text. click Training Files. Dataset ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. enter 1.rfa.

and click OK. click (Properties). and click above the tag to place a copy. Creating a Note Block | 279 . for Text. 12 On the Edit toolbar. 13 Select the tag. enter Seal existing doors and insulate. 11 In the Element Properties dialog.9 Drag the midpoint of the leader to position it as shown: Create annotation marks for items requiring notes 10 With the tag selected. click (Copy). on the Options Bar. under Identity Data.

16 For Tag. position the cursor over the hexagon tag until a vertical bar displays. Contact Historic Preservation District official for specific requirements. clear Copy. on the Options Bar. 19 On the toolbar.14 With the copy selected. enter B. and click. and on the Options Bar. enter Repair existing door surround. 280 | Chapter 7 Finishing the Sheets . as shown: NOTE To create a vertical mirror image. click (Properties). 20 Select the tag on the left. click (Mirror). 17 Click OK. 15 For Text. 18 Use the same method to make another copy of the tag and place it on the left side of the building. and click to create a vertical mirror image of the tag so the leader points toward the building.

24 In the New Note Block dialog. Clean and repair stone parapet cap as required. for Note block name.21 On the Design Bar. Remove all existing windows. Contact Historic Preservation District official for specific requirements. Clean opening and repair as required for new window installation. format. using the table as a reference. select Tag. On the Sorting/Grouping tab. under Available fields. 22 Optionally. Tuckpoint as required. Saw cut existing brick wall. click Modify. Creating a Note Block | 281 . enter Exterior Construction Notes. and moving counter-clockwise. Repair existing door surround. Clean exterior brick wall. Create. Repair as required. and click Add. Clean cut and repair wall as required. for Sort by. continue tagging the building as shown in the following illustration: Tag A B C D E F G H Text Seal existing doors and insulate. and click Add. and place a note block on a sheet 23 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Note Block. select Tag. Clean existing concrete loading dock. 25 Specify values in the Note Block Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ On the Fields tab. and click OK. Clean and repair existing stone trim as required. Select Text.

28 In the Project Browser.■ ■ On the Formatting tab. and for Alignment. 29 In the Project Browser.Elevations.rvt. enter Description. 34 Save the file as Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Finishing-Sheets_in_progress. for Heading. and drag it to the sheet. and select Bold. 33 Click File menu ➤ Save As. click Modify. On the Appearance tab. 27 In the column header (text). and double-click A103 . verify Arial in the first field. 32 Zoom in to see the note block. 30 Click to place the block in the upper-left corner of the sheet. 26 Click OK. 31 On the Design Bar. The Exterior Construction Notes block displays. expand Sheets (all). For Header text. and click Save. select Center. enter Mark. expand Schedules/Quantities. enter 6 mm in the second field. select Exterior Construction Notes. and drag the right column control to expand the column to display the note text. 282 | Chapter 7 Finishing the Sheets .

select does not equal. enter T. select Sheet Number. in the first field. for Filter by. you create an automatically populated drawing list for placement on the title sheet of the project. and click Add. and in the third field. enter Sheet Index. 2 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Drawing List. 3 Specify values in the Drawing List Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ On the Fields tab. and click Add. The drawing list displays. 6 In the Project Browser.rvt. ■ 4 Click OK.Using Drawing Lists In this lesson. double-click T . On the Sorting/Grouping tab. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous lesson.Title Sheet. Creating a Drawing List In this exercise. in the second field.Title Sheet. select Sheet Index. 1 In the Project Browser. 5 In the list title field. On the Filter tab. expand Schedules/Quantities. select Sheet Number. Select Sheet Name. under Sheets (all). for Sort by. you quickly create a drawing list that is automatically generated from the drawings available in the project. under Available fields. and drag it to the sheet. Metric\m_Freighthouse_FlatsFinishing-Sheets_in_progress. select Sheet Number. double-click T . Using Drawing Lists | 283 . 7 In the Project Browser. under Sheets (all).

8 Click to place it on the sheet in the lower-right corner. Create a legend view 1 On the View menu. NOTE A component that is placed in a legend does not count as an additional instance of the component in the Revit Architecture building model. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous lesson. Building component legends list and identify components such as walls. 11 Click File menu ➤ Save. and expand the right column to accommodate the text. 10 Zoom in to the drawing list. On construction documents. door frame schedule. 2 In the New Legend View dialog. Finally.rvt. and so on). building component legends are often called schedules (wall type schedule. On construction documents. enter Typical Symbol Legend. you add the completed symbol legend to multiple sheets for easy reference. 9 On the Design Bar. 284 | Chapter 7 Finishing the Sheets . Annotation legends are made up of components such as section markers and door tags that are paired with text that identifies them. and thus is not added to the number of instances of that component listed on a schedule or note block. doors. click Modify. and door frames. you create a legend view and add symbols and text to it using a text type you create by duplicating an existing text type and modifying the type properties. annotation legends are often referred to as symbol legends. for Name. Using Legends Legends provide a way to display a list of the various building components and annotations used in a project. click New ➤ Legend. The two most common types of legends produced for construction documents are annotation legends and building component legends. Creating a Symbol Legend In this exercise. Metric\m_Freighthouse_FlatsFinishing-Sheets_in_progress. and click OK. windows.

selecting each from the Type Selector and placing it in the legend as shown. 12 Enter Detail Callout for the text note. 13 Working from the top down. select Arial. 9 For Text Font. 4 Add the following symbols to the legend view. 6 On the Options bar. Add text to the legend 11 In the Type Selector. verify that Text : Legend Text is selected.Hexagon : Tag Create a text type 5 On the Design Bar. click Text. enter 3mm. click Symbol. 10 For Text Size. you create a text type with the necessary size. enter the following text for the remaining symbols in the legend: ■ ■ ■ Level Indicator Door Tag Window Tag Creating a Symbol Legend | 285 . enter Legend Text. and click OK twice. for Name. Because the text size for the symbol legend is not available in the Type Selector. and click OK. ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ M_Section Head .Add symbols to the legend 3 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. You do this by duplicating the standard text type and modifying the type properties. 8 In the Type Properties dialog.Circle M_Door Tag M_Window Tag Sheet Keynote . click . click Duplicate. 7 In the Element Properties dialog. and click to the right of the first symbol to specify the text start point.Filled Level Head . click Edit/New.

286 | Chapter 7 Finishing the Sheets . 15 In the Project Browser. click Modify. and click to place it. under Sheets.Unit 18. and click to place it. The symbol legend is added to the project sheet. drag it to the lower-right corner of the sheet. drag it to the lower-right corner of the sheet. click Typical Symbol Legend. double-click A102 .Site Plan/Floor Plan. 18 In the Project Browser. 16 In the Type Selector. expand Sheets (all). select Viewport : No Titlemark.■ Sheet Keynote Place the symbol legend on a sheet 14 In the Project Browser. and double-click A101 . 19 In the Project Browser. 17 On the Design Bar. click Typical Symbol Legend. expand Legends.

rvt. Creating a Component Legend | 287 . and click OK. 21 On the Design Bar. click Legend Component. click New ➤ Legend. Add components to the legend 4 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. enter 900 mm. click Modify. For Host length. for Name. Create a legend view 1 On the View menu. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. you create a building component legend for the wall types in the building model. 5 On the Options Bar. 7 Click near the top left of the drawing area to specify the insertion point for the wall. and press ENTER. select Medium for Detail Level. enter 4th Floor Wall Types. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Finishing-Sheets_in_progress. 3 For Scale. select Section. 2 In the New Legend View dialog. For View. You use the text type that you created in a previous exercise to create annotations that identify the material used in each wall component. You then add the completed legend to a project sheet. select Walls: Basic Wall: 4th Floor Balcony Divider. select1 : 50. 6 On the View Control Bar. 22 Click File menu ➤ Save. specify the following: ■ ■ ■ For Family. 8 Click directly below the first wall to place a second wall. select Viewport : No Titlemark. Creating a Component Legend In this exercise. A legend view is unlike any other view and can be placed onto multiple sheets for reference where required.20 In the Type Selector.

9 On the Design Bar. 288 | Chapter 7 Finishing the Sheets . select Walls : Basic wall : 4th Floor Exterior. Add titles to the legend components 11 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. 12 In the Type Selector. click Text. and on the Options Bar. for Family. click Modify. 10 Select the second wall. verify that Text : Legend Text is selected.

'' 15 Click below the lower wall and enter Wall Type 2 Exterior Wall. 19 Enter the following text. and click Modify on the Design Bar: 33mm Decking 50x100 Stud 33mm Decking. and enter Wall Type 1 Patio Divider.13 On the Options Bar. for example to force a line break between ''Wall Type 1'' and ''Patio Divider. Add text to the legend 16 On the Options bar. 17 Click the right side of the Wall Type 1 component to specify the leader start point. click to add text without a leader. NOTE Press ENTER to force the text to start on the next line. Creating a Component Legend | 289 . for Leader. The text note with leader is added to the legend. click to add text with a single-segment leader. pressing ENTER between component descriptions. 20 Use the following illustration as a guide for entering the text annotations on the lower wall component. 18 Click to the right of the wall to end the leader and specify the text start point. 14 Click below the upper wall component to specify the start point for the text.

The open drawings are both visible.Place the legend on a sheet 21 In the Project Browser. allowing you to select a component type in one drawing and then apply the type in the second drawing. 25 In the Project Browser. The floor plan and legend are added to the new sheet. 22 In the Select a Titleblock dialog. 24 Click to place the floor plan on the right side of the sheet. select Level 4. 28 Click Window menu ➤ Close Hidden Windows. under Floor Plans. 30 Click Window menu ➤ Tile. 23 In the Project Browser. under Floor Plans. double-click 4th Floor Wall Types. and drag it to the new sheet. Tile views in the drawing window 27 In the Project Browser. right-click Sheets (all). under Legends. 26 On the Design Bar. 29 In the project Browser. drag it onto the sheet. select 4th Floor Wall Types. 290 | Chapter 7 Finishing the Sheets . click OK to accept the default titleblock. click Modify to end the command. and click New Sheet. and click to place it in the upper left corner of the sheet. double-click Level 4.

34 Draw a rectangle around the lower-right area of the floor plan including the patio divider wall. Notice that the eyedropper changes to filled. 32 In the 4th Floor Wall Types Legend view. 33 In the floor plan view. indicating that it captured the wall type properties. select the Wall Type 2 component. Creating a Component Legend | 291 .Match a component type 31 On the Tools toolbar. click (Match Type). The view zooms in to the patio divider wall. enter ZR to zoom to a specific region.

These changes can be due to owner requests. and you can draw revision clouds around elements in your project that have changed. You can create a sequence of revisions.35 Select the patio divider wall. contractor inquiries. The wall type in the floor plan matches wall type 2 from the Wall Type Legend. and can then display the revisions in schedules that appear in the titleblock of each project sheet. 38 Click File menu ➤ Save. 37 Optionally. click if you do not want to save the change to the wall type. select Medium for Detail Level. Using Revision Tracking Revit Architecture provides tools that enable you to track revisions to your project. You can use revision tags to notate the revision clouds. Changing the detail level displays the hatching for each material of the wall component. Setting Up a Revision Table There are likely to be changes to your construction documents after you have issued the original set of documents for bid or after you have received a signed contract. 292 | Chapter 7 Finishing the Sheets . 36 On the View Control Bar.

If Visible is not selected. under Floor Plans. if the active revision is number 1. In this exercise. This is the date the revisions are sent out for review. verify that Cloud and Tag is selected. revision descriptions should be comprehensive. verify that By Project is selected for Numbering Method. Using the table. you use the Revisions command to open a revision table in which you can add rows that represent a sequence of revisions. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous lesson. any revision cloud you draw to indicate this particular revision is not visible in the view in which you create it. Setting Up a Revision Table | 293 . 2 On the Settings menu. all tags and schedules display the numeral 1.unanticipated changes in construction conditions. Add a revision to the project 4 For Release Date. the revisions are numbered according to the sequence in which they are added to a sheet. enter Relocate 4th floor partition dividing walls. enter a date. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Finishing-Sheets_in_progress. 7 Under Visible. If you select By Sheet. and you can add data such as release date and description to each revision. For example. yet as concise as possible. When you use this option. 5 For Description. Specify a revision numbering method 1 In the Project Browser. you would turn off visibility only after a revision was issued. 6 Verify that Issued is cleared. double-click Level 4. 3 In the Revisions dialog. In most instances. When Issued is selected. click Revisions. or changes in building material availability. you can specify the numbering method for revisions in a project.rvt. In general. the revision is locked and issued to the field. the revisions are numbered according to the sequence of revisions in the Revisions dialog.

9 Click File menu ➤ Save. Modify a wall 1 In the Project Browser. You can sketch revision clouds in all views except 3D views. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. 2 Zoom in to the left area of the drawing to see the 4th Floor Balcony Divider. you make changes to the project floor plan. You can draw multiple revision clouds for each revision. and click to reposition the divider closer to the upper wall. and then indicate the changes graphically with a revision cloud. 4 On the Edit toolbar. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Finishing-Sheets_in_progress. move the cursor up. click (Move).rvt. including revision number and revision date. under Floor Plans.8 Click OK. Sketching Revision Clouds In this exercise. double-click Level 4. 3 Select the divider. Revision clouds have read-only properties. 5 Select the partition. but each cloud is visible only in the view in which it is sketched. 294 | Chapter 7 Finishing the Sheets . which are inherited from the revision table you created for the project.

click Revision Cloud. click near the partition you moved. and move the cursor clockwise to create a segment of the revision cloud. Revit Architecture is now in sketch mode. Sketching Revision Clouds | 295 . 8 In the drawing area. 9 Click to end that segment and begin a new segment. click Finish Sketch. Add a revision cloud 7 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. 11 On the Design Bar. 10 Continue adding segments until the cloud encompasses the area that you changed. click Modify. The revision cloud is displayed around the modified partition.6 On the Design Bar.

select 6. 13 Click Settings menu ➤ Object Styles. and then apply the tag to the revision cloud in the current drawing. 16 Click OK.Modify revision cloud style 12 Select the revision cloud. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. Tagging Revision Clouds In this exercise. under Floor Plans. 15 Under the Revision Clouds category. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Finishing-Sheets_in_progress.rvt. 14 In the Object Styles dialog. 296 | Chapter 7 Finishing the Sheets . Load a revision tag 1 In the Project Browser. for Line Weight. click Tag ➤ By Category. The tag number that is displayed in the drawing is based on the numbering method you specified when you set up the revision table in a previous exercise. 2 Zoom in to the area with the revision cloud. you load a revision tag into the project. 3 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. click the Annotation Objects tab. double-click Level 4. 17 Click File menu ➤ Save.

4 On the Options Bar. If the cursor is just inside the cloud. select Leader. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Finishing-Sheets_in_progress.rvt. Because you chose to number by project. 6 Click Load. which creates a record of the revision and locks it from further changes. click OK. the cloud is tagged as number 1. Because there are no tags loaded for revision clouds. notice that M_Revision Tag is the loaded tag for Revision Clouds. 10 In the drawing area. and open Metric\Families\Annotations\M_Revision Tag. The number is based on the numbering method you specified when you set up the revision table.rfa. under Sheets. and because the revision is the first in the project. In the Tags dialog. Add a revised view to a sheet 1 In the Project Browser. Working with Revisions In this exercise. 5 In the Tags dialog. you prevent further changes to the revision. The tag displays the revision number of the cloud. click Training Files.Unnamed. After you make the necessary changes to the project and add the revised views to a sheet. Tag a revision cloud 9 On the Options Bar. Because a real-world project can undergo several revisions before it is completed. 11 Click to place the tag. click Tags. scroll down to Revision Clouds. 2 Enter ZR and zoom to the revision schedule in the sheet titleblock. You then issue a revision. 12 Click File menu ➤ Save. The information you added to the revision table in a previous exercise is displayed in the revision schedule. 7 In the left pane of the dialog. you need to add one. position the cursor just outside the revision cloud to the left. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. on which you place a revised view. Working with Revisions | 297 . you create a sheet view in your project. you create additional revisions in the revision table. You do this by issuing the revision. 8 In the Tags dialog. double-click A107 . the tag is displayed inside the cloud.

click Revisions. 8 If you want to hide issued revisions in the drawing. under Add. and click OK. A new row is added below the existing rows in the revision table. Create additional revisions 5 Your project may have several revisions before it is completed. 6 In the Revisions dialog. On the Settings menu. select None for each issued revision. You can continue to add revisions. 7 Enter the appropriate information for this revision. click Revisions. NOTE After you issue a revision. for Visible. 298 | Chapter 7 Finishing the Sheets . you can no longer modify it.Issue a revision 3 On the Settings menu. click New. You cannot add revision clouds to the revision in the drawing area. 4 For the Sequence 1 revision. select Issued. nor can you edit the sketch of the existing clouds.

click Training Files. you import a logo image in JPG format into a project. text. and open Common\Freighthouse Logo.Title Sheet. 4 Click in the upper right area of the sheet to place the logo. 10 Click File menu ➤ Save. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous lesson.9 Click OK. Importing from Other Applications | 299 . double-click T . and place it on a sheet. you learn to import information from other applications.rvt. under Sheets. and spreadsheets. into a project. 2 Click File menu ➤ Import/Link ➤ Image. 3 In the left pane of the Open dialog.JPG. such as images. Importing from Other Applications In this lesson. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Finishing-Sheets_in_progress. 1 In the Project Browser. Importing Image Files In this exercise.

300 | Chapter 7 Finishing the Sheets . 6 Select the text. you import text from another application using a cut and paste function to populate a text object on a sheet. click to add text without a leader.Title Sheet 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 6 Click File menu ➤ Save. for Leader. 7 Click Edit menu ➤ Copy. Copy the text 5 Open the Training Files\Common\Bidding Statement. click Text.rvt. Create a text element on the title sheet 1 In the Project Browser. under Sheets. click Modify. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Finishing-Sheets_in_progress. double-click T . 3 On the Options Bar.doc text file in another window. Importing Text Documents In this exercise. 4 Click and drag to place a text box on the right side of the sheet.5 On the Design Bar. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise.

you could use a screen capture utility to save the worksheet in BMP or JPG format. 2 Open the Microsoft Excel worksheet. click File menu ➤ Import/Link ➤ Image.rvt. click Modify. 9 On the Design Bar. 3 In Microsoft Excel. under Sheets. you have existing information in a spreadsheet format and would like to use it in the project. 6 In the left pane of the Save As dialog. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Finishing-Sheets_in_progress. 11 Zoom in to see the Fixture Schedule. click Training Files. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. 10 Zoom in to view the pasted text. for Name. 10 On the Design Bar. The only way to do this is to convert the spreadsheet file to a raster format (JPG or BMP) and import it as an image. The text is pasted into the new text box on the sheet. click File menu ➤ Print. and open Common\Fixture Schedule.mdi. double-click A102 . for File name. 9 Click to place the image on the sheet. 5 Click OK. 7 In the Revit Architecture window. NOTE You need to print/export the spreadsheet to a raster format.JPG. click Desktop. 4 Under Printer. This step has been completed for you. with the new text box still selected. Training Files\Common\Lighting Fixtures. and click Save. This process may vary from system to system. click Edit menu ➤ Paste from Clipboard. click Modify. enter Fixture Schedule. and saved as Fixture Schedule.JPG. Now that you have the worksheet in a raster format. select the document writer. 8 In the left pane of the Open dialog. 1 In the Project Browser.xls. Importing Spreadsheets In this exercise.Paste the text on the sheet 8 In the Revit Architecture window. NOTE Some formatting may be required once the text is placed in Revit Architecture. 11 Click File menu ➤ Save. This exercise demonstrates a common method.Unit 18. Importing Spreadsheets | 301 .

12 Click File menu ➤ Save. 302 | Chapter 7 Finishing the Sheets .

called dependent views. you break up the plan into sections. for the sanctuary will not fit onto a plotted sheet as one plan. The large floor plan. 303 . you work with a large project for a bird sanctuary. as well as a large lab building. To effectively document this project. or footprint. The drawings include the aviary and observation area of the site.Using Dependent Views 8 In this tutorial.

304 | Chapter 8 Using Dependent Views .Dependent view of lab building Dependent view of aviary and observation platforms Dependent views can be placed on sheets for documentation purposes.

| 305 .

enter Level 2 . 3 In the Project Browser. 4 In the Rename View dialog. 6 In the drawing area. click Zoom To Fit. 2 In the Project Browser. In the left pane of the Open dialog. and on the Zoom flyout of the View toolbar. click Training Files. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate as a Dependent.Using Dependent Views in Documentation In this lesson. 306 | Chapter 8 Using Dependent Views . and click OK. 5 Click in the drawing area.Aviary. right-click Level 2. The dependent view opens. right-click Dependent on Level 2. you ■ ■ ■ ■ Create split dependent views of a large floor plan and elevation Annotate the primary view to indicate where the view is split and to provide links to the dependent views Apply the specifications of the dependent views to other views in the project Add dependent views to sheets for documentation Using Dependent Views for Floor Plan Views In this exercise. under Floor Plans.rvt Create dependent views 1 In the Project Browser. under Level 2. and click Rename. you ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Create split dependent views of a large floor plan view Add a matchline to the primary view to indicate where the view is split Place dependent views on sheets Add view references to the primary view to link to dependent views Apply dependent view specifications to other views Dataset ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. and open Metric\ m_Dependent_Views. select the crop region. for Name. double-click Level 2.

The annotation crop is the exterior crop region. 8 Click the inside control on the bottom and drag it up.The following image shows a plan view with the model and annotation crop regions visible. confining the view to the upper-left area of the drawing (the aviary). 7 Select the inside (model crop) control on the right and drag it toward the center of the view to crop out the lab building. and the model crop is the interior crop region. Using Dependent Views for Floor Plan Views | 307 .

right-click Dependent on Level 2. click Zoom To Fit. 10 On the Zoom flyout. right-click Level 2. 308 | Chapter 8 Using Dependent Views . 11 In the Project Browser. 15 Select the crop region. 14 Click in the drawing area. and on the Zoom flyout. 16 Use the inside controls to crop the view to the lower-right building (the labs). and click OK. 13 In the Rename View dialog.9 On the View Control Bar. and click Rename. click (Hide Crop Region).Labs. 12 In the Project Browser. click Zoom To Fit. for Name. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate as a Dependent. enter Level 2 .

Add matchline to indicate split view 21 In the Project Browser. click (Hide Crop Region). click Modify. Using Dependent Views for Floor Plan Views | 309 . 22 On the View tab of the Design Bar. click Zoom To Fit. 20 On the Zoom flyout. click Matchline. 18 On the Design Bar.17 Select the outside control on the left and drag it to the left to reveal the notes. Matchlines are annotation lines that you add to a view to indicate where a view is split. The outside controls adjust the annotation crop region. 19 On the View Control Bar. double-click Level 2. under Floor Plans.

Click above the left corner of the lab building. Move the cursor left about 4800 mm. and click. 310 | Chapter 8 Using Dependent Views .23 Draw the matchline by specifying the following points: ■ Click above and to the right of the intersection of the lab building and the aviary. 24 On the Design Bar. click Finish Sketch. (Align with the second column of lab cubicles.) ■ ■ ■ ■ Move the cursor down and click just above the lab building. Click just below the lower intersection of the lab building and the aviary.

select 9. click the Annotation Objects tab. right-click A101 . 33 In the Project Browser. 31 In the Project Browser. expand Sheets. and click OK. click Level 2 .Aviary. 26 In the Object Styles dialog. for Line Weight. and click OK. and drag it onto the sheet. Create sheets and place dependent views 29 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Sheet. 27 Under Matchline. for Name. Using Dependent Views for Floor Plan Views | 311 . 28 For Line Pattern. 30 In the Select a Titleblock dialog. and click Rename. select Double Dash. 34 Click to place the view in the center of the sheet. 32 In the Sheet Title dialog.25 Click Settings menu ➤ Object Styles.Unnamed. click OK to accept the default titleblock. under Floor Plans. enter Level 2 Aviary.

40 Click to the left of the top of the matchline. under Floor Plans. Add reference annotations to sheets 37 In the Project Browser. 38 On the View tab of the Design Bar. click Modify. click View Reference.Aviary is selected.35 On the Design Bar. 36 Use the same method to create another sheet.Labs dependent view on the sheet. 312 | Chapter 8 Using Dependent Views . verify that Floor Plan: Level 2 . 39 On the Options Bar. double-click Level 2. You add view references near the matchline to annotate and link to the dependent views. rename the sheet Level 2 Labs. and place the Level 2 . for Target view.

44 On the Design Bar. Using Dependent Views for Floor Plan Views | 313 . for Target view. 43 Use the same method to add View References above (A101) and below (A102) the lower-left end of the matchline. 41 On the Options Bar.Labs. 46 In the Project Browser. double-click Level 2 . select Floor Plan: Level 2 . click Modify.The Sheet number of the dependent view displays to the left of the matchline. under Floor Plans.Aviary. click (Show Crop Region). 45 On the Zoom flyout. NOTE Double-clicking a view reference opens the dependent view that it references. 47 On the View Control Bar. click Zoom To Fit. 42 Click to the right of the top of the matchline.

select the room tag for Cubicle 3 (upper-right room tag) in the annotation area.48 Select the crop region. right-click. 314 | Chapter 8 Using Dependent Views . and click Hide in view ➤ Elements. 49 If. after modifying the annotation crop region. NOTE View references display in all views except for the view that it is referencing. and drag it slightly to the right to expand the annotation region so you can see the view reference. leaving 4 rooms visible in the view. 50 Use the same method to hide Cubicle 14 (directly below Cubicle 3). click the far right control. the tags for Cubicles 3 and 14 display. Notice that the view reference for the aviary does not display in the aviary dependent view.

Notice that the matchline and crop regions from Level 2 are applied to Level 1. 56 Double-click Dependent on Level 1. 55 On the Zoom flyout. expand Level 1. After you have set up dependent view configuration for one view.51 On the View Control Bar. 53 In the Select Views dialog. and double-click Dependent (2) on Level 1. and click Apply Dependent Views. select all views in the list. Using Dependent Views for Floor Plan Views | 315 . click (Hide Crop Region). Apply dependent view settings to other plans 52 In the Project Browser. right-click Level 2. under Floor Plans. click Zoom To Fit. 57 On the Zoom flyout. and click OK. 54 In the Project Browser. you can apply the view and crop region specifications to parallel views of the same scale. but are not placed on sheets. New dependent views display in the Project Browser under the primary view. click Zoom To Fit.

4 In the Rename View dialog. In the left pane of the Open dialog. The dependent view opens. 5 In the drawing area. and double-click South Elevation.Using Dependent Views for Elevation Views In this exercise. right-click Dependent on South Elevation.rvt Create dependent views 1 In the Project Browser. 316 | Chapter 8 Using Dependent Views . expand Elevations (Building Elevation). enter South Elevation . click Training Files. and open Metric\ m_Dependent_Views. The matchline is already placed in the view. 3 In the Project Browser. right-click South Elevation. and click Rename. you ■ ■ ■ ■ Create dependent split views of an elevation view Annotate the primary view to indicate where the view is split Place dependent views on a sheet Add view references to the primary view to link to dependent views Dataset ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. and click OK. 2 In the Project Browser. expand South Elevation. for Name. select the Crop Region.Left. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate as a Dependent.

cropping the view to the lab building.Right. enter South Elevation . 9 In the Project Browser. 11 Select the crop region. and click Rename.6 Select the inside crop region control on the right. 16 In the Project Browser. and drag it toward the center of the view. and click OK. 7 On the View Control Bar. 15 In the Select a Titleblock dialog. enter South Elevation. click (Hide Crop Region). under Sheets. and click OK. and click Rename. Create a sheet and place both dependent views on the sheet 14 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Sheet. 12 Select the inside crop region control on the left. 17 In the Sheet Title dialog. cropping the view to the aviary. Using Dependent Views for Elevation Views | 317 . for Name. 8 In the Project Browser. right-click South Elevation. 10 In the Rename View dialog. right-click A103 Unnamed. 13 On the View Control Bar. click OK to accept the default titleblock. and drag it toward the center of the drawing. for Name. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate as a Dependent. click (Hide Crop Region). right-click Dependent on South Elevation.

under Elevations. under Elevations. double-click South Elevation.Right. click View Reference. 23 In the Project Browser. 22 On the Design Bar. and drag it onto the sheet.Left. 318 | Chapter 8 Using Dependent Views . 26 Click to the left of the top of the matchline at the center of the elevation. 20 In the Project Browser. 24 On the Views tab of the Design Bar.18 In the Project Browser. 21 Click to place the elevation view at the bottom of the sheet. 19 Click to place the elevation view at the top of the sheet. click South Elevation . and drag it onto the sheet. 25 On the Options Bar. for Target view. under Elevations. click South Elevation . 27 Click to the left of the bottom of the matchline.Left is selected. click Modify. verify that Elevation: South Elevation .

28 On the Options Bar. for Target view. 30 On the Design Bar. under Sheets (all).South Elevation. click Modify.Right. 29 Click to the right of the top and the bottom of the matchline. Using Dependent Views for Elevation Views | 319 . 31 In the Project Browser. double-click A103 . select Elevation: South Elevation .

and click Activate View. and use the annotation crop controls to modify it. Right-click the view. Select the crop region.NOTE If the view references are not visible. 320 | Chapter 8 Using Dependent Views . you can modify the annotation region for the dependent view from the sheet.

Viewing and Rendering 4 321 .

322 | Chapter 9 Viewing and Rendering .

you learn to create and customize views of building information models. you learn how to change the visibility of detail components. 323 .Viewing 9 In this tutorial. and how to use plan regions within floor plans and reflected ceiling plans. how to control fill pattern colors. More specifically. You learn how to access and create building model views and how to change the visibility of building components and annotations within views.

locate the Project Browser. and double-click East. expand Views (all). A new view displays a wireframe view of the east elevation view of the building model. expand Elevations. TIP If the Project Browser does not display. and open Metric\m_Viewing_Exercise. 324 | Chapter 9 Viewing . you learn how to access different views of the building model. Both hidden lines and window tags display in the east elevation view. click . In the left pane of the Open dialog. sections. and three-dimensional (3D) views. Open an elevation view of the building model 1 On the left side of the drawing area.rvt.Viewing a Building Model In this lesson. The Project Browser is displayed by default between the Design Bar and the drawing area. you learn to create and customize user-defined views of a building information model. You also learn how to control the visibility of different building components and annotations within building model views. You create elevations. including elevation and three-dimensional views. Dataset ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. The current file name is displayed in the Project Browser title bar. on the Standard toolbar. Exploring the Building Model In this exercise. and learn how to control the visibility of building components and annotations within views. click Training Files. 2 In the Project Browser.

click Visibility/Graphics. Notice that window tags continue to display in the view. This change is applied only in this elevation view. scroll down and clear Window Tags. click Model Graphics Style. The east elevation view displays with hidden lines. 5 In the Visibility/Graphic Overrides for Elevation: East dialog. click the Annotation Categories tab. This change is applied only to the active view. the east elevation. Create a 3D view of the building model 8 On the View toolbar. This hides the lines that show through to the exterior of the elevation view. Exploring the Building Model | 325 . click .Display the elevation view with hidden lines 3 On the View Control Bar. Turn off the display of window tags in the elevation view 4 On the View menu. The 3D view is displayed in a new viewing window. and click Hidden Line. 7 Click OK. 6 Under Visibility. The window tags are no longer displayed in this view. The default name of the view is {3D}.

expand Views (all). 326 | Chapter 9 Viewing . you can enable zoom mode by rolling the middle wheel. right-click {3D}. You can pan. 15 In the Project Browser under 3D Views. 16 In the Rename View dialog. NOTE If you have a pointing device with a middle wheel. Move the mouse to pan the view. 10 Move the cursor to the drawing window and notice that it now displays as a hand This means you are in pan mode. 11 Pan the view by clicking and dragging the cursor in the drawing area. you can enable pan mode by pressing and holding the middle wheel button down. and notice that the cursor displays as a magnifying glass This indicates that you are in zoom mode. 17 In the upper right corner of the viewing window. . zoom. The view follows the movement of the cursor. 12 Press and hold CTRL. enter My 3D View. 13 View the Dynamic View dialog in the lower left corner of the screen. double-click My 3D View. click X to close the view. 18 In the Project Browser. and spin the building model by clicking the appropriate button in this dialog. . and expand 3D Views. click to reorient the view. and click Rename. under 3D Views. NOTE If you have a pointing device with a middle wheel.9 On the View toolbar. Save the current 3D view 14 In the Project Browser. and click OK. Notice that the view name is updated in the title bar of the viewing window and in the Project Browser.

you create a perspective view of the building model with a camera. as shown in the following illustration. and double-click Level 1. 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar.rvt. and click View. Creating a Perspective View with a Camera In this exercise. Specify the second point in one of the rooms in the building. expand Views (all). 3 Add the camera to the view by specifying two points: one for the camera position and the other for the camera target point: ■ ■ Specify the first point in the top right corner of the drawing. m_Viewing_Exercise. and distance from the target. eye height. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. Cameras define the eye point. outside of the dimension lines. TIP If the View tab of the Design Bar is not active. Create the perspective view 1 In the Project Browser. Creating a Perspective View with a Camera | 327 . click Camera. the new view named 3D View 1 is displayed by default in a perspective view. expand Floor Plans.Notice that the view continues to display with hidden lines and no window tags. right-click in the Design Bar. “Creating a Perspective View with a Camera” on page 327. 19 Proceed to the next exercise. After you specify the second point (the view target).

Move the cursor up and down in the view to move the cursor forward and backward. and sideways to see how the view changes. 328 | Chapter 9 Viewing . click Zoom ➤ Zoom All To Fit. Press and hold the left mouse button. 7 In the Dynamic View dialog. 5 On the View menu. 9 To move the camera forward and backward in the view: ■ ■ ■ Click Forward/Back and move the cursor into the perspective view. Change the camera projection settings 6 On the View menu. click the Walkthrough tab located at the bottom of the dialog. Move the cursor up. Press and hold the left mouse button. 8 To move the camera eye position higher or lower: ■ ■ ■ Click Dolly and move the cursor into the perspective view. You can use the walkthrough controls in this dialog to move the camera position and change the view. select the blue control grips on the sides of the crop region and move them out. click Dynamically Modify View.4 To resize the view to see the entire floor model. down.

and target 12 On the Window menu. 11 Adjust the view as shown in the following illustration. height. Press and hold the left mouse button. Four views of the model display in the drawing area. You may need to reposition the view with the other controls. 13 On the View menu. click Zoom ➤ Zoom All To Fit. Change the camera position. Move the cursor side to side in the view to rotate the view. Creating a Perspective View with a Camera | 329 .10 To rotate the camera around the target: ■ ■ ■ Click Turn and move the cursor into the perspective view. click Tile.

15 In the Project Browser. double-click Level 1. and click Show Camera. The border of the window that contains the Level 1 view highlights. The camera and the view direction of the camera are displayed in the appropriate views. double-click 3D View 1. right-click 3D View 1. 330 | Chapter 9 Viewing .14 In the Project Browser under Floor Plans. under 3D Views. 16 In the Project Browser.

TIP The updated view depends on the location of the camera before you change the elevation values. select the camera target point (the magenta grip). Creating a Perspective View with a Camera | 331 . and click Element Properties. Use a section box to clip the model 19 On the View toolbar. enter 15000 for Eye Elevation and 1700 for Target Elevation. click to create a new 3D view. and move it to another location. In the Element Properties dialog. click Model Graphics Style. 18 Change the target and eye elevation of the camera by modifying its properties: ■ ■ Select the camera in My 3D View. ■ 3D View 1 immediately updates to show the change. and click Shading. under Camera. right-click. Click OK. 20 On the View Control Bar. 3D View 1 should update immediately after you move the target point of the camera.17 In My 3D View.

and click OK. A section box is displayed around the model. select Section Box.21 Rotate the view as shown in the following illustration. 24 Click the section box. The section box highlights and grips are displayed on its faces. click View Properties. as shown in the following illustration. 22 On the View menu. 25 Select and move the lower right grip on the section box closer to the model. 23 In the Element Properties dialog. A rotation tool is also displayed. under Extents. 332 | Chapter 9 Viewing .

m_Viewing_Exercise. Sketch a section line in a plan view 1 In the Project Browser. 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise.26 Click and hold the rotation tool. Creating a Section View | 333 . double-click Level 1. expand Floor Plans. you create a section view by sketching a section line in a plan view. click Section.rvt. Creating a Section View In this exercise. 27 Proceed to the next exercise. and maximize this view. “Creating a Section View” on page 333. and rotate the section box around the model.

4 On the Design Bar. expand Sections. Notice a dashed green box with blue grips is displayed on the section line. View the section 5 To view the section. and then click to the right of the lower right wall to sketch the horizontal section line shown in the following illustration. select the section view. NOTE Fill pattern is dependent on the zoom ratio. 8 Select the section line. 334 | Chapter 9 Viewing . 6 In the Project Browser. and click Find Referring Views. double-click the section head. select Floor Plan: Level 1. The box represents the extents of the section view as well as the viewing direction of the section. You may need to zoom closer to the walls in order to see the fill pattern. 7 In the Go To View dialog. and drag the section depth grip below the middle horizontal wall as shown in the following illustration. click Modify.3 Click to the left of the left wall of the building model. and double-click Section 1. or in the Project Browser. and click Open View. right-click.

Notice the change in section depth. Creating Elevation Views | 335 . under Floor Plans. 10 Double-click the section head to display the section view. You may need to adjust your zoom settings to see the elevation symbol. click Modify. An elevation symbol displays at the end of the cursor. 15 Double-click the section head to display the section view. move the cursor around the building model. Notice that the elevation symbol arrow points to the nearest wall as you move through the building model.rvt. 12 Select the section line. double-click Level 1. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. 16 Proceed to the next exercise. you learn to create an elevation view in a project by adding an elevation symbol to a plan view. click Elevation. 14 On the Design Bar. 13 Click the control arrows to flip the section view.9 On the Design Bar. double-click Level 1. and select and move the section depth grip under the lower wall. “Creating Elevation Views” on page 335. Control arrows are displayed near the section tag. Change the view direction of the section 11 In the Project Browser under Floor Plans. 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar. 3 Without clicking in the drawing area. click Modify. Notice the change in the view direction. Add an elevation symbol 1 In the Project Browser. Creating Elevation Views In this exercise. m_Viewing_Exercise.

Do not select the arrow.b. 336 | Chapter 9 Viewing . Elevation 1 . View the elevation 6 To view the new elevation. double-click Level 1. The elevation symbol is displayed with four check boxes. and double-click the elevation symbol arrow.a. 9 Select the box shown in the following illustration to add a new elevation view. The elevation is named Elevation 1 . double-click Elevation 1 .a by default. zoom in.4 To create an elevation view of the building lobby. 8 Select the center of the elevation symbol. Make sure the elevation symbol is pointing towards the lobby doors. and click. 10 In the Project Browser. indicating the possible elevation views that you can create. The check mark in the right box indicates the current elevation view. 5 On the Design Bar. place the cursor inside the building facing the lobby entrance. click Modify. under Elevations.b. Elevation 1 . 7 In the Project Browser under Floor Plans.

you can choose the wall fill color for a wall type. floors. you learn to control the fill pattern color of a material and set the coarse scale fill pattern color of a wall type. In addition. such as the one below. and open Common\c_Showroom. Dataset ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. click Save As. and applies to phasing override materials as well. In the left pane of the Open dialog. you learn to control the fill pattern colors of a material. on the File menu.11 If you want to save your changes. Controlling Fill Pattern Colors | 337 . This means that in views with a coarse level of detail. 12 Close the exercise file without saving your changes. This includes walls. Controlling the Fill Pattern Color of a Material In this exercise. and other families. you can set the color of the coarse scale fill pattern for wall types. in this case. in a compound wall. and the insulation color to pink. You change the color of the cut and surface patterns in the brick material assigned to the exterior wall in the building model. and save the exercise file with a unique name. click Training Files. You can control the fill pattern color of the cut and surface patterns for objects that obtain their fill pattern definition from materials. Controlling Fill Pattern Colors In this lesson. where each layer is assigned a different material. For example. you can set the fill pattern color for the brick to red. a shade of gray. such as Brick on CMU. roofs.rvt.

9 In the Materials dialog. expand Views (all). select Masonry . click Color. and click OK twice. The brick cut pattern on the left is displayed as red.Change the color of the brick cut pattern for the exterior walls 1 In the Project Browser. View the surface pattern of the exterior brick walls 6 In the Project Browser.Brick for Name. A color is assigned to both the Surface Pattern and Cut Pattern options in the dialog. and double-click Wall/Floor Join .Filled). click Materials. Notice the different fill patterns assigned to each layer within the floor and wall structure. expand Views (all). 338 | Chapter 9 Viewing . select red. 4 Under Cut Pattern. 2 On the Settings menu. expand Sections (Section Head . click Materials. and double-click 3D. Change the brick surface pattern from black to white 8 On the Settings menu. select Masonry . 3 In the Materials dialog. The surface pattern of the brick is black.Brick for Name. 7 Zoom in on the brick pattern of the exterior walls. Each layer is designated by the material settings of the layer. expand 3D Views.Level 3. 5 In the Color dialog.

10 Under Surface Pattern. The view level of this view is set to display in Coarse detail as indicated by the Detail Level instance parameter value under Graphics. 2 On the View menu. click Color. 3 Click Cancel to exit the dialog without making any changes. View the detail level setting of the view 1 In the Project Browser. The surface pattern of the brick is now white. 12 Proceed to the next exercise. 11 In the Color dialog. expand Floor Plans. The walls in the floor plan that you work with are displayed with a gray fill pattern when displayed in a view with a coarse level of detail. you learn to set the coarse scale fill pattern color for a wall type. expand Views (all). and double-click Level 1. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. Setting the Coarse Scale Fill Pattern Color for a Wall Type | 339 . Setting the Coarse Scale Fill Pattern Color for a Wall Type In this exercise. click View Properties. “Setting the Coarse Scale Fill Pattern Color for a Wall Type” on page 339. and click OK twice.rvt. c_Showroom. select white. You change the coarse scale fill pattern from the default color of black to a shade of gray for a wall type.

select Solid fill for Name. the plan regions cannot overlap each other. click in the Coarse Scale Fill Pattern parameter value field and click 9 In the Fill Patterns dialog. Plan regions are closed sketches that you can create in floor plan and reflected ceiling plan (RCP) views only. on the File menu. Creating a View Plan Region In this lesson. although they may have 340 | Chapter 9 Viewing . right-click. click Detail Level. 5 In the Element Properties dialog. 6 In the Type Properties dialog. 7 In the Color dialog. 14 If you want to save your changes. and click OK three times. and click Fine.Change coarse scale fill pattern color of the arced wall 4 Select the south arced wall. 10 On the Design Bar. click Edit/New. 15 Close the exercise file without saving your changes. 12 On the View Control Bar. the Coarse Scale Fill Color is black and the Coarse Scale Fill Pattern is set to none. View the arced wall in fine detail 11 In the Project Browser under Floor Plans. click in the Coarse Scale Fill Color value field. select a shade of gray. By default. 8 In the Type Properties dialog. and click Element Properties. and save the exercise file with a unique name. 13 Zoom in on the arced wall. double-click Level 2. Notice that the surface pattern and color of the brick wall that display in a coarse detail level are not applied because the detail level is set to Fine. . If you create more than one plan region in a file. click Save As. you work with a split-level building model that requires a different view range than the rest of the view. click Modify. The wall type is displayed as solid gray within any view where the Detail Level is set to Coarse. and click OK.

Creating a Plan Region in a Floor Plan In this exercise. Creating a Plan Region in a Floor Plan | 341 . it does not display in the Level 1 floor plan. Because the stepped portion of the walls in the building model is above the cut plane height in the Level 1 floor plan view. Plan regions do not work with linked Revit Architecture files. you create a plan region in the Level 1 floor plan of the following building model.rvt. In the left pane of the Open dialog. By creating a plan region in the view with a different cut plane height. If you are not familiar with view ranges in Revit Architecture. line type. line color. you can display the stepped portion of the walls in the Level 1 floor plan. click Training Files. Dataset ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. refer to the online Help for more information. and you cannot control their visibility. or pattern. and open Metric\m_Plan_Region.coincident edges.

right-click in the Design Bar. and the view depth plane. Specify a point at the intersection of the two dashed blue lines on the bottom right. The cut plane height of the view range for this view is 1200 mm. 3 In the Level 1 view. Add a plan region to view the stepped portion of the model 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar. Plan regions have a single property. view range. the top and bottom clip planes. On the Options Bar. The stepped portion of the project walls and windows are not displayed because the cut plane does not intersect any of the model geometry above this height.View the Level 1 floor plan 1 In the Project Browser. and double-click Level 1. click Lines. 342 | Chapter 9 Viewing . click . In the following illustration. TIP If the View tab of the Design Bar is not active. expand Floor Plans. expand Views (all). click Plan Region. the south elevation is also displayed. You use the view range property to control the cut plane. ■ ■ ■ Specify a point at the intersection of the two dashed blue lines on the top left. so you can view the height of the walls and windows. and click View. which is similar to the view range for plan views. sketch the plan region using the blue tick marks for guidance: ■ On the Design Bar.

Creating a Plan Region in a Floor Plan | 343 . and then click OK twice. the line turns red.■ ■ On the Design Bar. 7 Because the top clip plane value cannot be set lower than the cut plane. click Modify. 5 In the Element Properties dialog. click Finish Sketch. 4 Select the plan region. and click Element Properties. This means that the plan region view is going to cut all geometry at 2800 mm above Level 1. 6 In the View Range dialog. By selecting Parent View’s Level. enter 4000 for the Top Offset. and view depth) in the view range is the same as the level used to define the corresponding plane in the parent view. right-click. you specify that the level used to define each plane (cut plane. under Extents. click Edit for View Range. Press ESC to end the command. select Parent View’s Level (Level 1) for Cut Plane. top and bottom clip planes. 8 Click Apply. When you select the plan region. and enter 2800 for the cut plane Offset. 9 On the Design Bar. The Level 1 floor plan should display as shown in the following illustration. The plan region displays as a dashed green line.

on the File menu. 344 | Chapter 9 Viewing .The following illustration demonstrates how the level 1 floor plan view is being viewed with the plan region. 10 If you want to save your changes. click Save As. and save the exercise file with a unique name. 11 Close the exercise file without saving your changes.

and posters.Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs 10 In this tutorial. you learn to use the AccuRender® Radiosity and Raytrace features in Revit Architecture 2008 to create rendered interior and exterior views of your building information model. and to create walkthroughs of your building information model. billboards. to place and render decals to create signs. 345 . AccuRender is the rendering engine incorporated into Revit Architecture that is used to produce rendered views.

After you create the perspective view. and then raytrace the view to produce the final rendered exterior view. In this exercise. you learn how to create an exterior perspective view of a building model and render it with the AccuRender Raytrace feature. you learn how to view and modify the material that is applied to a building component in a building model. 346 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs .Rendering an Exterior View In this lesson. you: ■ ■ ■ change the texture of the brick material applied to the exterior walls of the building. When you complete these changes. you raytrace a region of the building that includes the exterior wall. and the curtain wall to view and verify the material and texture changes. define a new polished aluminum material and apply it to the curtain wall mullions on the front curtain wall. and create the perspective view that you want to render. the floor. add realistic three-dimensional trees to the building site. You also learn to create a new material and apply it to a building component. change the material of the front terrace of the building from the default material to asphalt. you select a scene that defines the model environment. Applying Materials and Textures to the Building Model In this exercise. You learn to create and apply materials to a building model. You work with a building model that already has material applied to it.

6 Click Cancel three times to return to the 3D view of the building model without making any changes to the exterior finish at this time. Change the brick texture of the exterior wall finish material 7 On the Settings menu. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Verify that the material defined for the exterior finish layer (Layer 1) of the building model is Masonry . verify that Co-house . 8 In the Materials dialog. click . click Training Files. Applying Materials and Textures to the Building Model | 347 . TIP If the tab that you need does not display in the Design Bar.Brick. right-click in the Design Bar. under Construction.Heavyweight block is displayed for Type.Dataset ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. click Edit for Structure.rvt. click Materials. 5 In the Type Properties dialog. 9 Under AccuRender. View the finish material of the exterior walls 1 Verify that the 3D view of the townhouse building model is displayed. and click Edit/New.Brick.Cavity Wall . 4 In the Element Properties dialog. 3 On the Options Bar. under Name. and open Metric\m_Cohouse. 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. select Masonry . and click the tab in the context menu. click Wall. click next to Texture to display the Material Library.

200mm. 27 On the Design Bar. verify that Floor : Floor 1 displays in the Type Selector. Polished and click OK. click Materials. You can view the new brick texture when you raytrace a region of the building in a later step. Change the material of the terrace from the default material to asphalt 13 On the Design Bar. expand Metals. and click . 10 In the left pane of the Material Library dialog. 24 In the Material Library. 19 Click OK four times. select Carib. click Modify. 22 In the New Material dialog. and click 15 In the Element Properties dialog. 18 In the Materials dialog.Plain. 28 Select one of the curtain wall mullions on the exterior face of the building. click Edit/New. 21 In the Materials dialog. .Running. 14 On the Options Bar. under _accurender. 12 Click OK twice. for Layer 2. enter Aluminum. click Duplicate. click in the Material field that contains Default Floor. expand Masonry and click Brick. 26 Click OK twice.A preview of the brick texture that is currently assigned to the walls is displayed in the right pane of the Material Library. 25 Under Name. select Polished. 17 In the Edit Assembly dialog. click Modify and select the terrace in front of the building. 23 Under AccuRender. under Name. and click Aluminum. click Edit for Structure.Asphalt. 348 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . Define a new polished aluminum material and apply it to the curtain wall mullions 20 On the Settings menu. select Site . under Construction. under _accurender. 11 Under Name. under Name. click next to Texture to display the Material Library. 16 In the Type Properties dialog.

32 In the Materials dialog. 36 In the Scene Selection dialog. 30 In the Element Properties dialog. under Name. under Materials and Finishes. select Aluminum. click Edit/New. and then click . and curtain wall mullions to which you made material changes. and draw the rectangular region shown in the following illustration. 37 If you are prompted to turn off the lights in the scene. Applying Materials and Textures to the Building Model | 349 . verify that New is selected. and click OK. Raytrace a region of the building to view the material changes that you made 34 On the Rendering tab of the Design Bar. When Curtain Wall Mullions: Rectangular Mullion displays in the Status Bar at the bottom of the screen. select the curtain wall mullion again. floor. 29 On the Options Bar. click Region Raytrace. click in the Material field. 33 Click OK three times. 35 Move the cursor over the building model. select Exterior under Type. 31 In the Type Properties dialog. Make sure the region includes the exterior walls.TIP If you do not select the curtain wall mullion on the first selection. This completes the changes in materials and textures that you make for the building model. press TAB to cycle your selection through different building model components. click . click No. Polished.

“Adding Trees to the Site” on page 350. 39 Proceed to the next exercise. floor. Cnst. and curtain wall mullions are rendered (this takes a few moments). click Display Model to end the Region Raytrace command and redisplay the building model in hidden line wireframe. producing a photorealistic effect.The portion of the building that you selected is raytraced and the materials that you changed and applied to the exterior walls. when you render an exterior view of the model. 350 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . Adding Trees to the Site In this exercise. Add red maple trees to the site 1 In the Project Browser. 38 On the Design Bar. m_Cohouse. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise.rvt. expand Floor Plans. the leaves of the trees display as indicated by the season and location specified in the render scene settings. In a later exercise. you place two different types of trees on the building site. and double-click 1st Flr. expand Views (all).

The tree that you selected in this step is a red maple. Available tree types are listed in the Type Selector by their Latin names. 3 On the Site tab of the Design Bar. click Site Component. 4 In the Type Selector. 5 Move the cursor to a location on the building site. and click Site. click Modify. select M_Tree .9 Meters. 7 In the Type Selector. and add it to the site 6 On the Design Bar. select any of the deciduous trees.2 Zoom out so you can easily view the area surrounding the building model. Adding Trees to the Site | 351 . TIP If the Site tab is not displayed. Create a new type of tree. and click . and click Site Component. right-click in the Design Bar.Deciduous : Acer Rubrum . Continue to place trees until you have added several red maples to the building site as shown in the following illustration. and click to place a tree.

15 Under Other. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. select Oak. and click OK.rvt. 18 Proceed to the next exercise. The black oak is shorter than the red maple trees that you added to the site. and then click display the Plant Library. 352 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . under Identity Data. and click Deciduous. enter 7000mm for Plant Height. and click OK. you define the exterior perspective view of the building model that you want to render. 13 Under Name. “Creating a Perspective View” on page 352. as shown in the following illustration. under accurender. Creating a Perspective View In this exercise. click Edit/New. and place two black oak trees. 12 In the Plant Library. click in the Value field for Plant Name. expand Trees and Shrubs.8 In the Element Properties dialog. 14 In the Type Properties dialog. 11 In the Type Properties dialog. under Other. to 17 Press ESC to end tree placement. 9 In the Type Properties dialog. 16 Move the cursor to the building site. m_Cohouse. 10 In the Name dialog. enter Black Oak. Black. select Black Oak for Type Comments. and click OK twice. click Duplicate.

Place a camera in the first floor view 1 With the 1st Flr. view open. Cnst. 3 Select and move the crop boundary grips until the perspective view displays as in the following illustration. The new perspective view is displayed. Specify the second point in front of the building facade to define the target point of the camera. 2 Add the camera to the view by specifying points for the camera position and the camera target point: ■ ■ Specify the first point on the site facing the building to position the camera. click Camera. Creating a Perspective View | 353 . on the View tab of the Design Bar.

354 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . view. 6 Select and move the FOV boundary grip to adjust the field of vision and back clipping plane as shown in the following illustration.Modify the camera position and back clipping plane in the perspective view 4 In the Project Browser under Views (all). The camera position is displayed in the 1st Flr. 5 In the Project Browser under Floor Plans. right-click 3D View 1 (the default perspective view name). Cnst. The red triangle represents the FOV (field of vision) angle and the back clipping plane of the view. Cnst. double-click 1st Flr. expand 3D Views. and click Show Camera.

“Selecting a Scene and Rendering the View” on page 355.rvt. double-click Exterior. Selecting a Scene and Rendering the View | 355 . date. right-click 3D View 1. and environment settings that you use to render the view. enter Exterior. Display the perspective view 1 In the Project Browser under 3D Views. under 3D Views. 8 In the Rename View dialog. and click OK. lighting. m_Cohouse. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. Selecting a Scene and Rendering the View In this exercise.7 In the Project Browser. 9 Proceed to the next exercise. place. you select a scene and specify time. and click Rename.

356 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . click the Solar Angles tab. verify that Daylight Savings Time is selected. click Settings. 4 In the Render Scene Settings dialog. 5 In the Sun and Sky Settings dialog. under Scene Settings. click OK to accept the existing scene (Scene 1). Select the render scene settings 2 On the Rendering tab of the Design Bar. 3 In the Scene Selection dialog. 8 Under Time. clear Use Sun and Shadow Settings from view. and click Sun. TIP Use the left and right arrow keys to adjust the minutes precisely. Notice that the name of the tab changes to Date and Time. Time. 7 Under Date. and drag the slider to set the time to 2:30 PM. enter 10 (October) for Month and 5 for Day.You must define a scene because this is the first time settings are being applied to this view. and Place from the Specify Solar Angles list. 6 Select By Date.

click Image Size. MA. The rendered exterior perspective view is displayed.00 (many clouds.) 14 Click OK. click No. 22 In the Render Scene Settings dialog. Save the rendered view 29 On the Design Bar. 25 Enter 150 for Resolution. 19 In the Material Library. Rye.9 Click the Place tab. select Good for Quality. 21 Click OK twice. click Site. under _accurender. click Capture Rendering. 28 If you are prompted to turn off the lights in the scene. select Autumn for Plant Season. and click OK. 27 On the Options Bar. and enter bo. USA. click Raytrace. The rendered view is saved in the project and can be accessed from the Project Browser. and select Boston.20 for Cloudiness. select Grass. 13 Enter . click Environment. 16 In the Environment dialog. 26 On the Design Bar. Render the perspective view 24 On the Design Bar. under Background Color. click . This setting produces a level of cloudiness in the sky that ranges from 0 (no clouds) to 1. 17 Under Advanced. The Ground Plane tab displays. Selecting a Scene and Rendering the View | 357 . under Scene Settings. and click OK. 20 In the Name list. Dark. 23 Under Raytrace Settings. under Scene Settings. verify that Automatic Sky is selected. select Ground Plane. 15 In the Render Scene Settings dialog. 10 Click in the Cities list. 18 Click Material. 12 Click the Settings Tab. 11 Scroll down.

RPC people are represented by a circle in plan view and resemble real people only when rendered in a 3D view. Rendering an Interior View In this lesson. and double-click Exterior to display the rendered view of the townhouse that you saved. you render an interior view of the building model that you worked with in the previous lesson. and double-click 2nd Flr. and finally. on the File menu. 32 If you want to save this exercise. Adding RPC People In this exercise. use both Radiosity and Raytracing to render the view.30 On the Design Bar. you add two RPC people to the interior view that you render in a later exercise. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. click Save As. expand Renderings. To create the rendered scene.rvt. 358 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . 33 Proceed to the next lesson. m_Cohouse. and save the exercise file with a unique name. Redisplay the rendered view 31 In the Project Browser under Views (all). click Display Model to end rendering and redisplay the wireframe perspective view of the building model. expand Floor Plans. “Rendering an Interior View” on page 358. you add ArchVision realpeople (RPC people) to the floor plan of the second floor. Open second floor plan to display the interior scene that you will render 1 In the Project Browser under Views (all). define the view and render scene settings. Cnst.

and then move the cursor to rotate her so she is facing up and to the right (northeast).6 to select and place M_RPC Male: Alex to the right of Cathy and facing up and to the left (northwest). 3 On the Rendering tab of the Design Bar. 5 On the Options Bar. click Component. select M_RPC Female: Cathy. Adding RPC People | 359 . 4 In the Type Selector. 6 Click to place Cathy to the right of the sofa and below the table. select Rotate after placement. 7 Repeat steps 4 .2 Zoom in on the left side of the living room as shown.

Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise.rvt. “Creating the Interior Perspective View” on page 360. click Camera. Add a camera 1 On the View tab of the Design Bar.8 Proceed to the next exercise. 2 Add the camera to the view by specifying points for the camera position and target point: ■ Specify the first point on the floor plan facing the table and RPC people to place the camera. m_Cohouse. you create the interior perspective view that you will render in the final exercise in this lesson. Creating the Interior Perspective View In this exercise. 360 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs .

Cnst. but you must adjust the field of vision and far clipping plane to display more of the view. 3 In the Project Browser under Floor Plans. The interior perspective is displayed. Creating the Interior Perspective View | 361 . double-click 2nd Flr.■ Specify the target point of the camera in front of the corner of the table.

right-click 3D View 1. 5 In the Project Browser under 3D Views. and click OK. click the dimensions for Size. 7 In the Crop Region Size dialog. 362 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . 8 In the Project Browser under 3D Views. enter 229 mm for Width. double-click 3D View 1 to redisplay the interior perspective view. and click Rename. Resize the perspective view 6 On the Options Bar. enter 178 mm for Height.4 Select and move the FOV boundary grip to adjust field of vision and back clipping plane as shown in the following illustration. under Size.

11 On the View menu. A section box is displayed around the building model. click Shading to view the effects of the section box when you add it. under Extents. and click OK. click to display the 3D view of the building model. click View Properties. 15 Select and move the section box grips until only the room that you added RPC people to and that you want to render is visible. enter Interior. 14 On the Design Bar.9 In the Rename View dialog. click Modify. and select the section box. select Section Box. 12 On the View menu. 13 In the Element Properties dialog. Grips are displayed on the section box. Creating the Interior Perspective View | 363 . Add a section box to limit the extents of the rendered view 10 On the View toolbar. and click OK.

and enter Interior Scene for Name. Time. 14 Click Save. select New. click Environment. 9 Under Time. and Place from the Specify Solar Angles list. 17 In the Environment dialog. and click OK. MA. 10 Click the Place tab. and drag the slider to set the time to 8:30 PM. and click Save. clear Use Sun and Shadow Settings from view. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. 11 Click in the Cities list. 16 Proceed to the next exercise. and environment settings used to render the view. Display the interior perspective view 1 In the Project Browser. By limiting the geometry. under Scene Settings. select Interior. 8 Under Date. click OK. enter 6 (June) for Month and 6 for Day. you create a render scene to specify the time. USA. double-click Interior to display the interior perspective view. and click Sun. and select Boston. 15 In the Sun and Sky Settings dialog. Select the render scene settings 2 On the Rendering tab of the Design Bar. Creating a New Render Scene In this exercise. 5 In the Render Scene Settings dialog. 364 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . under 3D Views. you reduce the rendering time. 7 Select By Date. place. m_Cohouse. 13 Click the Settings tab. 4 Under Type. verify that Daylight Savings Time is selected. and enter bo. date. under Background Color. 12 Scroll down. click the Solar Angles tab. under Scene Settings. Notice that the name of the tab changes to Date and Time. 6 In the Sun and Sky Settings dialog. on the Main tab. click Settings. TIP Use the left and right arrow keys to precisely adjust the minutes. 3 In the Scene Selection dialog.rvt. verify that Automatic Sky is selected.This process allows you to limit the geometry that will be rendered when you create a rendering of your interior view. 16 In the Render Scene Settings dialog. “Creating a New Render Scene” on page 364. specify a file location and name for the scene settings.

The 3D view of the building model with the section box is displayed. under 3D Views. Rye. select Grass. 21 In the Name list. click Daylights. under Use View’s Section Box. Defining Daylights and Rendering the View | 365 . 22 Click OK twice. select Ground Plane. double-click {3D}. m_Cohouse. such as windows and doors. as daylight sources. select {3D}. When you define daylights for the curtain wall panels. “Defining Daylights and Rendering the View” on page 365. Defining Daylights and Rendering the View In this exercise. 3 Select the curtain wall on the second floor (Walls: Curtain Wall. 5 On the Design Bar. Dark. Curtain Wall 1). select Summer for Plant Season. click Radiate. and click OK. 23 In the Render Scene Settings dialog. Render the perspective view 4 In the Project Browser under 3D Views. 24 Under Scene Settings. under accurender. 25 Proceed to the next exercise. 19 Click Material. you define daylights for the glazed panels of the curtain wall and render the view. The Ground Plane tab displays. 2 On the Rendering tab of the Design Bar. click Site. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. Define daylights for the glazed panels of the curtain wall 1 In the Project Browser.rvt.18 Under Advanced. 6 In the Radiosity Information dialog. 20 In the Material Library. you allow sunlight to pass through the panels when you render the view. You can select families with transparent materials. double-click Interior. click OK.

you rendered an exterior and an interior view. When radiate completes. Light bounce is calculated for each individual light. which can take several minutes. click Save As. and save the exercise file with a unique name. and click The raytraced perspective view is displayed and now includes the RPC people. the following rendered view is displayed. By completing the two rendering lessons included in this tutorial. The RPC people do not display in the view until you raytrace them in the next steps. begins. on the File menu. 8 On the Options Bar. 7 On the Design Bar. 9 If you want to save your changes. select Medium (150 dpi) for Resolution. 366 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . click Raytrace. You learned to use both the Radiosity and Raytracing features included in the AccuRender render engine.The radiosity process. . 10 Close the exercise file.

click Settings ➤ Project Units. Creating and Recording Walkthroughs | 367 . which is the path that a camera will follow through your building model. or section view. You create a walkthrough that begins in the breakfast room of the townhouse. elevation. Usually you define the walkthrough path in a plan view.Creating and Recording Walkthroughs In this lesson. you learn how to create and record animated walkthroughs of your building models in Revit Architecture 2008. and ends in the far corner of the living room. The walkthrough path is a spline. proceeds through the dining room. and you create it by specifying points that create the spline. but you can also define it in a 3D. and open Common\c_Townhouse. Each point becomes a key frame in the walkthrough. NOTE Some Imperial values are used by default in this exercise. Dataset ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. Recording a Walkthrough After you create a walkthrough. you can select one of the following display options for the building model in your walkthrough: ■ ■ ■ ■ Wireframe Hidden Line (wireframe view with hidden lines) Shaded or Shaded with Edges AccuRender (Raytrace) IMPORTANT If you record your walkthrough AVI with the AccuRender display option. Additional frames that comprise the walkthrough are created between the key frames. You can edit the walkthrough path by selecting and moving the key frames. Creating and Editing a Walkthrough The first step in creating a walkthrough is to define the walkthrough path.rvt. and change unit formats as desired. but you can also create it in a 3D orthographic view. Creating a Walkthrough In this exercise. click Training Files. A walkthrough is created in a 3D perspective view by default. you must select or define a scene. If you prefer to use Metric values. In the left pane of the Open dialog. In a plan view. you can record the walkthrough by exporting it to an AVI file that you can play with any available video player independent of your Revit Architecture software. you learn how to create and edit a walkthrough of the first floor of a townhouse. When you export your walkthrough to an AVI. you can also specify the height of the camera along the walkthrough path.

click . The floor plan of the first floor of the townhouse is displayed. 6 After you specify the final point of the walkthrough path in the Living room. 5 Specify four additional points to define key frame positions on the walkthrough path as shown in the following illustration. TIP If the tab that you need does not display in the Design Bar. on the Options Bar. expand Views (all). expand Walkthroughs. 3 On the Options Bar. Edit and play the walkthrough 7 In the Project Browser under Views (all). verify that Perspective is selected to create the walkthrough in a 3D perspective view. of the walkthrough. and double-click 1st Floor. 4 Move the cursor under the text label in the Breakfast room. 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar.Create a walkthrough of the first floor of the building model 1 In the Project Browser. and double-click Walkthrough 1. click Walkthrough. 368 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . or the first key frame. right-click in the Design Bar. and click to specify the start point. expand Floor Plans. and click the tab in the context menu.

8 Verify that the crop boundary of the walkthrough frame is selected and is displayed as red with blue grips. and select the crop boundary. Your frame may look a bit different from the frame in the illustration because the walkthrough path is not precisely the same. 14 Click . 12 On the View menu. The walkthrough controls are displayed on the Options Bar. 9 On the Options Bar. Two options are displayed on the Options Bar: Edit Walkthrough and Size. Creating a Walkthrough | 369 . 10 In the Crop Region Size dialog. verify Field of view is selected. 13 On the Options Bar. and click OK. 11 Under Change. select the crop boundary. click the dimensions for Size to change the size of the walkthrough frame crop region. click Edit Walkthrough.The last frame of the walkthrough is displayed. click Zoom ➤ Zoom Out (2x). The frame that is displayed is frame 300 of 300 frames in the walkthrough. If it is not. surrounded by a crop boundary with grips as shown in the following illustration. enter 16" for Width and 9" for Height.

Changing the Walkthrough Path and Camera Position In this exercise. Change the properties of the camera 1 In the Project Browser under Floor Plans. 17 Click . The walkthrough path is displayed in the floor plan of the first floor. clear Far Clip Active. The walkthrough plays.15 In the Walkthrough Frames dialog. double-click 1st Floor. The current display is wireframe with hidden lines. and click OK. and click OK. 18 When the walkthrough stops playing. under Extents. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. you learn how to edit the walkthrough path and change the camera position in the walkthrough that you created in the previous exercise. enter 1 for Frame. 16 On the Options Bar. Clearing this option disables the far clipping plane of the camera. click Edit Walkthrough. click . “Changing the Walkthrough Path and Camera Position” on page 370. enter 60 to reduce the total number of frames in the walkthrough from 300 to 60. 2 On the Options Bar. proceed to the next exercise. press ESC. 370 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . 3 In the Element Properties dialog. c_Townhouse.rvt. Edit the walkthrough path 4 On the Options Bar. NOTE To stop playing the walkthrough at any time. and press ENTER to set the walkthrough to play from the beginning (the key frame).

Your walkthrough path may vary from the one in the illustration so do not be concerned if the camera displays at a slightly different location.The camera is displayed at the first key frame position on the walkthrough path in the breakfast room. 6 On the Options Bar. 5 Select the target point of the camera (the magenta grip). and adjust it to view the kitchen as shown in the following illustration. Changing the Walkthrough Path and Camera Position | 371 . Blue grips are displayed at each key frame. select Path for Controls. You can move any camera target or key frame position.

c_Townhouse. Recording the Walkthrough In this exercise. and drag it to the location shown in the following illustration. but that do not suffer loss due to compression quality. click Export ➤ Walkthrough. It produces files that are larger than compressed files. The AVI is recorded. 372 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . under Walkthroughs.rvt. without opening Revit Architecture 2008. select <Shading> for Display mode. 3 Under Output Length. 10 Proceed to the next exercise. the Full Frames (Uncompressed) option is available to all users. you record the walkthrough that you created in the previous exercise by exporting it to an AVI. you can select to display the walkthrough in wireframe. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. 9 On the Options Bar. shaded. When you export the walkthrough. specify a path and a file name for the AVI. If you are unsure of what option to use. shaded with edges. 5 In the Video Compression dialog. “Recording the Walkthrough” on page 372. 4 Under Format. double-click Walkthrough 1.7 Click the third key frame position. Play the walkthrough to view the changes that you made 8 In the Project Browser. 1 On the File menu. hidden line. click Edit Walkthrough. specify 15 for Frames per Second. and click OK. 2 In the Save As dialog. or with AccuRender raytracing. and then click to play the walkthrough. NOTE The available Compressor options are specific to your current computer system. and click Save. 6 Double-click the AVI file to play the walk-through from the location that you specified in step 3. select any codec (compression/decompression) that is available on your system for Compressor.

8 If you want to save this exercise. on the File menu. perhaps to 6” wide x 4” height. and with a frame rate of from 15-30 frames per second. 9 Close the exercise file without saving your changes. click Save As. Recording the Walkthrough | 373 . and save the exercise file with a unique name.7 Try creating other walkthroughs. If you had 150 frames and a frame rate of 15 seconds. Reducing the size of the output images and managing the frame rate lets you create realistic and smooth movement. reducing the size of the image. then you are moving from the breakfast area to the living room window in 10 seconds. specifying the number of frames.

374 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs .

you create interior and exterior views of a building information model to be used in solar studies that you define. you learn how a solar study of different perspective views of a building can support passive solar design by showing where shadows fall during the warmest time of the day and at different times throughout the year. Interior solar studies can illustrate how effectively natural light penetrates inside a building during specific times of the day and year. In this tutorial. Exterior solar studies can show the impact of shadows on a site by the terrain and the surrounding buildings. 375 . You specify settings for summer and winter solstice solar studies and export one solar study as a video and the other as a series of images. More specifically.Creating Solar Studies 11 The ability to create solar studies for a specific project and site can be very valuable for creating sustainable designs.

expand Floor Plans. you learn to create three 3D views of a building information model for use with solar studies. ■ ■ ■ A courtyard perspective view illustrates how shadows impact the site and buildings. The view you create may differ slightly from the illustrations in the exercises because of minor variations in camera placement. A cut section view enables you to see the effect of shadows and light on the interior of a building. A plan view provides information on how sunlight and shadows play on the floor of a building. and open Common\c_Solar_Study. expand Views (all). 376 | Chapter 11 Creating Solar Studies . 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar. as shown. Creating a Solar Study . click Camera.Courtyard View In this exercise. 1 In the Project Browser. In the left pane of the Open dialog.rvt. click Training Files.Creating Views for Solar Studies In this lesson. 3 Click in the lower right corner of the drawing area outside of the courtyard to place the camera and click in the upper left corner above the courtyard to place the camera target point. A 3D view is created. Dataset ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. you customize a 3D external view of the building to enhance Solar Study analysis. and double-click 01 Entry.

10 On the File menu. double-click 01 Entry.rvt dataset you saved in the previous exercise. Dataset Continue to use the c_Solar_Study. right-click 3D View 1. and drag the blue circular controls to see more of the perspective view. click Modify. 5 In the Dynamic View dialog. you create a section cutaway view. under Floor Plans.4 On the View toolbar. as shown. enter Solar Study . 8 In the Project Browser. Creating a Solar Study Section Cutaway View In this exercise. 7 Click the view boundary to select it. as shown. Creating a Solar Study Section Cutaway View | 377 . “Creating a Solar Study Section Cutaway View” on page 377. 9 In the Rename View dialog. 2 Enter ZR to zoom in on the house. and click Rename. 6 On the Design Bar. 11 Proceed to the next exercise. and click OK. if necessary. expand 3D Views. and save the exercise file with a unique name.Courtyard View. click Spin and move the cursor in the drawing area to adjust the view. Create section 1 In the Project Browser. click to reorient the view. click Save As.

expand Sections. double-click the section head. 6 To view the section. right-click Section 1.3 On the Design Bar. enter Section for Solar Study Cutaway. 8 In the Rename View dialog. click 10 On the View toolbar. 5 On the Design Bar. and click Rename. to reorient the view. 4 Click to the right of reference plane 9 between A and B and. 378 | Chapter 11 Creating Solar Studies . and click OK. click Modify. and then click to the left outside of the house to sketch the horizontal section line shown in the following illustration. Create 3D section view 9 On the View toolbar. click Section. click . 7 In the Project Browser.

right-click {3D}. and under Orient to a View. and click OK. then select Medium. changing to Medium or Fine provides a better view for a shadow study. click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. as shown. On the Annotation Categories tab. 3 Click in the upper left corner and lower right corner to sketch a selection around the site. 19 Proceed to the next exercise. 15 In the Rename View dialog. you create a plan cutaway view. Typical plan views. so no shadows will be cast from these elements. 16 On the View Control Bar. Create callout 1 In the Project Browser. under Floor Plans. then Fine. enter Solar Study Section Cutaway. 17 To hide the section box. Creating a Solar Study Plan Cutaway View | 379 . including the house. 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar. clear Section Boxes. 18 On the File menu. Dataset Continue to use the c_Solar_Study. 14 In the Project Browser. click Callout. do not display many elements in 3D. select Section: 12 In the Dynamic View dialog. click Save. double-click 01 Entry.11 In the Dynamic View dialog. some structural elements are shown as a single line rather than solid and do not cast a shadow. NOTE With the detail level set to Coarse. to expand the dialog. In some cases. such as floor plans and ceiling plans. click Detail Level ➤ Coarse. under 3D Views. as shown. click Section for Solar Study Cutaway. click Modify. and click OK. and click Rename. “Creating a Solar Study Plan Cutaway View” on page 379. NOTE A plan view of a shadow study should be created in a 3D view with top orientation. Creating a Solar Study Plan Cutaway View In this exercise. click Spin and move the cursor to adjust the view down and to the right.rvt dataset you saved in the previous exercise. 13 On the Design Bar.

as shown. to reorient the view. click 8 On the View toolbar. and click OK. 10 In the Dynamic View dialog. and click Rename. enter Solar Study Callout for Plan Cutaway. click . as shown. 6 In the Rename View dialog. and under Orient to a View. 13 Select the blue down arrow control at the bottom of the model and drag down to expose the full first level of the model. Create 3D Plan View 7 On the View toolbar. under Floor Plans. right-click Callout of 01 Entry. 5 In the Project Browser. double-click Callout of 01 Entry. select Floor Plan: Solar Study Callout for Plan Cutaway. click Spin and move the cursor to adjust the view to the right and back to view the front side. 14 Select the blue up arrow control in the center of the model and drag up to expose the second floor of the building. 9 In the Dynamic View dialog click to expand the dialog. 380 | Chapter 11 Creating Solar Studies . click Modify.4 In the Project Browser. 11 On the Design Bar. 12 Select the section box in the drawing area.

Display study views 22 In the Project Browser. so you can see into the building from the top. click Temporary Hide/Isolate ➤ Hide Category. 19 In the Rename View dialog. enter Solar Study Plan Cutaway. and click OK. Creating a Solar Study Plan Cutaway View | 381 . and click Rename. click Save. 20 On the View Control Bar.15 Select the Roof. right-click {3D}. click Temporary Hide/Isolate ➤ Reset Temporary Hide/Isolate. double-click each of the sun study 3D views that you created in this lesson: ■ ■ ■ Solar Study . 16 On the View Control Bar.Courtyard View Solar Study Plan Cutaway Solar Study Section Cutaway These views will be used in additional lessons in this tutorial. 18 In the Project Browser. 21 On the File menu. under 3D Views. 17 On the View Control Bar. click Detail Level ➤ Fine. under 3D Views.

or multi-day solar study. .rvt dataset you used in the previous lesson. click . The Sun and Shadows Settings dialog displays. 7 Create a Single-Day study from an existing study. expand 3D Views. and click OK. you create a solar study for winter and summer solstice. you create a single-day solar study for the summer solstice. and time. expand Views (all). 3 Select Cast Shadows. USA is selected. Creating Solar Studies . 9 In the Name dialog. you specify the location. 382 | Chapter 11 Creating Solar Studies . click Changing the place in this dialog changes the setting defined for the project. 10 Under Place. date. click Shadows ➤ Advanced Model Graphics. enter Summer Solstice. CA. 4 Under Sun and Shadows Settings. and double-click Solar Study . Dataset Continue to use the customized c_solar_study. and click OK. 6 Click the Multi-Day tab. as well as a time interval for the frames of the solar animation. and click Duplicate. select Los Angeles. single-day. USA. and time range. Los Angeles. 2 On the View Control Bar. and preview the effects of each study as an animation. 11 In the Manage Place and Locations dialog. leave the slider at 50. MA. Create summer solstice study 1 In the Project Browser.Courtyard View. You can change the intensity of the shadows by dragging the slider in the Shadow field. Click the Single-Day tab. as well as a time interval for the frames of the solar animation. 5 Click the Single-Day tab.Saving Solar Study Settings and Previewing Animations In this lesson. date range. click . you specify the location. 8 Confirm that One Day Solar Study . For the Single-Day solar study. For this study.Boston. The animations of solar activity at a particular place and time allow you to study the impact of natural light and shadows on the buildings and site. You can create a still. for City.Summer and Winter Solstice In this exercise. For the Multi-Day solar study.

for Date. select June 22. select Winter Solstice. under Frame. 3 In the Advanced Model Graphics dialog. Under Frame. NOTE If you clear Sunrise to sunset. verify that Sunrise to sunset is selected. click Shadows ➤ Advanced Model Graphics. you preview the solar studies you created in the previous exercise. Los Angeles. on the Single-Day tab. ■ ■ To display the previous sequential frame. verify that the value is set to 15 minutes.rvt dataset you saved in the previous exercise. and click OK. Los Angeles. 7 On the Options Bar. 13 Select Ground Plane at Level. and click OK. click OK. click Save. 2 On the View Control Bar. 14 In this case. Los Angeles is selected. Dataset Continue to use the c_Solar_Study. click To display the next key frame. 19 On the File menu. click the control buttons to preview the animation: ■ To display the previous key frame. under Sun and Shadows Settings. 6 On the View Control Bar. click .12 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog: ■ ■ For Date. enter Winter Solstice. enter 20 and press ENTER. 18 In the Advanced Model Graphics dialog. click Shadows ➤ Preview Solar Study.Courtyard View is currently displayed. select December 22. you want to see how the shadows fall on the terrain and not for a specific level. click . click OK. 5 In the Advanced Model Graphics dialog. ■ For Time Interval. 8 On the Options Bar. Previewing Solar Study Animation In this exercise. You can select the level to be used for shadow display. Create winter solstice study 15 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. Notice that 01 Entry is selected as the level. 16 In the Name dialog. and click Duplicate. confirm that Summer Solstice. enter 10 and press ENTER. 20 Proceed to the next exercise. and click OK. For Time Range. 4 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. you can specify the start and stop times for the solar study. 2006. you can specify to go to a specific frame in the solar study animation: ■ ■ Under Frame. click . Preview winter solstice animation 1 Confirm that the 3D View Solar Study . “Previewing Solar Study Animation” on page 383. Clear Ground Plane at Level. 2006. . Previewing Solar Study Animation | 383 . 17 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog.

13 On the View Control Bar. Click and enter Dining. click OK. Dataset Continue to use the c_Solar_Study. click Text. you annotate a floor plan to identify different activities for the building and export a solar study for a cutaway view as an AVI video file. Each PNG is a still image of a sequential frame in the animation. on the Single-Day tab. Click in the drawing area and enter Living Area. AVI files are standalone video files that can be easily distributed and viewed by colleagues or clients. approximately as shown. The solar study animation plays. click Shadows ➤ Advanced Model Graphics. 12 In the Advanced Model Graphics dialog. 2 Enter ZR and zoom in on the house. Annotate view for solar study 1 In the Project Browser. Preview summer solstice animation 9 On the View Control Bar. PNG format images can be easily displayed on a web site or sent via e-mail. 384 | Chapter 11 Creating Solar Studies . and click OK. click . Exporting Solar Studies In this lesson.■ To display the next sequential frame. double-click 01 Entry. . Los Angeles. click . under Floor Plans.rvt dataset you saved in the previous lesson. select Summer Solstice. approximately as shown. showing the progression at 15-minute intervals for the location and date specified. Click outside of the text box to end the command. 10 In the Advanced Model Graphics dialog. 14 On the Options Bar. Exporting the Study as AVI In this exercise. click Shadows ➤ Preview Solar Study. under Sun and Shadows Settings. 11 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. ■ NOTE You can stop viewing the animation at any time by clicking Cancel in the Status Bar. click To play the animation from start to finish. 3 Label areas in the house: ■ ■ ■ ■ On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. You also export the winter solstice solar study as a series of PNG format images. click . you export the summer solstice solar study as an AVI file.

On the Options Bar. 10 In the Advanced Model Graphics dialog. expand 3D Views. click . 11 To display the section box. Exporting the Study as AVI | 385 . 7 In the Advanced Model Graphics dialog. as shown. select Summer Solstice. 5 In the Project Browser. select Section Boxes. as shown. and click OK. and double-click Solar Study Section Cutaway. 9 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog.4 Sketch rooms: ■ On the Design Bar. 8 Under Sun and Shadows Settings. Los Angeles. click Shadows ➤ Advanced Model Graphics. click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. NOTE The building is a shell and you are considering alternative layouts for the interior space. on the Single-Day tab. click . click Lines. Click in the drawing area and sketch around the Dining area. click OK. On the Annotation Categories tab. 6 On the View Control Bar. and click OK. Sketching the living and dining room areas in the house and using a solar study to determine where direct light is in the floor plan helps to determine the best layout. ■ ■ ■ Click in the drawing area and sketch a rectangle around the living area. verify that Cast Shadows is selected.

12 In the drawing area. and enter ZF to zoom to fit the building to the drawing area. if necessary. enter 450 in the first field (width). enter Summer Solar Study Section Cutaway . clear Section Boxes. select Frame range. For Dimensions. 17 Complete the information in the Save As dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Click the Desktop icon on the left to save the file to the computer Desktop. For File name. To maintain the proportions of the frame. as shown. Export as AVI 16 Click File menu ➤ Export ➤ Animated Solar Study. 15 To hide the section box.Los Angeles. you only enter one dimension and the other one is calculated automatically. verify that Hidden Line is selected. For Save as type. click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. select AVI Files. and enter 5 to 50. and click in the second field (height) to see the value dynamically changed. for Model Graphics Style. and click OK. 14 Click outside of the section box. On the Annotation Categories tab. The equivalent zoom percentage is also set if you specify frame dimensions. For Frames per second. verify that the value is set to 15. select the section box. 386 | Chapter 11 Creating Solar Studies . Under Output Length. Under Format. NOTE ZR for Zoom To Region to make it easier to select the control. 13 Click the right blue control and drag the right edge of the section box to reveal the roof overhang.

the Frame Range was set to just 5 files to avoid cluttering the Desktop. 3 Under Sun and Shadows Settings. enter 450 in the first field (width). click Save.Los Angeles. BMP. it is recommended that you first create a folder to export to because the export process creates several files. TIFF. To view the animation. NOTE When you export to PNG. for Model Graphics Style. click OK. or frame. 8 In the Save As dialog. The animation plays as the AVI file is saved to the Desktop. such as JPEG. and click OK. on the Single-Day tab. select Winter Solstice. 21 Proceed to the next exercise. The animation plays as the files are saved to the Desktop. click Save. For Frames per second. For Dimensions. depending on the Frame Range. click Shadows ➤ Advanced Model Graphics. or any single-frame format. Exporting a Study as PNG In this lesson. you open each image. “Exporting a Study as PNG” on page 387. verify that the value is set to 15. and click OK. select Frame range. In this example. For Save as type. and click in the second field (height) to see the value dynamically changed. NOTE Uncompressed AVI files can be zipped to reduce the file size. Limiting the range from 5 to 50 omits these frames. The AVI can then typically be played from within the zip file. Under Output Length. verify that Full Frames (Uncompressed) is selected. 6 Click File menu ➤ Export ➤ Animated Solar Study.rvt dataset you saved in the previous exercise. enter Winter Solar Study Section Cutaway . Los Angeles. 18 In the Save As dialog. 4 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. Dataset Continue to use the c_Solar_Study. 7 Complete the information in the Save As dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Click the Desktop icon. as shown: Exporting a Study as PNG | 387 . 20 On the File menu. 19 In the Video Compression dialog. of the animation separately. 2 On the View Control Bar. The resulting PNG images are date and time stamped. select PNG. for Compressor. Export as PNG 1 Confirm that the 3D View Solar Study Section Cutaway is displayed. 5 In the Advanced Model Graphics dialog. For File name. Under Format. click Save. and enter 5 to 10. verify that Hidden Line is selected. or GIF.NOTE The first and last few frames (sunrise and sunset) show large triangular shadows from the terrain. you export the Winter Solstice Solar Study to create a solar animation that is output as individual ping (PNG format) graphics. click .

double-click Solar Study Plan Cutaway. 388 | Chapter 11 Creating Solar Studies . 2 Select the section box in the drawing area. Create plan interior view 1 In the Project Browser. you create an internal solar study for a plan to determine where shadows fall inside the building during the warmest part of the day.rvt dataset you saved in the previous lesson. you create a 3D view of a plan and create a solar study to animate the effects of natural light on the inside of the building. click Save. Creating an Internal Plan Solar Study In this lesson. Dataset Continue to use the c_Solar_Study. Creating an Internal Plan Study In this exercise.9 On the File menu. under 3D Views.

click Temporary Hide/Isolate ➤ Hide Category. 3 Select the blue left arrow control and drag it to the left to expose the roof overhang and posts. as shown. and on the View Control Bar.NOTE Enter ZF for Zoom To Fit if necessary to see the entire building on the screen. 5 Select the roof. Hiding the roof allows you to see how shadows fall on the interior floor of the building. 4 Click View menu ➤ Orient ➤ Top. Creating an Internal Plan Study | 389 .

and click Save. The animation plays as the AVI file is saved to the desktop. click Save. for name enter 2pm Los Angeles Plan Cutaway. click OK. for File name enter 2pm . 16 In the Video Compression dialog. 8 On the View Control Bar. and click OK. and click OK. 11 Select Multi Day Solar Study . you compare how shadows display when the project is oriented to Project North and when it is changed to True North. 15 Export the animation: ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Export ➤ Animated Solar Study. In the Save As dialog. click Shadows ➤ Solar Study Off. For Time Interval. for Compressor. Orienting to True North for Solar Studies In this lesson.Create multi-day solar study 6 To hide the section box. Notice that the dining area receives full sun during the warmest part of the day. Clear Ground Plane at Level so that the shadows fall on the terrain. 390 | Chapter 11 Creating Solar Studies . click the Multi-Day tab. specify 2:00 pm. 18 On the File menu. and click OK. select One week. For Time. Click the Desktop icon. 7 Adjust settings on the View Control Bar: ■ ■ Click Shadows ➤ Shadows On. clear Section Boxes. USA.Week Interval. and click Duplicate. On the Annotation Categories tab.Los Angeles . MA. 9 On the Advanced Model Graphics dialog. under Sun and Shadows Settings. and click OK. 17 On the View Control Bar. 12 In the Name dialog. click 10 On the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. 14 In the Advanced Model Graphics dialog. 13 Specify values for the multi-day study: ■ ■ ■ . click Shadows ➤ Advanced Model Graphics.Boston. click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. select Full Frames (Uncompressed). Click Detail Level ➤ Fine.

For example. change the time back to 12:00 PM. Then. you create still solar studies and observe that the shadows extend straight up when the project is set to the default orientation of Project North. so you may need to make your own adjustment for specific studies.Orienting to True North Drafting convention is that project north is the top of the view. and click OK.rvt dataset you saved in the previous exercise. click . NOTE Solar Studies do not have a Daylight Savings setting. 7 Under Sun and Shadows Settings. click Shadows ➤ Advanced Model Graphics. Orienting to True North | 391 . on the Still tab. 2 On the View Control Bar. select Summer Solstice. and select Winter Solstice. 11 Under Date and Time. click . View still solar studies 1 Confirm that the 3D View Solar Study Plan Cutaway is displayed in the drawing area. 8 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. Notice that the shadows display in an upward direction in the cutaway view. 5 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. In this exercise. click . and click OK. 10 Under Sun and Shadows Settings. specify 11:00 AM for time. you change the orientation to True North to see how the change in orientation can impact solar study accuracy. Dataset Continue to use the c_Solar_Study. to see the sun at its highest point on June 22. click the Still tab. and click OK. you would set the time to 1:00 PM rather than 12:00 PM. select Cast Shadows. 4 Under Sun and Shadows Settings. 3 In the Advanced Model Graphics dialog. 9 Under Date and Time. 6 In the Advanced Model Graphics dialog. click Apply.

16 In the Advanced Model Graphics dialog. 14 Under Sun and Shadows Settings.12 In the Advanced Model Graphics dialog. enter 45 and press ENTER to set the angle of rotation. 18 Orient the project to True North: ■ ■ ■ ■ Right-click in the drawing area. 13 On the View Control Bar. double-click 01 Entry. Notice that the project rotates in the view. 15 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. Rotate project to True North 17 In the Project Browser. in the Angle from Project to True North field. click OK. click the Still tab. click . for Orientation. under Graphics. click Shadows ➤ Advanced Model Graphics. and click OK. and click OK. Click Tools menu ➤ Project Position/Orientation ➤ Rotate True North. and select View Properties. select True North. In the Element Properties dialog. under Floor Plans. On the Options Bar. click OK. 392 | Chapter 11 Creating Solar Studies . and select Winter Solstice. NOTE You must go to a plan view to set True North and you must change the view graphics to True North before you can change the angle value.

select Summer Solstice. Orienting to True North | 393 . enter True North Summer Solstice Plan Cutaway. click the Single-Day tab. 25 In the Advanced Model Graphics dialog. 19 In the Project Browser. and click Apply. including the angle from True North. Notice that the shadows lengthen now that the project is oriented to True North. Los Angeles. click the Still tab. In the Save As dialog. under 3D Views. 21 On the View Control Bar. For Save as type. for File name. click Summer Solstice. and click OK.NOTE Settings for the location and orientation. 24 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. double-click Solar Study Plan Cutaway. 23 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. 20 Click View menu ➤ Refresh. click OK. Export animated solar study 26 Export the animation: ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Export ➤ Animated Solar Study. click . verify that AVI Files is selected. are saved with the project. click Shadows ➤ Advanced Model Graphics. 22 Under Sun and Shadows Settings.

and select View Properties. Right-click in the drawing area. and click in the second dimension field to see the value calculated automatically. Rendered views do not have this limitation.■ Under Format. and exporting it as a JPEG image. enter 600 in the first field. 4 Render the scene: ■ ■ ■ On the Options Bar. Dataset Continue to use the c_Solar_Study. JPEG format images can be easily displayed on a web site or sent via e-mail. On the Options Bar. ■ 27 In the Video Compression dialog. for Compressor. 2 In the Project Browser. capturing it. you confirm that the winter solstice has sunlight in the living room by creating one rendering. and click OK. and click Save. Rendering Interior Shadow Views In this lesson. 29 On the File menu. double-click Solar Study Plan Cutaway. 3 On the Rendering tab of the Design Bar. for Orientation. for Resolution. This would include some exterior views and most interior views. under Floor Plans. under 3D Views. under 3D Views. click Raytrace. select Draft (75 dpi). you also capture the image and export it as a JPEG file for future use. On the Options Bar. 1 In the Project Browser. 394 | Chapter 11 Creating Solar Studies . and click OK. In this exercise. click Save. double-click each of the following views to review the available views for rendering: ■ ■ ■ to house from SW to west facade of house living area This view most accurately shows the interior of the living room. click GO. NOTE Retain the 45° value for the Angle from project to True North to maintain accuracy in shadow display for this project.rvt dataset you saved in the previous exercise. 28 Once you are finished with the study. The animation plays as the AVI file is saved to the desktop. under Graphics. Refer to “Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs” on page 345 for additional information on rendering. for Scene. Rendered views will also show shade from plants and seasonal foliage. Rendering an Interior View Shadow calculations are not reliable for camera views in which a shadow would fall onto the camera’s location in the view. Click the Desktop icon. verify that Full Frames (Uncompressed) is selected. double-click 01 Entry. select Project North. Since a rendered image is temporary. you render an interior view to observe how sunlight and shadows play in a specific room. it is a best practice to change the view graphics setting back to Project North for documentation and annotation purposes: ■ ■ ■ In the Project Browser. for Dimensions. The scene is rendered in full color at draft resolution. In the Element Properties dialog. select Winter solstice 2pm in LA.

6 Export the image as a JPEG: ■ ■ on the Design Bar. 5 On the Design Bar. click Save. 7 Review some captured images of the building. under Renderings. click GO. for Resolution. click Capture Rendering. Rendering an Interior View | 395 .■ ■ On the Options Bar. In the Save As dialog. click Export Image. select JPEG. select Presentation (300 dpi). On the Options Bar. for Save as Type. double-click each of the following images: ■ ■ ■ living area summer living area winter to house and studio summer solstice 8 On the File menu. NOTE Rendered views are temporary. The scene is rendered in high resolution. Notice that you can clearly see where light enters the windows and how the shadows fall on the floor. so use the Capture Rendering option to save the view in the project. and click Save. In the Project Browser.

396 | Chapter 11 Creating Solar Studies .

For the realistic approach. a consultant. You can use the analytique to graphically compare the organization and forms of a particular 397 . There are two directions you can choose when organizing presentation graphics: realism and stylistics. sections. Whether the audience is the general contractor. In this tutorial. A majority of tools in Revit Architecture 2008 are intended to describe number. or the client. and Section Boxes. and line quality without the measurement of its thickness is to transcend "building" and to recognize the "architecture. Advanced Model Graphics. There remain many options in the software that do not quantify specific dimensions so much as they explain the subjective complexity of the work. To express texture beyond material specifics. tailoring the presentation is just as important as the accuracy of the content. you explore the stylistic approach. there are several options for expressing the architecture. In this series of exercises." The analytique is a classic Beaux Arts method of representing a work of architecture for analysis by graphically showing the relationship among plans." In Revit Architecture. and other quantifiable elements within the context of contract documents. you learn several graphic techniques using these above mentioned tools to create an "analytique. elevations. They include the Accurender® Plug-in for Rendering. the Linework Tool. The architect's primary goal in documentation is to communicate the intent of the design. you learn various methods of effectively communicating your design intent to your audience by creating presentation views. and details. an outside reviewer. type.Presentation Views 12 In this tutorial. length. tutorials on the Accurender features of Revit Architecture can be found under “Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs” on page 345.

building or space by superimposing and overlapping measured drawings at multiple scales. 398 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . Using the pre-built building model. Co-house. you organize an analytique by creating and modifying several views.

Dataset ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. you create a copy of the plan. expand Floor Plans.Adding a Floor Plan View to the Analytique In this lesson. Preparing a Floor Plan for the Analytique In this exercise. Cnst. and open Metric\m_Cohouse. click Training Files. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate.rvt. right-click 2nd Flr. you create a copy of a floor plan in preparation for the analytique. expand Views (all). and place the plan on a dark background for contrast. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Adding a Floor Plan View to the Analytique | 399 . Copy the floor plan 1 In the Project Browser. you create a presentation floor plan. A copy of the floor plan is created and opened. In order for the floor plan to fit into the analytique. change the visibility settings to remove unwanted documentation.

Cnst. right-click Copy of 2nd Flr. and clear Show annotation categories in this view. Notice the immediate change in the line weights. elevations. and click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics again. 7 Under Visibility. Up Arrow. click in the drawing area. 3 In the Rename View dialog. 8 Click OK. sections. Modify view scale 9 On the View Control Bar at the bottom of the drawing area. this represents the view getting smaller. and click OK. exit the menu. under Floor Plans. and so on in this view. click the Scale control and select 1:100. Down Arrow. enter Presentation Second Floor Plan. NOTE Stair text is considered part of a stair component rather than an annotation. click Visibility/Graphics. and click Rename.2 In the Project Browser. Notice that no annotations display in this view. 5 In the Visibility/Graphics Overrides dialog. click the Annotation Categories tab. click Save As. Modify visibility/graphics 4 On the View menu. expand the Stairs category. 400 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . 10 On the File menu. 6 Click the Model Categories tab. dimensions. UP Text. This turns off the visibility of all tags. TIP If the Visibility/Graphics option is not active. and clear DOWN Text.

Modify advanced model graphics settings 1 If the Floor Plan: Presentation Second Floor Plan is not the active view. click the Advanced Model Graphics control. modify. The higher the number. 8 Select Boston. Using Advanced Model Graphics | 401 . you can specify one place where the project resides within the world. navigate to the folder of your choice. and click Advanced Model Graphics. click . The Shadow intensity dictates the darkness of the shadow display. 3 In the Advanced Model Graphics dialog. you use advanced model graphics to cast shadows and add a sense of texture to the new floor plan view. the darker the shadows. 12 Proceed with the next exercise. click for Place. name the project m_Cohouse_Presentation_Views. At that place. and click OK. USA for City. Changes made within the Advanced Model Graphics dialog are applied only to the active view. ■ Under Intensity. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you saved in the previous exercise. click the Place tab. 6 Under Settings. on the Still tab. 4 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. double-click it in the Project Browser. The Sun and Shadows Settings are shared with Accurender and can also be used when rendering. ■ Under Sun and Shadows Settings. Using Advanced Model Graphics In this exercise. NOTE Shadows can be cast in all view styles except Wireframe. and click Save. 7 In the Manage Place and Locations dialog.rvt. Under Shadows Properties. select Sun and Shadow Settings.11 In the Save As directory. you can create. and delete multiple locations in order to analyze a single prototype. 2 On the View Control Bar. MA. select Cast Shadows. m_Cohouse_Presentation_Views. specify 35 for Shadow. select By Date. Within a Project. 5 Under Settings.rvt. “Using Advanced Model Graphics” on page 401. specify the following: ■ ■ Select Hidden Line for Style. Time and Place.

and click Advanced Model Graphics. click . and select 1st Flr. 15 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. 12 In the Advanced Model Graphics dialog. 10 Select Ground Plane at Level. click Save. under Sun and Shadows Settings. you can enter any city you wish. click OK. however. clear Ground Plane at Level. Turn off the ground plane shadows 13 On the View Control Bar. 17 On the File menu. This turns off the shadows cast on the ground. click OK. This plan view is now ready to be added to a sheet. 9 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. under Settings. Notice the series of shadows based on the specified sun angles. be aware that if you enter a different city. 402 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . 14 In the Advanced Model Graphics dialog. most of the images in the remainder of this tutorial may differ from those on your screen depending on the settings that you choose. “Adding the Floor Plan to a Sheet” on page 403. 16 In the Advanced Model Graphics dialog. click the Advanced Model Graphics control. and click OK. 11 Click OK. Cnst. specify 10/27/2006 for Date and 1:00 PM for Time. This is the level the shadow will be cast upon.NOTE For this step. 18 Proceed with the next exercise. This gives the plan depth and creates a sensation of space beyond what you can normally express in a plan view.

5 Move the cursor to the center of the sheet as shown. Create a new sheet 1 On the View tab of the Design Bar. 6 On the Design Bar. and click View. and click to place it. select Arch Portrait. TIP If the View tab is not available. and click OK. select Floor Plan: Presentation Second Floor Plan. right-click the Design Bar. click Modify. Adding the Floor Plan to a Sheet | 403 . and click Add View to Sheet.Adding the Floor Plan to a Sheet In this exercise. and notice a view title displays. 3 On the View tab of the Design Bar. 7 Zoom in around the viewport. you add the floor plan to a sheet and modify the view to enhance the contrast. click Sheet. 2 In the Select a Titleblock dialog. 4 In the Views dialog. The viewport displays at the tip of the cursor. Notice the blank D-sized sheet is portrait oriented. click Add View.

you need to create a new viewport type that does not display the view title. To accomplish this. Create a new viewport type 8 Select the viewport in the center of the sheet. and click OK. click . 10 In the Element Properties dialog. For this analytique. 9 On the Options Bar. under Graphics. 13 In the Type Properties dialog. click OK. you will create a dark filled region for the floor plan view. click Edit/New. select No for Show Title. Notice the viewport no longer displays a view title. enter Presentation. click Duplicate.Because the view title needs to be removed for the analytique. and click OK. 404 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . Create a solid fill background for contrast 15 Right-click the viewport. 14 In the Element Properties dialog. 12 In the Name dialog. you need to create a base of contrast for the centered plan. and click Activate View. 11 In the Type Properties dialog. This activates the Presentation Second Floor Plan within the context of the sheet.

use the Trim tool to clean up gaps or overlapping intersections. click . When you are finished drawing the chain. click Duplicate. you must define the inner perimeter by drawing a chain of lines around the perimeter of the building model. under Graphics. and you should take advantage of endpoint snapping when available. Now that you have defined the outer perimeter of the filled region. 23 In the Element Properties dialog. 19 Draw a rectangle around the view as shown. 24 In the Type Properties dialog. for Fill Pattern. and click OK. and the boundary of the region. The lines shown below are enhanced for training purposes. 26 In the Type Properties dialog. You enter sketch mode where you define the line type. 17 In the Type Selector. TIP If you have difficulty sketching using invisible lines. TIP Use care when sketching this chain. and select Chain. click Region Properties. select the entire chain (use TAB) and change the line type back to Invisible lines by selecting it from the Type Selector. You may want to zoom in while sketching some details. 18 On the Options Bar. click . 20 On the Options Bar. The space between the perimeter of the building model and each line should be equidistant. fill properties. select Invisible Lines. click Filled Region. 25 In the Name dialog. create the interior chain of lines using Medium or Wide lines. draw a chain of lines around the exterior face of the building model as shown.16 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. click Edit/New. Adding the Floor Plan to a Sheet | 405 . enter Solid Black. click . 21 Starting at the upper-left corner of the building model. 22 On the Design Bar. If necessary.

406 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . verify that the Background is Opaque and the Color is Black. and click OK. you copy an elevation view and use advanced model graphics to cast shadows on the view. Name the sheet 31 Right-click anywhere on the sheet. Adding an Elevation View to the Analytique In this lesson. 32 Right-click the edge of the sheet. 35 Proceed with the next lesson. enter Presentation for Sheet Name. 33 In the Element Properties dialog. 28 In the Type Properties dialog. and click OK. click OK. click Finish Sketch. 29 In the Element Properties dialog. and click OK. 30 On the Design Bar. select Solid Fill. under Name. Preparing the Elevation Analytique In this exercise. 34 On the File menu.27 In the Fill Patterns dialog. and click View Properties. “Adding an Elevation View to the Analytique” on page 406. click Save. Notice how the filled region enhances the view contrast. you create an elevation and add it to the presentation sheet that you created in the first exercise. scroll down. under Identity Data. and click Deactivate View.

under Visibility. Preparing the Elevation Analytique | 407 . and clear Show annotation categories in this view. and click Rename. expand the Doors category. right-click South. expand Elevations. and click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics again. Copy and rename the elevation view 1 In the Project Browser. 3 In the Rename View dialog. and click OK. This turns off the visibility of all annotations in this view. click in the Walls row. click Override. 7 In the Visibility/Graphic Overrides dialog. This turns off the visibility of all wall surface patterns in this view. Modify visibility/graphic overrides 4 On the View menu. and click OK. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. clear Visible. TIP If the Visibility/Graphics option is not active. under Pattern Overrides. under Views (all). under Visibility. 5 In the Visibility/Graphic Overrides dialog. 8 Click the Annotation Categories tab. scroll up. 9 Click OK. A copy of the south elevation view becomes the active view. under Elevations. enter Presentation South Elevation.rvt. on the Model Categories tab. click Visibility/Graphics. 2 In the Project Browser. right-click Copy of South. In the Projection/Surface Patterns column for Walls. and clear Elevation Swing. click in the drawing area. exit the menu.Dataset Continue to use the dataset you saved in the previous exercise. 6 In the Fill Pattern Graphics dialog. m_Cohouse_Presentation_Views.

under Settings. 13 Under Intensity. specify 35 for Shadow. and click OK. 15 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. 16 In the Name dialog. “Adding the Presentation Elevation View to the Presentation Sheet” on page 408. click . 11 In the Advanced Model Graphics dialog. you add the Presentation South Elevation view to the Presentation sheet. 20 On the File menu. click Save. you can create more interesting shadows on the elevation view. 19 In the Advanced Model Graphics dialog. 21 Proceed with the next exercise. and click Advanced Model Graphics. enter Sun and Shadow Settings Elevation. Changes made within the Advanced Model Graphics dialog are applied only to the active view. select By Date. click Duplicate. 408 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . click OK. Time and Place. Adding the Presentation Elevation View to the Presentation Sheet In this exercise. and click OK.Apply advanced model graphics 10 On the View Control Bar. verify that Hidden Line is the selected Style. 18 Specify 2:30 PM for Time. By changing the angle of the sun. select Cast Shadows. click the Advanced Model Graphics control. 17 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. 14 Under Sun and Shadows Settings. 12 Under Shadow Properties.

3 In the Views dialog. Add a view to the sheet 1 In the Project Browser. m_Cohouse_Presentation_Views. TIP Use the snap feature to snap the viewport to the center reference plane. 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar. under Views (all). and click Add View to Sheet. Notice the viewport displays a view title. select Elevation: Presentation South Elevation. expand Sheets (all). and double-click A105 . Adding the Presentation Elevation View to the Presentation Sheet | 409 .rvt. click Add View.Presentation. 4 Center the viewport above the presentation plan view as shown.Dataset Continue to use the dataset you saved in the previous exercise.

6 Drag the Presentation South Elevation viewport downward until it shares an edge with the presentation floor plan. 410 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views .5 In the Type Selector. 7 On the Design Bar. select Viewport: Presentation. click Modify. Notice the view title no longer displays.

Preparing a Section View for the Analytique In this exercise. Adding Section Views to the Analytique In this lesson. You also create a view template for presentation views and apply it to other views. you create and modify the section view that you later add to the analytique.8 On the File menu. you create section and callout views and place them in the analytique. 9 Proceed with the next lesson. You add silhouette edges and filled regions to the views. click Save. Adding Section Views to the Analytique | 411 . “Adding Section Views to the Analytique” on page 411.

Adjust the controls to modify the extents. 4 Add the section shown below. Add a section in a plan view 1 In the Project Browser. Section 2 is added to the building model. select 1: 100 for Scale. Cnst. click Section. and use the flip arrows if necessary. Create a callout of the section view 5 In the Project Browser. 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 412 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . 3 On the Options Bar. you will create a callout around the building model components within the section view.rvt. and double-click Section 2. To accomplish this. The section should cut through the center of the building model and extend past the front of the building (lower wall). m_Cohouse_Presentation_Views. expand Sections (Callout 1). To fit correctly in the analytique. double-click 1st Flr. this view needs to be rotated 180 degrees. under Floor Plans.Dataset Continue to use the dataset you saved in the previous exercise. TIP You can also change the scale of the section view after you create it.

7 On the Options Bar. TIP You can also open the callout in the Project Browser by double-clicking Callout of Section 2 under Sections (Callout 1). under Sections (Callout 1). 10 In the Project Browser. 11 In the Rename View dialog. 8 Draw a callout around all the building model components within the section view as shown. double-click Presentation Section 2. and click OK. click Visibility/Graphics. and click Rename. This turns off the visibility of all wall surface patterns in this view. select 1 : 100 for Scale. click Callout. click Modify.6 On the View tab of the Design Bar. under Pattern Overrides. and click OK. click Override. Use the controls to adjust the precise location of the boundary and to move the callout head so it is readily identifiable. 12 In the Project Browser. click the Model Categories tab. click in the Walls row. clear Visible. 15 Under Visibility. Modify Visibility/Graphic Overrides 13 On the View menu. 16 In the Fill Pattern Graphics dialog. In the Projection/Surface Patterns column for Walls. right-click Callout of Section 2. Preparing a Section View for the Analytique | 413 . under Sections (Callout 1). enter Presentation Section 2. Rename the callout 9 On the Design Bar. 14 In the Visibility/Graphic Overrides dialog.

20 Click OK. Hide the crop boundary 21 Select the crop boundary. 22 On the Options Bar. Revit Architecture displays 2 boundaries. Notice that the crop regions no longer display. When you select the crop boundary. The inner crop boundary shows the crop region for model elements. 23 In the Element Properties dialog. under Extents. 414 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . click . and clear Elevation Swing. clear Crop Region Visible. 18 Turn off the visibility of the following model categories: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Casework Ceilings Furniture Lighting Fixtures Specialty Equipment 19 Click the Annotation Categories tab. and click OK. This turns off the visibility of all annotations in this view. clear Annotation Crop. and clear Show annotation categories in this view. The outer crop boundary (indicated with dashed lines) shows the crop region for annotation elements.17 Under Visibility. expand the Doors category. scroll up.

Under Shadows Properties. under Sections (Callout 1). select Cast Shadows. TIP You may need to move the dialog off to the side in order to see the view. Adding Shadows and Silhouettes to a Section View | 415 . you use advanced model graphics to cast shadows on the section view. double-click Presentation Section 2. Notice that the shadows displayed do not offer much contrast.rvt. click Save. Adding Shadows and Silhouettes to a Section View In this exercise. open the Project Browser and.24 On the File menu. In addition. Under Intensity. 2 On the View Control Bar. Click Apply. “Adding Shadows and Silhouettes to a Section View” on page 415. you apply silhouette edges to contrast the edges of the view. and click Advanced Model Graphics. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you saved in the previous exercise. click the Advanced Model Graphics control. Add shadows to the section view 1 If Presentation Section 2 is not the active view. 25 Proceed with the next exercise. specify the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Select Hidden Line for Style. 3 In the Advanced Model Graphics dialog. m_Cohouse_Presentation_Views. specify 35 for Shadow.

select Silhouette Edges for Silhouette style. was added to this dataset for training purposes. 10 Under Silhouette Edges. Notice the shadows on the view provide more contrast and a sense of depth. select Override Silhouettes. 7 In the Advanced Model Graphics dialog. click Duplicate. TIP The current view of your model may vary from the illustrations in the tutorial based on the placement of the section line in the previous exercise. and click Advanced Model Graphics. click Save. “Adding the Presentation Section to the Analytique” on page 417. You can modify this line style by selecting Line Styles from the Settings menu. NOTE The line style. 12 Proceed with the next exercise. ■ Under Sun and Shadows Settings. specify an Azimuth of 135 degrees. and click OK. and click OK. you create a new Sun and Shadow setting in order to make a presentation view with more contrast. Silhouette Edges. Notice application of heavy line weights to the edges of the building model. Apply silhouette edges 8 On the View Control Bar. select Directly. 9 In the Advanced Model Graphics dialog. TIP You can also use the linework tool to emphasize individual surface edges. enter Sun and Shadow Settings Section. 6 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. click OK. and click OK. 11 On the File menu. click . 416 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . under Silhouette Edges.In the steps that follow. click the Advanced Model Graphics control. specify an Altitude of 70 degrees. under Settings. 5 In the Name dialog. select Relative to View. 4 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog.

select Section: Presentation Section 2. 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar.rvt. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you saved in the previous exercise. 6 On the Design Bar. 3 In the Views dialog. 5 In the Type Selector. double-click A105 . m_Cohouse_Presentation_Views. Adding the Presentation Section to the Analytique | 417 .Adding the Presentation Section to the Analytique In this exercise. The view title no longer displays. under Sheets (all). select Viewport: Presentation. click Add View.Presentation. you add the Presentation Section 2 view to the analytique and rotate the view 180 degrees. and click Add View to Sheet. click Modify. Add the view to the presentation sheet 1 In the Project Browser. 4 Move the cursor under the centered plan view as shown. and click to place the selected view.

under Sections (Callout 1). Rotate the callout view 7 In the Project Browser. you click to specify the start radius. and enter 180 to specify the number of degrees of rotation.Notice the section needs to be rotated 180 degrees. 10 Specify the start radius to the right of the callout. specify 3 o’clock as the rotation start point. 418 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . Using a clock as a reference. double-click Section 2. 9 On the Edit toolbar. 11 Move the cursor a slight distance counter-clockwise. and press ENTER. click . To rotate an object. In the steps that follow. 8 Select the callout that you added previously. you accomplish this by rotating the callout within the section view. and either enter the degrees of rotation or click to specify the end radius. move the cursor in the direction of the rotation.

Adding the Presentation Section to the Analytique | 419 .After you enter the rotation value and press Enter. 14 Select the Presentation Section 2 viewport. double-click A105 . 12 Drag the callout extents until they extend just past the perimeter of the edges of the building model as shown. Notice the extents need to be adjusted to fit around the edges of the building model. Reposition the viewport 13 In the Project Browser. and drag it up and to the left as shown. Notice that the Presentation Section 2 view has rotated 180 degrees and now needs to be repositioned. under Sheets (all). the callout rotates 180 degrees.Presentation.

420 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . 3 In the New View Template dialog. m_Cohouse_Presentation_Views.rvt. click OK. 17 Proceed with the next exercise. under Sections (Callout 1).15 On the Design Bar. Create a presentation view template 1 In the Project Browser. Working with a Presentation View Template In this exercise. 4 In the View Templates dialog. click Modify. double-click Presentation Section 2. you add the modified view to the presentation sheet. “Working with a Presentation View Template” on page 420. and click OK. 16 On the File menu. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you saved in the previous exercise. you create a view template for presentation views in order to reduce repetitive work while creating subsequent views. 2 On the View menu. After applying the view template to a new section view. click Save. enter Presentation. click Create View Template from View.

click View Properties. click Add View. annotations. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. you can use a view property to accomplish the same thing. 13 Place it to the left of the plan view. under Sheets (all). under Sections (Type 1). and elevation swings no longer display. select Presentation. under Sections (Type 1). enter Presentation Section 1. right-click Section 1. 12 In the Views dialog. Apply presentation view template 8 On the View menu. 14 In the Type Selector. click Apply View Template. lighting fixtures. Rather than use a callout to rotate this view after it is added to a sheet. double-click A105 .Presentation. and click OK. 7 In the Rename View dialog. 16 On the View menu. Working with a Presentation View Template | 421 . 9 In the Select View Template dialog. 6 In the Project Browser. Now. and click Add View to Sheet. select Viewport: Presentation. select Section: Presentation Section 1. Add the view to the presentation sheet 10 In the Project Browser. Notice the furniture. rather than repeat numerous steps to prepare this view for the analytique. right-click Copy of Section 1. 15 Right-click the viewport. 11 On the View tab of the Design Bar. you can simply apply the presentation view template. and click Activate View.Create a new presentation view 5 In the Project Browser. and click OK. and click Rename.

In this exercise. and click Deactivate View. and click OK. 21 Proceed with the next exercise. traditional analytiques contain a detail. click Save. under Graphics. 19 Move the view so the walls line up similar to the image shown. 18 Right-click the viewport. 422 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . you create a wall section and add it to the right side of the analytique. such as a tracery window or column capital. select 90 degrees Counterclockwise for Rotation on Sheet.17 In the Element Properties dialog. “Working in a Callout Analytique” on page 422. 20 On the File menu. Working in a Callout Analytique Typically.

6 In the Project Browser. click Callout. right-click Callout of Section 1. 5 In the Rename View dialog. select the callout. 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar. 4 In the Project Browser. click Modify. and modify the extents and the callout head location as shown. enter Presentation Callout.Dataset Continue to use the dataset you saved in the previous exercise. under Sections (Type 1). After you add the callout. 3 Draw a callout around the front balcony as shown. and click OK. Create callout 1 In the Project Browser. double-click Section 1. under Sections (Callout 1). and click Rename. under Sections (Callout 1). double-click Presentation Callout.rvt. m_Cohouse_Presentation_Views. Working in a Callout Analytique | 423 .

and click View Properties. 9 In the Element Properties dialog. under Extents.7 Select the crop boundary and adjust the bottom so that there is a small gap as shown. This gap is used later in the exercise to place a fill region. 8 Right-click. 424 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . clear Annotation Crop. and click OK. clear Crop Region Visible.

under Sheets (all). 18 In the Element Properties dialog. Modify presentation callout on sheet 16 Right-click the presentation callout viewport. click View Properties. select Viewport: Presentation. 17 On the View menu. 13 Place it on the right side of the presentation sheet. 11 On the View tab of the Design Bar. 15 On the Design Bar. 20 Select the callout presentation viewport. select Section: Presentation Callout. click Modify. and move it into the position shown below. 14 In the Type Selector. and click Add View to Sheet. double-click A105 . Working in a Callout Analytique | 425 . click Add View. and click Activate View.Presentation. and click Deactivate View. and click OK. 19 Right-click the callout presentation view. specify a value of 22 for Scale Value 1. 12 In the Views dialog.Add callout to presentation sheet 10 In the Project Browser. select Custom for View Scale.

The intent of the analytique is not so much a measured construction document as it is a stylized representation of the architectural forms. Although there are several methods you could use to create these areas of contrast. 25 Using the drawing tools on the Options Bar. the easiest method is to apply filled regions to the presentation callout. activate the viewport. In the steps that follow.NOTE If the presentation callout view does not fit properly on the sheet. turn on the crop region from the view properties dialog. sketch the filled regions on the floors and roof shown below. click Region Properties. 23 On the Design Bar. under Sections (Callout 1). You can sketch all of them at once or one filled region at a time. click Filled Region. you add a heavy base to the floors and a poche to the base. and make adjustments as necessary. The composition set for the analytique is now complete. 22 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. Click Finish Sketch on the Design Bar when you are finished. You do not have to replicate the image exactly. double-click Presentation Callout. 426 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . When finished. hide the crop region and deactivate the viewport. 24 In the Element Properties dialog. select Solid Black for Type. Apply filled regions to presentation callout 21 In the Project Browser. and click OK.

click . Add poche region 27 Right-click the presentation callout viewport. double-click A105 . and click Activate View. Working in a Callout Analytique | 427 . click Filled Region.26 On the Project Browser. 29 On the Options Bar. 28 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. and sketch the rectangle shown below. under Sheets (all).Presentation.

33 Select the crop region. under Extents. Notice the entire poche region does not display because the crop region does not encompass the new filled region.30 On the Design Bar. select Crop Region Visible. and drag the left and bottom extent until the entire poche region displays. 32 In the Element Properties dialog. and click OK. click Finish Sketch. 31 On the View menu. 428 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . click View Properties.

36 Right-click the presentation callout viewport. and apply shadows to the views. click View Properties. Creating 3D Cutaways with Section Boxes | 429 . and click Deactivate View. Creating Cutaway Isometric Views In this exercise. 35 In the Element Properties dialog. under Extents. clear Crop Region Visible. click Save. you create three similar isometric views with different cutaways. and click OK. You then add perspective views to the presentation and annotate the sheet. you create isometric 3D views and use section boxes to create cutaways with shadows. 38 Proceed with the next lesson. 37 On the File menu. You then add each view to the presentation sheet.34 On the View menu. Creating 3D Cutaways with Section Boxes In this lesson. “Creating 3D Cutaways with Section Boxes” on page 429.

Dataset Continue to use the dataset you saved in the previous exercise. 5 In the Advanced Model Graphics dialog. select Cast Shadows. 2 On the View menu. Create southwest isometric view 1 In the Project Browser. m_Cohouse_Presentation_Views. and click 1 : 200. click . under 3D Views. click the Advanced Model Graphics control. 6 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. and click Advanced Model Graphics. specify 35 for Shadow. and click OK. Under Intensity. click the Scale control. double-click Isometric. click Orient ➤ Southwest. Apply advanced model graphics 4 On the View Control Bar. enter Sun and Shadow Settings Isometric. specify the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Select Hidden Line for Style. click Duplicate. Under Sun and Shadows Settings. 430 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . 7 In the Name dialog. 3 On the View Control Bar.rvt. Under Shadows Properties.

and click OK. Select 1st Flr. enter Isometric 1. 10 In the Advanced Model Graphics dialog. and click OK. under 3D Views. 14 In the Project Browser. 16 In the Rename View dialog. and click OK. Creating Cutaway Isometric Views | 431 . select Section Box. under Extents. select Silhouette Edges for Silhouette style. right-click Copy of Isometric 1. under Settings. Select Relative to View. right-click Isometric. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. Specify an Altitude of 45 degrees. and click OK. double-click Isometric 2. under 3D Views. 11 Under Silhouette Edges. Add a section box to Isometric 2 17 In the Project Browser. 13 In the Rename View dialog. Cnst. 18 On the View menu. 9 Click OK. click View Properties. and click Rename. Rename and duplicate isometric views 12 In the Project Browser. under Silhouette Edges. select Override Silhouettes. 19 In the Element Properties dialog. 15 In the Project Browser. in the list. Select Ground Plane at Level. enter Isometric 2. right-click Isometric 1. specify the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Select Directly. under 3D Views. Specify an Azimuth of 135 degrees. Notice the section box that displays around the building model.8 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. and click Rename. under 3D Views.

and click Rename. and drag the plane downward until it cuts halfway through the second floor as shown.20 Select the section box. When you are finished. under 3D Views. click Modify on the Design Bar. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. right-click Copy of Isometric 2. 22 In the Project Browser. right-click Isometric 2. make a duplicate of the view. You can use this to rotate the section box. 23 In the Project Browser. These allow you to modify the extents of the section box. Before turning off the visibility of the section box. TIP Notice there is also a rotation symbol. under 3D Views. 432 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . Notice the grips that display on each face of the section box. 21 Select the controls for the top plane of the section box.

and click OK. 26 To hide the section box. click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics.Presentation. 25 In the Project Browser. either adjust the plane location. under Sheets (all). 30 Select the controls for the top plane of the section box. and click OK. and drag the plane downward until it cuts halfway through the first floor as shown. Notice the section box no longer displays. you stack the three isometric views in a vertical column on the presentation sheet to show the continual erosion of the structure. double-click A105 . NOTE Depending on the precise location of the top plane of the section box. or turn off the visibility of railings and stairs using the Visibility/Graphics dialog. enter Isometric 3. Creating Cutaway Isometric Views | 433 . 29 Select the section box. under 3D Views. drag Isometric 3 underneath the left section view as shown and. In such a case. 27 On the Annotation Categories tab. click Modify on the Design Bar. When you are finished. under 3D Views. clear Section Boxes.24 In the Rename View dialog. 34 In the Project Browser. Modify the section box of Isometric 3 28 In the Project Browser. 31 To hide the section box. clear Section Boxes. select Viewport: Presentation. double-click Isometric 3. 32 On the Annotation Categories tab. Next. in the Type Selector. the stairs and railings may display. under 3D Views. Add isometric views to the presentation sheet 33 In the Project Browser. double-click Isometric 2. and click OK.

434 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . select Viewport: Presentation. Notice the filled region partially covers the view. You resolve this problem in the steps that follow. drag Isometric 1 underneath Isometric 2 as shown and. in the Type Selector. in the Type Selector. drag Isometric 2 underneath Isometric 3 as shown and. under 3D Views. under 3D Views.35 In the Project Browser. select Viewport: Presentation. 36 In the Project Browser.

41 In the Type Properties dialog. This will make it easier to draw lines. 45 On the Design Bar. 46 In the Element Properties dialog. and on the Options Bar. and click Deactivate View. The image below shows the lines redrawn. and click Activate View. Creating Cutaway Isometric Views | 435 . 39 On the Design Bar. 42 Click OK twice. redraw the portion of the filled region so it follows the boundary of Isometric 1. 47 On the Design Bar. select Transparent for Background. 40 In the Element Properties dialog. and then click Edit/New. click Region Properties. and click OK. 43 On the Design Bar. You change this back to solid fill when you are done. select Solid Black for Type.Modify filled region boundaries 37 Right-click the Presentation Callout viewport. You may need to use the split tools and trim tools to modify lines along the way. select Concrete for Type. click Region Properties. click Edit. 48 Right-click the Presentation Callout view. click Lines. click Finish Sketch. 44 Using the drawing tools. under Graphics. 38 Select the poche filled region.

Create a perspective view 1 In the Project Browser. click Save. then you specify the eye direction and range. After adding shadows and silhouette edges to the view. a cutaway perspective view. you add it to the presentation sheet. and specify the range and direction just outside the upper right corner of the building model. 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar. double-click 1st Flr. Cnst. m_Cohouse_Presentation_Views.49 On the File menu. Adding a camera is a two-click process: first you specify the eye location. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you saved in the previous exercise. 436 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . Creating Cutaway Perspective Views In this exercise.rvt. you create the final view for the analytique. 50 Proceed with the next exercise. 3 Place the camera in the southwest corner of the view as shown. “Creating Cutaway Perspective Views” on page 436. click Camera. under Floor Plans.

6 In the Advanced Model Graphics dialog. click the Advanced Model Graphics control. Add shadows and silhouette edges 5 On the View Control Bar. Under Shadows Properties. Under Intensity. specify 35 for Shadow. 4 Adjust the crop boundary so the entire building model fits within it. Under Sun and Shadows Settings. click . Creating Cutaway Perspective Views | 437 . and click Advanced Model Graphics. select Cast Shadows.The view opens immediately. specify the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Select Hidden Line for Style.

select Section Box. You may need to adjust the location of the crop boundary as well. Notice the controls that display on each plane. 438 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . and click OK. and click OK. under Silhouette Edges. select Override Silhouettes. select Silhouette Edges for Silhouette style. click View Properties. 8 In the Advanced Model Graphics dialog. Add a section box 10 On the View menu. A section box now cuts through the building model. under Extents. 13 Use the section controls to modify the location of each respective plane until your view resembles the following image. 12 Select the section box. 9 Under Silhouette Edges. and click OK.7 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. select Sun and Shadow Settings Isometric for Name. 11 In the Element Properties dialog.

click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics.14 Select the crop boundary. and click OK. clear Section Boxes. 18 To hide the crop region. you must specify the actual size of the image. 16 In the Crop Region Size dialog. Add the view to the presentation sheet 20 On the Project Browser. select Scale (locked proportions).Presentation. 17 Under Model Crop Size. click View menu ➤ View Properties. enter 165 mm for Width. 19 To hide the section box. Creating Cutaway Perspective Views | 439 . On the Annotation Categories tab. and click OK. click Size. After placing it. 21 In the Project Browser. Clear Crop Region Visible. under Change. under Sheets (all). go to the Type Selector and select Viewport : Presentation. and click OK. double-click A105 . drag 3D View 1 onto the presentation sheet. and place it in the upper-left corner as shown. Because scale does not apply to perspective views. under 3D Views. 15 On the Options Bar.

m_Cohouse_Presentation_Views. you complete the analytique by adding text to the presentation sheet. enter Description. 440 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . click . click Save. 4 In the Type Properties dialog. 9 In the Name dialog. click Duplicate. select the same font as the title. 6 In the Type Properties dialog. under Text. click Edit/New. 3 In the Element Properties dialog. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you saved in the previous exercise. and click OK. specify a text size of 40 mm. Add a title and description 12 In the Type Selector. and click OK. specify a text size of 6 mm.rvt. 11 In the Element Properties dialog. click OK. under Text. select a font. 23 Proceed with the next exercise. select Text : Title. click Text. 2 On the Options Bar. and click OK. enter Title. 7 In the Element Properties dialog. Create new text types 1 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. 10 In the Type Properties dialog. 13 Add a title to the analytique as shown. 5 In the Name dialog. “Annotating the Analytique” on page 440. click Duplicate. and click OK.22 On the File menu. Annotating the Analytique In this exercise. 8 In the Type Properties dialog. click Edit/New.

14 Click in the drawing window to complete the title text. select Text : Description. This completes the Presentation Views tutorial. Annotating the Analytique | 441 . 15 In the Type Selector. click Save. 17 On the Design Bar. 16 Add a description of your choosing and add it to the analytique as shown. click Modify. 18 On the File menu.

442 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views .

Importing and Exporting 5 443 .

444 | Chapter 13 Importing and Exporting

Exporting to Autodesk 3ds Max or VIZ

13

In this tutorial, you learn how to export a Revit Architecture building model to Autodesk®3ds Max® or Autodesk®VIZ, where you render it and create a daylight analysis. Autodesk 3ds Max is a professional three-dimensional animation package that provides robust animation, modelling, and workflow functionality for the most complex problems in design visualization and visual effects. Autodesk VIZ is a 3D modelling, rendering, and presentation software application that provides state-of-the-art image creation technologies for communicating and sharing your design intent. For simplicity, this tutorial uses 3ds Max, but the same workflow applies in VIZ. NOTE To complete this tutorial, you must have Autodesk 3ds Max 9 installed on your system. If you do not have 3ds Max installed on your system, or if you have an earlier version of the software, you can download a free trial from the Autodesk website.

445

Render a Revit Architecture Building Model in 3ds Max
In this exercise, you export a Revit Architecture building model to Autodesk 3ds Max and render it. To export the building model to 3ds Max, you select a 3D view of the building in Revit Architecture and export its geometry and data to a DWG file. You then link the DWG file to a new 3ds Max scene. NOTE You can also import the DWG file into 3ds Max, but linking allows you to easily update the 3ds Max scene with any changes that you make to the Revit Architecture model after you initially import it. After you link the DWG file in 3ds Max, you quickly render a view of the building model. The AccuRender materials that are applied to elements in the Revit Architecture building model can be rendered in 3ds Max. After you make some minor adjustments to the materials, you add a daylight system and a sky to produce a more polished rendering.

Dataset
■ ■

Click File menu ➤ Open. In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Common\c_Export to 3DS.rvt.

Export a Revit Architecture building model to a DWG file
1 In the Project Browser, under Views (all), expand 3D Views, and double-click To Building. The view of the building that you want to render in 3ds Max displays.

446 | Chapter 13 Exporting to Autodesk 3ds Max or VIZ

There are a few steps you can take to reduce the geometry and data in the model to make the export process more efficient. You can change the detail level of the view, use a section box to limit the view geometry, and turn off visibility of building elements. Because this building model is small, it is not necessary to use any of these options at this time.

2 Click File menu ➤ Export ➤ CAD Formats. 3 In the Export dialog:

For Save in, browse to C:\Documents and Settings\All Users\Application Data\Autodesk\RAC 2008\Training\Common. Under File Naming, verify that Automatic and Long are selected. If these options are selected, a file name that consists of the dataset name appended with the view name automatically displays for the File Name.

Click Options.

4 In the Export Options dialog, under Solids (3D views only), select Export as ACIS solids, and click OK. The 3D elements in the building model will be exported as ACIS solids, or as 3D objects with multiple sides. If you select to export as polymesh, each element would be exported as an object made up of multiple polygons that are joined, or ''meshed'' together. When exporting to a DWG for use in Max, it is recommended that you export building models to DWG as ACIS solids. 5 In the Export dialog, click Save. 6 In the alert dialog, click OK to ignore the view crop boundary. The building model is exported to a DWG file in the Training location that you specified. 7 Minimize Revit Architecture but keep it open, as you modify the building model and reload it later in the tutorial. Next, link the file to a 3ds Max scene and render it. Link a DWG file to 3ds Max if you anticipate making changes to the building model that you want to reexport to 3ds Max. Import files when you want to export only one iteration of a design for use in 3ds Max.

Create a 3ds Max scene
8 Open 3ds Max, and if the Welcome screen displays, click Close. 9 Click File menu ➤ New. 10 In the New Scene dialog, select New All, and click OK. 11 Click Customize menu ➤ Units Setup.

Render a Revit Architecture Building Model in 3ds Max | 447

12 In the Units Setup dialog:
■ ■ ■ ■

Under Display Unit Scale, select US Standard. Verify Feet w/Fractional Inches is displayed. Under Lighting Units, select American. Click OK.

13 Click File menu ➤ Save As, and save the file as RAC Building.max.

Link the Revit Architecture building model to 3ds Max
14 Click File menu ➤ File Link Manager. 15 In the File Link Manager dialog, click the Presets tab. 16 Under Named Presets, select Revit, and click Modify. This preset contains the desired settings for linking Revit Architecture building models. 17 In the File Link Settings: DWG Files dialog, click the Advanced tab. 18 Verify Use scene material assignments on Reload is selected. This setting ensures that material changes that you make in 3ds Max will be preserved if you reload the DWG file. 19 Click Cancel. 20 In the File Link Manager, click the Attach tab, and click File. 21 In the Open dialog:

For Look in, browse to C:\Documents and Settings\All Users\Application Data\Autodesk\RAC 2008\Training\Common. Select c_Export_to_3DS.rvt-3DView-ToBuiliding.dwg, and click Open.

22 In the File Link Manager dialog:
■ ■ ■

For Preset, select Revit. Click the Attach tab. Click Select Layers to include. A dialog listing all the layers that were created when you exported the Revit Architecture building model to the DWG displays.

23 In the Select Layers dialog:
■ ■

Select Select from list. Scroll to view the layers, and verify that a check mark displays to the left of each layer name to indicate it is selected. In this tutorial, you want all the layers visible, but you can use this dialog control the layers that display in your 3ds Max scene.

Click OK.

24 In the File Link Manager, click Attach this file. 25 In the Proxy Object dialog, click Yes.

448 | Chapter 13 Exporting to Autodesk 3ds Max or VIZ

The file opens in the 3ds Max, and 4 different views of the building model display. Only the single camera position that created the 3d To Building view was exported with the Revit Architecture building model.

26 Close the File Link Manager.

Adjust a scene for rendering
27 On the bottom right of the screen, click in the Perspective viewport to set it current. The edges of the viewport are highlighted in yellow when the viewport is current. 28 In the top left corner of the viewport, right-click the Perspective viewport label, and click Views ➤ Camera: To Building.

29 Adjust the view:

■ ■

In the lower-right corner of the screen, click Click in the Camera: To Building viewport.

(Dolly Camera).

Render a Revit Architecture Building Model in 3ds Max | 449

Press and hold the mouse button, and drag the cursor toward you until the view is adjusted as shown.

Render the scene

30 On the Main toolbar, click

(Quick Render).

The scene renders and the rendering displays in the Render window. There are a couple of adjustments that you want to make to the rendering, including the quality of the glass and stone materials. Because this is an exterior view, you also want to add a daylight system (a sun) and a sky in the background.

31 Close the render window. NOTE If you want to save any of your renderings as you progress through this tutorial, at the top of the render window, click .

450 | Chapter 13 Exporting to Autodesk 3ds Max or VIZ

Improve the quality of the glass and stone materials in 3ds Max

32 On the Main toolbar, click

(Material Editor). (Get Material).

33 In the Material Editor, under the bottom left side of the material slots, click 34 On the left side of the Material/Map Browser, under Browse From, select Scene.

All of the materials applied to the Revit Architecture elements that were exported to the DWG file with the elements display in the right pane of the browser. 35 In the list of materials, select and drag Glass to one of the material slots at the top of the Material Editor.

36 In the Instance (Copy) Material dialog, verify Instance is selected, and click OK. 37 In the Material Editor, change the color of the glass:
■ ■ ■

Under Templates, select Glass - Clear. Under Physical Qualities, for Diffuse Color, click the color swatch. In the Color Selector, specify a golden brown color, and click Close.

38 Change the quality of the stone material on the retaining wall:

■ ■

In the Material Editor, select another slot, and click

(Pick Material from Object).

In the Camera: To Building viewport, move the cursor over the retaining wall and click to select it.

■ ■

In the Material Editor, under Templates, select Stone. Close the Material Editor and the Material Map Browser.

Render a Revit Architecture Building Model in 3ds Max | 451

Add a sun and sky
39 Click in the Top viewport and zoom out until you can see the entire building and the camera. 40 Click Create menu ➤ Lights ➤ Daylight System. 41 In the Daylight Object Creation dialog, click Yes.

42 In the Top viewport, to the right of the building, click and drag to place and size the compass rose. 43 Move the cursor down and to the right to place the sun.

44 On the right side of the screen, locate the Command panel and click 45 Under Daylight Parameters, under Position, click Setup. 46 Under Location, click Get Location. 47 In the Geographic Location list, select Boston, MA, and click OK. 48 Under Site, for North Direction, enter 250. 49 Under Time:
■ ■ ■

(Modify).

For Hours, enter 12. For Month, enter 7. For Day, enter 21.

452 | Chapter 13 Exporting to Autodesk 3ds Max or VIZ

For Year, enter 2007.

50 Click Rendering menu ➤ Environment, and verify that the Environment tab is displayed. 51 Under Common Parameters, and under Background, click the color swatch, and set the background color to a sky blue color.

Render the scene

52 On the Main toolbar, click

(Render Scene Dialog).

53 At the bottom of the panel, for Viewport, select Camera: To Building, and click the lock that displays next to the selector. The lock lets you adjust the scene in other viewports (which become active as you use them), and then click Render to render the viewport you originally chose. When off, Render always renders the active viewport. 54 Under Output size, click 640 x 480. 55 Click the Advanced Lighting tab, and under Select Advanced Lighting, select <no lighting plug-in>. 56 Click Render. The scene is rendered and displays the adjustments you made to the glass and stone materials, as well as the addition of the daylight system and sky.

57 Click File menu ➤ Save. 58 Proceed to the next exercise, “Rendering Cutaway Views in 3ds Max” on page 453.

Rendering Cutaway Views in 3ds Max
In this exercise, you create and render 2 similar cutaway views of the building model. You use 2 different techniques to create the cutaway views. You create the first view in Revit Architecture using a section box to limit or ''cut away'' geometry from the building in the front of the To Building 3D view. You then export the geometry to the DWG file you created in a previous exercise, and reload it in the Autodesk 3ds Max scene. You learn how to use a section box to limit the building model geometry that you export, a technique that is useful and time-saving when exporting large building models.

Rendering Cutaway Views in 3ds Max | 453

A cutaway view created by a section box in Revit Architecture and rendered in 3ds Max

After you create the first cutaway view, you create a similar view in 3ds Max by adjusting the visibility of the curtain wall elements so they are not visible to the camera, and then rendering the scene in the To Building viewport. Dataset

Continue to use the datasets you used in the previous exercise, c_Export to 3DS.rvt and RAC Building.max.

Create a Revit Architecture cutaway view
1 Maximize Revit Architecture. 2 In the 3D To Building view, right-click, and click View Properties. 3 In the Element Properties dialog, under Extents, select Section Box, and click OK. 4 Click View menu ➤ Zoom Out.

454 | Chapter 13 Exporting to Autodesk 3ds Max or VIZ

A section box displays around the view.

5 Select the section box so that grips display. 6 Select and move the grips until a cutaway view displays as shown.

7 Click File menu ➤ Save.

Reload the cutaway view in 3ds Max and render it
8 Export the building model to the DWG file again, and reload the DWG in 3ds Max. 9 When the file is reloaded, render it again.

Rendering Cutaway Views in 3ds Max | 455

Create a cutaway view in 3ds Max
10 Open Revit Architecture. 11 In the To Building view, right-click, and click View Properties. 12 To restore the view, in the Element Properties dialog, under Extents, clear Section Box, and click OK. 13 Export the building model to the DWG file again, and reload the DWG in 3ds Max.

14 In 3ds Max, on the Main toolbar, click

(Select Objects by Name).

15 At the top of the Select Objects dialog, enter curtain to select all the Curtain Wall Panel and Curtain Wall Mullion objects that display in the left side of the dialog. 16 At the bottom right of the dialog, click Select. The components of the curtains wall are selected. You will create a named selected set to control the camera’s visibility of these objects.

17 On the Main toolbar, click

(Edit Named Selection Sets).

18 In the Named Selection Sets dialog, click set name. 19 Close the Named Selection Sets dialog.

(Create New Set), and enter Curtain Wall for the selection

20 Right-click in the view, and click Object Properties. 21 In the Object Properties dialog, click the General tab. 22 Under Rendering Control, clear Visible to Camera, and click OK.

23 On the Main toolbar, click

.

A cutaway view, similar to the one that you created with the Revit Architecture section box displays. 24 Proceed to the next exercise, “Creating a Daylight Analysis” on page 457.

456 | Chapter 13 Exporting to Autodesk 3ds Max or VIZ

Creating a Daylight Analysis
In this exercise, you create a daylight analysis of the Revit Architecture building model in 3ds Max. The analysis will uses daylight levels in a specific location to display a spectrum of colors on the building model. The colors indicate the different levels of light incident on each building surface. The blue and green colors indicate low light levels, while the red, yellow, and orange colors indicate high levels of light. A daylight analysis can be a useful tool in determining the sustainability of your Revit Architecture building models.

Dataset

Continue to use the datasets you used in the previous exercise, c_Export to 3DS.rvt, and RAC Building.max. 1 In 3ds Max, click Rendering menu ➤ Environment. 2 In the Environment and Effects dialog, under Exposure Control, select Pseudo Color Exposure Control. Pseudo Color Exposure Control is a lighting analysis tool that provides you with an intuitive way of visualizing and evaluating the lighting levels in your scenes. It maps luminance or illuminance values to pseudo colors that show the brightness of the values being converted. 3 Under Pseudo Color Exposure Control:

Under Display Type, for Quantity, select Illuminance. Illuminance displays values of light incident on surfaces.

■ ■ ■ ■

For Style, select Colored. For Scale, select Logarithmic. Under Display Range, for Min., enter 100. For Max, enter 8000. The display range sets the lowest and highest values to represent in the rendering. Although this tutorial provides display range values, when you create your own daylight analysis you will probably want to test different display ranges to get the results that you want.

4 On the Main toolbar, click

(Render Scene).

Creating a Daylight Analysis | 457

The scene renders and displays a true color rendering in the Render window. The 256 color daylight analysis is then created.

5 If desired, in the Render window, click 6 Save and close the 3ds Max scene. 7 Maximize Revit Architecture.

, and save the file.

8 Save the exercise file with a unique name, or close the file without saving it.

458 | Chapter 13 Exporting to Autodesk 3ds Max or VIZ

Importing SketchUp Files

14

The ability to import SketchUp® files directly into Revit Architecture allows you to quickly integrate sketch concepts into the Revit environment and reuse the SketchUp model without having to manually rework it. Once the model has been imported, you can easily add detail with Revit components. In this tutorial, you import a SketchUp file into a Revit Architecture project as an in-place mass family.

After you import the SketchUp model, you create a small building from the front mass form. You use the mass faces of the mass form to create Revit elements, such as walls, curtain walls, and roofs, that compose the building.

459

460 | Chapter 14 Importing SketchUp Files

Importing a SketchUp Model as a Mass
In this exercise, you create a Revit Architecture project, and import a SketchUp model into the project as an in-place mass family. The in-place mass family is saved only in context of the project, and not in the library.

Create a Revit project
1 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Project. 2 In the New Project dialog, under Template file, click Browse. 3 In the left pane of the Choose Template dialog, click Training Files, and open Metric\Templates\DefaultMetric.rte. 4 In the New Project dialog, click OK. 5 Click File menu ➤ Save As. 6 In the Save As dialog, for File name, enter Import SketchUp, and click Save.

Import a SketchUp model
7 On the Design Bar, click the Massing tab. TIP If the Massing tab does not display in the Design Bar, right-click in the Design Bar, and click Massing on the context menu that displays. 8 On the Massing tab of the Design Bar, click Create Mass. 9 In the informational dialog, click OK. 10 In the Name dialog, enter SketchUp Model, and click OK. 11 Click File menu ➤ Import/Link ➤ CAD Formats. 12 In the Import/Link dialog:
■ ■ ■ ■ ■

Click the Training Files icon. Double-click the Common folder. For Files of type, select SketchUp Files. Click the Sketchup file, buildings.skp. Under Import or Link, for Layers, select All. This option allows you to select what to import: all elements, visible elements, or select from a list.

■ ■ ■

Under Layer/Level Colors, select Preserve colors. Under Positioning, select Manually place, and select Cursor at center. For Place at level, select Level 1. In a new project, Level 1 is the only choice. An existing project may have options for many levels to choose from, depending on the complexity of the project.

Under Scaling, for Import units, select Auto-Detect.

Importing a SketchUp Model as a Mass | 461

You can have Revit automatically detect and convert incoming units to project units (Auto-Detect) or you can specify the units for the SketchUp drawing if you know that information.

Click Open.

The model displays in the view on the Level 1 floor plan. 13 Click to place the lower right building inside of the elevation markers.

14 On the View toolbar, click

.

15 Enter ZR to zoom in on the lower right building. 16 On the Design Bar, click Finish Mass. NOTE A warning message displays because the mass contains only mesh geometry. The mesh geometry (faces) will be used in another exercise to create Revit elements, such as walls, curtain walls, and roofs. 17 In the warning dialog, click the Close button.

18 Proceed to the next exercise, “ Creating a Building from Mass Faces” on page 462.

Creating a Building from Mass Faces
In this exercise, you use the faces of the front mass form to create Revit Architecture elements, such as walls, curtain walls, and roofs, that compose the building. The mass faces are not converted to Revit elements: they remain in the project. You turn their visibility off to view only the building.

462 | Chapter 14 Importing SketchUp Files

After you create the building from the mass faces, you modify the roofs and add doors to complete the design.

Create roofs from mass faces
1 Zoom in to the front mass form, and on the View Control Bar, click Model Graphics Style ➤ Shading with Edges.

2 On the Massing tab of the Design Bar, click Roof by Face. 3 In the Type Selector, verify Basic Roof: Generic - 400mm displays. 4 On the Options Bar, for Level, verify Level 2 is selected. 5 Move your cursor over the top face of the left mass, and when the cursor displays a plus sign, select the face so that it highlights in red. The cursor displays a plus or a minus sign, indicating that you are adding or subtracting faces to and from the selection.

6 On the Options Bar, click Create Roof. A roof is created from the mass face. (It is difficult to see the roof in the current view. To see the new roof, on the View toolbar, click to turn off mass visibility in the view. Click again to display masses.)

7 With the Roof by Face command still active, on the Options Bar, verify that Select Multiple is selected. This option enables you to select more than 1 face when you create a roof. 8 Select the top 3 faces of the mass on the right.

Creating a Building from Mass Faces | 463

9 On the Options Bar, click Create Roof. 10 Adjust the view:

■ ■

On the View toolbar, click

.

In the Dynamic View dialog, click Spin, and move the cursor in the drawing area until you can see the middle mass.

11 Right-click, and click Cancel to end the Spin command. 12 On the Design Bar, click Roof by Face. 13 Select the top 4 faces of the mass.

14 On the Options Bar, click Create Roof.

464 | Chapter 14 Importing SketchUp Files

19 On the Design Bar.200mm displays. Create walls from mass faces 18 On the View toolbar. click you created. 20 In the Type Selector. Creating a Building from Mass Faces | 465 . click . click Modify to end the command. to turn off the mass visibility in the view. 21 On the Options Bar. click Wall by Face. for Loc Line. 16 On the View toolbar. verify Basic Wall: Generic . and adjust the view so you can see the front of the mass form. select Core Face: Exterior.15 On the Design Bar. 22 Select the 4 mass faces that have been highlighted in red below. This option lets you create the walls on the inside of the mass. and display only the roofs that 17 Click again to redisplay the masses.

verify Curtain System: 1500 x 3000mm displays. 26 In the Type Selector. click Create System. 466 | Chapter 14 Importing SketchUp Files . Create curtain systems from mass faces 25 On the Design Bar. 29 Using the same technique. 28 On the Options Bar. create the 2 curtain systems shown below. 27 Select the left face of the left mass. click Curtain System. click to view only the walls and roofs.23 On the View toolbar. 24 Click to redisplay the masses.

Create a roof from a mass face 33 On the Design Bar. click Create Roof. click Wall by Face. select the other wall. and adjust the view so you can see the back of the mass forms. TIP If you have difficulty selecting a wall that shares an edge with another wall. click . 32 Select the 5 walls highlighted below. click Roof by Face.30 On the View toolbar. press TAB until the desired wall highlights. Creating a Building from Mass Faces | 467 . Create walls from mass faces 31 On the Design Bar. and select it. 34 Select the mass face shown below. and on the Options Bar.

and on the Options Bar. 38 On the View toolbar. 36 Select the 4 mass faces shown below.Create additional curtain systems from mass faces 35 On the Design Bar. 39 Click to redisplay the masses. click Wall by Face. click to view the building that you have created. click Curtain System. click Create System. Create the final wall 37 On the Design Bar. and select the mass face shown below. 468 | Chapter 14 Importing SketchUp Files .

specify a point for the camera target. 44 On the View toolbar. and click in the drawing area to hide the grips. click Camera. Below the right corner of the view. click in the view. and curtain systems that make up your building Creating a Building from Mass Faces | 469 . double-click Level 1. 41 Zoom out beyond the drawing extents. The perspective view created by the camera displays. to view only the walls. roofs. 43 Resize the view by moving the frame grips until you can see the building. as shown.Create a 3D perspective view of the building with a camera 40 In the Project Browser. The view frame is highlighted in red and its grips display. In the far left corner of the building that you created. under Floor Plans. 42 Place the camera and its target: ■ ■ ■ On the View tab of the Design Bar. specify a point to place the camera.

for Justification. 46 On the Options Bar. Modify the roofs 49 On the Views toolbar. 48 Repeat the preceding steps to change the justifications of the 2 other curtain systems in the view. Click OK. click Modify. Click the frame to display its grips. Under Grid 1 Pattern. Change the justification of the curtain systems 45 On the Design Bar. and select the left curtain system in the view. for Justification. Under Grid 2 Pattern. click 47 In the Element Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ . select Center. select Center.You may need to resize the view again. 470 | Chapter 14 Importing SketchUp Files . click .

double-click {3D}. click . 57 In the Type Selector. under 3D Views. Creating a Building from Mass Faces | 471 . 56 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar.50 Select each roof to display its grips. and adjust the view so you can see the front of the building. double-click 3D View 1. 51 Right-click. Add doors to the building 54 In the Project Browser. and click Cancel to end the command. click Door. 58 Add doors to the building as shown below. Click Model Graphics Style ➤ Shading with Edges. 52 In the Project Browser. verify M_Single-Flush: 0915 x 2134mm displays. 55 On the View toolbar. and move the roof edges as shown below. under 3D Views. 53 On the View Control Bar: ■ ■ Click Model Graphics Style ➤ Hidden Line.

472 | Chapter 14 Importing SketchUp Files .59 Save and close the drawing.

Creating Families 6 473 .

474 | Chapter 15 Creating Families .

475 . Even though various types within a family can look completely different. you learn about the various types of families and the Family Editor. or other parameter variables as designed by the family creator. shape. This keeps everything coordinated and saves you the time and effort of manually keeping components and schedules up to date. material set. Each family element can have multiple types defined within it.About Families and the Family Editor 15 All elements in Revit Architecture 2008 are “family based. they are still related and come from a single source. each with a different size. In this tutorial. Changes to a family type definition ripple through the project and are automatically reflected in every instance of that family or type within the project.” The term family describes a powerful concept used throughout Revit Architecture to help you manage your data and make changes easily. thus the term family.

In this lesson. but you cannot create new system families.Using Families and the Family Editor One of the many advantages of using Revit Architecture is the ability to create your own families of components without having to learn a complex programming language. such as a dome roof. if you create a family called "double-hung window" that includes types with several sizes. You provide the information necessary to uniquely describe the family geometry. You can either duplicate and modify an existing component family or create a new component family based on a variety of family templates.rfa extension. for example. Some family types are pre-defined within Revit Architecture and cannot be created or modified outside of the project environment. floors. An example is a door family hosted by a wall family. For example. Family templates assist you in creating and manipulating component families. and save them from a project file to your library if needed. and furniture. trees. There are. however. has wall types that define interior. you learn about the three types of families and how they are used within a project and how they are created. because there is only one file to track. 476 | Chapter 15 About Families and the Family Editor . All different types that you create are stored with the master family file. Standard component families can exist outside of the project environment and have an .rfa extension. You also learn about the Family Editor. Using the Family Editor. You can duplicate and modify existing system families. Host-based families have components that require hosts. You can load them into projects. there is another type of family that allows you to create any shape or form required for a particular project and have Revit Architecture recognize it as a particular component type. and roofs. you create a family within predefined templates that contain the intelligent objects needed to create the particular family type. Walls. foundation. transfer them from one project to another. Revit Architecture has three types of families: ■ ■ ■ System Standard Component In-place System Families System families are pre-defined within Revit Architecture and comprise principle building components such as walls. This makes file management much easier. floors. the types would all be saved as one file which can then be loaded into any project. Family templates are either host-based or standalone. You work with the Family Editor to create and modify components. exceptions to this rule. In addition. generic. and when and how to use it. Standard Component Families Standard component families are loaded by default in project templates. The basic walls system family. Introduction to Families Most families are created in the Family Editor and saved as separate files with an . NOTE You can use “Transfer Project Standards” to copy system families from one project to another. exterior. and roofs are examples of these types of families. while many more are stored in component libraries. and partition wall styles. The following illustration shows different types within the basic walls family. Standalone families include columns.

as well as the level of detail associated with that view. Family element visibility can be dependent of your viewing direction. and the category that you use determines the component’s appearance and display control within the project. In this section. Families are listed in the Project Browser under their respective component category. Introduction to the Family Editor You can use the Family Editor to create both real-life building components and graphical/annotation components. To add a family to your project. In the final exercise. You create in-place families only within the current project. for example. you learn about the Family Editor. you learned about the different types of Revit Architecture families and when to use them. click Load From Library ➤ Load Family. Introduction to the Family Editor | 477 . and when to use it. you need to reload the family in the project to see the updated family. if you change the original family. such as plan. In-place Families In-place families are either model or annotation components in a particular project. You do not have to carry the original family file along with the project. it is saved with the project. custom wall treatments. or you can load it using the Load From Library. However. elevation. After the family has been loaded in the project. 3 Navigate to the library or location of the family. You have a choice of categories when you create in-place families. 2 On the File menu. The following illustration shows a building model of the Pantheon without a roof and with an in-place roof family. 4 Select the family file name and click Open. you can drag it into the document window.The following illustration shows host-based window and door family components in a wall. Adding a family to a project 1 Open or start a project. and also a standalone furniture family component. Load Family command on the File menu. or 3D. so they are useful for objects unique to that project. how to access it. Families store all of the necessary geometry to display the two-dimensional (2D) and three-dimensional (3D) versions of particular objects.

consider checking the web library and other web resources. 2 If there isn’t a component family loaded in the project. 4 If you can’t find the component you require. 5 Finally. When to use the Family Editor During the design process. This will be apparent because the only Design Bar tab available is Family. if you have exhausted your external resources. How to use the Family Editor You can access the Family Editor in several ways. navigate to a family file. If you find a close match. modify it as needed.rfa extension and it will open Revit Architecture in the Family Editor. you will inevitably come to a point where you need a specific component for your design. open it in the Family Editor. and the general procedure for creating a standard component family. You can have a project open and the Family Editor open simultaneously. When the family opens. 9 Save the newly-defined family. 7 Specify 2D and 3D geometry display characteristics with sub-category and entity visibility settings. It is far easier to modify an existing component within the Family Editor than to create it from scratch. 3 Next. you learn when to use the Family Editor. click File ➤ New ➤ Family. With Revit Architecture open. Also consider any internal family libraries that may exist on the network. select the appropriate template. you can double-click any file with an . 4 Add dimensions to specify parametric component geometry. and then load it into a new project and see how it performs.In this exercise. you can search the component library loaded on your local hard drive. 478 | Chapter 15 About Families and the Family Editor . 2 Define sub-categories for the family to aid in controlling visibility of the object. you can click File ➤ Open. Within the Windows® environment. it should be available within the Type Selector. you should create a new component family using one of the family templates as a starting point. and then load it into the project. you should then try to find the component that most closely resembles it. and click Open. 6 Flex the new model to verify correct component behavior. General procedure for creating a standard component family 1 Select the appropriate family template. how to access it. such as newsgroups. 3 Lay out reference planes to aid in drawing component geometry. In this case. To start a new family. 5 Add label dimensions to create type or instance parameters. and click Open. 8 Define family type variations by specifying different parameters. presume it is a bay window that you require. it opens within the Family Editor. There is a logical thought process that you should follow: 1 Is there a component of this type already loaded into this project? If so.

you create an in-place family. you start with a simple door family and then move onto a window family. Using the installed templates. you create it within the project file. not within the Family Editor. you learn how to create a different type of component. You create a furniture family. and several annotation families. In addition. you learn how to create specific Revit Architecture 2008 families.Creating Components in the Family Editor 16 In this tutorial. In each lesson. a lighting fixture. When you create an in-place family. This allows you to create the family in the context of the current project. 479 .

You can unjoin solids or cancel the cutting of a void on a solid using commands available on the Tools toolbar: ■ ■ ■ ■ Join Geometry Unjoin Geometry Cut Geometry Don’t Cut Process Overview: Creating a Family Follow this best practice process for creating a family: Step 1: Select a family template. Step 6: If the selected family template is a host-based template. Step 10: Repeat the flex procedure until reasonably complete. Step 2: Define additional subcategories. Blend: A blend contains two sketches. The sketches must not touch or intersect each other. To quit the sketch mode. Step 11: Test the family in a project environment. lineweight settings. 480 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . use the Cut Geometry tool to create the cut. it automatically cuts the solid. ■ Extrusion: The sketch for an extrusion must be a closed loop with no intersection between the sketch lines. and pin those reference planes. and test after each step. click Finish Sketch on the Design bar. and a Profile that must be a closed loop with no intersection between the sketch lines. Solids and Voids are sketch based. The first line of the path defines the work plane for the profile. When you are in sketch mode. line patterns. line colors. You can also join the geometry of different solids with the Join Geometry tool.Creating 3D Geometry All tools for creating 3D geometry can be accessed in the Family Design Bar. Revolve: The sketch for a revolved object must be a closed loop with no intersection between the sketch lines. Step 3: Use the Element Properties dialog to define the reference planes that represent the origin of the family. continue to incrementally add reference planes. switch between the different host types. Note that no geometry is created. Base and Top. and export settings for selected geometry. Step 7: Add 2 or more types in the Family Types dialog with different values for the parameters. and Sweep. Step 5: Dimension the reference planes and create parameters. Step 8: Test (flex) the family: switch between the types. Blend. ■ ■ ■ When a void is placed on a solid. Revolve. Subcategories are used to define visibility settings. create different host types for testing purposes. if required. build geometry. There are four different methods to create Solid geometry and/or Void geometry in the Family Design Bar: Extrusion. materials. you can no longer select or modify an element that is not in the sketch. There can be more than one closed loop in the sketch but they must not touch or intersect each other. The sample below shows a start angle of 0° and an end angle of 180°. Sweep: A sweep contains two sketches: a 2D Path that can be a closed or open. both of which must be a closed loop with no intersection between the sketch lines. Step 4: Create the skeleton of the family by adding reference planes in all required views. Each sketch is set to a different height. fill patterns. The start and end angles of the revolution can be defined in the Revolution properties. If you place the void before you add the solid. if the family includes a host. Step 9: Create a single level of 2D and 3D geometry and lock it to the selected reference planes. tests at this point ensure that the skeleton of the family works correctly.

Adding Reference Planes Next. Select a family template 1 Close all open projects or families. The furniture family in this lesson has the shape of two boxes. select both reference planes. click Ref Plane. NOTE The direction of the reference planes is not important. 8 Using the same method. therefore new reference planes are required in plan and elevation views. You have created a new furniture family. Level is open. and on the Options Bar. select Metric Furniture. click Training Files. 5 While pressing CTRL. you define the skeleton of the family with reference planes in plan and elevation views before you create geometry. 2 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Family. 1 On the Family tab of the Design Bar. and create one to the right. The floor plan Ref. and click Open. and click OK.rft. click to pin the reference planes. verify that Defines Origin is selected for the Center (Left/Right) reference plane. and click OK. and create one below. You should name reference planes to easily identify them in all views. 2 Create a horizontal reference plane above the existing horizontal reference plane. . Defining the Origin of a Family | 481 . You can control which reference planes are used as origin in the Element Properties dialog.Defining the Origin of a Family The intersection of 2 reference planes in a view defines the origin and the insertion point of a family in a project. click 7 In the Element Properties dialog. and the family contains 2 reference planes in this floor plan. 3 In the left pane of the New dialog. on the Edit toolbar. verify that Other ➤ Defines Origin is selected. 6 Select the horizontal reference plane named Center (Front/Back). The intersection of these reference planes now defines the origin and the insertion point of the family in plan view. 3 Create a vertical reference plane to the left of the existing vertical reference plane. 4 Navigate to Metric ➤ Templates.

on the Options Bar. 482 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . Name reference planes 5 Select the left reference plane and.4 Click Modify. and click OK. enter Left. click . for Identity Data ➤ Name. You name reference planes so that you can identify them in different views. 6 In the Element Properties dialog.

These behave the same as strong references. name the other reference planes Right. The reference plane can be accessed in a project for alignment or dimensioning. but cannot be accessed in a project for alignment or dimensioning. These are predefined system priorities that define a direction (for example. Defining Priorities for Reference Planes | 483 . use Left for the Is Reference value. The reference plane can be accessed in a project for alignment or dimensioning. define the priorities of the reference planes you have created. Shape handles display if the reference plane is dimensioned with an instance parameter. as shown.7 Using the same method. Defining Priorities for Reference Planes Revit Architecture includes several predefined priorities that you can apply to a reference plane. and click OK. select Left. for Other ➤ Is Reference. The reference allows minor strength snapping. and Back. Is Reference Value Not a Reference Definition The reference plane can be used in a family. Front. the strong reference is always captured first. If a reference plane defines the left edge of a family. The reference does not snap and shows no shape handles. 2 In the Element Properties dialog. Weak Reference Strong Reference Directional References According to these rules. top). Shape handles display if the reference plane is dimensioned with an instance parameter. The priority is specified as the Is Reference value in the Element Properties dialog for the reference plane. and on the Options Bar. click . right. When you dimension a family and a strong and a weak reference are close together. The reference plane allows minor strength snapping. 1 Select the Left reference plane. left.

Note that the Length parameter has been added to the dimension string. 4 Select the Left reference plane and the Right reference plane. enter 300mm. For Group parameter under. and click above the planes to place the dimension. 5 Click Modify. select Add Parameter. Width. 3 On the Family tab of the Design Bar. Repeat for the other reference plane. 7 On the Options Bar. specify the Is Reference value to correspond to the name of each reference plane (Right. and press ENTER. and press ENTER. Dimensioning Reference Planes The dimension controls the behavior of the location of reference planes. enter 750mm. Repeat for the other reference plane. Click the temporary dimension. Front. for Name. select Dimensions. We want drive Length. click Dimension. 8 In the Parameter Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Parameter Data. and Back). 2 Dimension the vertical reference planes: ■ ■ ■ Select one of the new reference planes. 1 Dimension the horizontal reference planes: ■ ■ ■ Select one of the new reference planes.3 Using the same method. 6 Select the dimension line. and Height as parameters of the furniture family. The dimension can have a fixed value or can be driven by a parameter. for Label. 484 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . Click OK. enter Length. Click the temporary dimension.

click Dimension. 12 Using the same method. 11 Click each of the vertical reference planes. Add a multi-segment dimension 10 On the Design Bar. click to place the dimension. and click the EQ symbol above the dimension. dimension the horizontal reference planes. Dimensioning Reference Planes | 485 .9 Using the same method. dimension the outer horizontal reference planes with the Width parameter.

486 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . and Base Back. but do not appear in the project. 17 In the Element Properties dialog. enter 50mm for the left temporary dimension. name them Base Left. 18 Click the Base Left reference plane. and click . Position and dimension the 4 new reference planes with a fixed distance from the outer reference planes. 15 Using the Element Properties dialog. Base Right. for Other ➤ Is Reference. and click OK. select Not a Reference. and press ENTER.Add base reference planes 13 On the Design Bar. Base Front. Because the base planes should not be used as a reference for dimensions or alignments. 16 While pressing CTRL. click Ref Plane. click the base reference planes. you need to specify the Is Reference values. 14 Create 2 horizontal reference planes and 2 vertical reference planes within the existing outer reference planes. Now the reference planes can be used in the family.

click Dimension. 20 On the Design Bar. position the remaining new reference planes.19 Using the same method. and lock the dimension. 21 Select the Left and Base Left reference planes. Dimensioning Reference Planes | 487 .

25 Create 2 horizontal reference planes above the existing horizontal reference plane. and section views. 26 Select the middle reference plane. You can dimension reference planes in plan. For Identity Data ➤ Name. you add a reference plane and the Height parameter of the family in the Front view. the family contains a level and a reference plane that defines the origin of the family in the elevation view. Under Is Reference. Click OK. 24 On the Design Bar. elevation.22 Using the same method. Make sure that you use consistent views to add dimensions. and lock the dimensions. 23 In the Project Browser. and click 27 In the Element Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ . click Ref Plane. enter Base Bottom. under Elevations. By default. select Not a Reference. 28 Change the lower temporary dimension to 150mm. Next. double-click Front. The front view displays. 488 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . dimension all other reference planes for the base with the outer reference planes.

for Name. Under Is Reference. and save the file as Cabinet. For Identity Data ➤ Name. Click OK. click 31 In the Element Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ . select Top. 37 Select the last dimension added. 36 Click Modify.rfa. select Dimensions. 39 Click File menu ➤ Save. click Dimension. 32 On the Design Bar. Under Group parameter under. you create 2 types of the family in the Family Types dialog. and click to place the dimension. enter Top. enter Height. select Add Parameter. 33 Select the lower reference plane and the Base Bottom reference plane. The basic skeleton of the furniture family is completed. 35 Dimension the lower reference plane and the Top reference plane. navigate to Training/Metric/Families. 30 With the top reference plane still selected. In the next exercise. 38 In the Parameter Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Parameter Data. for Label. 34 Lock the dimension. Click OK. Dimensioning Reference Planes | 489 .29 Select the top reference plane and change the temporary dimension to 1450mm. on the Options Bar.

When a family is loaded in a project. for Width. enter 2000. 3 In the Family Types dialog. 7 Click Apply. for Name. NOTE In the Family Types dialog. For Length. enter 800. 8 Using the same method. enter 1800. double-click Ref. NOTE In order to see changes applied to the reference planes. enter 1000. but no geometry has been added. 5 Using the same method. for Width. click New. For Length. 10 Click Apply. enter 1000. under Family Types. Note that the reference planes and the dimensions adjust according to the entered values. clicking Apply adjusts the geometry without closing the dialog. Family types allow you to predefine variations of a family. for Height. 9 In the Family Types dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Dimensions. check the family as often as possible by switching between different types. click Family Types. 4 In the Name dialog. 1 In the Project Browser. parameters. Note that the name of the type you have created is displayed in the Name selection box at the top of the dialog. 490 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . clicking OK adjusts the geometry and closes the dialog. under Floor plans. enter 2800. enter 600 x 1500 x 1600. 11 Click OK. Best practice is to perform the first tests when the reference planes. the types defined in the family editor appear in the project. for Height. click in the titlebar of the Family Types dialog and drag it so that both the dialog and the drawing area are visible. and click OK. each type is represented with selected parameters. 6 In the Family Types dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Dimensions. Family types are also a good way to test your family for correct behavior. 2 On the Family tab of the Design Bar.Managing Family Parameters and Family Types Parameters and their values can be managed in the Family Types dialog. Level. create a new type named 1000 x 2000 x 2800. create a new type named 800 x 1000 x 1800. and dimensions are specified.

Creating Solid Forms Use the simplest form to create solid geometry for a furniture family. Reference planes have the ability to define a work plane if they are named. edges of a solid form can also be locked to reference planes. Change a work plane for existing geometry: You can also use the Work Plane dialog to change the work plane for existing geometry in a drawing. click Solid Form ➤ Solid Extrusion. A work plane is a planar surface on which you can add sketch lines or others components. Creating Geometry In this lesson. you only need to lock the top and bottom edges of the solid geometry. Sketch an extrusion 1 In the Project Browser. Defining Work Planes Any solid/void form is created on a work plane. In such an instance. you can select a named reference plane or define a work plane by picking a plane or a line in the drawing area before you sketch geometry. double-click Ref. select the geometry. you use extrusions to model the solid geometry of a cabinet family. You constrain the extrusions to the reference planes you created in previous exercises. Because you lock the planar edges in plan view. under Floor Plans. Level. Define a work plane in sketch mode: While in sketch mode. 2 On the Design Bar. Make sure that you have set an appropriate work plane when you create 2D or 3D geometry in your family. you access the Work Plane dialog by clicking (Plane) on the Tools toolbar. where you can define the plane. Locking edges of solid/void forms: In elevation view. there is an option on the Sketch tab of the Design Bar to Set Work Plane. Lock geometry to reference planes | 491 . and click Edit Work Plane on the Options bar. This option will display the Work Plane dialog. In that case.Lock geometry to reference planes Locking sketch lines: Lines of a sketch can be locked to a reference plane in plan view to ensure that the edge of the solid is maintained if the dimension of the reference plane changes. create an extrusion from the plan view. The Family Editor offers multiple tools to set a work plane current: Define a work plane before adding geometry: Using the Work Plane dialog.

3 On the Options Bar. An example of sketch lines drawn off of reference planes An example of sketch lines aligned on the desired reference plane 492 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . The sketch of the extrusion is now locked to the outer reference planes in plan view. When the parameters Length and Width change. click Finish Sketch. NOTE Only sketch directly on the desired reference planes when the situation is clearly arranged. click . You can use the Align tool to align the sketch lines with the desired reference planes. When the setup is more complex. 4 Sketch the rectangle directly on the outer reference planes. with multiple reference planes or when you need to sketch with the Line tool. do not sketch directly on the reference planes. the extrusion is changed accordingly in plan view. 6 On the Sketch tab. 5 Lock each line of the sketch with the reference plane.

10 Lock the dimension. double-click Front. and click the top edge of the extrusion to align to this reference plane.Adjust extrusion height 7 In the Project Browser. Creating Solid Forms | 493 . click (Align). 8 On the Options Bar. NOTE You can also drag the top edge of the solid geometry with the extrusion shape handle to the top reference plane and lock it. 9 Select the Top reference plane as the alignment reference. under Elevations.

Create the base geometry 12 In the Project Browser. 19 Select the Base Bottom reference plane as the alignment reference. Level. under View Specific Display. 23 Save the file. and lock all the sketch lines with the reference planes. 13 On the Design Bar. 16 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. double-click Ref. click . 15 Sketch the rectangle directly on the reference planes for the base (the inner reference planes). double-click Front. under Floor Plans. and click the top edge of the extrusion to align to this reference plane. click Visibility. under Elevations. clear Plan/RCP. click Finish Sketch. 18 On the Tools toolbar. 20 Click Modify.11 Align the bottom of the extrusion to the Base Bottom reference plane and lock the dimension. 22 In the Family Element Visibility Settings dialog. and click OK. 21 Click the base geometry and on the Options Bar. 17 In the Project Browser. click Solid Form ➤ Solid Extrusion. The base should display only in elevation and 3D views. click . 494 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . 14 On the Options Bar.

and lock the geometry. They are view direction specific. Hiding the existing solid geometry before you create the symbolic lines helps you create the lines on the intersections of the reference planes. 7 Draw a symbolic line from the lower left corner to the top right corner. 2 While pressing CTRL. clear Coarse. click Symbolic Lines. and click the locks to create the constraint. lines need to be added as symbolic illustration in plan views. on the Options Bar. double-click Ref. click Detail Level ➤ Fine. For the furniture family. and lock the geometry. When you use 3D geometry. elevation. 3 On the View Control Bar. click Temporary Hide/Isolate ➤ Reset Temporary Hide/Isolate. The lines are greyed out. click Temporary Hide/Isolate ➤ Hide Element. the lines need to appear in medium and fine detail levels. under Detail Levels. verify that the Line tool is active. 8 While pressing CTRL. For example. 1 In the Project Browser. Click Modify. they show only in views that are parallel to their creation view. under Floor plans. 13 Click OK. The family geometry should change each time you apply a different type. click Family Types. select both lines and. 14 On the View Control Bar. elevation. select the symbolic line. Model lines and symbolic lines can also be constrained to reference planes. There are 2 methods for adding 2D geometry available from the Family tab of the Design Bar: Model lines: these can be added in all views. 10 On the View Control Bar. NOTE You have to exit Symbolic Line mode to lock the geometry. as the current displayed detail level is Coarse. 6 Draw a line from the top left corner of the reference planes to the lower right corner.Creating 2D Geometry You can create families using 3D and 2D geometry. the software automatically creates the correct plan. Test the family 11 On the Design Bar. Level. select the base geometry and the furniture geometry. click Visibility. 12 In the Family Types dialog. The lines display again. Symbolic lines: these can be added in plan. and click Apply. and click OK. and section views of the family. 9 In the Family element visibility settings dialog. 4 On the Design Bar. use model lines to display additional lines in the 3D view of the family. Creating 2D Geometry | 495 . but not in coarse. select a different family type. 5 On the Options Bar. By design. and section views.

click Model Graphics Style ➤ Shading with Edges. 496 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . Loading a Family into a Project Families can be loaded directly from the family editor into selected open projects. double-click View 1.The geometry of the furniture family is complete. This opens a predefined 3D view. Before you save the family. 2 On the View Control Bar. 4 Click View menu ➤ Orient ➤ Save View. The last view creates the thumbnail view of the family. Save a 3D view 1 In the Project Browser. under 3D views. 3 Click View menu ➤ Orient ➤ Northwest. set a 3D view of the family current. 5 Save the file.

All the family types you created are listed as options.NOTE If you save the family in a 3D view different than the default {3D} view and if you have saved the orientation of your view. 10 In the Project Browser. drag each of the types into the drawing area. If required. click . Creating a Door Family | 497 . 11 Click Modify. this view is maintained when the family is opened again. 7 Click Window menu ➤ Cabinet.rfa 3D View: View 1 to switch to the family. and click to place them. The family is loaded into the new project. under Cabinet. Create a project 6 On the Standard toolbar. You can press SPACE to change the orientation of the type. expand Families ➤ Furniture ➤ Cabinet. click Load into Projects. you create a custom door family based on the definition of a flush exterior door. 13 Close all open projects or families. 12 On the Views toolbar. 9 In the Project Browser. click (3D). Creating a Door Family In this lesson. you create new door types based on size and assign parameters respectively. After you create the door leaf as an extrusion. 8 On the Family tab of the Design Bar. you can create additional types with different dimensions in a project.

498 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . 2 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Family. and open Metric\Templates\Metric Door. The door type has a variable height and width. Create a new family based on the default door template 1 Close any open projects or families. and thickness.rft. Drawing the Door Plan View Components In this exercise.You also learn how to constrain the door design by adding labelled dimensions to specify values for the door width. 3 In the left pane of the New dialog. click Training Files. height. you draw the plan view components for the new door family.

click Symbolic Lines. and represent the door opening profile. 5 On the Window menu. click . 10 On the Options Bar. part of the door properties. Notice the four tiled views. Level. click Zoom ➤ Zoom All to Fit. Labelled dimensions. Drawing the Door Plan View Components | 499 . 6 Maximize the window. The reference planes that display are part of the default door template. The door opening is aligned and locked to the reference planes. 7 Enter ZF. sketch a 1000 mm x 50 mm rectangle for the door leaf as shown. select Doors [projection]. are also displayed.4 On the View menu. 9 In the Type Selector. Draw the door panel plan view representation 8 On the Design Bar. 11 Starting at the door hinge point on the lower left corner of the door opening. Floor Plan: Ref. this is the keyboard shortcut for Zoom to Fit. click Tile.

click Dimension.Dimension the door panel 12 On the Design Bar. 13 Add a horizontal dimension from the left edge to the right edge of the door panel as shown. 14 Add a vertical dimension from the top edge of the door panel to the bottom edge as shown. 500 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor .

select Width for Label. Because labelled dimensions are parameters.Add dimension labels to the door leaf 15 On the Design Bar. NOTE This same label is applied to the dimension referencing the door opening. 17 On the Options Bar. 19 On the Options Bar. a user can change the value of the Width parameter and all dimensions labelled with it change accordingly. click Modify. 16 Select the vertical dimension that controls the door width. Drawing the Door Plan View Components | 501 . select Thickness for Label. 18 Select the horizontal dimension that references the door thickness.

so it doesn’t visually interfere with the door swing location. 23 On the Options Bar. When drawing an arc from center and end points. 25 Select the upper right corner of the door opening for the arc start point. TIP If the Arc from Center and End Points command is not visible on the Options Bar. you first specify the arc center.Draw the door opening plan view arc 20 Select the dimension with the two EQ symbols and move it. click the down arrow button. as shown. click . the arc is selected so you can see the arc center and each end point. then you specify each end point. In the image below. along with the witness line controls. click Symbolic Lines. 21 On the Design Bar. select Plan Swing [cut]. 22 In the Type selector. 26 Select the upper left corner of the door leaf for the arc endpoint. 24 Enter SI. 502 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . and select the intersection at the upper left corner of the door opening for the arc center point. and select the command from the menu.

3 On the Design Bar.Add a reference plane for the exterior face of the door 27 Proceed to the next exercise. under Elevations. under Specify a new Work Plane. Creating the Door Leaf Solid Geometry In this exercise. click Lines. Creating the Door Leaf Solid Geometry | 503 . Dataset Continue using the family file from the previous exercise. you create the solid geometry of the door leaf with an extrusion. click Solid Form ➤ Solid Extrusion. double-click Exterior. 6 On the Options Bar. and click OK. 1 In the Project Browser. 2 On the Design Bar. “Creating the Door Leaf Solid Geometry” on page 503. select Reference Plane: Exterior for Name. 5 On the Design Bar. 4 In the Work Plane dialog. and then select the lower right corner of the door opening for the second corner of the rectangle. enter 50 mm for Depth. and click . 7 Select the upper left corner of the door opening for the first corner of the rectangle. click Set Work Plane.

click Finish Sketch. 504 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . 9 In the Project Browser under Elevations. double-click Left. TIP When you add the witness line to the exterior face of the extrusion. then click to specify the dimension witness line.8 On the Design Bar. use the TAB key to toggle to the extrusion reference. click Dimension. 10 On the Design Bar. 11 Add a horizontal dimension from the exterior face of the door extrusion to the interior face of the door extrusion.

click Modify. click Visibility. Creating the Door Leaf Solid Geometry | 505 . Left/Right. Specify the visibility of the door leaf in plan view 15 On the Design Bar. and Fine are selected. and When cut in Plan/RCP. 19 Under Detail Levels. and clear Plan/RCP.12 On the Design Bar. 18 In the Family Element Visibility Settings dialog. Level. click Modify and select the dimension. 13 On the Options Bar. select Front/Back. 16 Select the door leaf extrusion. verify that Coarse. double-click Ref. under View Specific Display. Medium. 14 In the Project Browser. under Floor Plans. select Thickness for Label. and click OK. 17 On the Options Bar.

and click OK. click 17 In the Materials dialog. and click OK. 21 In the Element Properties dialog. 10 In the Element Properties dialog. Assigning Materials to the Door Components In this exercise. enter Oak Door for Name. you assign a material to the door leaf. 7 In the Materials dialog. 5 In the Material Library dialog. 12 In the Element Properties dialog. 4 In the Materials dialog. 18 In the Element Properties dialog. 506 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . under Materials and Finishes. select Oak Door for Name. for Material. 15 On the Options Bar. 16 In the Element Properties dialog. and click OK. click OK. It also defines its appearance when rendered. click . This material designation controls how it displays in shaded and hidden line views. 13 On the Design Bar. under AccuRender. click Modify. Create a new material based on the existing red oak material 1 On the Settings menu.Dark. 6 Click OK. 9 On the Options Bar. click OK. Dataset Continue using the family file from the previous exercise. click Materials. click for Texture. The solid geometry of the door is now complete. The door leaf is assigned the new Oak Door material. 3 In the New Material dialog.No Gloss. navigate to AccuRender/Wood/Oak.Red/Stained. 19 Repeat the previous five steps for the exterior frame extrusion. click OK.20 On the Options Bar. and click OK. click . 22 Proceed to the next exercise. Assign the Oak Door material to the door frame 14 Select the interior door frame extrusion. for Material. 2 In the Materials dialog. “Assigning Materials to the Door Components” on page 506. select Oak Door. under Name. click Duplicate. click . click 11 In the Materials dialog. select Panel for Subcategory. Assign the Oak Door material to the door leaf 8 Select the door leaf extrusion.

The door frame is assigned the new Oak Door material. Flex the door model 23 Zoom out to view the entire door. under 3D Views. under Views (all). 22 Zoom in on a door corner. double-click View 1. and select Shading with Edges. Assigning Materials to the Door Components | 507 . 21 On the View Control Bar. click the Model Graphics Style control. View the new door 20 In the Project Browser. The Oak Door material is now assigned to the door leaf and door frame.

28 Proceed to the next exercise. 508 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . 2 In the Family Types dialog. Click Apply. 27 Click OK. you ensure it adjusts to the changes it may encounter once loaded into a project. you define new door types based on the door model that you have created. 3 In the Name dialog. In the Family Types dialog. Click Apply. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Dimensions. Under Other. enter 2000 mm for Height. under Family Types. enter 925 x 2000mm for Name. and click OK. This allows you to apply changes made in the dialog and see how the new door reacts. 24 On the Design Bar. Enter 1500 mm for Width. enter 125 mm for Frame Width. Dataset Continue using the family file from the previous exercise. By flexing the new component. “Defining New Door Types” on page 508 Defining New Door Types In this exercise. Try to move the dialog off to the side so you can still see the door family next to it. Define new door types with various heights and widths 1 On the Design Bar. 26 Return the door parameters to their original values. enter 75 mm for Frame Width. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Dimensions. enter 2500 mm for Height. click Family Types.Flexing the new family is an important part of the design process. click Family Types. Notice the door geometry adapts to the new dimension values. Under Other. click New. 25 In the Family Types dialog. Enter 1000 mm for Width.

4 In the Family Types dialog. Enter 925 mm for Width. Define the second new door type. Defining New Door Types | 509 . click Training Files. specify the following: ■ ■ ■ Under Dimensions. Place new door types in the project 21 On the Design Bar. and click OK. under Template file. and click OK. click Save. click New ➤ Project. 10 In the Family Types dialog. and click Open. 13 Navigate to the folder of your choice and save the new door family with the name. 9 In the Name dialog. Click Apply. enter 2134 mm for Height. 17 Under Create new. Click Apply. Training Door. Enter 750 mm for Width. click Door. enter 2000 mm for Height. 19 On the Options Bar. 5 Under Family Types.rte. click New. 15 In the New Project dialog. enter 2100 mm for Height. 11 Click OK. select it. 12 On the File menu. and open Metric\Templates\DefaultMetric. click Load. You now have three new door types defined within your door family. specify the following: ■ ■ ■ Under Dimensions.rfa. 20 In the Open dialog. 7 In the Family Types dialog. click New. Click Apply. select Project. Define the third new door type.rfa. 22 Draw a wall segment 8000mm long. 6 In the Name dialog. 8 Under Family Types. specify the following: ■ ■ ■ Under Dimensions. Training Door. Load the new door family into a new project 14 On the File menu. click Browse. click Wall. 16 In the left pane of the Choose Template dialog. enter 750 x 2100mm for Name. and click OK. enter 1220 x 2134mm for Name. Use the default wall selection in the Type Selector. Enter 1220 mm for Width. 18 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. navigate to the location where you saved the door family.

28 In the Type Selector. click . click the Model Graphics Style control. select Training Door : 925 x 2000mm. 510 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . 25 On the Design Bar. click Door.23 On the View toolbar. 29 Add this door to the center of the wall as shown. and select Shading with Edges. 27 Add the door to the left side of the wall as shown. 24 On the View Control Bar. 26 In the Type Selector. select Training Door : 750 x 2100mm.

You then assign parameters to the window family to allow for the creation of different-sized versions of the nine-light prototype.30 In the Type Selector. default sill height. You create the window frame. and create the window sash as a sweep. you create a custom window family based on the definition of a fixed rectangular window with nine lights. and specify values for the window width. height. Creating a Window Family | 511 . you assign new dimension values to the window to create new types within the window family. glazing and mullions as extrusions. 31 Add the third door type to the right side of the wall as shown. Creating a Door Family. Finally. This completes the lesson. and mullion offset. You now have three new flush exterior doors based on the new door family prototype. Creating a Window Family In this lesson. 32 You can close all files without saving. select Training Door : 1220 x 2134mm.

2 On the File menu.rft. also one of the window properties. you specify the parameters for the new window family. 6 Two dimension strings display with their labels. 5 Enter ZF. click New ➤ Family. 512 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . these specific type parameters are adjustable once the window is part of a project. 3 In the left pane of the New dialog. click Training Files. this is the keyboard shortcut for Zoom to Fit. is one of the type parameters. Create a new family based on the default window template 1 Close any open projects or families. Height and Default Sill Height. The label name. The window type has a variable height and width. equally spaced vertical mullions. When you add labels to dimensions. and the height of the top and bottom row of lights is adjustable. and open Metric\Templates\Metric Window. 4 Maximize the Elevation: Exterior view.Specifying the New Window Parameters In this exercise.

enter 1300 mm for Height. 8 In the Family Types dialog. click Sketch 2D Path. Change the height and width values again. Dataset Continue using the family file from the previous exercise. specify the following: ■ ■ ■ Under Dimensions. Move the dialog off to the side so you can see the window opening. 5 Sketch a rectangle to represent the sweep path starting at the upper left corner of the opening and ending at the lower right corner. 4 On the Options Bar. click Family Types. 11 Proceed to the next exercise. Snap the cursor to each corner. Enter 1800 mm for Width. click Solid Form ➤ Solid Sweep. click Lines. This is the starting point for the new window. Creating the Window Frame Solid Geometry In this exercise. “Creating the Window Frame Solid Geometry” on page 513. and click Apply.” and it is done to avoid conflicts and to ensure that all model geometry adjusts to changes as designed.Modify the new window type height and width parameters 7 On the Design Bar. 9 Enter 1000 mm for Height and 2000 mm for Width. 10 Click OK. you create the solid geometry of the window frame with a sweep. then sketching the sweep profile. Create a sweep path for the window frame solid geometry 1 On the Design Bar. click . 3 On the Design Bar. 2 On the Design Bar. This process is called “flexing the model. and click Apply. Creating sweep geometry requires first sketching the sweep path. Notice how the window opening adapts to the changing dimension values. Click Apply. Creating the Window Frame Solid Geometry | 513 . The profile is swept along the path to create the solid geometry.

13 On the Options Bar. click . Add a reference plane for the sweep profile 8 On the Design Bar. click Sketch Profile. The red dot indicates the intersection of the sweep path and the profile plane. and click Open View. click the Scale control. 7 On the Design Bar. click Finish Path. 514 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . select Elevation: Right. and specify an offset of 50 mm. 11 Zoom in on the red dot in the middle of the wall. click Ref Plane. 9 In the Go To View dialog.6 Click the locks so the sweep is locked to the opening size. 12 On the Design Bar. and select 1:10. 10 On the View Control Bar. 14 Pick the exterior wall face so that a reference line is offset 50 mm to the left of the exterior wall face as shown.

sketch the frame profile approximately as shown. click Lines. 20 On the Design Bar. select Prefer: Wall faces. 22 In the Element Properties dialog. Sketch the window frame profile 23 On the Design Bar. 21 On the Options Bar.15 On the Design Bar. click . 16 On the Options Bar. and click OK. 24 On the Options Bar. select Chain and click . 17 Add a dimension between the exterior wall face and the new reference plane. Creating the Window Frame Solid Geometry | 515 . click Modify. enter Sash for the Name. click Dimension. 25 Below the red dot. and select the reference plane. under Identity Data. 18 On the Design Bar. and select the dimension. click Modify. 19 Drag the value control off to the side as shown.

516 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . and drag it to the exterior face of the wall. the frame profile should extend beyond the edges of the wall. click Modify. and drag it to the interior face of the wall. 26 On the Design Bar. click it to constrain the left edge of the frame to the interior face.NOTE When you sketch the frame profile. However. click it to constrain the frame to the exterior wall face. the exact dimensions are not critical. 28 Select the left edge of the frame section. When the lock displays. 27 Select the right edge of the frame section. When the lock displays. Precise dimensions are assigned to the frame profile in subsequent steps.

TIP After adding the dimension. Creating the Window Frame Solid Geometry | 517 . 30 On the Design Bar. and specify the dimension value. click Modify. 31 Add a vertical dimension of 40 mm to the left side of the frame and another vertical dimension of 20 mm to the right side of the frame. as shown. select the line you want to move. click Dimension.29 Select the short line parallel and to the right of the Sash reference plane. Drag it to the left and align it with the Sash reference plane. click it to lock the line to the reference plane. When the lock displays.

Lock the alignment when the lock icon displays. Align the new profile to the window opening edge 32 Select the 40 mm dimension. select the top horizontal line of the frame profile. TIP If you don’t see the lock icon. 34 On the Tools toolbar. Next. this is the top of the window opening. 35 Select the horizontal reference plane that intersects the red dot. zoom out until it displays. 33 Select the 20 mm dimension. click the lock to constrain the present value. When the lock displays. click the lock to constrain the present value. click Finish Sweep. 37 On the Design Bar. click Finish Profile. When the lock displays.Modify each dimension if necessary. click . 518 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . 36 On the Design Bar.

spin the model so you can see the interior of the frame. under Specify a new Work Plane. double-click Exterior.The window frame profile is swept around the window opening. click . and enter . click Lines. 40 Proceed to the next exercise. and select Lock. 5 On the Options Bar. Creating the Window Sash Solid Geometry In this exercise. “Creating the Window Sash Solid Geometry” on page 519. press TAB to cycle through the selection options. 38 In the Project Browser. 2 On the Design Bar. 4 On the Design Bar. and click OK. Chain of walls or lines. select Reference Plane: Sash for Name. If necessary. and double-click View 1. Dataset Continue using the family file from the previous exercise. 39 In the Project Browser. Specify the window sash extrusion parameters 1 On the Design Bar.45 mm for Depth. click Solid Form ➤ Solid Extrusion. click Set Work Plane. Creating the Window Sash Solid Geometry | 519 . you create the solid geometry of the window sash with an extrusion. expand 3D Views. under Views (all). and select the option. 3 In the Work Plane dialog. under Elevations. Pick the sash profile lines 6 Place the cursor over the left side of the frame.

520 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . 8 Specify the upper left inside corner of the window frame for the first corner of the rectangle. click Finish Sketch. 9 On the Design Bar. Draw offset extrusion lines 7 On the Options Bar. set the following options: Click . and then specify the lower right inside corner for the second corner of the rectangle. ■ ■ Enter . You specify a negative offset value to indicate an extrusion direction inside of the window frame. and lock icons display on each line.The entire sash outline is selected.50 mm for Offset. ■ Click .

Creating the Window Glass Solid Geometry In this exercise. “Creating the Window Glass Solid Geometry” on page 521. you create the solid geometry of the window glass with an extrusion. under Elevations. under 3D Views. Notice the sash is aligned with the Sash reference plane. double-click View 1. Spin the model if necessary to view the sash and frame at various angles. 11 In the Project Browser. 12 Proceed to the next exercise. The window sash extrusion is now complete. double-click Right.10 In the Project Browser. Creating the Window Glass Solid Geometry | 521 .

4 Select the left edge of the sash so that a vertical reference plane is added 30 mm to the right. Add a reference plane to specify the glass work plane 1 In the Project Browser. under Elevations. 3 On the Options Bar. 2 On the Design Bar.Dataset Continue using the family file from the previous exercise. and enter 30 mm for Offset. click Ref Plane. as shown. double-click Right. click . 522 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor .

click . double-click Exterior. and click OK. and click OK. 9 On the Options Bar. 17 Select each of the sash extrusion lines to create the glass boundary.5 On the Design Bar. 14 In the Work Plane dialog. click Dimension. 6 Add a horizontal dimension of 30 mm between the left edge of the sash and the reference plane. Creating the Window Glass Solid Geometry | 523 . click Set Work Plane. enter Glazing for the Name instance parameter. 15 On the Design Bar. enter -12 mm for Depth. under Elevations. click Lines. 13 On the Design Bar. click Modify. 7 On the Design Bar. and select Lock. under Specify a new Work Plane. 8 Select the reference plane. Pick lines to define the glass extrusion 12 On the Design Bar. 11 In the Project Browser. click Solid Form ➤ Solid Extrusion. 16 On the Options Bar. under Identity Data. select Reference Plane: Glazing for Name. 10 In the Element Properties dialog. click .

double-click Right. click . you can control subcategory visual style using the Objects Styles dialog. click Finish Sketch. and glass 19 In the Project Browser. 23 On the Design Bar. 524 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . After the family is loaded into a project. sash. View the window model with frame. NOTE Assigning subcategories to model elements is important. specify Glass for the Subcategory instance parameter. and click OK.18 On the Design Bar. under Identity Data. click Modify. 22 In the Element Properties dialog. 21 On the Options Bar. 20 Select the glass extrusion. under Elevations.

make sure the window frame stretched with the opening and that the glass extrusion remains attached to the interior edge of the sash. click Family Types.24 In the Project Browser. Under Other. 26 In the Family Types dialog. Click Apply. it is important to verify that all model elements adapted to the changes as expected. under 3D Views. Flex the window model 25 On the Design Bar. You should flex the model at regular intervals to catch problems early. Most problems can be resolved by aligning and locking lines. Notice the window adapts to the new dimension parameters. enter 500 mm for Default Sill Height. Enter 1500 mm for Width. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Dimensions. NOTE After flexing the model. Move the Family Types dialog off to the side so you can see the window model. double-click View 1. Spin the model if necessary to view the sash and frame at various angles. For example. Creating the Window Glass Solid Geometry | 525 . enter 1500 mm for Height.

Add reference planes to specify the location of the new window mullion centerlines 1 In the Project Browser. click Dimension. click Ref Plane. 4 On the Design Bar. “Creating the Window Mullion Solid Geometry” on page 526. 526 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . under Elevations. click to return the window to its original dimensions. the exact location is not critical. 29 Proceed to the next exercise. 3 Add two horizontal and two vertical reference planes inside of the window opening to approximate the mullion centerline locations as shown. 28 On the Edit toolbar. Dataset Continue using the family file from the previous exercise. 2 On the Design Bar.27 Click Cancel. double-click Exterior. Precise dimensions are assigned to the reference planes in subsequent steps. NOTE When you draw each reference plane. Creating the Window Mullion Solid Geometry In this exercise. you create the solid geometry of the window mullions based on reference planes and extrusions.

as shown.Add a multi-segmented dimension referencing all of the vertical reference planes except the center (Left/Right) as shown. 5 Add a dimension between the top of the window opening (top reference plane) and the horizontal reference plane below it. click Modify. click the EQ symbol to make the dimension segments equal. as shown. Creating the Window Mullion Solid Geometry | 527 . 8 Select the dimension on the upper-right that references the top two horizontal reference planes. Do not be concerned with dimension values. After adding the dimension. Add a mullion offset family parameter 7 On the Design Bar. Do not be concerned with dimension values. 6 Add a dimension between the bottom of the window opening (bottom reference plane) and the horizontal reference plane above it.

11 On the Design Bar. 528 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . Select Instance. 12 In the Family Types dialog. under Dimensions. Click OK.9 On the Options Bar. TIP Due to the length of the dimension label.. Notice the dimension value becomes editable. you may want to drag the dimension value as shown. enter 350 mm for Mullion Offset. 10 In the Parameter Properties dialog. select <Add parameter. enter Mullion Offset for Name. select Family parameter.> for Label. and click OK. click Family Types. Under Parameter Data. select Dimensions.. Under Group parameter under. specify the following parameters: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ For Parameter Type. 13 Select the horizontal reference plane second from the bottom.

it is critical that the short horizontal lines align with the horizontal edges of the sash. select Mullion Offset for Label. 20 On the Design Bar. 23 On the Options Bar. click Set Work Plane. 18 On the Design Bar. click Modify. select Reference Plane: Glazing for Name. under Specify a new Work Plane. However. As you did before. move the dimension value as shown. and enter 350 mm as the new value. click Modify. 22 On the Design Bar. 16 Select the dimension on the lower-right. and click OK.14 Click the dimension value. 21 In the Work Plane dialog. 24 Sketch a rectangle centered on the left vertical mullion reference plane approximately as shown. Do not be concerned with precise dimensions. 17 On the Options Bar. enter 14 mm for Depth. click Solid Form ➤ Solid Extrusion. Creating the Window Mullion Solid Geometry | 529 . 15 On the Design Bar. Watch the Status Bar to be sure that the lines are snapping to the sash. and click . Create the vertical mullion extrusions 19 On the Design Bar. click Lines.

27 Add a horizontal dimension from the left edge of the mullion extrusion to the reference plane centered between the vertical mullion extrusion sketch lines. Click the EQ symbol to make both horizontal dimensions equal. notice lock icons display on the interior horizontal edges of the sash. 26 On the Design Bar. click Dimension.After you complete the sketch. Move the dimension values as shown. 530 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . 25 Click both of the locks so the mullion adapts to changes in window height. and to the right edge of the mullion extrusion.

and place it above the dimension you placed in the previous steps. and select the dimension you added in the previous step. enter Mullion Width for Name. Under Group parameter under. 31 In the Parameter Properties dialog. 29 On the Design Bar. Move the Mullion Width value to the left as shown. 30 On the Options Bar.28 Add a horizontal dimension from the left edge to the right edge of the mullion extrusion. Click OK. Creating the Window Mullion Solid Geometry | 531 . Select Type. select Dimensions. specify the following parameters: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ For Parameter Type. Under Parameter Data. select <Add parameter> for Label. select Family parameter. click Modify.

follow these basic steps: ■ Sketch the rectangle similar to the mullion on the left. 33 On the Design Bar. ■ Dimension mullion edges and the reference plane at the center of the mullion and click the equality constraint. enter 40 mm for Mullion Width. Remember. and click Apply. 35 In the Family Types dialog. click Family Types. 532 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . Select the dimension. select Mullion Width for Label. This is changed in later steps. Add a dimension between the left and right mullion edges. and on the Options Bar. Move the dialog off to the side so you can see the window in the drawing area. click Finish Sketch.32 Repeat the previous steps to create an identical mullion centered on the right vertical reference plane as shown. ■ ■ Do not be concerned with the value of the mullion width. Specify the mullion width parameter 34 On the Design Bar. NOTE Do not lock the lines to the sash edge as you did previously.

37 Click Cancel. click to return the window to its original dimensions. and aligned with the sash edge. under Specify a new Work Plane.Notice the mullions remain centered and equally spaced on the reference planes. NOTE After flexing the model. Most problems can be resolved by aligning and locking lines. 40 On the Design Bar. Sketch the horizontal mullion extrusions 39 On the Design Bar. and click OK. and the mullions stretch with the new window height. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Dimensions. enter 500 mm for Default Sill Height. 38 On the Edit toolbar. You should flex the model at regular intervals to catch problems early. Click Apply. enter 1500 mm for Height. evenly spaced. 41 In the Work Plane dialog. or undoing the same. In this case. Flex the window model 36 In the Family Types dialog. select Reference Plane : Glazing for Name. click Set Work Plane. click Solid Form ➤ Solid Extrusion. it is important to verify that all model elements adapted to the changes as expected. Notice the window adapts to the new dimension parameters. Under Other. Enter 1500 mm for Width. Creating the Window Mullion Solid Geometry | 533 . you should pay close attention to the new mullions and make sure they remain centered.

46 Add a vertical dimension from the top edge of the mullion extrusion to the reference plane at the center of the mullion. as shown. 48 Add a vertical dimension from the top edge to the bottom edge of the mullion extrusion. click Modify. Do not be concerned with the dimension value. click Dimension. 43 On the Options Bar. 534 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . 47 On the Design Bar. and select the dimension you added in the previous step. Notice the Depth value on the Options Bar remains at the previously specified value. and then click the lock icons to lock the left and right edges to the edge of the sash. 45 On the Design Bar. and then to the bottom edge of the mullion extrusion. and move the EQ values off to each side as shown. click Dimension. 49 On the Design Bar. Click the EQ symbol to make both vertical dimensions equal.42 On the Design Bar. 44 Sketch a rectangle centered on the upper horizontal mullion reference plane approximately as shown. click Lines. click .

Remember. Add a dimension between the upper and lower mullion edges. ■ Dimension mullion edges and the reference plane at the center of the mullion and click the equality constraint. Move the dimension value as shown. Select the dimension. Creating the Window Mullion Solid Geometry | 535 . NOTE Do not lock the lines to the sash edge as you did previously.50 On the Options Bar. ■ ■ 52 On the Design Bar. click Finish Sketch. and on the Options Bar. 51 Repeat the previous steps to create an identical mullion centered on the lower horizontal reference plane as shown. follow these basic steps: ■ Sketch the rectangle similar to the mullion you just completed. select Mullion Width for Label. select Mullion Width for Label.

and select the vertical mullions. spin the model to get a good view of the mullions. click Join Geometry. 536 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . under 3D Views. Join the mullion geometry 53 On the Tools menu.The horizontal mullion extrusions are now complete. If necessary. double-click View 1. 55 In the Project Browser. 54 Select the horizontal mullions.

you can still see the window. Under Other. Notice the window adapts to the new dimension parameters and the mullions stretch with the new window height. Flex the window model 56 Adjust the location of the window model within the drawing area. click Family Types. 57 On the Design Bar. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Dimensions. enter 1500 mm for Height. enter 500 mm for Default Sill Height. Click Apply. so when you open the Family Types dialog. Enter 1500 mm for Width. 59 Click Cancel.Notice the mullion extrusions are joined. Creating the Window Mullion Solid Geometry | 537 . 58 In the Family Types dialog.

sash. and click OK. click the Model Graphics Style control. click to return the window to its original dimensions. select Stained. Assign the Pine Frame material to the frame. “Assigning Materials to the Window Components” on page 538. 3 In the New Material dialog. Assigning Materials to the Window Components In this exercise. double-click Exterior. click for Texture. click Duplicate. TIP Hold the CTRL key down as you select the sweep and various extrusions. 538 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . and mullions that you want to display in renderings of the new window. Dark. Dataset Continue using the family file from the previous exercise. and mullions 7 In the Project Browser. Create a new material based on the existing yellow pine material 1 On the Settings menu. under AccuRender. 8 On the View Control Bar. No Gloss. navigate to AccuRender/Wood/Pine. the sash. under Elevations. 6 In the Materials dialog. Yellow/. click Materials. 61 Proceed to the next exercise. click OK. 5 In the Material Library dialog. enter Pine Frame for Name. and select Shading with Edges. and the mullions. 9 Select the window frame sweep. and click OK. 4 In the Materials dialog. sash. 2 In the Materials dialog. you assign materials to the frame.60 On the Edit toolbar.

click for Material. The window frame is assigned the new Pine Frame material. click Modify. Modify the glass visibility 19 In the Project Browser under Elevations. 18 On the Design Bar. click Visibility. and click OK. under View Specific Display. 11 In the Element Properties dialog. 22 In the Family Element Visibility Settings dialog. and Fine are selected. under Identity Data. 24 In the Project Browser. verify that Coarse. 20 Select the glass extrusion. 17 In the Element Properties dialog. 23 Under Detail Levels. select Edit for Visibility. click . double-click Right. under 3D Views. select Pine Frame for Name. 21 On the Options Bar. select Front/Back and When cut in Plan/RCP (if category permits). Assigning Materials to the Window Components | 539 .10 On the Options Bar. under View Specific Display. 15 In the Family Element Visibility Settings dialog. and Fine are selected. double-click View 1. select Frame/Mullion for Subcategory. clear the other view options. Medium. 14 In the Element Properties dialog. verify that Coarse. select Front/Back and When cut in Plan/RCP (if category permits). click OK. and click OK. under Graphics. 13 In the Materials dialog. and click OK. Medium. 12 Under Materials and Finishes. 16 Under Detail Levels.

25 Zoom in on a window corner. The window frame. you define new window types based on the window model that you just created. sash. Defining New Window Types In this exercise. and glass display their assigned materials. mullions. “Defining New Window Types” on page 540. 26 Proceed to the next exercise. You then create multiple window types that will be available to the user after the family is loaded into a project. You begin by adding a formula to the mullion offset parameter to specify horizontal divisions of one third the overall height of the window. 540 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor .

The horizontal mullions are now spaced apart at one third the height of the window. Defining New Window Types | 541 . it is also a good idea to flex the model after a new formula is applied. 3 In the Family Types dialog. and click Apply. verify that 2000 mm is specified for Height. 2 On the Design Bar. click Family Types. Add a mullion offset formula to the family type 1 Zoom to fit and move the window model off the side of the drawing area so it will be visible after you open the Family Types dialog. and click Apply.Dataset Continue using the family file from the previous exercise. In the Family Types dialog. Flex the window model 4 In addition to flexing the model after the addition or modification of model geometry. enter Height/3 in the Formula column for Mullion Offset.

verify that the following parameter values are specified: ■ ■ ■ Enter 2500 mm for Width. under Family Types. 7 In the Name dialog. and click OK. click New. Define new window types with various heights and widths 6 In the Family Types dialog. and click Apply. 5 In the Family Types dialog. 542 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor .The window height is doubled. Enter 1250 mm for Height. enter 1000 mm for Height. enter 2500 w x 1250mm h for Name. 8 In the Family Types dialog. Click Apply. but the one third height spacing is maintained in the horizontal mullions.

Define the final window type 12 Under Family Types. enter 2600 w x 1300mm h for Name. enter 1800 w x 1500mm h for Name and click OK. 16 Navigate to the location of your choice and save the new window family with the name. 15 On the File menu. Click Apply. 11 In the Family Types dialog. Defining New Window Types | 543 . 18 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. click New. click to start a new project based on your default template. Click OK. specify the following parameter values: ■ ■ ■ ■ Enter 1800 mm for Width. You now have three new window types defined within your window family.9 Under Family Types.rfa. Enter 1300 mm for Height. click Window. 13 In the Name dialog. click New. Enter 1500 mm for Height. Load the new window family into a new project 17 On the Standard toolbar. 14 In the Family Types dialog. 19 On the Options Bar. 10 In the Name dialog. click Load. specify the following parameter values: ■ ■ ■ Enter 2600 mm for Width. Click Apply. Training Window. click Save. and click OK.

click . This is because you set the visibility values to display when cut in plan/RCP. 32 On the View menu.rfa file. 25 In the Type Selector. and select Shading with Edges. click Thin Lines. and click Open. click the Model Graphics Style control. click Wall. 23 On the Design Bar. 28 Add this window to the center of the wall. 26 Add the window to the left side of the wall. 30 Add the third window to the right side of the wall. 31 On the Design Bar. navigate to the location of your Training Window. 29 In the Type Selector. click Modify. 24 On the Options Bar. 22 Draw a generic wall segment 12000 mm long. select Training Window : 1800 w x 1500mm h. select Training Window : 2500 w x 1250mm h. clear Tag on Placement. 33 Zoom in on the center window. Notice the detail that displays.20 In the Open dialog. 27 In the Type Selector. select Training Window :2600 w x 1300mm h. Place new window types in the project 21 On the Design Bar. 544 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . 34 On the View toolbar. click Window. 35 On the View Control Bar. select it.

Solid geometry: Use solid geometry as often as possible to represent a family because it automatically gives you the correct plan. Planning a Complex Model Family Before you start to create a complex model family.You have three new fixed nine-light windows based on a new window family prototype. the easiest way to create a window frame is to create an extrusion including two rectangles for the frame edges in an elevation view of the family. Solid Blend. You can also switch on/off selected subcategories in a project. Creating solid geometry: Based on the 4 ways to create solid geometry in Revit Architecture (Solid Extrusion. and symbolic lines are usually assigned to selected Subcategories. that each family in a project can have a different value for an instance parameter. elevation. you plan. Linework: You can create model lines and symbolic lines in a family. sketch. and create a complex window family with a complex opening. Parameters: You should carefully define the parameters in a family. Formulas between parameters drive the behavior of parts of the family. where symbolic lines are view direction specific: they show only in views that are parallel to the view where they have been created. For example. Revit Architecture allows you to specify a parameter as instance or type parameter. This completes the Creating a Window Family lesson. and materials of the subcategories. Model lines are displayed in every view. a parameter drives geometry in a family. Instance parameter means. line patterns. model lines. Creating a Complex Model Family In the following exercises. ■ ■ ■ ■ Creating a Complex Model Family | 545 . Basically. where type parameters drive the geometry for each family type. line colors. Solid Revolve. and section views of a family. The window family includes nested families for the outer sill and uses shared parameters for evaluation purposes. Solid Sweep) you can decide in which view you start to create your solid geometry. you should sketch the design of the family and make notes of the desired behavior: ■ Subcategories: Solid geometry. A large number of parameters reduce the performance of the family. This allows you to drive lineweights.

■ Scheduling/exporting parameters: Revit Architecture differs between different parameter types. you should define different widths for each of the casements. Level of detail: Revit Architecture allows you specify the visibility of each solid form and line geometry for the Detail Levels Coarse. and should account for instances when either of the casements is toggled off. By family type: Each type of the family can have different material assignments for selected solids in the family. Detail Level View Plan Coarse Medium Fine Section Elevation Additionally. and Elevation views. Assigning material: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Directly: The solid geometry in the family has material explicitly assigned. By category: The solid material gets its material from the selected category or subcategory in a project. Medium and Fine. Section. Various parameters drive the behavior of the family. By instance: Each single instance of the family can have different material assignments for selected solids in the family. you can use a parameter with the Parameter Data Type Yes / No. Sketching the requirements The window family should be modelled with different detail levels in Plan. 546 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . ■ Visibility settings: If specific visibility settings are required for selected geometry or linework. where a Shared parameter can appear in schedule and tags and can be exported to ODBC. A Family parameter does only appear in the family itself.

select Metric Window. click Training Files. and click Open.The window contains the following parameters: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ A: Insertion depth B: Frame depth C: Frame width D: Sash width E: Center post width F: Wall offset G: Left width H: Right width I: Width J: Wall offset top K: Top frame height L: Bottom frame height M: Height Outer sill: ■ ■ ■ Fixed front height: 30mm Fixed back height: 50mm Fixed offset: 30mm ■ Glass fixed width: 20mm Selecting a Family Template In this exercise. 3 In the left pane of the New dialog. 2 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Family. The family template uses a wall as host. One test scenario consists in switching between the wall types with different thicknesses to check whether the constraints work correctly. The family editor is opened with a new window family.rft. Selecting a Family Template | 547 . You should test your family often as you incrementally build geometry in the next steps. navigate to Metric ➤ Templates. create a second wall type with a different wall thickness so that you can test the family. you open a template that you use as the basis for the complex window family. 1 Close all open projects or families.

4 Select the wall. 7 Create a vertical reference plane to the right of the Left reference plane. . in the Edit toolbar. Click OK. . 3 Select the horizontal reference plane. click Ref Plane. 4 In the Element Properties dialog: ■ Under Construction. 548 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . Creating the Skeleton for a Complex Wall Opening The window contains a more complex wall opening than a standard rectangular opening. 8 In the Type Properties dialog. click Edit/New. Verify that Defines Origin is selected. Under Other. enter Insertion Edge. 9 In the Edit Assembly dialog. and on the Options Bar. for Name. In the Type Selector. click 5 In the Element Properties dialog. for Structure ➤ Thickness. Prepare the centered reference planes 1 Select the Center (Left/Right) reference plane. TIP Press TAB until the reference plane is highlighted. 6 In the Type Properties dialog. so you model the new opening first. for Is Reference. 11 Switch back to the previous wall settings: ■ ■ Select the wall. and click OK. under Other. refer to the command line to verify what is selected. click Edit. click 2 In the Element Properties dialog. select Defines Origin. 8 Create a vertical reference plane to the left of the Right reference plane. This means that the exterior wall layers that have wraps assigned will end at this reference plane. 7 In the Name dialog. click . 5 Select the Center (Left/Right) reference plane. This requires that the standard rectangular opening be deleted and replaced with voids cut out from the default wall. 10 Click OK 3 times. for Construction ➤ Structure. click Duplicate. and click OK. select Wall Closure. enter 400. and on the Options Bar. Create reference planes for the opening 6 On the Design Bar. select Weak Reference. select Basic Wall : Wall 1. ■ ■ ■ ■ For Identity Data ➤ Name. 9 Click Modify. and click . accept the default name.

on the Options Bar. TIP Press TAB until the reference plane is highlighted. This parameter is defined as an instance parameter. enter Insertion Depth. 19 Select the dimension. 12 Using the same method. 17 Click Modify. Dimension horizontal reference planes 15 On the Design Bar. click Dimension. enter 75. because each inserted value should have a different insertion depth. and click OK.10 Select the first reference plane you created. and select Instance. Click OK. enter Wall Offset Left. for Identity Data ➤ Name. for Name. For Group parameter under. 20 In the Parameter Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Parameter Data. The horizontal reference plane defines the inner edge and the new vertical reference planes define the left and right edges of the wall offset for the opening. 13 Select the Exterior horizontal reference plane on the top wall edge. select Add Parameter. 16 Dimension the Exterior and Insertion Edge horizontal reference planes. 14 Using the same method. for the temporary dimension. select Constraints. By extending the reference pane. and click . name the other new reference plane Wall Offset Right. Next. drag the Interior horizontal reference plane to the left side. click Dimension. refer to the status bar to verify what is selected. dimension the vertical reference planes. for Label. use the blue circle grip to drag the left edge of the reference plane to line up with the left side of the Insertion Edge reference plane. 23 Click Modify. 18 Select the Exterior reference plane. Creating the Skeleton for a Complex Wall Opening | 549 . you can more easily select it because it doesn’t overlap with other elements in the drawing. 11 In the Element Properties dialog. 22 Dimension the Left and Wall Offset Left vertical reference planes. Dimension vertical reference planes 21 On the Design Bar.

Dimension reference planes in elevation 29 In the Project Browser. 28 Select the dimension. for Label. enter Wall Offset. enter 100. 550 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . 36 Dimension the Head and Wall Offset Top reference planes. select Construction. for Label. Click OK. double-click Exterior. For Group parameter under. 35 On the Design Bar. for Identity Data ➤ Name. dimension the Right and Wall Offset Right reference planes. on the Options Bar. under Elevations. 34 In the Element Properties dialog. 27 Using the same method. click Ref Plane. 39 In the Parameter Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Parameter Data. enter Wall Offset Top. 25 Select the dimension. Click OK. select Construction.24 Select the Wall Offset Left reference plane. 33 Select the new reference plane. enter 100. 32 Click Modify. enter Wall Offset Top. and click . and press ENTER. 38 Select the dimension. 31 Create a horizontal reference plane below the Head reference plane. for the temporary dimension. For Group parameter under. The reference planes and parameters for the plan view are defined. click Dimension. for Label. select Add Parameter. on the Options Bar. select Wall Offset. The skeleton for the opening is complete. 26 In the Parameter Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Parameter Data. you apply the same method to reference planes in an elevation view. select Add Parameter. on the Options Bar. for the temporary dimension. and click OK. for Name. Next. for Name. 37 Select the Wall Offset Top reference plane. 30 On the Design Bar.

40 Save the file as Casement Window. under Floor Plans. 1 In the Project Browser. NOTE Zoom in as necessary so that the rectangle does not snap to reference planes. double-click Ref. and click OK. 2 On the Tools toolbar. and lock the alignment. 7 Select the Exterior reference plane. Level. 3 In the Work Plane dialog. and Wall Offset Right reference planes. Modelling a Complex Wall Opening You model the opening with voids that are cut from the wall geometry. 8 Using the same method. for Name. under Specify a new Work Plane. 5 On the Options Bar. and sketch the extrusion as shown. 6 On the Tools toolbar. select the top edge of the sketch. click (Align). lock the other sketch lines to the Insertion Edge.rfa. click (Plane). click Void Form ➤ Void Extrusion. Wall Offset Left. select Reference Plane : Sill. 4 On the Design Bar. click . Modelling a Complex Wall Opening | 551 .

create and constrain a void extrusion for the inner part of the opening as shown. click (Align). 14 Align the bottom edge of the smaller void to the Sill reference plane. and lock the alignment. 17 Select the left vertical edge of the default opening (Opening Cut). Lock the sketch lines to the Insertion Edge. 10 Using the same method.9 On the Design Bar. click (3D). 15 Using the same method. Interior. click Finish Sketch. 12 On the Tools toolbar. and press DELETE. align and constrain the top and bottom edges of the other void to the Head and Sill reference planes. and lock the alignment. double-click Exterior. 16 On the Views toolbar. 11 In the Project Browser. 13 Align the top edge of the smaller void to the Wall Offset Top reference plane. In order to use the voids as a new opening. under Elevations. the voids need to be cut from the wall geometry. NOTE Create the void extrusion directly below the one you just created. Also. Right. and Left reference planes. you need to delete the standard rectangular opening cut. 552 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor .

18 On the Tools toolbar. click (Cut Geometry). Next. cut the second void from the wall.The opening in the wall is deleted. 19 Select the void. you control correct behavior of the new wall opening by changing the wall offset parameters. 20 Using the same method. The first void is cut from the wall. and then select the wall geometry. Modelling a Complex Wall Opening | 553 .

select Not a Reference. enter 50mm. Note that the opening has changed correctly. Level. 1 In the Project Browser. 3 Select the reference plane. For Other ➤ Is Reference. click Dimension.Change wall offset parameters 21 On the Design Bar. under Floor Plans. and click 4 In the Element Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ . enter Frame Left. 8 Create a vertical reference plane to the left of the Wall Offset Right reference plane. double-click Ref. click Family Types. 2 Create a vertical reference plane to the right of the Wall Offset Left reference plane. You can also test the opening by flexing the wall types and thicknesses. and click . 9 Select the reference plane. Creating Window Frame Geometry The reference planes and parameters for the window frame are defined in the plan and exterior elevation views. 554 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . enter 100mm. 6 Dimension the Left and Frame Left vertical reference planes. Click OK. 22 In the Family Types dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Construction ➤ Wall Offset Top. For Wall Offset. For Identity Data ➤ Name. 7 Select the Frame Left reference plane. for the temporary dimension. Click OK. enter 50mm. 5 On the Design Bar.

enter Frame Right. 12 Dimension the Right and Frame Right vertical reference planes. Click OK. select Not a Reference. For Group parameter under. select Construction. enter Frame Width. select Add Parameter. select Frame Width. click Dimension. name it Frame Interior. 13 Select the Frame Right reference plane. for Name. for Label. Creating Window Frame Geometry | 555 . 14 Select the right dimension. 15 In the Parameter Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Parameter Data. on the Options Bar. create a horizontal reference plane below the Insertion Edge reference plane. For Other ➤ Is Reference. 16 Select the left dimension. enter 100mm. for Label. for the temporary dimension. 11 On the Design Bar.10 In the Element Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Identity Data ➤ Name. on the Options Bar. 17 Using the same method. and create a Frame Depth type parameter dimension as shown. Click OK.

and create a Center Post Width type parameter dimension. NOTE The positioning of the center post will be specified later in the exercise. 556 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . The exact vertical position of the reference planes is not important. 19 Using the same method used previously. dimension the planes at 120mm.18 Create 2 more vertical reference planes to the left of the Center (Left/Right) reference plane. name the reference planes Center Post Left and Center Post Right.

Click OK. and dimension the Head and Frame Top reference planes at 150mm. select Construction. 31 In the Parameter Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Parameter Data ➤ Name. enter Frame Height Bottom. click Dimension. under Elevations. on the Options Bar. 25 Dimension the Sill and Frame Bottom horizontal reference planes. 27 Using the same method. For Group parameter under. double-click Exterior. 22 Select the reference plane. Creating Window Frame Geometry | 557 . create a horizontal reference plane below the Wall Offset Top reference plane. and click 23 In the Element Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ . 26 Select the Frame Bottom reference plane. for Label. select Construction. 24 On the Design Bar. select Not a Reference. on the Options Bar. 21 Create a horizontal reference plane above the Sill reference plane. enter Frame Bottom. Click OK.Create parameters in elevation 20 In the Project Browser. 30 Select the other dimension. For Other ➤ Is Reference. 28 Select the lower dimension. for Label. for the temporary dimension. For Group parameter under. enter 150mm. select Add Parameter. enter Frame Height Top. 29 In the Parameter Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Parameter Data ➤ Name. name it Frame Top. select Add Parameter. Click OK. For Identity Data ➤ Name.

Before you model the frame geometry. Under Construction. click New. Family types allow you to set different values for parameters and to save this state as a specific type of the window family. 35 In the Name dialog. instance parameters can be changed on an instance level for each inserted window instance. and click OK. click New. You create 2 family types for the Casement Window family. enter 100mm. enter 80mm.The skeleton of the window frame is complete. 37 In the Name dialog. click Family Types. For Wall Offset. enter 100mm. 38 In the Family Types dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Constraints. enter 1500 x 1400 1-Swing Sash 400 and Click OK. enter 50mm. enter 70mm. A family type manages type parameters only. For Wall Offset. enter 2000mm. for Wall Offset Top. for Frame Depth. enter 2000 x 1500 2-Swing Sash 1200. add 2 window types with different parameters to check whether the parameters work correctly. Additional values for new parameters will be set continuously after each reasonable step of completeness. Under Dimensions. 34 Under Family Types. Create family types 32 On the Design Bar. For Frame Height Top. for Insertion Depth. For Frame Width. for Wall Offset Top. 558 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . for Insertion Depth. enter 60mm. For Frame Height Bottom. enter 50mm. Under Construction. enter 80mm. enter 1500mm. enter 80mm. 36 Under Family Types. for Height. For Center Post Width. enter 100mm. enter 50mm. For Width. For Frame Width. 33 In the Family Types dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Constraints. enter 100mm. Under Other.

43 On the Design Bar. and click OK. Frame Right. Frame Bottom. Center Post Right. Sill. For Center Post Width. 45 On the Tools toolbar. select Reference Plane : Frame Interior. Rectangle position in view Left Right Outside (larger rectangle) Lock to reference planes Frame Top. enter 80mm. For Width. 39 Click Apply. and lock the alignments to create a constraint for all edges as shown. Center Post Left. NOTE Refer to the following table for information on the alignment reference planes. Note that the reference planes adjust to the new dimensions. enter 120mm. click Solid Form ➤ Solid Extrusion. enter 1400mm. Under Other. 44 On the Options Bar. for Name. Model frame geometry 41 On the Tools toolbar. and a third rectangle outside the intersection of the reference planes. enter 120mm. 42 In the Work Plane dialog. Under Dimensions. enter 70mm. under Specify a new Work Plane. Head. select 2000 x 1500 2-Swing Sash 1200. click (Align). Right. 46 Align all sketched edges to the reference planes. for Height. click (Plane). for Frame Depth. and sketch the extrusion with 3 rectangles as shown. Frame Top. 40 Under Name. Frame Left. Left Creating Window Frame Geometry | 559 . enter 1500mm. For Frame Height Bottom. Frame Bottom. and click OK. click . one on the right.■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ For Frame Height Top. NOTE Create 3 rectangles: One on the left.

560 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . double-click Ref. For Graphics ➤ Visibility/Graphics Overrides. 57 On the View Control Bar. 49 On the Tools toolbar. and click 54 In the Element Properties dialog: ■ ■ For Identity Data ➤ Subcategory. under Floor Plans. click 50 Align edges: ■ ■ (Align). click (3D). . Frame material will be assigned later in the tutorial.47 On the Design Bar. clear Coarse. select Frame/Mullion. and lock the alignment. 53 Select the extrusion solid geometry. Under Detail Levels. 56 Click OK twice. click Edit. 55 In the Family Element Visibility Settings dialog: ■ ■ Under View Specific Display. click Finish Sketch. 52 On the Views toolbar. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Shading with Edges. 51 Click Modify. The window frame is complete. and lock the alignment. Level. clear Plan/RCP. Align the top edge of the extrusion to the Insertion Edge reference plane. 48 In the Project Browser. Align the bottom edge of the extrusion to the Frame Interior reference plane.

click Scale ➤ 1:10. 3 On the Views toolbar. under Floor Plans. Level. click Family Types. and click OK. Defining the Window Sash Parameters You use known modelling procedures to create the geometry for the window sash. 2 On the View Control Bar. 60 Select 2000 x 1500 2-Swing Sash 1200. 59 In the Family Types dialog. Defining the Window Sash Parameters | 561 . and click Apply. click (Thin Lines) to work with heavier lineweights. Changing the scale makes it easier to work in detail. double-click Ref. because the visibility settings are different for the left and right sashes. select 1500 x 1400 1-Swing Sash 400. under Name. 4 Create 4 vertical reference planes as shown.Test the family again 58 On the Family tab of the Design Bar. enter Sash Left Left. and click 6 In the Element Properties dialog: ■ . 5 Select the leftmost reference plane you just created. However. Define parameters in plan view 1 In the Project Browser. you model each sash separately. For Identity Data ➤ Name.

click Dimension. 14 Create a horizontal reference plane above the Frame Bottom reference plane. add parameters to the remaining dimensions. 562 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . 15 Click Modify. 9 Select the left dimension. Click OK. for Label. Click OK. You can drag dimension text to the left or right side using the Drag Text grip.■ ■ For Other ➤ Is Reference. 7 Using the same method. working from left to right: Reference Plane 2 3 4 Properties Name: Sash Left Right Is Reference value: Not a Reference Name: Sash Right Left Is Reference value: Not a Reference Name: Sash Right Right Is Reference value: Not a Reference 8 Dimension the reference planes with adjacent reference planes for the window frame as shown. 18 On the Design Bar. Click OK. 12 Using the same method. enter Sash Bottom. for Label. enter Sash Width. Define parameters in elevation view 13 In the Project Browser. For Identity Data ➤ Name. select Sash Width. under Elevations. 11 Select the next dimension. select Construction. select Add Parameter. For Other ➤ Is Reference. 10 In the Parameter Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Parameter Data ➤ Name. 16 Select the reference plane. and click 17 In the Element Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ . For Group parameter under. specify each dimension as 50mm. double-click Exterior. on the Options Bar. specify the properties for the remaining new reference planes. on the Options Bar. select Not a Reference. select Not a Reference.

click Family Types. click (Align). 28 For Name. 25 For Name. 23 While pressing CTRL. for Label. 32 Align all sketched edges to the reference planes. click . click Solid Form ➤ Solid Extrusion. 24 On the Family tab of the Design Bar. Specify it as Not a Reference. and lock the alignment to create a constraint for all edges as shown. create a horizontal reference plane below the Frame Top reference plane: ■ ■ ■ Name it Sash Top. select 1500 x 1400 1-Swing Sash 400. Defining the Window Sash Parameters | 563 . on the Options Bar. enter 50mm. 30 On the Options Bar. The skeleton of the window sash is complete. enter 70mm. 21 Using the same method. select 2000 x 1500 2-Swing Sash 1200. Note that the reference planes adjust to the new dimension. for the temporary dimension. select Sash Width. 22 Select the Sash Top reference plane.19 Dimension the Frame Bottom and Sash Bottom reference planes. 20 Select the Sash Bottom reference plane. and sketch 2 rectangles to form the right sash extrusion as shown. for the temporary dimension. 27 Click Apply. Dimension the Frame Top and Sash Top reference planes. Create solid extrusions 29 On the Design Bar. select both dimensions. Before you model the sash geometry. 31 On the Tools toolbar. for Sash Width. and click OK. enter 50mm. 26 Under Construction. extend the 2 window types with different values for the new parameter to check whether the parameter work correctly.

under Floor Plans. Align the top edge of the extrusion to the Insertion Edge reference plane. 38 On the Tools toolbar. NOTE Modifying the cut plane offset value allows you to see the sash extrusion in the view. Frame Right. for Cut plane ➤ Offset. Sash Right Left. 37 In the View Range dialog. 40 Click Modify. for Extents ➤ View Range. 33 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. 564 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor .NOTE Refer to the following table for information on the alignment reference planes. and lock the alignment. enter 1500. Sash Bottom. 34 In the Project Browser. and click OK twice. 35 Click View menu ➤ View Properties. Sash Top. switch to the Exterior Elevation view and create the solid extrusion for the left sash. click (3D). and lock the alignment. Level floor plan view to align the edges as you did for the right sash. Center Post Right. double-click Ref. Align the bottom edge of the extrusion to the Frame Interior reference plane. 41 Using the same method. click Finish Sketch. Rectangle position in view Outside Inside Lock to reference planes Frame Top. Level. Frame Bottom. click Edit. Sash Right Right. 36 In the Element Properties dialog. 43 On the Views toolbar. click 39 Align edges: ■ ■ (Align). 42 Switch back to the Ref.

create a visibility parameter for the left sash named Sash Left. Defining Visibility Parameters | 565 . select Construction. 5 Click OK 3 times. select the 2 extrusions. clear Plan/RCP. Defining Visibility Parameters You add visibility parameters so that you can display the left and right sashes separately. 46 In the Family Element Visibility Settings dialog: ■ ■ Under View Specific Display.44 While pressing CTRL. note the parameters you have just created with checkboxes in the Value column. For Graphics ➤ Visibility. click Family Types. 6 Using the same method. and click . 2 In the Element Properties dialog. 7 On the Design Bar. For Group Parameter under. for Graphics ➤ Visible. For Identity Data ➤ Subcategory. click Edit. Under Detail Levels. enter Sash Right. 3 In the Associate Family Parameter dialog. 1 Select the right solid geometry of the window sash. 47 Click OK twice. select Frame/Mullion. click Add parameter. and click 45 In the Element Properties dialog: ■ ■ . clear Coarse. 4 In the Parameter Properties dialog: ■ ■ For Parameter Data ➤ Name. click the rectangular button on the right side.

and Frame Interior reference planes. dimension the Insertion Edge. under Elevations. double-click Exterior. For Other ➤ Is Reference. 2 Create a horizontal reference plane between the Insertion Edge and Frame Interior reference planes. Creating Reference Planes for the Glass Geometry The glass geometry will be dimensioned directly in the sketch. and click OK. 10 Under Construction. 7 Click EQ to center the reference plane for the glass axis between the reference planes for the window frame. 3 Select the reference plane. and click 4 In the Element Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ . 1 In the Project Browser. NOTE Any 3D geometry assigned to a Yes/No parameter is still visible in the family editor. Glass Axis Left. click Dimension. select 1500 x 1400 1-Swing Sash 400. clear Sash Left. 6 Using one dimension string. Click OK. 5 On the Design Bar. 9 Select 2000 x 1500 2-Swing Sash 1200. select Not a Reference. not aligned to reference planes. 9 Create 3 more reference planes as shown. the geometry is only greyed out if the visibility parameter is not assigned. 8 In the Project Browser. For Identity Data ➤ Name. double-click Ref. enter Glass Axis. The glass is located in the center of the frame / sash with a fixed thickness of 20mm. and Glass Axis Horizontal.Test the family 8 For Name. This is because the glass width and height will be extended to the window frame if the sash is switched off. 566 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . Level. and name them Glass Axis Right. Glass Axis. and click Apply. under Floor Plans.

4 On the Options Bar. Creating the Glass Geometry In this exercise. Sketch the right glass extrusion 1 On the Tools toolbar. for Name. create EQ dimensions with the adjacent sash reference planes. You create parameters that define the dimensions of the glass geometry. and sketch the right glass extrusion as shown. Creating the Glass Geometry | 567 . This centers the glass reference planes between the window sashes.10 For each of the new reference planes. you use extrusions to create the glass for the complex window family. and click OK. select Reference Plane : Glass Axis. 2 In the Work Plane dialog. click Solid Form ➤ Solid Extrusion. click (Plane). under Specify a new Work Plane. 3 On the Family tab of the Design Bar. click .

click Dimension. 13 Using the same method. enter Glass Length Right. 10 Dimension the left edge and right edge of the sketch. select Other. click Dimension. dimension the top and bottom edge of the sketch. Click OK. 568 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . select Add Parameter. 6 Using one dimension string. 12 In the Parameter Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Parameter Data ➤ Name. dimension the left edge of the sketch. the Glass Axis Right reference plane. on the Options Bar. 7 Click EQ. for Label.Dimension the sketch 5 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. For Group Parameter under. 11 Select the dimension line and. dimension the top and the bottom of the sketch. 8 Using the same method. 9 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. and the right edge of the sketch. and create a Glass Height Right parameter.

clear Coarse. and click 16 In the Element Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ . click Edit. select Glass. 18 Click OK twice. Assign properties 15 Select the glass geometry. click (3D). Create the left glass extrusion 19 Using the same method. enter 10. 21 On the Views toolbar. For Extrusion Start. clear Plan/RCP.0.0.14 On the Design Bar. Under Detail Levels. click Finish Sketch. 17 In the Family Element Visibility Settings dialog: ■ ■ Under View Specific Display. For Graphics ➤ Visibility. For Constraints ➤ Extrusion End. enter -10. Creating the Glass Geometry | 569 . create the glass geometry for the left sash with the new parameters Glass Height Left and Glass Length Left. For Identity Data ➤ Subcategory. 20 Assign the same Element properties to the left extrusion that you assigned to the right.

Formulas are typed directly into the Family Types dialog box. x raised to the power of y log sqrt(Value) sin cos tan asin acos atan exp abs 570 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . click Model Graphics Style ➤ Shading With Edges. They can also be used to control Yes/No parameters. Creating Formulas to Define Width Formulas are one of the many powerful aspects of Revit Architecture Families . where all of the parameters for a family are listed. set the height to 2000) as well as mathematical expressions.22 On the View Control Bar. you should do it. Formulas can use logic such as IF statements (IF the width is 1000. if you can build your family without using formulas.used to control families in many ways. as it will minimize performance hits. The formulas in the following chapters of this tutorial should give you mainly an impression of how complex formulas can be set. However. Expressions for formulas Mathematical Function Addition Subtraction Multiplication Division Exponentiation Logarithm Square Root Sine Cosine Tangent Arcsine Arccosine Arctangent e raised to an x power Absolute Value Expression + * / x^y.

6 Select the dimension. click Dimension. select Dimensions. 7 In the Parameter Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Parameter Data ➤ Name. For Type of Parameter. for Label. select Add Parameter.6. NOTE Do not dimension the right sash using the same method. 8 . 10 In the Parameter Properties dialog: ■ ■ For Parameter Data ➤ Name. 8 . <result-if-true>. 8 . click Family Types. y = 2). under Parameters. IF ( Length < 55' . <result-if-false>) IF ( Length < 35' . on the Options Bar. Click OK. 5 Select the Center Post Left reference plane. Level. select Length. 3 Dimension the Frame Left and Center Post Left reference planes. Creating Formulas to Define Width | 571 . 2 On the Family tab of the Design Bar.OR IF ( OR ( A = 1 .(2*30) Simple IF IF ( <condition>. click Add. enter 1000. For Group parameter under. 8 On the Design Bar. 5' . for the temporary dimension. B = 3 ) . under Floor Plans. The width of the right sash will be determined using formulas. 3' . enter Width Sash Right. 4 Click Modify. 9 In the Family Types dialog. enter Width Sash Left."A" is less than or equal to "B": IF ( NOT ( A > B ) . 3 ) Yes/No Controlling the state of a Yes/No parameters A with a next Yes/No parameter B: Not (B) Position the center post 1 In the Project Browser. IF ( Length < 45' . 3 ) Simple IF . 8' ) ) ) IF . 2'-6". double-click Ref. This would overconstrain the family.AND IF ( AND (x = 1 . 3 ) Multiple IF IF ( Length< 35' .11 Samples for formulas Standard Width . 3'-0" ) Simple IF . 2' 6" .

The value is greyed out. In the Formula row for Glass Length Left. in the Formula row for Glass Length Right. (Height . for Dimensions ➤ Width Sash Right ➤ Formula. Frame Width.Width Sash Left) . and press ENTER. 19 In the Family Types dialog.Frame Height Bottom . the new value is 560. and press ENTER. and click OK.2 * Sash Width). 16 Adjust the parameters: ■ For Width Sash Left. 15 For Name.Frame Height Top .■ ■ For Group Parameter under. enter 1200.Frame Height Top . select 1500 x 1400 1-Swing Sash 400. The value for Width Sash Right is updated by the formula entered previously.(Frame Width * 2) . enter if(Sash Left. enter the formula to get the calculated width: (Width . and cannot be changed in the Family Types dialog. Define glass width and length 18 On the Design Bar. enter if(Sash Right. select 2000 x 1500 2-Swing Sash 1200. select 2000 x 1500 2-Swing Sash 1200. (Width Sash Left . 14 Adjust the parameters: ■ For Width Sash Left. In the Formula row for Glass Height Left. the new value is 880. Width Sash Left).Frame Height Top .Frame Height Top Frame Height Bottom . ■ Click Apply. Height . Width Sash Left.2 * Sash Width). In the Formula row for Glass Height Right. ■ ■ ■ 20 Click OK. enter formulas: ■ Under Other. and Center Post Width. enter 400.Frame Height Bottom). Height . (Width Sash Right . enter if(Sash Left. (Height . enter if(Sash Right. 17 For Name. Click OK. click Family Types. Test the family 13 Under Name. The value for Width Sash Right is now calculated dependent on the values for Width.Frame Height Bottom). Width Sash Right). ■ Click Apply. select Dimensions.Center Post Width 12 Press ENTER. The value for Width Sash Right is updated by the formula entered previously.2 * Sash Width). You can test the formulas by switching between the different window types in the Family Types dialog. 11 In the Family Types dialog.2 * Sash Width). The glass dimensions are now dependent on the visibility settings for the window sashes. 572 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor .

6 In the Work Plane dialog. select Reference Plane : Insertion Edge. under Category. 9 On the Options Bar. and lock all alignment constraints. 5 On the Tools toolbar.Creating Elevation Lines The best method to create the elevation lines for the sashes is to create them in the exterior elevation view. select Elevation Swing [projection]. 2 In the Object Styles dialog. Creating Elevation Lines | 573 . clear Chain. and click OK. 3 Click OK. They should be placed on a selected subcategory. under Specify a new Work Plane. 7 On the Family tab of the Design Bar. note the Elevation Swing subcategory. click (Plane). double-click Exterior. 8 In the Type Selector. under Elevations. expand Windows. 10 Create single symbolic lines as shown. 4 In the Project Browser. 1 Click Settings menu ➤ Object Styles. click Symbolic Lines. for Name.

check whether the solid geometry has the correct subcategory assigned. Creating Material Parameters Material parameters for selected solid geometry make the family more flexible in terms of materials assignments for different window types. and glass. enter Window Frame. under Graphics. associate the symbolic lines on the right side with the Sash Left family parameter. select Sash Right. 574 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . unless the default value is < By Category >. 7 Select Cool. for Windows ➤ Frame/Mullion. Assign a default material 1 Click Settings menu ➤ Object Styles. select Default. 5 In the Materials dialog. Assigning Default Materials You can assign a default material for each subcategory. 14 In the Element Properties dialog. for Name. 13 While pressing CTRL. When the family is added to a project and the subcategory does not exist in the project. click . this subcategory is added to the project and has the material assignment from the family. clear Coarse. Material parameters override the material assignment of the subcategories in the Object Styles dialog. 3 In the Materials dialog. 2 In the Object Styles dialog. expand accurender ➤ Solid Colors. for Visible. and click OK. When you assign default materials in a family. 6 In the Material Library dialog. select the 2 symbolic lines on the left side. under Detail Levels. and on the Options Bar. and click Duplicate. you create material parameters for the frame. select the rectangular button on the right side. 15 In the Associate Family Parameter dialog. under Category. while pressing CTRL. click in the Material column. 16 Click OK twice. 4 In the New Material dialog. and click OK three times. 18 Save the file. Next. and click OK. the object styles settings of the project define the default material. and click the button on the right side of the column. for Name. 12 In the Family element visibility settings dialog. 17 Using the same method. select all symbolic lines. click Visibility. If the subcategory already exists in the project. under AccuRender. and click .11 In the drawing area. sash. The default material is assigned to the Frame/Mullion category.Matte. and select Whites.

1 On the Views toolbar. For Group parameter under. 2 Click File menu ➤ Open. 2 Select the solid geometry of the window frame. click Add parameter. 10 Save the file. click (3D). click Family Types. and associate the sash and glass solid geometry with the respective parameter. and click Open. for Materials and Finishes ➤ Material. enter Frame. click Training Files. The default value is By Category. Level. Creating Nested Families | 575 . parameters of nested families can be associated with parameters of the main family. The Back and Center (Left/Right) reference planes define the origin of the family. and click 3 In the Element Properties dialog. navigate to Metric/Families/Windows/m_Concrete Sill. Creating Nested Families Families can be imported into families. which nests them. 5 In the Parameter Properties dialog: ■ ■ For Parameter Data ➤ Name. a Depth instance parameter.rfa. create 2 material parameters named Sash and Glass. Note the new Material parameters under Material and Finishes. In this lesson. The concrete sill family consists of a solid extrusion. 8 On the Family tab of the Design Bar. Concrete sill family 1 Close all open projects or families. . select Materials and Finishes. If this parameter is defined as shared. 7 Using the same method. You can override it on a type level. 4 In the Project Browser. double-click Ref. 9 Click OK. you learn how to import window sill families into the window family and associate parameters of the nested families to the main family. Using family type parameters in the main family. When the family is loaded into a project. 6 Click OK three times. 4 In the Associate Family Parameter dialog. the solid geometry has the material that is assigned to its subcategory in the Object Styles dialog. 3 In the left pane of the Open dialog. you can switch between imported families of the same category. under Floor Plans. click the rectangular button on the right side. You can then model parts of the family separately from the main family model. Creating Sill Families There are 2 window sill families available in the training folders. a Width type parameter. and a fixed dimension for the sill overhang. Open the families and explore the design of them.

10 Click File menu ➤ Open. double-click Left. The Bottom reference plane defines the origin of the family.5 In the Project Browser. click Training Files. and click Open.rfa. The elevation view shows reference planes with fixed dimensions. and click . and is visible only in detail level Fine. Metal sill family 9 Close all open projects or families. navigate to Metric/Families/Windows/m_Metal Sill. has a fixed material Window Sill Concrete assigned. The sketch lines of the extrusion are locked to all exterior reference planes. under Elevations. 6 In the Project Browser. 11 In the left pane of the Open dialog. 8 Click OK. 7 Select the solid geometry. 12 Select the solid geometry. under 3D views. The sill is placed on a subcategory Window Sill. 576 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . and click . double-click View 1.

navigate to Casement Window. 4 On the Family tab of the Design Bar.rfa is cleared. Loading Sill Families into the Window Family Families opened in the family editor can be loaded directly into other families. 2 In the Open dialog. 13 Click OK. select Casement Window.The sill is placed on a subcategory Window Sill. 10 Click OK. and is visible only in detail level Fine. The concrete sill family is now loaded into the Window family.rfa. Both sill families were created with the Generic Model family template and changed to a window family. select Casement Window. click Load into Projects. 8 On the Design Bar. Parameters. has a fixed material Window Sill Metal assigned. 9 In the Load into Projects dialog. and verify thatm_Concrete Sill. and then load families into the casement window family you have created. Load the metal sill 7 Click Window menu ➤ Metal Sill. 11 Click Window menu ➤ Tile. 5 In the Load into Projects dialog. and verify that m_Metal Sill.rfa -3D View: View1. Load the concrete sill 1 Click File menu ➤ Open. 6 Click OK.rfa is cleared. and Origins are as in the concrete sill family. 3 Using the same method. The category of a family can be changed under Settings menu ➤ Family Category and Parameters.rfa. click Load into Projects. Loading Sill Families into the Window Family | 577 . Reference Planes. The metal sill family is now loaded into the Window family. You open the main family first. open m_Concrete Sill. and click Open.rfa.rfa.

select Length. click Family Types. enter Sill Length. under Parameters. select Construction. Creating a Length Parameter The sill length needs to be equivalent to the exterior width of the window family. For Type of Parameter. for Construction ➤ Sill Length. Create the parameter 1 On the Design Bar.rfa and m_Concrete Sill. you create a parameter that determines the true sill length in the window family. click Add. under Families ➤ Windows ➤ Concrete Sill. 2 In the Family Types dialog. As both sill families have been defined as Window families. enter Width .12 Close and save m_Metal Sill. 4 In the Parameter Properties dialog. in the Formula column. 5 Click OK. Associate the parameter to nested families 6 In the Project Browser. 578 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor .rfa. 13 Maximize Casement Window.rfa. they appear in the Project Browser under Families ➤ Windows. 3 In the Parameter Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ For Parameter Data ➤ Name.2* Wall Offset. For Group parameter under. Click OK. double-click Concrete Sill.

Placing the Sill Family In this exercise. aligning it to reference planes in both plan and elevation views. click the rectangular button on the right side. The sill family needs to be positioned and aligned in plan and elevation views. 4 Drag Concrete Sill into the drawing area. Level. double-click Ref. The Length type parameter of the nested families now has the same value as the calculated value of the Sill Length parameter of the window family. 5 Click Modify. 10 Using the same method. 11 Select the Center (Left/Right) reference plane of the window family. and click . select Sill Length. and click to place it. Associate an instance parameter 6 Select the solid geometry of the concrete sill. click the rectangular button on the right side. under Floor Plans. for Dimensions ➤ Length. Place the family 1 In the Project Browser. 9 Click OK twice.7 In the Type Properties dialog. 8 In the Associate Family Parameter dialog. The Width instance parameter of the nested families now has the same value as the Insertion Depth parameter of the window family. associate the Length parameter of the Metal Sill family. click Detail Level ➤ Fine. select the hidden Center (Left/Right) reference plan of the Sill family. Align the sill 10 On the Tools toolbar. you place the concrete sill in the project. 9 Click OK twice. and lock the alignment. click (Align). 2 On the View Control Bar. expand Families ➤ Windows ➤ Concrete Sill. 8 In the Associate Family Parameter dialog. select Insertion Depth. for Dimensions ➤ Width. 7 In the Element Properties dialog. 3 In the Project Browser. Placing the Sill Family | 579 .

TIP If the sill does not display. under 3D Views. and lock the alignment. 13 In the Project Browser. click (Align). and lock the alignment. 16 Select the Sill reference plane of the window family. double-click Left. 15 On the Tools toolbar. under Elevations. click Detail Level ➤ Fine. click and spin the wall. you add a Sill Type parameter. click Detail Level ➤ Fine.12 Using the same method. 14 On the View Control Bar. The sill is placed in the desired position. double-click View 1. Creating a Shared Parameter In order to switch the sill from concrete to metal on an instance level. align the lower horizontal edge of the sill to the Insertion Edge reference plane of the Window family. 17 In the Project Browser. 18 On the View Control Bar. align the bottom edge of the sill family. 580 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor .

under Parameters. and select Instance. Under Type of Parameter. 4 Under File name. If the family is then loaded into a project. select the Concrete Sill family. 8 In the Parameter Properties dialog: ■ ■ For Name. for Group parameter under. click New. select Sill Type. 3 In the Save As dialog. Create the shared parameter 1 Click File menu ➤ Shared Parameters. 9 In the Select Category dialog. click OK. Testing Nested Families | 581 . under Parameter Type. navigate to Training. Add the parameter to a family 11 On the Design Bar. Testing Nested Families You can test the correct behavior of the nested families directly in the window family. 13 In the Parameter Properties dialog. for Constraints ➤ Sill Type (default). you must define the parameter as a shared parameter. Note that the last created Shared Parameter file has been automatically opened. enter Training Shared Parameter. under Parameters. 2 In the Edit Shared Parameters dialog. click New. the parameter appears on the Fields tab of the Schedule Properties dialog in the available fields list. 1 On the Family tab of the Design Bar. select Metal Sill. 14 In the Shared Parameters dialog. 12 In the Family Types dialog. and click OK.To display the custom parameter in a schedule. select Constraints. for Name. under Groups. 16 Click OK twice. click Shared parameter. 15 In the Parameter Properties dialog. for Label. The metal sill replaces the concrete sill. click Family Types. 7 In the Edit Shared Parameters dialog. 18 On the Options Bar. 6 In the New Parameter Group dialog. select <Family Type>. Associate the parameter to geometry 17 In the drawing area. click Family Types. and click Select. click Add. select Windows. 5 In the Edit Shared Parameters dialog. click Create. and click Save. 3 Click Apply. enter Sill Type. enter Windows. 2 In the Family Types dialog. 10 Click OK 3 times.

7 Using the same method. select Casement Window : 2000 x 1500 2-Swing Sash 1200 and place the window in the wall. Test windows and sills 1 On the Standard toolbar. This creates a new project with the default template. 8 On the Views toolbar. 5 On the Design Bar. use best practice to test the window in multiple wall thicknesses in the project environment. check all views at all levels of detail. 9 In the View Control Bar. TIP If the sill does not display. 3 On the Design Bar. click the Window tool. click (3D). click Load into Projects.4 Click OK. click Detail Level ➤ Fine. 582 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . insert a Casement Window : 1500 x 1400 1-Swing Sash 400 in the wall. 6 In the Type Selector. click the Wall tool. click and spin the wall. 2 Click Window menu ➤ Casement Window. Testing the Family in a Project Environment Finally. click .rfa -3D View: View 1. and create a horizontal wall. 4 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar.

14 In the Schedule Properties dialog. You begin by creating the desktop. you create a custom furniture family based on the definition of a rolltop desk. rolltop. and Sill Type to the Scheduled fields list. Width. Sill Type is now displayed in the schedule table. and click OK. 13 In the New Schedule dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Category. and drawers as extrusions. select Metal Sill. drawer base. Click OK. Height. and click . Create a window schedule 12 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Schedule/Quantities. add the fields Mark. Creating a Furniture Family | 583 . Under Name.10 Select the smaller window. 11 In the Element Properties dialog. Creating a Furniture Family In this lesson. and click OK. You then assign parameters to the furniture family to allow for the creation of different-sized versions of the prototype. enter Window Schedule with Sills. Note that the window sill has changed. for Constraints ➤ Sill Type. select Windows.

you add reference planes and specify the parameters for the new rolltop desk furniture family. 7 Draw two horizontal reference planes. Floor Plan: Ref. Precise dimensions are assigned to the reference planes in subsequent steps.rft. click Training Files. 3 In the left pane of the New dialog. 5 On the View menu. Level. Create a new family based on the default furniture template 1 Close all open projects or families. you assign new dimension values to the furniture to create new types within the furniture family. they represent the furniture centerline axes. click Zoom ➤ Zoom to Fit. their exact location is not critical. 584 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . The reference planes that display are part of the default furniture template. NOTE When you draw the reference planes. click Ref Plane. 2 On the File menu.Finally. Specifying the New Rolltop Desk Parameters In this exercise. click New ➤ Family. Draw additional horizontal and vertical reference planes 6 On the Design Bar. and specify values for the furniture length and depth. one above and one below the existing horizontal centerline reference plane as shown. 4 Maximize the view. and open Metric\Templates\Metric Furniture.

and ending at the right reference plane. proceeding to the centerline reference plane. click Dimension. Dimension the reference planes 9 On the Design Bar. add a horizontal dimension string beginning at the left reference plane. as shown.8 Draw two vertical reference planes. 10 Near the bottom of the drawing area. Specifying the New Rolltop Desk Parameters | 585 . one to the left and one to the right of the existing vertical centerline reference plane as shown.

12 On the Design Bar. 11 Add an overall horizontal dimension underneath the dimension you just added. click Modify. 586 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . 13 Select the left reference plane. 14 Change the horizontal dimension to 2000 mm. It should reference the left reference plane and the right reference plane as shown.Click the EQ symbol to make the segments equal.

15 On the Design Bar. Specifying the New Rolltop Desk Parameters | 587 . 16 On the right side of the drawing area. add an overall vertical dimension from the upper reference plane to the lower reference plane. 17 To the right of the dimension you just created. as shown. click Dimension. as shown. and ending at the lower reference plane. Click the EQ symbol to make both segments equal. proceeding to the centerline reference plane. add a vertical dimension string beginning at the upper reference plane.

588 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . Afterwards. 21 On the Design Bar. select each reference plane and drag the extents to the new position. select each dimension and drag the witness line controls as needed. click Modify. TIP To do this. horizontal reference plane. click Modify. 22 Clean up the extents of the reference planes and the dimension witness lines as shown. 20 Change the vertical dimension to 1000 mm. 19 Select the upper.18 On the Design Bar.

Under Parameter Data.> for Label.... specify the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Parameter type. select <Add parameter. 26 Select the 1000 mm dimension. select Dimensions. select Family parameter. For Group parameter under. Select Type. 25 In the Parameter Properties dialog. select <Add parameter. Specifying the New Rolltop Desk Parameters | 589 . 24 On the Options Bar. 27 On the Options Bar.Add length and depth family parameters 23 Select the 2000 mm dimension..> for Label. select Family parameter. Click OK. specify the following: ■ Under Parameter type. enter Length for Name. 28 In the Parameter Properties dialog.

so when you open the Family Types dialog. click Family Types. Click OK. select Dimensions. Select Type. Therefore. it will also adapt to the same changes. These reference planes will be the skeleton that you snap the solid geometry to. enter Depth for Name. Enter 1500 mm for Depth. 590 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor .■ ■ ■ ■ Under Parameter Data. When the solid geometry is snapped to the reference planes. do the following: ■ ■ ■ Under Dimensions. 31 In the Family Types dialog. Click Apply. For Group parameter under. you should flex the design now to ensure the reference planes and labelled dimensions adapt to changes as expected. Flex the design 29 Adjust the location of the reference planes within the drawing area. enter 3000 mm for Length. 30 On the Design Bar. Notice the reference planes adapt to the new dimension parameters. you can still see the model.

and click OK. and click to select all four symbolic lines. 33 Proceed to the next exercise. 5 On the Design Bar. under Specify a new Work Plane. Creating the Desktop Solid Geometry | 591 . Click Apply. click Lines. 4 On the Design Bar. Creating the Desktop Solid Geometry In this exercise. 8 On the Options Bar. click Solid Form ➤ Solid Extrusion. you create the solid geometry of the desktop with an extrusion. 6 In the Work Plane dialog. press TAB until the chain of lines is offered as a selection option. Create the desktop using an extrusion 1 On the Design Bar.32 In the Family Types dialog. select Level: Ref. enter 2000 mm for Length. 7 On the Design Bar. click Set Work Plane. and enter 100 mm for Depth. “Creating the Desktop Solid Geometry” on page 591. and then select the lower right reference plane intersection for the second corner of the rectangle. click . 9 Move the cursor over one of the symbolic lines. NOTE In the image below. click Symbolic Lines. Enter 1000 mm for Depth. Your lines may have a lighter weight. Dataset Continue using the family file from the previous exercise. 3 Select the upper left reference plane intersection for the first corner of the rectangle. return the parameters to their original values: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Dimensions. Level for Name. click . Click OK. 2 On the Options Bar. the symbolic line thickness was modified for training purposes.

click Dimension. The desktop extrusion extends 100 mm above the reference level. 13 Move the cursor over the top edge of the desktop. click Finish Sketch. 16 Drag the bottom edge of the desktop up until the desktop is 100 mm thick. 592 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . 15 Move the cursor over the bottom edge of the desktop. 14 Drag the top edge of the desktop upward until the temporary dimension value is 750 mm.10 On the Design Bar. and select the top edge. click Modify. Add height and thickness dimensions 17 On the Design Bar. under Elevations. press TAB until Extrusion : Shape handle displays in the Status Bar. double-click Front. and select the bottom edge. Move the desktop up 12 On the Design Bar. press TAB until Extrusion : Shape handle displays in the Status Bar. 11 In the Project Browser.

19 Add a vertical dimension from the bottom of the desktop to the top edge. Click OK. Creating the Desktop Solid Geometry | 593 . For Group parameter under. select Family parameter.. Select Type. 21 Select the 750 mm dimension. 22 On the Options Bar.> for Label. enter Height for Name. 24 Select the 100 mm dimension.18 Add a vertical dimension from the reference level to the top edge of the desktop. Select Type. 27 On the Design Bar. enter Thickness for Name. select Dimensions. select Dimensions. click Modify. Add height and thickness family parameters 20 On the Design Bar. select <Add parameter.> for Label. 25 On the Options Bar. specify the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Parameter type. 26 n the Parameter Properties dialog. For Group parameter under. click Modify.. select <Add parameter. specify the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Parameter type. 23 In the Parameter Properties dialog.. Under Parameter Data. Click OK.. Under Parameter Data. select Family parameter. as shown.

and click Apply. enter 4000 mm for Length. 4 Move the cursor over the left vertical reference plane. Enter 1200 mm for Height. “Creating the Desk Drawer Base Solid Geometry” on page 594. and click Apply. and click Apply. click Family Types. 2 On the Design Bar. Enter 100 mm for Thickness. 594 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . 29 On the Design Bar. Creating the Desk Drawer Base Solid Geometry In this exercise. so when you open the Family Types dialog. and enter 100 mm for Offset. click . Click OK. 3 On the Options Bar. 31 In the Family Types dialog. 30 In the Family Types dialog. Click Apply. do the following: ■ ■ ■ Under Dimensions. Level. 32 Proceed to the next exercise. Enter 750 mm for Height. you can still see the model. return the parameters to their original values: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Dimensions. Dataset Continue using the family file from the previous exercise. you create the solid geometry of the desk drawer base. double-click Ref. Enter 150 mm for Thickness. click Ref Plane. and click to locate a new vertical reference plane offset 100 mm to the right. enter 2000 mm for Length. under Floor Plans. Notice the desk top adapts to the new dimension parameters.Flex the design 28 Adjust the location of the model within the drawing area. Offset two reference planes to locate the first drawer base corner 1 In the Project Browser.

Creating the Desk Drawer Base Solid Geometry | 595 . Lock the dimension as shown. 8 Add a dimension to the top horizontal reference plane and the offset plane below it. Click the lock icon as shown.5 Move the cursor over the upper horizontal reference plane. and click to locate a new horizontal reference plane offset 100 mm below it. 6 On the Design Bar. click Dimension. 7 Add a dimension referencing the left vertical reference plane and the offset plane you added.

12 On the Design Bar.Sketch the left drawer base 9 On the Design Bar. 10 On the Design Bar. and click OK. 13 On the Options Bar. Level for Name. click Lines. select Level: Ref. click Solid Form ➤ Solid Extrusion. 15 Click both of the lock icons to lock the edges of the extrusion to the reference planes. 596 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . as shown. click . under Specify a new Work Plane. two lock icons display. 14 Select the intersection of the new offset reference planes for the first corner of the rectangle. After you complete the rectangle. click Set Work Plane. and then specify a point 300 mm to the right and 800 mm down for the second corner of the rectangle. 11 In the Work Plane dialog.

click the Mirror tool. 20 On the Tools toolbar. click Dimension.16 On the Design Bar. and then click the lock icon to lock the dimension. 17 Add a vertical dimension from the lower reference plane to the lower edge of the drawer base. using the TAB key. click Modify. 19 Select the four sketched lines. Mirror the left rectangle to create the right drawer base 18 On the Design Bar. TIP You can select multiple elements by holding the CTRL key down. 21 Select the vertical centerline reference plane as the mirror axis. You can also highlight the entire line chain. . Creating the Desk Drawer Base Solid Geometry | 597 .

23 For the align-to reference. 598 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor .A duplicate of the left drawer base is mirrored to create the right drawer base. select the horizontal reference plane second from the top. 24 Select the top horizontal line of the right drawer extrusion as shown. as shown below at the cursor. click . 22 On the Tools toolbar.

26 On the Design Bar. 27 Add and lock the following two dimensions to the right drawer extrusion: ■ Add a dimension from the right vertical reference plane to the right edge of the drawer base. and then click the lock icon to lock the dimension. ■ Creating the Desk Drawer Base Solid Geometry | 599 .A lock icon displays. Add a dimension from the lower reference plane to the lower edge of the drawer base. 25 Click the lock icon to lock the extrusion edge to the reference plane. click Dimension. and then click the lock icon to lock the dimension.

. Under Parameter Data. one on each extrusion that references the width of the drawer base.28 Add two final dimensions. select <Add parameter. specify the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Parameter type. as shown. select Family parameter. Click OK. 30 On the Options Bar.. 29 Select the dimension referring to the drawer width on the left extrusion. Select Type. 600 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . select Dimensions.> for Label. 31 In the Parameter Properties dialog. For Group parameter under. enter Drawer Base Width for Name.

click . click Modify. double-click Front.32 Select the dimension referring to the drawer width on the right extrusion. click Finish Sketch. Creating the Desk Drawer Base Solid Geometry | 601 . 38 Select the lower edge of the desktop as the align-to reference. 35 On the Design Bar. 33 On the Options Bar. select Drawer Base Width for Label. Extend the drawer base extrusions up to the desktop 36 In the Project Browser. under Elevations. 37 On the Tools toolbar. 34 On the Design Bar.

Flex the design 46 Adjust the location of the model within the drawing area so when you open the Family Types dialog. you can still see the model. click Modify. click Visibility/Graphics. notice that annotations display in this view. click it to lock the alignment. a lock icon displays. click the Scale control and select 1:20. However. After the alignment. 45 On the View Control Bar. 44 Clear Show annotation categories in this view. 40 On the Design Bar. 43 Click the Annotation Categories tab.39 Select the upper edge of the drawer base. 42 On the View menu. and click OK. 41 On the View toolbar. The solid geometry for the desk drawer base is now complete. click . 602 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor .

Creating the Rolltop Solid Geometry In this exercise. under Elevations. 50 Proceed to the next exercise. and click Apply.47 On the Design Bar. enter 2000 mm for Length. Creating the Rolltop Solid Geometry | 603 . Enter 100 mm for Thickness. and click Apply. “Creating the Rolltop Solid Geometry” on page 603. Click OK. Notice the desk adapts to the new dimension parameters. Enter 1200 mm for Height. enter 4000 mm for Length. Create the rolltop extrusion 1 In the Project Browser. 49 In the Family Types dialog. click Family Types. Click Apply. 48 In the Family Types dialog. you create the solid geometry of the desk rolltop. return the parameters to their original values: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Dimensions. Dataset Continue using the family file from the previous exercise. and click Apply. Enter 750 mm for Height. do the following: ■ ■ ■ Under Dimensions. double-click Right. Enter 150 mm for Thickness.

9 Select the desk top. click . 3 On the Design Bar.2 On the Design Bar. 8 On the Tools toolbar. select Reference Plane: Center (Left\Right) for Name. under Specify a new Work Plane. and click OK. click Solid Form ➤ Solid Extrusion. click . then the lower horizontal sketch line. 604 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . and click the lock icon to lock the alignment. then move the cursor up 300mm and to the left 400mm. click Lines. click Set Work Plane. 6 On the Options Bar. and click to specify the upper left corner. as shown. 5 On the Design Bar. 4 In the Work Plane dialog. 7 Sketch the rectangle beginning at the intersection of the desktop and the right reference plane.

12 Add one dimension referring to both vertical sketch lines. 11 On the Design Bar. click Dimension. and lock it. Add another dimension to both horizontal sketch lines. then select the right parallel sketch line. and lock the alignment. and lock it.10 Select the right vertical edge of the desktop extrusion. Creating the Rolltop Solid Geometry | 605 .

click the Fillet arc tool. and then move the cursor down and to the right until you create and arc similar to the image below. TIP You may need to click the down arrow button. . click Finish Sketch. 606 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . the upper sketch line. Do not be concerned with the precise dimension of the arc radius. 15 Select the left vertical sketch line. 16 On the Design Bar. 14 On the Options Bar. and then select the fillet arc tool from the menu.13 On the Design Bar. click Lines.

20 Select the right edge of the right drawer base. Creating the Rolltop Solid Geometry | 607 .The rolltop extrusion outline is complete. 18 On the Tools toolbar. and click the lock icon. select the right edge of the rolltop. click . 19 Select the left edge of the left drawer base. double-click Front. Align the left and right edges of the rolltop with the drawer bases 17 In the Project Browser. select the left edge of the rolltop. and click the lock icon. under Elevations.

and click Apply. The solid geometry of the rolltop is now complete. and click Apply. you can still see the model. 608 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . enter 4000 mm for Length. You can also use dimension constraints. and click Apply.21 On the View toolbar. and click Apply. you may need to align and lock problematic edges that did not remain aligned. 23 On the Design Bar. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Dimensions. Enter 200 mm for Thickness. Flex the design 22 Adjust the location of the desk model within the drawing area so when you open the Family Types dialog. If not. Enter 1500 mm for Height. 24 In the Family Types dialog. Enter 1500 mm for Depth. click Family Types. click . The desk should adapt to all the changes.

Enter 100 mm for Thickness. Creating the Drawers Solid Geometry In this exercise. Enter 1000 mm for Depth. select Pick a Plane. enter 2000 mm for Length. you create the solid geometry of the drawers and apply material to the desk. Create the desk drawer extrusions 1 On the Design Bar. 3 In the Work Plane dialog. Click Apply. 26 Proceed to the next exercise. click Set Work Plane. under Specify a new Work Plane. Creating the Drawers Solid Geometry | 609 . Enter 750 mm for Height.25 In the Family Types dialog. “Creating the Drawers Solid Geometry” on page 609. Click OK. 4 Select the front plane of the right drawer base. return the parameters to their original values: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Dimensions. Dataset Continue using the family file from the previous exercise. 2 On the Design Bar. and click OK. click Solid Form ➤ Solid Extrusion.

under Elevations. click the lock that displays to lock the alignment. 7 On the Options Bar. click Dimension. and then select the corresponding left vertical lines of the two drawers above it. 8 Sketch six drawers similar to the image below. NOTE Adding and locking these dimensions is very important. 13 To constrain the four upper drawers. click drawer set on the left. If you modify the desk length or the drawer base width. select Multiple Alignment. After selecting the line of an upper drawer. click Lines. click . select the left vertical line on the left lowest drawer first. and repeat the previous step by selecting the right vertical lines of the 610 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . Lock each dimension as you add it. 14 On the Tools toolbar. 9 On the Design Bar. NOTE The exact configuration of the rectangles representing the drawer fronts is not critical. 12 On the Options Bar. double-click Front. zoom the view until you do. 10 Add a dimension between the vertical edges of the drawer base and the vertical lines of each bottom drawer. these locked dimension assure that the drawers flex as expected. 6 On the Design Bar. If you cannot see the locks on the dimensions.5 In the Project Browser. There should be four dimensions as shown. . click . 11 On the Tools toolbar.

under Constraints. 26 In the Materials dialog. 19 On the Design Bar. 23 In the Element Properties dialog. 27 In the Material Library dialog. 29 In the Materials dialog. click OK. and select Shading with Edges. Cherry. under AccuRender. 18 In the Element Properties dialog. click . 25 In the New Material dialog. click OK. enter 20mm for Extrusion End. click the Model Graphics Style control. under Materials and Finishes. and repeat the previous two steps on the right set of drawers. 22 On the Options Bar. click . click Extrusion Properties.15 On the Tools toolbar. for Material. click Duplicate. and click OK. click Finish Sketch. 16 On the Design Bar. 20 On the View toolbar. These steps ensure the top drawers remain aligned and flex with the constrained bottom drawer. Polished. 28 Click OK. click for Texture. click Modify. Creating the Drawers Solid Geometry | 611 . Apply material to the desk 21 Draw a pick box around the entire desk to select all the extrusions. 17 On the Design Bar. 31 On the View Control Bar. Dark. enter Desk .Wood. click . navigate to AccuRender/Wood/Cherry and select Stained. 30 In the Element Properties dialog. and click OK. click 24 In the Materials dialog.

35 In the Family Types dialog. click Family Types. The desk should adapt to all the changes. enter 2000 mm for Length. If not. do the following: ■ ■ ■ Under Dimensions. Click Apply. and click Apply. You can also use dimension constraints. return the parameters to their original values: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Dimensions. and click Apply. 36 Proceed with the final exercise in this lesson. Enter 1500 mm for Depth. 33 On the Design Bar. Enter 1000 mm for Depth. Defining New Furniture Types In this exercise. Enter 750 mm for Height. 612 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . 34 In the Family Types dialog. you can still see the model. you may need to align and lock problematic edges that did not remain aligned. enter 4000 mm for Length. Enter 100 mm for Thickness. you define new furniture types based on the rolltop desk model that you just created.Flex the design 32 Adjust the location of the desk model within the drawing area so when you open the Family Types dialog. and click Apply. “Defining New Furniture Types” on page 612. Enter 200 mm for Thickness. Click OK.

enter 2100 mm for Length and 1100 mm for Depth. under Family Types. enter Rolltop Desk 2250 x 1250mm for Name. 7 In the Family Types dialog. 20 Specify a point in the drawing area to add the first desk. click the Model Graphics Style control and select Shading with Edges. and click OK. enter Rolltop Desk 2100 x 1100mm for Name. 12 Navigate to the folder of your choice and save the new furniture family project with the name. click New. and click Apply. select Rolltop Desk 200 x 1000mm. 9 In the Name dialog. and click Apply. enter 2250 mm for Length and 1250 mm for Depth. select it. click New. 18 In the Open dialog. click . Defining New Furniture Types | 613 . click Load. 17 On the Options Bar. enter Rolltop Desk 2000 x 1000mm for Name. 16 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 6 In the Name dialog. You now have three new furniture types defined within your furniture family. 5 Under Family Types. click Family Types. verify that Length is 2000 mm and Depth is 1000 mm.Dataset Continue using the family file from the previous exercise. Load the new furniture family into a new project 13 On the Standard toolbar. click New.rfa. click Apply. click Component. Define new furniture types with various widths and depths 1 On the Design Bar. 15 On the View Control Bar. navigate to the location of your Training Furniture. 11 On the File menu. and click Open. and click OK. click Save. 8 Under Family Types. 3 In the Name dialog. and click OK.rfa file. Training Furniture. 10 In the Family Types dialog. 19 In the Type Selector. click 14 On the View toolbar. 2 In the Family Types dialog. 4 In the Family Types dialog. and click OK. to start a new project based on your default template.

and click to add the third desk. Drawing a Baluster In this exercise. 22 Specify a point to the right of the first desk. 23 In the Type Selector. Creating a Baluster Family In this lesson. you draw a baluster with an extrusion. select Rolltop Desk 2100 x 1100mm. This completes the Creating a Furniture Family lesson. select Rolltop Desk 2250 x 1250mm. you create a custom baluster and apply it to a set of stair railings.21 In the Type Selector. and add the second desk. You now have three new rolltop desks based on the new rolltop desk furniture family prototype. 24 Specify a point in the drawing area to the right of the previous two desks. 614 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . Balusters are simply profile extrusions with an assigned height family parameter.

Draw your profile approximately 30mm wide by 60mm deep. Level. click Zoom ➤ Zoom All to Fit. 5 On the Design Bar. 6 In the Work Plane dialog. the baluster profile should be centered on the vertical and horizontal reference planes. 2 On the View menu. and click OK. The bottom of the baluster is at the reference level and the baluster has an assigned default height of 750mm. NOTE When you draw the closed profile lines and arcs. 8 Draw the closed baluster plan profile as shown. Create a new family based on the default profile template 1 Expand the left elevation view. click Solid Form ➤ Solid Extrusion. click Set Work Plane. their exact location is not critical. In the left pane of the New dialog. 4 On the Design Bar. The reference planes that display are part of the default baluster template. Drawing a Baluster | 615 . select Ref. click Lines. Level for Name. expand Views (all). click Finish Sketch. 7 On the Design Bar. However. Draw the baluster plan profile 3 In the Project Browser. click New ➤ Family. and double-click Ref. and open Metric\Templates\Metric Baluster. Top and bottom cut angles for the baluster are also displayed.rft. expand Floor Plans. 9 On the Design Bar.Dataset ■ ■ On the File menu. click Training Files.

6 On the Design Bar. 14 Click the lock icon. 616 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . 5 Draw a straight stair run as shown.rte. The new custom baluster is now complete. Draw a straight stair run 3 On the Design Bar. 2 In the left pane of the New Project dialog. click Stairs. the extrusion has a height of 250mm. Assigning the New Baluster to a Stair Run In this exercise. 13 Select the top reference plane and select the top edge of the extrusion. click . click Modify and select the extrusion. click Load from Library ➤ Load Family. 12 On the Options Bar. click Finish Sketch. 11 On the Design Bar. click the Modelling tab. click New ➤ Project. 15 Save the new baluster family with the name Training Baluster. and open Metric\Templates\DefaultMetric.Extend the baluster extrusion to the top reference plane 10 In the Project Browser under Elevations. 7 On the File menu. double-click Front.rfa. By default. you assign the new baluster that you just created to a stair run. 4 On the Design Bar. click Training Files. Load the new baluster family into a new project 1 On the File menu.

click Shading with Edges. 11 On the View menu. select it. click Modify and select the existing railing. click . click OK. Assigning the New Baluster to a Stair Run | 617 . 15 In the Type Properties dialog. click Edit/New. 22 Zoom in on the new balusters. 20 In the Type Properties dialog. click OK. select Training Baluster : Training Baluster for the Regular baluster. 17 Clear Use Balusters Per Tread on Stairs. click Orient ➤ Southwest. 13 On the Options Bar. 14 In the Element Properties dialog. click Edit for Baluster Placement. 19 Click OK. 21 In the Element Properties dialog. 9 On the View toolbar.rfa file.8 In the Open dialog. navigate to the location of your Training Baluster. 18 Specify Start and End posts as Training Baluster. and click Open. Apply the custom baluster to the stair run 12 On the Design Bar. click . 16 In the Edit Baluster Placement dialog. 10 On the View menu. under Baluster Family.

Drawing a Sweep Profile In this exercise. and open Metric\Templates\Metric Profile-Rail. click New ➤ Family. Dataset ■ ■ On the File menu. 3 Save the new profile family with the name Profile . Create profiles to define frequently used shapes in your details. a reveal. However. This completes the Creating a Baluster Family lesson. You then create an in-place sweep based on a 2D path and apply the host sweep to a wall. and a host sweep. you draw a sweep profile. click Training Files. cornices. In this lesson. Drawing a Rail Profile In this exercise. verify that Ref. and other sweep-defined objects. In the left pane of the New dialog. their exact location is not critical. Create a new family based on the default profile template 1 On the Design Bar. Level is open. Creating Profile Families A profile is a series of closed two-dimensional lines and arcs.The stair run is now assigned the new baluster that you created.Sweep.rft. a stair nosing. click New ➤ Family. The new sweep profile is now complete. NOTE When you draw the closed profile lines and arcs. 618 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . Create a new family based on the default rail profile template 1 In the Project Browser. a railing. balusters. Use profiles to define object cross sections such as railings. the sweep profile should begin at the reference plane intersection. Dataset ■ ■ On the File menu. soffits. click Lines.rfa. In the left pane of the New dialog. draw the sweep profile with line and arc segments as shown. you create a rail profile. 2 Starting at the reference plane intersection. under Floor Plans. and open Metric\Templates\Metric Profile.rft. click Training Files. you create five different profiles: a sweep.

Draw the rail profile 2 On the Design Bar.The reference planes that display are part of the default rail profile template. their exact location is not critical. In the left pane of the New dialog. The rail height is measured from the floor elevation to the rail top. Drawing a Stair Nosing Profile | 619 .rft. Dataset ■ ■ On the File menu.Rail. you create a stair nosing profile. NOTE When you draw the closed profile lines and arcs. The reference planes that display are part of the default stair nosing profile template. draw the rail profile with line segments as shown. The new rail profile is now complete. click Training Files. the top of the rail profile should coincide with the rail top reference plane. Drawing a Stair Nosing Profile In this exercise. However. 3 Starting at the reference plane intersection. with the vertical reference plane labeled as the riser face and the horizontal reference plane labeled as the tread surface.rfa. 4 Save the new profile family with the name Profile . with the vertical reference plane labeled as the rail centerline and the horizontal reference plane labeled as the rail top. Additional text specifies the lower-left quadrant as the location for the stair nosing. and open Metric\Templates\Metric Profile-Stair Nosing. click Lines. Create a new family based on the default stair nosing profile template 1 Notice the existing planes and text provided within the template. click New ➤ Family.

Level is open. you create a reveal profile. Drawing a Reveal Profile In this exercise. click Lines. verify that Ref. click New ➤ Family. the top of the stair nosing profile should coincide with the tread surface reference plane and the right edge of the stair nosing profile should coincide with the riser face reference plane. In the left pane of the New dialog. The horizontal reference plane represents the offset from floor level to the reveal. In addition. 620 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor .Draw the stair nosing profile 2 On the Design Bar. Dataset ■ ■ On the File menu. and the wall body indicated to the right of the wall face reference plane. with the vertical reference plane labeled as the wall face. you must draw the stair nosing in the lower-left quadrant. However.rfa.Stair Nosing. under Floor Plans. Create a new family based on the default reveal profile template 1 In the Project Browser. draw the stair nosing profile with line and arc segments as shown. NOTE When you draw the closed profile lines and arcs. The new stair nosing profile is now complete.rft. click Training Files. and open Metric\Templates\Metric Profile-Reveal. 4 Save the new profile family with the name Profile . Reveal profiles are used with the Reveal tool in the project environment to define a wall cutout. their exact location is not critical. 3 Starting at the reference plane intersection. The reference planes that display are part of the default reveal profile template.

the left edge of the reveal profile must coincide with wall face reference plane and the reveal must be drawn within the wall body (to the right of the wall face reference plane). Level is open.rfa. Host Sweep profiles are similar to reveal profiles and are used with the Host Sweep tool in the project environment to define a shape to add to a host surface. 4 Save the new profile family with the name Profile .rft. click Training Files. you create a host sweep profile. The new reveal profile is now complete. NOTE When you draw the closed profile lines. draw the reveal profile with line segments as shown. Create a new family based on the default host sweep profile template 1 In the Project Browser. and open Metric\Templates\Metric Profile-Hosted. In the left pane of the New dialog. Drawing a Host Sweep Profile In this exercise. Dataset ■ ■ On the File menu. Drawing a Host Sweep Profile | 621 . which may be any vertical surface.Draw the reveal profile 2 On the Design Bar. click Lines. their exact location is not critical. under Floor Plans. verify that Ref. 3 Starting at the reference plane intersection.Reveal. However. click New ➤ Family.

click Create. click Training Files. Applying a Sweep Profile to a 2D Path In this exercise. 2 In the New Project dialog.rfa. 4 Save the new profile family with the name Profile . click Browse. click New ➤ Project. 622 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . the left edge of the host sweep profile must coincide with the host face reference plane. The new host sweep profile is now complete. draw the reveal profile with line and arc segments as shown. 4 In the New Project dialog. Draw the host sweep profile 2 On the Design Bar. 3 Starting at the reference plane intersection.Host Sweep.The reference planes that display are part of the default host sweep profile template. and the host sweep profile must be drawn outside of the host body (to the right of the host face reference plane).rte. and open Metric\Templates\DefaultMetric. you apply the sweep profile that you just created to a 2D path. their exact location is not critical. Create a new project 1 On the File menu. Specify the family category 5 On the Modelling menu. NOTE When you draw the closed profile lines. with the vertical reference plane labeled as the host face and the host body indicated to the left of the host face reference plane. However. The reference plane intersection is the origin of the host sweep profile. click OK. click Lines. 3 In the left pane of the New dialog.

NOTE When you sketch the 2D path.6 In the Family Category and Parameters dialog. and click OK. enter Sweep for Name. Sketch the 2D sweep path 8 On the Family tab of the Design Bar. click Finish Sweep. Modify the sweep profile configuration 18 In the Project Browser. 10 On the Design Bar. Applying a Sweep Profile to a 2D Path | 623 .Sweep. and double-click South. click Sketch 2D Path. 20 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 19 Zoom in on the right end of the sweep. click Ref Plane. select Profile . click Solid Form ➤ Solid Sweep. 9 On the Design Bar. navigate to the location of Profile . click Lines and sketch the 2D path approximately as shown. click Load Profiles. and click Open. and click OK. expand Elevations. 16 On the Design Bar. the exact location of the path is not critical. select it. 7 In the Name dialog. 17 On the View toolbar. 15 On the Design Bar.rfa. click Finish Family. beside Load Profiles. 14 In the Type Selector. 13 In the Open dialog. Apply the sweep profile to the 2D path 12 On the Options Bar. select Generic Models for Family Category.Sweep. expand Views (all). click . click Finish Path. 11 On the Design Bar.

and open Metric Templates\DefaultMetric. you apply the host sweep profile that you created to a group of walls. 27 On the View toolbar. click Finish Family. click 24 In the Element Properties dialog. click Browse. click New ➤ Project. 26 On the Design Bar. Applying a Host Sweep Profile to Walls In this exercise. enter 600 for Vertical Profile Offset. Create a new project 1 On the File menu. 3 In the left pane of the New dialog. Enter 25 degrees for Angle. 25 Click OK.rte. on the Options Bar. Under Other. 2 In the New Project dialog. on the Options Bar. click . 4 In the New Project dialog. 624 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . click OK.21 Draw a vertical reference plane coincident with the left edge of the profile as shown. click Edit. 23 Select the sweep profile again and. 22 Select the sweep profile and. click Training Files. Under Constraints. Draw a wall group 5 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. do the following: ■ ■ ■ . The sweep profile application is now complete. select Profile Is Flipped. click Wall.

NOTE When you draw the walls. 9 On the Options Bar. verify that Horizontal is selected. their exact location is not critical. Applying a Host Sweep Profile to Walls | 625 . 6 Draw four walls as shown. 11 Select a point on the right wall for the next wall sweep. 8 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. 7 On the View toolbar. click Host Sweep ➤ Wall Sweep. click . 10 Select a point on the left wall for the wall sweep.

on the Options Bar. you create a room tag which displays room name. floor and ceiling finish.Host Sweep : Profile . click Zoom ➤ Zoom All to Fit.12 On the Design Bar. 17 In the Type Properties dialog. and area with labels added to extract project data. click New ➤ Annotation Symbol. Replace the default wall sweep with the new host wall sweep 13 On the File menu. Creating a Room Tag In this lesson. click . Create a new tag based on the default room tag template 1 On the View menu. under Construction. click OK. In the left pane of the New dialog.rft. 15 Select the wall sweep and. Specifying Room Tag Parameters In this exercise. click Training Files. select Profile . and open Metric\Templates\M_Room Tag.Host Sweep for Profile. 21 Move the cursor to rotate your viewpoint to view the host sweep from underneath. The default wall sweep is replaced with your host sweep profile.rfa. click Load from Library ➤ Load Family. you specify the room tag parameters. Dataset ■ ■ On the File menu. navigate to the location of Profile . and click Open. 18 In the Element Properties dialog. 14 In the Open dialog. 626 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . 20 In the Dynamic View dialog. click 16 In the Element Properties dialog. 19 On the View toolbar. select it.Host Sweep. click Spin [Shift]. . The reference planes that display are part of the default room tag template. click Edit/New. This completes the Creating Profile Families lesson. click Modify. and click OK.

8 In the Name dialog. select Label : 2mm. select Name. click OK. Specifying Room Tag Parameters | 627 . 13 On the Options Bar. click Label. clear Underline. select Area. 15 In the Select Parameter dialog. 22 Specify a point below the Ceiling Finish label for the last label location. The name label is displayed with the text underlined. 5 In the Type Properties dialog. select Floor Finish. click Duplicate. and click OK. verify that Label : 3mm is displayed. select Ceiling Finish. click Edit/New. 4 In the Element Properties dialog. 17 In the Type Selector. click Label. 3 On the Options Bar. 18 Specify a point below the Name label for the next label location. 14 Specify the location for the first label as shown.Edit the 3mm label 2 On the Family tab of the Design Bar. click Edit/New. select Underline. click . 20 Specify a point below the Floor Finish label for the next label location. and click OK. 12 In the Type Selector. Add a 2mm label 6 In the Element Properties dialog. Combine labels into a room tag 11 On the Design Bar. and click OK. enter 2 for the Text Size parameter. 10 In the Element Properties dialog. 7 In the Type properties dialog. and click OK. and click OK. 9 In the Type Properties dialog. 23 In the Select Parameter dialog. 19 In the Select Parameter dialog. 21 In the Select Parameter dialog. enter 2mm for Name. verify that Center and Middle are selected for Text Alignment. and click OK. and click OK. 16 Zoom in on the label.

click Training Files. 24 Save the new room tag with the name Finish Area Tag. 4 Specify the reference plane intersection for the circle center point. In the left pane of the New dialog. Creating an Annotation Symbol In this lesson. 3 On the Options Bar. Creating a Custom North Arrow Annotation Symbol In this exercise. The new room tag is now ready for use.rft. The reference planes that display are part of the default generic annotation template. This completes the Creating a Room Tag lesson. you create a custom north arrow annotation symbol and place it in a new project.The Area label has a predefined value of 150 SF. click New ➤ Annotation Symbol. notice that there is only one view available. 628 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . click Lines. Notes included with the template specify annotation parameters. and open Metric\Templates\Generic Annotation.rfa. Create a new annotation symbol based on the default generic annotation template 1 In the Project Browser. Sketch a north arrow symbol 2 On the Design Bar. Dataset ■ ■ On the File menu. click . you create a custom north arrow annotation symbol with a circle and lines.

7 Draw a horizontal line from the left side to the right side of the circle through the center point. 6 On the Options Bar. click Modify.5 Drag the cursor and specify a radius of 8mm. click . 9 Draw a vertical line from the center point to the bottom of the circle. Creating a Custom North Arrow Annotation Symbol | 629 . 10 On the Design Bar. 8 Draw a vertical line from the top to the center point of the circle.

19 Save the new north arrow with the name. and click OK. Add an annotation objects subcategory 11 On the Settings menu. and open Metric\Templates\DefaultMetric. click New. 8 Zoom in on the lower right corner of the sheet. 9 On the File menu.rfa.The new north arrow annotation symbol is ready to edit. click Load from Library ➤ Load Family. select 3 for Line Weight. 13 In the New Subcategory dialog. Apply the new line weight to the upper vertical line 15 On the Design Bar. 14 In the Object Styles dialog. 7 Click OK. 5 On the View tab of the Design Bar. click OK. Adding the New North Arrow to a Project In this exercise. and select the upper vertical line. verify that Generic Annotations is selected for Subcategory of. click Modify. enter North Line for Name. select A1 metric. Training North Arrow. Load the new north arrow into a new project 1 On the File menu. click Object Styles. select North Line. 18 Select the template notes and press DELETE. 16 In the Type Selector. click Training Files. under Modify Subcategories. click Sheet. and click OK. click New ➤ Project. in the North Line row. The north arrow annotation symbol is now complete. 12 In the Object Styles dialog. 6 In the Select a Titleblock dialog. 2 In the New Project dialog. 3 In the left pane of the New dialog. 4 In the New Project dialog.rte. click Modify. you add the new north arrow annotation symbol that you created to a project. click Browse. 630 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . 17 On the Design Bar.

rfa. graphics.10 In the Open dialog. 12 In the Type Selector. and open Metric\Templates\A0 Metric. In the left pane of the New dialog. Create a new family based on the default titleblock template 1 The default titleblock template consists of 4 border lines. Creating a Titleblock Family | 631 . click Training Files. navigate to the location of Training North Arrow. click Modify. text.rft. This completes the Creating an Annotation Symbol lesson. click New ➤ Titleblock. 13 Specify a point in the lower right corner of the sheet to place the symbol. and your project data. Drawing Linework for a Titleblock Sheet In this exercise. select it. Creating a Titleblock Family In this lesson. and labels. The titleblock has linework. and click Open. 11 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. You customize the titleblock with a new text style. Dataset ■ ■ On the File menu. you create a custom titleblock sheet based on the A0 metric titleblock template. click Symbol. select Training North Arrow. you draw all of the linework necessary to create a custom A0-size sheet. 14 On the Design Bar.

Add vertical and horizontal lines 5 On the Options Bar. and click to draw a new vertical line. 4 Specify the upper left corner of the sheet for the first rectangle corner. 632 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . 9 Draw a horizontal line 140mm below the upper inside border as shown. click Lines. and enter -25 for Offset. and click . click .Sketch the inside border 2 On the Design Bar. 11 Draw a horizontal line 120mm above the lower inside border as shown. 10 Draw a horizontal line 120mm below the last horizontal line as shown. 3 On the Options Bar. . click 8 Enter 0 for Offset. and enter 140 for Offset. and then specify the lower right corner of the sheet for the second corner of the rectangle. 6 Move the cursor over the right inside border line. 7 On the Options Bar. click .

click Lines. select Title Blocks. 13 In the Type Selector. Drawing Linework for a Titleblock Sheet | 633 . 20 Move the cursor over the fifth horizontal line. 16 In the Type Selector. and click to draw a new horizontal line 20mm below the existing line. and click to draw a new horizontal line 20mm below the existing line. press CTRL. 19 Move the cursor over the fourth horizontal line. 18 Move the cursor over the third horizontal line. 24 Move the cursor over the eighth horizontal line. 22 Move the cursor over the third horizontal line. 26 Zoom out to view the entire sheet. enter 30 for Offset. and enter 20 for Offset. 23 Move the cursor over the seventh horizontal line. 21 On the Options Bar. and click to draw a new horizontal line 20mm below the existing line. 25 On the Design Bar.12 On the Design Bar. select Wide Lines. and click to draw a new horizontal line 30mm above the existing line. 14 Zoom in on the lower right corner of the sheet. click Modify. and select the second and third horizontal lines. 17 On the Options Bar. and click to draw a new horizontal line 30mm above the existing line. and click to draw a new horizontal line 30mm above the existing line. click . click Modify. 15 On the Design Bar.

and labels to your titleblock. click Duplicate. 4 Zoom in on the logo. 3 Place the image in the upper right corner of the sheet as shown. click Edit/New. click . you add a company logo. Adding Graphics and Text to a Titleblock In this exercise.jpg. click Text. text notes. click Import/Link ➤ Image. 6 On the Options Bar. 634 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . Add a company logo 1 On the File menu. click Training Files. and open Common\Company Logo.The titleblock linework is now complete. 2 In the left pane of the Open dialog. 7 In the Element Properties dialog. 8 In the Type Properties dialog. Create a new 10mm text style 5 On the Design Bar.

in the text box. and drag the text note down as shown. enter 10 for Text Size. 10 In the Type Properties dialog. and click OK. select Text : 8mm. and add an address and phone number as shown. 11 Click OK twice. Press ENTER to add each new line of text and click outside of the text box to complete the text. and select Bold. and select the last text note. Add company address and phone number text 15 In the Type Selector. 17 On the Design Bar.9 In the Name dialog. 18 Select the drag handle. under Text. enter 10mm Bold for Name. 16 Draw a text box below the initial text. 14 Click outside of the text box to complete the text. 13 Enter Arch Design Inc. click Modify. Add company name text 12 Draw a text box under the first horizontal line as shown. Adding Graphics and Text to a Titleblock | 635 .

select Constrain and Multiple.19 Click outside the text box to complete the modification. click Modify. click . 25 Click inside the Consultant text group. and enter the following text: ■ ■ ■ ■ Consultant: Address: Address: Telephone: 22 On the Design Bar. and select the consultant text note. 23 On the Edit toolbar. click Text. 636 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . Add consultant name. and phone number text 20 On the Design Bar. address. 24 On the Options Bar. 21 Draw a text box below the second horizontal line.

27 Move the cursor down another 120mm and click to specify the second copied text note location. Adding Graphics and Text to a Titleblock | 637 .26 Move the cursor down 120mm and click to specify the first copied text note position.

38 Draw a text box in the next space up. and enter Sheet Number:. click Edit/New. 32 In the Name dialog. click Duplicate. under Text. 31 In the Type Properties dialog. 36 Draw a text box in the lower right space of the titleblock. and enter Date:. 29 On the Options Bar. click Text. 638 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . 39 Draw a text box in the next space up. and enter Drawn By:. select Text : 5mm. enter 5 for Text Size. 34 Click OK twice. 37 Draw a text box in the next space up. click . and click OK. enter 5mm for Name. 33 In the Type Properties dialog.Create a new 5mm text style 28 On the Design Bar. and enter Checked By:. 30 In the Element Properties dialog. Add drawing data text 35 In the Type Selector.

and drag to the left until the label displays on one line. 41 On the Options Bar. The label displays a default value wrapped to 3 lines. 42 Place the cursor at the lower right corner of the Date field. 43 In the Select Parameter dialog. select Project Issue Date. NOTE Move the label if necessary to line up properly with the existing text. and click OK. Adding Graphics and Text to a Titleblock | 639 .Add drawing data labels 40 On the Design Bar. click Label. and click to specify the label location. select Right and Bottom for Text Alignment. 44 Select the left drag handle on the label.

NOTE Move the label if necessary to line up properly with the existing text. enter 15mm Label for Name. 48 In the Select Parameter dialog. 640 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . select Label : 15mm Label. 46 In the Select Parameter dialog. 54 In the Type Properties dialog. and click OK.45 Place the cursor at the lower right corner of the Drawn By field. 60 Place the cursor near the center of the field above the Date field. Create a new 15mm label style 49 On the Design Bar. 50 On the Options Bar. 53 In the Name dialog. select Sheet Number. 57 Place the cursor at the lower right corner of the Sheet Number field. 59 On the Options Bar. 51 In the Element Properties dialog. 58 In the Select Parameter dialog. 52 In the Type Properties dialog. and click OK. 47 Place the cursor at the lower right corner of the Checked By field. select Drawn By. click Center and Middle. enter 15 for Text Size. and click to specify the label location. click Duplicate. 55 Click OK twice. Add sheet number and project data labels 56 In the Type Selector. select Checked By and click OK. and click OK. 61 In the Select Parameter dialog. and click OK. and click to specify the label location. NOTE Move the label if necessary to line up properly with the existing text. click Label. and click to specify the label location. under Text. select Project Number. and click to specify the label location. click . click Edit/New.

67 In the Select Parameter dialog. 65 Select the left drag handle on the label. 64 In the Select Parameter dialog. and drag to the left until the label displays on one line. select Client Name. Create a 4mm label style 69 On the Design Bar. click Label. Adding Graphics and Text to a Titleblock | 641 . and click OK. and drag to the left until the label displays on one line. and drag to the left until the label displays on one line. and click OK. and click to specify the label location. and click to specify the label location. 66 Place the cursor near the center of the field above the Project Name field. 68 Select the left drag handle on the label. 63 Place the cursor near the center of the field above the Project Number field.62 Select the left drag handle on the label. select Project Name.

and then adjust the width of the File Path field so that it is approximately equal to the width of the Sheet Number field.70 On the Options Bar. select File Path. under Text. 79 In the Select Parameter dialog. and click Open. and labels are now complete. select it.rfa.rfa file. and click OK. click Left and Middle. text. 75 Click OK twice. enter 4 for Text Size. 5 On the View tab of the Design Bar. click Load. select 4mm Label. and click OK. enter 4mm Label. 78 Place the cursor in the border area below the left side of the Sheet Number field. click Edit/New. navigate to the location of Training A0Horizontal Titleblock. select Training A0Horizontal Titleblock. click Modify. 74 In the Type Properties dialog. click Training Files. click OK. 3 In the left pane of the New dialog. click Duplicate. 73 In the Name dialog. click Browse. 4 In the New Project dialog. 7 In the Open dialog. 80 On the Design Bar. 81 Save the new titleblock family with the name Training A0Horizontal Titleblock. 642 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . click New ➤ Project. 6 In the Select a Titleblock dialog.rte. click Sheet. you add the titleblock that you created to a new project. 8 In the Select a Titleblock dialog. and click to specify the label location. 77 On the Options Bar. Add Project Path label 76 In the Type Selector. Adding the Titleblock to a New Project In this exercise. click . Load the new titleblock family into a new project 1 On the File menu. 71 In the Element Properties dialog. and open Metric\Templates\DefaultMetric. 9 Click OK. The titleblock graphics. 2 In the New Project dialog. 72 In the Type Properties dialog.

click Modify and select the titleblock. enter Name for Drawn By. and click OK. Enter Jane Smith for Client Name. 12 In the Element Properties dialog. 15 In the Type Properties dialog. 14 On the Settings menu. 13 Zoom in on the lower right corner of the sheet. Enter In Progress for Project Status. Enter Office Building for Project Name.Modify titleblock properties 10 On the Design Bar. 2005 for Project Issue Date. Adding the Titleblock to a New Project | 643 . click . do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Enter January 1. Enter 2005-01 for Project Number. click Project Information. 11 On the Options Bar. 16 Click OK. under Other.

To change the units of measurement to meters. format the Area to use 2 decimal places. Open the existing Pantheon building model 1 On the View menu. on the Settings menu. you start with an incomplete building information model of the Pantheon. Dataset ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. Creating In-Place Families In this lesson. click Orient ➤ Southeast. NOTE This project was created using an imperial template and components.This completes the Creating a Titleblock Family lesson. Set the Length units to millimeters. Creating the Dome Roof In-Place Family In this exercise. click Training Files. In the left pane of the Open dialog. and open Common\c_Pantheon. and add a dome roof and a concave floor with revolved forms as in-place families. Sketch the roof cross-section with a closed profile in an elevation view. set the Area to Square meters. and set the suffix to None.rvt. 644 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . you create the dome roof with a revolved form. You create an in-place family in your current project rather than in the Family Editor. click Project Units. In-place families interact with the building model according to their assigned family category.

4 In the Family Category and Parameters dialog. you add a dome roof with oculus (circular opening) to the Pantheon building model. expand Elevations. 9 Select the Center East/West reference plane as shown. and click OK. Specify the Roofs family category 3 On the Modelling menu. select Pick a Plane. click Solid Form ➤ Solid Revolve. and click OK.Center. enter Dome for Name. 10 In the Go To View dialog. and double-click South. expand Views (all). select Roofs for Family Category. 7 On the Design Bar. 2 In the Project Browser. click Create. click Set Work Plane. and click OK. Specify the dome roof revolved form parameters 6 On the Design Bar.Next. Creating the Dome Roof In-Place Family | 645 . 5 In the Name dialog. select Section: Wall Section . 8 In the Work Plane dialog. and click Open View.

click . click . click Axis. and then specify the top endpoint of the reference plane for the endpoint of the axis. Draw the axis of rotation for the dome roof revolved form 11 On the Design Bar. 646 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . 13 Specify the bottom endpoint of the Center East/West reference plane for the start point of the axis.The center wall section view is displayed. 16 Specify the intersection of the Upper Cornice horizontal reference plane and vertical axis as the circle center point. 15 On the Options Bar. Draw the lower face of the dome roof 14 On the Design Bar. 12 On the Options Bar. click Lines.

Draw the oculus rim profile 18 Zoom in on the top of the circle. click . Creating the Dome Roof In-Place Family | 647 . 20 Specify the reference plane intersection for the start point of the rim profile as shown. and select Chain. until it creates an intersection with the level 1 reference plane.17 Move the cursor out. and draw the five rim profile line segments in the shape of a reverse C as shown. The circle is tangent to the interior wall face and the level 1 reference plane at the floor line. 21 Snap to reference plane intersections. 19 On the Options Bar. The reference planes that display are guides for drawing the oculus rim profile.

23 On the Options Bar.Split the circle 22 On the Tools toolbar. 25 Select the intersection of the circle and the lower left vertical line of the profile as shown. 28 Specify the endpoint of the upper left rim profile line segment as the arc start point. click . Draw the upper face of the dome roof 26 On the Design Bar. 648 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . 27 On the Options Bar. select Delete Inner Segment. The circle is trimmed between the rim profile and the first split point. click Lines. click . 24 Select a point on the circle to the right of the rim profile.

Draw two lines to close the dome roof profile 31 On the Design Bar. 33 Draw a horizontal line from the arc endpoint to the interior edge of the wall. Creating the Dome Roof In-Place Family | 649 .29 Specify the top of the stairs in the wall section as the arc endpoint. and then select a point on the arc above the tangent point as the segment to keep. 35 Select the interior face of the wall. 32 On the Options Bar. Trim the arc below the tangent point 34 On the Tools toolbar. click . 30 Specify a point on the arc approximately as shown. click and select Chain. click Lines. and then draw a vertical line down the interior wall face to the lower dome roof face tangent point.

and click OK. 42 On the View toolbar. 40 On the Design Bar. 38 In the Materials dialog. click Create.The dome roof closed profile is now complete. click Revolution Properties. and click OK. Specify lightweight concrete for the dome roof material 36 On the Design Bar. Creating the Concave Floor In-Place Family In this exercise. 2 In the Family Category and Parameters dialog. click Finish Family. select Floors for Family Category. you create the concave floor slab for the Pantheon building model. 41 On the Design Bar. The dome roof in-place family is now complete. under Materials and Finishes. click Finish Sketch. select Concrete . click . 39 In the Element Properties dialog. 37 In the Element Properties dialog. click OK. 650 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . click for Material. Specify the concave floor revolved form parameters 1 On the Modelling menu.Cast-in-Place Lightweight Concrete for Name.

6 On the Design Bar. Draw the axis of rotation for the floor revolved form 10 On the Design Bar. select Pick a Plane. select Section: Wall Section . Creating the Concave Floor In-Place Family | 651 . and click Open View. and then specify the top endpoint of the reference plane for the endpoint of the axis. enter Concave Floor for Name. 12 Specify the bottom endpoint of the Center East/West reference plane for the start point of the axis. 9 In the Go To View dialog. click Solid Form ➤ Solid Revolve. double-click South. 7 In the Work Plane dialog. 5 On the Design Bar. click Axis. click . 11 On the Options Bar. 8 Select the Center East/West reference plane as shown. 4 In the Project Browser under Elevations.Center. click Set Work Plane. and click OK.3 In the Name dialog. and click OK.

O. 15 Specify the intersection of the T. and select Chain. 652 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . 16 Drag the cursor up 800 mm. NOTE You may need to zoom in closer to the intersection to select the first point.Draw the concave floor profile 13 On the Design Bar. click Lines. click . and specify the next point for the floor profile as shown. for the start point of the floor profile as shown. Footing level line and the axis. 14 On the Options Bar. 17 Specify the intersection of the level 1 reference plane and the interior wall edge for the next point of the floor profile as shown.

23 In the Element Properties dialog. double-click 3D Section View. such as reference planes and sub-categories. select Cobblestone for Name. click OK. click Revolution Properties. you start with the selection of a family template. Specify cobblestone for the concave floor material 20 On the Design Bar. Based on the template you select. Footing level line and the axis for the last point of the floor profile. 22 In the Materials dialog. Footing level line and the interior wall edge for the next point of the floor profile. click Finish Sketch.O. This completes the Creating In-Place Families lesson.18 Specify the intersection of the T. When you create a new family. Appendix A .O. Appendix A . and title blocks. and click OK. 21 In the Element Properties dialog.Exploring Family Templates Revit Architecture ships with a large number of family templates.Exploring Family Templates | 653 . 24 On the Design Bar. click for Material. 25 On the Design Bar. annotation families. The concave floor closed profile is now complete. Revit Architecture differs between templates for model families. 19 Specify the intersection of the of the T. 26 In the Project Browser under 3D Views. the new family has specific default contents. click Finish Family.

Contains sample wall geometry. Category: None Casework wall based Family template for casework. Category: Casework Casework Family template for casework.rft Baluster Description Family template for baluster families.Model Family Templates The templates for model families are in Documents and Settings/All Users/Application Data/Autodesk/RAC 2008/Metric Templates. Category: None Baluster . The following table gives an overview of the templates for model families: Template Name *.Post Family template for posts of balusters. Wall based families can only be placed on wall faces in a project. 654 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . Geometry can be locked to upper and lower reference level in elevation views.

Geometry can use length parameter as “stretch” value. contains a reference line and left and right reference planes. Category: Detail Items Model Family Templates | 655 . If a column intersects a wall. Includes the filled region tool. is used to create 2D detail components. the column inherits the material of the wall. Category: Columns Curtain Wall Panel Family template for filling elements of curtain walls.Template Name *. Geometry can be locked to upper and lower reference level in elevation views. includes the filled region tool.rft Description Column Family template to create columns. Category: Curtain Panels Detail Component line based 2D family. Category: Detail Items Detail Component 2D family.

656 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . Ceiling based families can only be placed on any ceiling in a project. Category: Electrical Equipment Electrical Fixture ceiling based Family template to create electrical equipment families. Category: Doors Electrical Equipment Family template to create electrical equipment families. Contains a sample ceiling geometry.Template Name *.rft Door .Curtain Wall Description Family template for door elements of curtain walls. Category: Curtain Panels Door Family template for doors.

Category: Electrical Fixtures Entourage Family template to create entourage families. Category: Furniture Systems Furniture Family template to create furniture families. Contains sample wall geometry. Category: Furniture Model Family Templates | 657 . Category: Entourage Furniture System Family template to create furniture system families.rft Description Category: Electrical Fixtures Electrical Fixture wall based Family template to create electrical equipment families. Category: Electrical Fixtures Electrical Fixture Family template to create electrical equipment families. Wall based families can only be placed on wall faces in a project.Template Name *.

Template Name *. Ceiling based families can only be placed on ceiling in a project.rft Generic Model ceiling based Description Family template to create any generic model geometry. Floor based families can only be placed on a floor face in a project. Contains a sample ceiling geometry. Face based families can only be placed on any face in a project. Category: Generic Models Generic Model floor based Family template to create any generic model geometry. Category: Generic Models Generic Model face based Family template to create any generic model geometry. Contains sample floor geometry. Category: Generic Models 658 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor .

Category: Generic Models Generic Model wall based Family template to create any generic model geometry. Includes the filled region tool.rft Generic Model line based Description Family template to create any generic model geometry. Category: Generic Models Sample: Wall Opening with 2D graphics in plan view and a void extrusion. Contains sample wall geometry. Geometry can use length parameter as “stretch” value. Category: Generic Models Generic Model roof based Family template to create any generic model geometry. Contains a reference line and left and right reference planes.Template Name *. Contains sample roof geometry. Wall based families can only be placed on wall faces in a project. Model Family Templates | 659 . Roof based families can only be placed on any roof face in a project.

Roof based families can only be placed on a roof face in a project. Contains sample roof geometry. Category: Generic Model Lighting Fixture floor based Family template to create lighting fixtures. Category: Lighting Fixtures 660 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . Category: Lighting Fixtures Lighting Fixture roof based Family template to create lighting fixtures. The family has illumination properties for the rendering tools. Contains sample floor geometry.rft Generic Model Description Family template to create any generic model geometry.Template Name *. Floor based families can only be placed on a floor face in a project. The family has illumination properties for the rendering tools.

The family has illumination properties for the rendering tools. Ceiling based families can only be placed on a ceiling face in a project. Linear Lighting Fixture roof based. Category: Lighting Fixtures Model Family Templates | 661 . Contains sample ceiling geometry. The family has illumination properties for the rendering tools.rft Lighting Fixture ceiling based Description Family template to create lighting fixtures. Linear Lighting Fixture Family templates to create linear lighting fixtures. Contains sample wall geometry. Linear Lighting Fixture ceiling based. Linear Lighting Fixture wall based. Wall based families can only be placed on a wall face in a project. The family has illumination properties for the rendering tools. Category: Lighting Fixtures Lighting Fixture Family template to create lighting fixtures. The family has illumination properties for the rendering tools.Template Name *. Category: Lighting Fixtures Linear Lighting Fixture floor based. Contains the same defaults as the Lighting Fixtures. Category: Lighting Fixtures Lighting Fixture wall based Family template to create lighting fixtures.

and roofs Massing families can also be generating floor area faces. Contains sample ceiling geometry.Template Name *. Faces of masses can be used to create other model elements like walls. Wall based families can only be placed on wall faces in a project.rft Mass Description Family template to create massing families. Category: Mass Sample: Mass families from the content library. slabs. and gross floor areas. Ceiling based families can only be placed on ceiling faces in a project. Masses can report gross volume. Category: Mechanical Equipment 662 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . Category: Mechanical Equipment Mechanical Equipment wall based Family template to create mechanical equipment families. gross surface area. Mechanical Equipment ceiling based Family template to create mechanical equipment families. Contains sample wall geometry.

Contains sample wall geometry. Wall based families can only be placed on wall faces in a project.Template Name *. Category: Plumbing Fixtures Plumbing Fixture Family template to create plumbing fixture families.rft Mechanical Equipment Description Family template to create mechanical equipment families. Category: Plumbing Fixtures Model Family Templates | 663 . Category: Mechanical Equipment Parking Family template to create parking families. Category: Parking Planting Family template to create planting families. Category: Planting Plumbing Fixture wall based Family template to create plumbing fixture families.

gutter. Profile usage can be explicitly assigned. mullion. Profile-Hosted Family template to create 2D profiles for hosts. Profile usage (fascia. 664 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . Category: Profiles. wall sweep) can be explicitly assigned under Settings menu ➤ Family Category and Parameters. slab edge. Profile usage can be explicitly assigned.Template Name *. A profile is only used in combination with system families. A profile is only used in combination with system families. Profile-Reveal Family template to create 2D profiles for wall sweeps and wall reveals.rft Profile Description Family template to create 2D profiles. Families based on this template can be used in a project with the tools in the Modelling menu ➤ Host Sweeps. Category: Profiles. Category: Profiles. Profile-Rail Family template to create 2D profiles for rails. Category: Profiles. Contains default reference planes Rail Centerline and Rail Top. A profile is only used in combination with system families. A profile is only used in combination with system families.

Category: Entourage Site Family template to create Site families.Template Name *. Contains sample wall geometry. Category: Specialty Equipment Speciality Equipment Family template to create specialty equipment families. Wall based families can only be placed on wall faces in a project.rft Profile-Stair Nosing Description Family template to create 2D profiles for stair nosing. Category: Specialty Equipment Model Family Templates | 665 . Category: Profiles. Category: Site Speciality Equipment wall based Family template to create specialty equipment families. A profile is used only in combination with system families. The family has an rpc file link included. RPC Family Family template for models using the Real People Collection product family.

If a structural column intersects a wall. specific setting for symbolic representation and the structural material type can be defined. Category: Structural Foundations Structural Framing . such as beams and braces. the column cuts out the wall. The family templates contain specific reference planes for members and stick symbols.rft Spot Lighting Fixture floor based. specific settings for symbolic representation and the structural material type can be defined. Spot Lighting Fixture Structural Column Description Family templates to create spot lighting fixtures. Spot Lighting Fixture roof based. Spot Lighting Fixture ceiling based. Category: Structural Columns Structural Foundation Family templates to create structural foundation families. Contains the same defaults as the Lighting Fixtures. The family has illumination and spot properties for the rendering tools. If a structural foundation family is placed below a column. Under Settings menu ➤ Family Category and Parameters. Under Settings menu ➤ Family Category and Parameters. Category: Lighting Fixtures Family template to create structural columns. 666 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . A structural column can be defined as a room-bounding element if the structural material type is set to concrete or precast concrete.Beams and Braces Family template to create structural framing families. it moves its position if the base of the structural column is moved. Geometry can be locked to upper and lower reference level in elevation views. Beams can be placed on structural columns.Template Name *. Spot Lighting Fixture wall based.

Template Name *.rft Description Category: Structural Framing Structural Framing .Curtain Wall Family template for window elements of curtain walls. Category: Curtain Panels Window with trim Family template for windows including trim on the exterior side. Category: Windows Model Family Templates | 667 . such as trusses. Category: Structural Framing Window .Complex and Trusses Family template to create structural framing families.

and parameters. In the family the intersection of the horizontal and right reference planes define connection location with the system section line. and parameter text size are always related to the current scale of the View Control Bar. Symbol size. click Tag ➤ Multi-Category to add a tag. Category: Section Marks Family template to define the symbol for spot elevations. Category: Spot Elevation Symbols Generic Tag Grid Head Level Head Multi-Category Tag Room Tag Section Head Spot Elevation Symbol 668 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor .rft Callout Head Door Tag Generic Annotation Description Family template for the tag of a callout.0mm on a plotted sheet. The intersection of 2 reference planes defines the insertion point of a tag. Category: Generic Annotation Family template for tags. Category: Room Tags Family template for section heads. Category: Callouts Family template for door tags. Category: Generic Model Tags Family template for the grid heads. Category: Grid Heads Family template for level heads. Category: Multi-Category Tags Family template for room tags. Category: Windows Annotation Family Templates The templates for annotation families are in Documents and Settings/All Users/Application Data/Autodesk/RAC 2008/Metric Templates/Annotation. On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. parameter text created with a text height of 2. text. Category: Door Tags Family template for generic annotations.Template Name *. The category can be set under Settings menu ➤ Family Category and Parameters. A MultiCategory tag needs a shared parameter as filter parameter. Annotation families are scale-dependent. filled regions.rft Window Description Family template for windows. the same shared parameter is added to a project as a project parameter and can be used to filter selected elements to be tagged with the MultiCategory tag. Annotation families consist mainly of lines. Category: Level Heads Family template for Multi-Category tags.0mm has a size of 2. The following table gives an overview of the templates for annotation families: Template Name *. The category can be set under Settings menu ➤ Family Category and Parameters. text size. Thus.

rft Metric ■ A0 metric. Title block families consist mainly of lines for the plan border.rft ■ A4 metric. Category: Window Tags Titleblock Family Templates The templates for titleblock families are in Documents and Settings/All Users/Application Data/Autodesk/RAC 2008/Metric Templates/Titleblocks.rft ■ E1 .rft ■ A3 metric.Template Name *. In a project. the title block can be assigned to a sheet using View menu ➤ New ➤ Sheet.36 x 24.rft ■ C .rft Titleblock Family Templates | 669 . and parameters. The following table gives an overview of the templates for title block families: Template Name Comments Family templates for title blocks using common standard sizes.5.42 x 30. Category: View Titles Family template for window tags.rft ■ A2 metric. all loaded title block families are listed for selection.rft View Title Window Tag Description Family template to define view title of a view in a sheet.24 x 18.rft ■ A1 metric. filled regions.11 x 8.17 x 11.rft ■ B . text. In the Select a Titleblock dialog. You import images to your title block.rft ■ New Site Metric. Imperial ■ A .rft ■ D .

670 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor .

you learn specific techniques and best practices that you can apply broadly when creating other families in Revit Architecture 2008. and the specific techniques for creating a parametric component. you create a new parametric component within the Family Editor. formula-based parameters. The goal of this tutorial is to teach you the proper approach to parametric component creation. and detail level controls. The truss also has multiple types. assigned subcatecories.Parametric Component Design Techniques 17 In this tutorial. At the end of this tutorial. In this case. In exercises that become increasingly complex. In the center of the truss is a mechanical service clearance to accommodate HVAC systems. During this tutorial. The parametric component that you design in this tutorial is an open web wood floor truss. the length of the trimmable truss determines the size and grade of the truss chords. 671 . methodology. This type of component uses a broad spectrum of design techniques within the Family Editor. you will understand the process. not specifically how to make a floor truss. you learn the process and methodology of creating a new family.

Decide component type and design requirements 1 What type of component are you designing? In this case. For training purposes. Knowing why you are creating a particular family and what you need it to do will drive the specific design process.Planning a Parametric Component Family Creating a new parametric component family is no different than any other design process. This decision dictates which family template you begin with. Your assignment is to create a truss that adapts parametrically to changes in the building design. this must be a structural beam component. it is an open-joist wood floor truss. beams. Because this component has to interact closely with other structural components. The design requirements dictate how simple or complex a family must be. In the next exercise. In this lesson. you determine the requirements of the new component. A rectangular mechanical clearance opening must be centered within the beam. 2 What additional design requirements affect the design plan for this beam family? Additional design requirements ■ ■ ■ The truss should automatically adjust depth as the length changes. the beam design must be advanced in order to have the flexibility that the specs require. Although this solution is possible. Determining Component Needs In this exercise. there is a computing performance cost that must be paid within the project. a generic floor-based component might work. planning ahead is one of the most important steps. and structural walls. imagine that your firm specializes in light commercial and residential design. It should also be an available option within a beam system. In this case. and also works intuitively with them. you select the best available template with which to begin the new structural beam family. In this case. Using the new family within a project 3 How will you use the family within a project? 672 | Chapter 17 Parametric Component Design Techniques . If the design requirements can be met with a simple design. For every complexity added to a family. you should avoid over-designing the component. NOTE When creating a new family. Two types should be created. you accomplish two main tasks: you determine the component needs and select the family template that is suited to those needs. a 2x3 truss and a 2x4 truss. then you should design only what is needed to satisfy the requirements. In addition. it is not the best solution. Take this into consideration during your design planning. the design specification requires that the floor truss snaps to columns. If the component did not have to interact so closely with other structural components. the component should use the point-to-point insertion method with the joist web members adjusting parametrically.

such as wood type. You have completed the planning stage for the new family. Selecting the Family Template In this exercise. “Selecting the Family Template” on page 673. especially if you are going to be nesting subcomponents that may require separate scheduling. ■ What materials remain constant throughout a project? The chord and web material will always be wood. These materials can be applied using Object Styles. the means by which you gather the information you require within the schedule needs to be built into the component.For instance: ■ What materials need the most control? These materials. This critical decision reduces the quantity of template options. Depending on the family you are designing. would require Instance or Type parameters. you determine which family template provides the best starting point for the new beam family. only the 2x3 and 2x4 trusses with wood web members are required. In the previous exercise. 4 Continue with the next exercise. ■ How will the component need to be scheduled? This is an important question. ■ What types are most commonly used? In this training case. you determined that the component type is a structural beam. In addition. the planning stage and questions may differ. Selecting the Family Template | 673 .

for example: wall based or floor based. it provides two intersecting reference planes: Center (left/right) and Center (front/back). 6 In the New dialog. On the right side of the New dialog. this is where you access family templates. NOTE Do not double-click the template or open it. and open Metric\Templates. There are two structural framing templates provided. Like most generic family templates. click Training Files. 3 In the left pane of the New dialog.rft 674 | Chapter 17 Parametric Component Design Techniques . ■ Metric Structural Framing . In addition. However. Notice that most of the template names include the component type. 2 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Family. scroll to the structural framing templates. to ensure you are using the templates referenced in this tutorial. Usually. you will access them from the Training Files folder.Review the template options 1 Close any open projects or families.Beams and Braces. the template name often includes information how the component would be used with a project.rft. 4 Scroll through the various template options. You should be in the Metric Templates folder. The New dialog opens to the templates folder that is specified in your Settings ➤ Options dialog. Select it so that the preview displays. notice the preview. 5 Select Metric Generic Model floor based.

Beams and Braces. it is not the best starting point for the beam family. ■ Metric Structural Framing . 10 Maximize the view. Floor Plan: Ref. Open the family template 9 Double-click Metric Structural Framing . It provides two intersecting reference planes: Center (left/right) and Center (front/back).This template is design specifically to accommodate point-to-point insertion and the specific snapping.rft to open it. Because of its simplicity. 8 Select Metric Structural Framing . 7 Select Metric Structural Framing . These planes are designed specifically to accommodate point-to-point beam insertion and the special snapping and display requirements of beam components. Floor Plan: Ref.rft and notice the preview. Level.Beams and Braces. Notice this template offers three vertical planes on each side of the center (left/right) reference plane.rft. and display functions required by structural beams.Complex and Trusses. and notice the preview.Complex and Trusses. spacing.rft This template is designed for complex framing components and trusses. Level Selecting the Family Template | 675 . it is not designed to create a component capable of point-to-point insertion. Although the template name suggests this is the appropriate template. This template is the best starting point for the new family.

you can see the rectangular beam extrusion and a symbolic line. you add the reference planes. “Creating the Component Skeleton” on page 676. under Floor Plans. Review existing reference planes 1 In the Project Browser. you add reference planes to the beam design. creating a skeleton to build upon is the foundation of a new component family. lines. As you add solid geometry later in the tutorial. and dimensions that provide a skeleton for the solid geometry. Therefore. under 3D Views. the geometry supplied can be used or discarded as needed. Adding Reference Planes In this exercise. These reference planes act as part of the skeleton to which the solid geometry will align and lock. Creating the Component Skeleton In this lesson. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you started in the previous exercise. This beam extrusion is supplied within the template as a starting point. it is not necessary to create a skeleton of reference planes or lines and then align and lock the solid geometry to it. double-click Front. TIP The name also displays on the Status Bar. Notice that the beam extrusion is centered on the level line. Reference Plane: Left. Level. however. double-click View 1.In this view. 12 In the Project Browser. double-click Ref. the top of the beam extrusion is aligned to the associated level of the plan view. Dimensioning the solid geometry directly also works. you snap and lock the solid geometry to these reference planes and lines. 676 | Chapter 17 Parametric Component Design Techniques . Like many templates. When a beam family based on this template is added to a project. 11 In the Project Browser. using reference planes and lines is considered more reliable and is therefore a best practice. 2 Place the cursor over the leftmost vertical reference plane until the tooltip displays the name of the plane. NOTE When creating or modifying a family. under Elevations. 13 Proceed to the next lesson.

■ Stick Symbol Left and Stick Symbol Right: Adding Reference Planes | 677 . ■ Left and Right: These two planes mark the points where the beam intersects with other columns. In the project plan view image below. The six reference planes shown in the project below were added as a training reference. they do not display when the family is loaded into a project.3 Repeat this step for the other two vertical planes on the left side. NOTE The reference planes shown in the project image below were added as a training reference. The reference planes and their respective explanations are listed below. notice the location of the beam extents. ■ Member Left and Member Right: These two planes refer to the left and right extent of the beam solid geometry when displayed in a medium or fine display view of a project. two steel columns and a steel beam have been added to a project. The two arrows point to the snap points that the left and right reference planes refer to. Reference planes that display within a family file do not display within a project. The reference planes in this template are designed to accommodate the point-to-point insertion of a beam component. In the image below.

it is important to be familiar with the template so you do not create duplicate or conflicting planes. 678 | Chapter 17 Parametric Component Design Techniques . 5 On the Edit Toolbar. You will use these two reference planes to control the beam width and keep it centered on the reference plane: Center (Front/Back). you add the solid geometry for the truss as a sweep. NOTE Be careful not to select the symbolic line. click . Delete existing solid geometry 4 Select the rectangular beam extrusion. Before adding new reference planes. 8 Add a reference plane approximately 50 mm below the horizontal reference plane: Center (Front/Back). In a later exercise. Each family template has a different set of reference planes established within it. click Ref Plane. 7 Add a reference plane approximately 50 mm above the horizontal reference plane: Center (Front/Back).These two planes refer to the extents of the stick symbol when it is loaded into a project and the plan view display setting is coarse. Add new reference planes 6 On the Design Bar.

The next four reference planes that you add mark the thickness of the truss chords. click to place it. click Ref Plane. and specify an Offset of 38 mm.Add ref. click . click on the Edit toolbar. Level as the mirror axis. select the lower horizontal reference plane. planes to control beam depth 9 In the Project Browser. These two reference planes mark the top and bottom extents of the beam. Level. Adding Reference Planes | 679 . When a copy of the reference plane displays below it. 15 Place the cursor over the top horizontal reference plane. 12 Add a reference plane approximately 150 mm above the Level: Ref. Level. TIP You can also use the mirror tool to accomplish this task. 10 On the Design Bar. This beam requires additional reference planes to complete the truss skeleton. TIP You can control the direction of the offset by moving the cursor slightly to either side of the line you intend to pick. 13 On the Design Bar. 14 On the Options Bar. click Ref Plane. double-click Front. and select the Level: Ref. To do this. 11 Add a reference plane approximately 150 mm below the Level: Ref. under Elevations.

click to place it as shown. specify an Offset of 200 mm.16 Place the cursor over the lower horizontal reference plane and when a copy of the reference plane displays above it. and when a copy of the reference plane displays to the right of it. click to place it as shown. 19 On the Options Bar. and when a copy of the reference plane displays to the left of it. click to place it as shown. You have completed the reference planes that make up the skeleton of the chords. 680 | Chapter 17 Parametric Component Design Techniques . 17 Place the cursor over Reference Plane: Member Left. Before you move on to the next exercise. you must add four additional reference planes to accommodate the center chase. 18 Place the cursor over Reference Plane: Member Right.

and when a copy of the reference plane displays to the right of it. Notice the reference planes that you added in the elevation view. under Floor Plans. 23 Use the Reference Plane: Center (Left/Right) to add reference planes to the left and right of it as shown below. 24 In the Project Browser.20 Place the cursor over Reference Plane: Center (Left/Right). Level. 21 Place the cursor over Reference Plane: Center (Left/Right). Although there is nothing technically incorrect regarding the reference planes in this view. cleaning up some of the extents would make the view easier. specify an Offset of 238 mm. which you do in the next exercise. Adding Reference Planes | 681 . click to place it as shown. double-click Ref. 22 On the Options Bar. click to place it as shown. and when a copy of the reference plane displays to the left of it.

28 In the Save As dialog. you add some of the dimensions and constraints that control how the open web floor truss adapts to changes in its geometry. you can make sure the new family adapts to changes in geometry as expected before adding solid geometry to it. 27 Click File menu ➤ Save. “Adding Dimensions and Constraints” on page 682. Make sure you remember where you saved it. NOTE You use this family for the remainder of this tutorial. 682 | Chapter 17 Parametric Component Design Techniques . Repeat this step for the remaining extents so that your plan view resembles the image below. 26 Starting with one of the reference planes you added to define the center chase. navigate to the folder of your choice. click Modify. Adding Dimensions and Constraints In this exercise. In the following exercise. By applying dimensions and constraints directly to the skeleton of the family. 29 Proceed to the next exercise. you add dimensions and constraints to the to the skeleton. You have finished creating the initial skeleton of the open web wood floor truss.25 On the Design Bar. and click Save. select the reference plane and adjust the extents similar to the image below. enter Wood Floor Truss for File name.

5 Select the dimension you added in the previous step. Wood Floor Truss. 3 Select each of the horizontal reference planes and place the dimension to the left as shown. Adding Dimensions and Constraints | 683 . click Modify. and click the EQ symbol when it displays.Dataset Continue to use the dataset. This tool is the aligned dimension tool. separate the overriding values by dragging the value controls as shown. 6 On the Design Bar. After adding the dimension. 4 On the Design Bar. click Dimension. It allows you to dimension between parallel lines.rfa. 2 On the Options Bar. TIP You may need to adjust your zoom settings during this procedure. click . This ensures that changes to the chord width are distributed equally across the center reference plane. that you saved at the end of the previous exercise. click Dimension. Dimension chord width 1 On the Design Bar.

You may need to use the TAB key to toggle the selection to the reference plane. 9 On the Design Bar. and click the EQ symbol to apply the equality constraint.7 Add a dimension referring to the upper horizontal reference plane and the lower horizontal reference plane. under Elevations. the Center reference plane. Level. click Dimension. Add the depth dimension and equality constraint 8 In the Project Browser. place the dimension to the left as shown. NOTE The center horizontal reference plane overlaps the level line: Ref. 684 | Chapter 17 Parametric Component Design Techniques . double-click Front. and the lower horizontal reference plane. 10 Select the upper horizontal reference plane. 11 Add a dimension referring to the upper horizontal reference plane and the lower horizontal reference plane and move it to the left of the equality constrained dimension you added previously. Place the dimension as shown.

Dimension chord thickness 14 On the right side of the model. 15 Add four dimensions as shown.Dimension and constrain the center chase width 12 Add a dimension referring to the three vertical reference planes in the center of the model. These dimensions refer to the chord thickness. These dimensions refer to the chord thickness of the vertical members and the members that border the center chase. 13 Add a dimension referring to the reference planes to the left and right of the Center (Left/Right) reference plane. place the dimension under the lines as shown and click the EQ symbol to apply the equality constraint. and place it below the dimension you added previously. add two dimensions as shown. Adding Dimensions and Constraints | 685 .

If the component is something that is cut or otherwise extremely flexible. that you saved at the end of the previous exercise. 17 Proceed to the next exercise. When you design a new family. You should lean towards simplicity whenever possible. you will add additional reference planes. you label the dimensions that you added in the previous exercise. Things to consider when deciding “instance” or “type:” ■ ■ ■ If the component comes in standard sizes that must be maintained. In this exercise.You have finished adding the dimensions and constraints that control how the truss skeleton adapts to changes. consider making it a type parameter. it becomes a parameter. There are many types of parameters and various ways to create them.rfa. you label the dimensions to create instance and type parameters. Create the chord width parameter 1 In the Project Browser. consider making it a type parameter. 686 | Chapter 17 Parametric Component Design Techniques . You choose whether to make it an instance or type parameter. Throughout the tutorial. If the component has material that varies per component. under Floor Plans. and constraints as needed. ■ Dataset Continue to use the dataset. If the parameter controls something that usually remains constant by its nature. consider making it an instance parameter. they allow you to “flex” the model in order to test your design. Level. In addition. These parameters are the key to providing flexibility within a project. 2 Select the dimension that refers to the width of the chord as shown. double-click Ref. “Creating New Length Parameters” on page 686. dimensions. When you label a dimension in the Family Editor. Wood Floor Truss. consider making the material parameter an instance parameter. 16 Click File menu ➤ Save. Creating New Length Parameters In this exercise. it is important to decide how much control over the component will be required after the component is loaded into a project. In the next exercise. The parameters that you create when designing a family are the same parameters used within a project to control the instance and type parameters of that family. you create new length parameters that control the basic dimensions of the floor truss.

8 In the Parameter Properties dialog. select Family parameter. enter Chord Width for Name. Under Parameter Data. Select Type. Create truss depth parameter 5 In the Project Browser. under Elevations. Under Parameter Data. Select Dimensions for Group parameter under. select Family parameter. specify the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Parameter Type. Select Dimensions for Group parameter under. 7 On the Options Bar. select Add parameter for Label. Creating New Length Parameters | 687 .3 On the Options Bar. specify the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Parameter Type. 4 In the Parameter Properties dialog. 6 Select the dimension on the left that refers to the depth of the truss. enter Depth for Name. This indicates whether the parameter is a type or instance parameter. double-click Front. select Add parameter for Label. Click OK. Select Type. ■ Click OK.

Create center chase width parameter
9 Select the dimension that refers to the width of the center chase interior.

10 On the Options Bar, select Add parameter for Label. 11 In the Parameter Properties dialog, specify the following:
■ ■ ■ ■ ■

Under Parameter Type, select Family parameter. Under Parameter Data, enter Center Chase Width for Name. Select Dimensions for Group parameter under. Select Type. Click OK.

Create chord thickness parameter
12 On the right side of the model, select the dimension that refers to the thickness of the lower horizontal truss chord as shown.

13 On the Options Bar, select Add parameter for Label. 14 In the Parameter Properties dialog, specify the following:

Under Parameter Type, select Family parameter.

688 | Chapter 17 Parametric Component Design Techniques

■ ■ ■ ■

Under Parameter Data, enter Chord Thickness for Name. Select Dimensions for Group parameter under. Select Type. Click OK.

TIP You may need to drag the text label downward as shown.

Apply chord thickness label to other dimensions
15 On the right side of the model, select the dimension that refers to the thickness of the upper horizontal truss chord. 16 On the Options Bar, select Chord Thickness for Label.

17 Apply the Chord Thickness label to the vertical chords and the vertical members on the left and right side of the center chase as shown.

Creating New Length Parameters | 689

18 On the Design Bar, click Family Types. In the Family Types dialog, notice the labelled dimensions display under the list of parameters and under the group, Dimensions. When you load this family into a project, these parameters will be available within the Type Properties dialog for the beam. 19 Click Cancel. 20 On the File menu, click Save. 21 Proceed to the next exercise, “Flexing the Component Model” on page 690.

Flexing the Component Model
One of the most important steps in the process of creating a new parametric component is the flexing of the model. Flexing the model means to change parameter values, thus forcing the model to adapt to the changes. This is not limited to length parameters. If you add a new material parameter, you should also test it to make sure it works as expected. You should flex the model after any major change to the design.

You should flex a new family after:
■ ■ ■ ■ ■

Adding or modifying an element. Adding or modifying a parameter. Adding a new constraint. Nesting a component. Adding or modifying a parameter formula.

When you flex a family, you should always do it from the Family Types dialog, rather than by manually stretching or manipulating the objects within the family. When you change a parameter value and apply the change, this is the most accurate way of testing how the family will behave within a project.

690 | Chapter 17 Parametric Component Design Techniques

In this exercise, you flex the model to test the various length parameters that you added in the previous exercise. Even though you have yet to add any model geometry to the family, it is important to verify that the reference lines adjust to changes as constraints are maintained. After you verify this, you can add the model geometry to the skeleton and be relatively certain that it will also flex as expected. Dataset Continue to use the dataset, Wood Floor Truss.rfa, that you saved at the end of the previous exercise.

Preparing the family for flexing
1 When flexing the model, you need to be able to see the model within the drawing area and also apply new values within the Family Types dialog:

Maximize the Revit window and adjust the zoom settings so the model is in one corner of the drawing area. When you open the Family Types dialog, you can drag it to the opposing corner. or

Reduce the Revit window and keep the model centered in the drawing area. When you open the Family Types dialog, you can drag it off the Revit window as shown.

Adjust your display using one of the two methods before opening the Family Types dialog. 2 On the Design Bar, click Family Types, and drag the dialog so that you can view the model.

Flex the truss depth
3 In the Family Types dialog, under Dimensions, enter 600 mm for Depth, and click Apply. Notice the depth of the truss adapts to the change in dimension value. Also notice the equality constraint spreads the additional depth evenly above and below the Ref. Level. In addition, notice that the reference planes marking the chord thickness adapted to the change in depth while maintaining their specified value. Verifying that the entire model adapts to changes and making sure nothing “breaks” is the essence of flexing.

Flexing the Component Model | 691

4 Enter 450 mm for Depth, 80 mm for Chord Thickness, 800 mm for Center Chase Width, and click Apply. Notice that the model adapts to all of the changes.

Reset parameters
5 In the Family Types dialog, reset the parameters back to their original values:
■ ■ ■ ■ ■

Enter 300 mm for Depth. Enter 38 mm for Chord Thickness. Enter 400 mm for Center Chase Width. Click Apply. Click OK.

When working within the Family Editor, you should always flex the design after you add new elements or modify the existing design in any way. 6 On the File menu, click Save. 7 Proceed to the next lesson, “Adding Solid Geometry” on page 693.

692 | Chapter 17 Parametric Component Design Techniques

Adding Solid Geometry
In this lesson, you add the solid geometry using extrusions for the chords and trimmable plywood ends. After creating the extrusions, you constrain them using a combination of locked alignments and labelled dimensions. After flexing the design, you load the truss into a project to verify that it works as designed.

Creating Solid Extrusions
In this exercise, you create the top and bottom chords of the truss. After adding the chords, you align and lock their position. Dataset Continue to use the dataset, Wood Floor Truss.rfa, that you saved at the end of the previous exercise.

Add chord extrusions
1 In the Project Browser, under Elevations, double-click Left. 2 Zoom in around the center of the truss design.

3 On the Design Bar, click Solid Form ➤ Solid Extrusion. 4 In the Work Plane dialog, click Name, select Reference Plane: Member Left, and click OK. 5 On the Design Bar, click Lines. 6 On the Options Bar, click , and select Lock.

7 Select the four reference planes that border the top chord as shown.

Adding Solid Geometry | 693

Notice that the sketch lines are automatically locked to the reference planes. 8 On the Tools toolbar, click .

When using the Trim tool, click the part of the line you want to keep. 9 Select perpendicular intersecting lines to create the top chord sketch as shown.

10 On the Design Bar, click Lines. 11 On the Options Bar, click , and verify that Lock is selected.

12 Select the four reference planes that border the bottom chord as shown. NOTE A warning dialog displays notifying you that there are overlapping lines. You can ignore this warning because after you finish trimming, the lines will no longer overlap.

13 On the Tools toolbar, click

.

14 Select perpendicular intersecting lines to create the bottom chord sketch as shown.

694 | Chapter 17 Parametric Component Design Techniques

15 On the Design Bar, click Finish Sketch. 16 In the Project Browser, under 3D Views, double-click View 1. Notice the chord extrusions and the symbolic line. The chords need to be aligned and locked to the correct reference planes in order for them to flex with changes in the geometry.

17 On the File menu, click Save. 18 Proceed to the next exercise, “Adding Constraints to the Solid Geometry” on page 695.

Adding Constraints to the Solid Geometry
In this exercise, you add constraints to the chord extrusions and then flex the family to verify that it works as designed. Dataset Continue to use the dataset, Wood Floor Truss.rfa, that you saved at the end of the previous exercise.

Constrain the extrusion ends
1 In the Project Browser, under Elevations, double-click Front. 2 Enter SD; this is the keyboard shortcut for Shading with Edges. This makes the chord extrusions more visible within the view. 3 Select the chord extrusions.

4 Drag the right arrow control to the right until it snaps to the reference plane: Member Right, as shown. Click the lock symbol to lock the extrusion edge to the reference plane.

Adding Constraints to the Solid Geometry | 695

5 Drag the left arrow control to the right until it snaps to the reference plane: Member Left, as shown. Click the lock symbol to lock the extrusion edge to the reference plane.

Flex the design
6 Prepare the view for flexing in the same way you did during the flexing exercise. You’ll want to set up your screen so you can see the model truss while the Family Types dialog is open. On the Design Bar, click Family Types.

7 In the Family Types dialog, enter 6000 for Length, and click Apply. Notice that the extrusions did not move or change their length. This is because the length dimension references the extreme left and right reference planes, not the member right or member left reference planes. Therefore, you must add a new constraint before flexing the length. 8 In the Family Types dialog, enter 3000 for Length, click Apply, and click OK.

Add a new dimension and constraint
9 On the Design Bar, click Dimension. 10 Add a dimension between the reference plane: Left and the reference plane: Member Left as shown. Click the lock symbol to lock the dimension value.

696 | Chapter 17 Parametric Component Design Techniques

11 Add a dimension between the reference plane: Right and the reference plane: Member Right as shown. Click the lock symbol to lock the dimension value.

In this particular case, adding this constraint to the model has no impact on how it works within a project. This is a two-point placement beam family that uses the member left and member right reference planes as the determining extents of this component. Later in this lesson, you load this family into a project to test how it works within a project environment.

Flex the length
12 On the Design Bar, click Family Types. 13 In the Family Types dialog, enter 6000 for Length, and click Apply. Notice that the extrusions adjusted to the change in length. This tells you that the constraints on the extrusion ends are working.

TIP If one of the extrusion ends did not adjust as expected, use the Align tool and add the constraint. Afterwards, flex the model once again to make sure the fix works as expected. 14 Click OK.

Adding Constraints to the Solid Geometry | 697

In a later exercise, you add the web members. Therefore, you need a truss long enough to add web arrays and do not need to return the truss back to its original length value.

Flex the chord width, depth, and thickness
15 In the Project Browser, under 3D Views, double-click View 1. 16 Enter SD for Shading with Edges.

17 On the Design Bar, click Family Types. 18 In the Family Types dialog, specify the following:
■ ■ ■

Enter 600mm for Depth. Enter 200mm for Chord Width. Enter 76mm for Chord Thickness. TIP When flexing, it is important to remember the original values so you can reset them afterwards. Therefore, try picking a method, such as doubling, that allows you to easily return to the original values.

Click Apply.

The chords should adjust to each of the new values. 19 Specify the beam values shown below:
■ ■ ■ ■

Enter 286mm for Depth. Enter 89mm for Chord Width. Enter 38mm for Chord Thickness. Click Apply, and click OK.

20 On the File menu, click Save. 21 Proceed to the next exercise, “Creating Additional Solid Geometry” on page 698.

Creating Additional Solid Geometry
In this exercise, you add the extrusions for the truss ends and the center chase.

Dataset

698 | Chapter 17 Parametric Component Design Techniques

Continue to use the dataset, Wood Floor Truss.rfa, that you saved at the end of the previous exercise.

Add the center chase extrusions
1 In the Project Browser, under Floor Plans, double-click Ref. Level. 2 Zoom in on the center of the truss and select the model line that represents the beam stick symbol. 3 On the View Control Bar, click the Hide/Isolate control, and click Hide Element. This will make it easier to sketch the center chase extrusions. 4 On the Design Bar, click Solid Form ➤ Solid Extrusion. 5 On the Design Bar, click Lines. 6 On the Options Bar, click , and verify that Lock is selected.

7 Select the four reference planes that border the left, vertical member of the center chase as shown.

Notice that the sketch lines are automatically locked to the reference planes. 8 On the Tools toolbar, click .

9 Select perpendicular intersecting lines to create the left, vertical member of the center chase sketch as shown.

10 On the Design Bar, click Lines. 11 On the Options Bar, click , and verify that Lock is selected.

12 Select the four reference planes that border the right, vertical member of the center chase as shown.

Creating Additional Solid Geometry | 699

NOTE A warning dialog displays notifying you that there are overlapping lines. You can ignore this warning because after you finish trimming, the lines will no longer overlap.

13 On the Tools toolbar, click

.

14 Select perpendicular intersecting lines to complete the center chase sketch as shown.

15 On the Design Bar, click Finish Sketch. 16 In the Project Browser, under Elevations, double-click Front. 17 Zoom in on the center chase.

Align and lock the new extrusions
18 On the Tools menu, click Align. This next process is very important. The ends of the chase extrusions must be aligned and locked to the horizontal reference planes coincident with the interior edges of the chords. Although you can align and lock extrusion to extrusion, it is considered a best practice to align and lock to reference planes. 19 For the align-to reference, select the reference line on the top of the lower chord as shown. You may need to press TAB to toggle the selection options.

700 | Chapter 17 Parametric Component Design Techniques

20 Click the bottom edge of one of the chase extrusions, and after the alignment, click the lock symbol to lock the alignment.

21 Align the top edge of the chase extrusions with the reference line coincident with the lower edge of the upper chord, and lock the alignment as shown.

22 On the Design Bar, click Modify.

Flex the center chase
23 On the Design Bar, click Family Types. 24 In the Family Types dialog, specify the following:
■ ■ ■

Enter 486mm for Depth. Enter 800mm for Center Chase Width. Click Apply.

The truss should adapt to all the changes. If it does not, redo any problematic alignments and constraints. 25 In the Family Types dialog, reset the values as follows:
■ ■ ■

Enter 286mm for Depth. Enter 400mm for Center Chase Width. Click Apply, and click OK.

Clean up the view
26 Zoom to Fit.

Creating Additional Solid Geometry | 701

27 Clean up the view by moving the dimensions off to the side as shown. This will make subsequent work much easier.

Add the truss end extrusions
28 Select the Chord Thickness dimension in the lower-left corner as shown.

29 On the Options Bar, select Add Parameter for Label. 30 In the Parameter Properties dialog, under Parameter Data, specify the following:
■ ■ ■ ■

Enter Trimmable End Length for Name. Select Dimensions for Group parameter under. Select Instance. Click OK.

31 Select the Chord Thickness dimension in the lower-right corner of the view. 32 On the Options Bar, select Trimmable End Length for Label. 33 On the Design Bar, click Family Types. 34 In the Family Types dialog, under Dimensions, enter 300mm for Trimmable End Length, click Apply, and click OK.

Sketch the right end extrusion
35 In the Project Browser, under Elevations, double-click Right. 36 Zoom around the truss elements. 37 On the Design Bar, click Solid Form ➤ Solid Extrusion. 38 In the Work Plane dialog, select Reference Plane: Member Right for Name, and click OK. 39 On the Design Bar, click Lines. 40 On the Options Bar, click , and verify that Lock is selected.

702 | Chapter 17 Parametric Component Design Techniques

41 On the upper chord, select the lower horizontal reference plane; on the lower chord, select the upper horizontal reference plane. These two lines represent the upper and lower boundary of the sketch.

42 On the Options Bar, enter19mm for Offset. 43 Select the Center (Front/Back) reference plane twice to add a sketch line to each side as shown.

44 On the Tools toolbar, click

.

45 Select perpendicular intersecting lines to complete the end sketch as shown.

Creating Additional Solid Geometry | 703

46 On the Design Bar, click Extrusion Properties. 47 In the Element Properties dialog, under Constraints, verify that 300mm is specified for the Extrusion End value, and click OK. 48 On the Design Bar, click Finish Sketch.

Sketch the left end extrusion
49 In the Project Browser, under Elevations, double-click Left. 50 Zoom around the truss elements. 51 On the Design Bar, click Solid Form ➤ Solid Extrusion. 52 In the Work Plane dialog, select Reference Plane: Member Left for Name, and click OK. 53 On the Design Bar, click Lines. 54 On the Options Bar, click , and verify that Lock is selected.

55 On the upper chord, select the lower horizontal reference plane; on the lower chord, select the upper horizontal reference plane. These two lines represent the upper and lower boundary of the sketch. 56 On the Options Bar, enter 19mm for Offset. 57 Select the Center (Front/Back) reference plane twice to add a sketch line to each side as shown.

704 | Chapter 17 Parametric Component Design Techniques

58 On the Tools toolbar, click

.

59 Select perpendicular intersecting lines to complete the end sketch as shown.

60 On the Design Bar, click Extrusion Properties. 61 In the Element Properties dialog, under Constraints, specify -300mm for the Extrusion End value, and click OK. NOTE This extrusion value must be negative in order to push the extrusion towards the center of the truss. 62 On the Design Bar, click Finish Sketch.

Add alignment constraints
63 In the Project Browser, under Elevations, double-click Front.

Although the truss ends line up with the reference planes controlling the length of the trimmable ends, they are not aligned and locked to those reference planes and would not pass a flex test. 64 Zoom in on the left end of the truss. 65 On the Tools menu, click Align. 66 Select the Member Left reference plane as the align-to point.

67 Select the left edge of the left end extrusion, and lock the alignment.

Creating Additional Solid Geometry | 705

68 Select the reference plane coincident with the right edge of the left end extrusion; this is the align-to point. 69 Select the right edge of the left end extrusion, and lock the alignment.

70 Repeat the previous five steps for the right end of the truss. Make adjustments to account for the right side. TIP When you finish the alignments, if you select the end extrusion, a lock displays on each side indicating the constraints to the reference planes. 71 On the Design Bar, click Modify.

Flex the design
72 On the Design Bar, click Family Types. 73 In the Family Types dialog, specify the following:
■ ■ ■

Enter 486mm for Depth. Enter 600mm for Trimmable End Length. Click Apply.

The truss should adapt to all the changes. If it does not, fix any problematic alignments and constraints. 74 In the Family Types dialog, reset the values as follows:
■ ■ ■

Enter 286mm for Depth. Enter 300mm for Trimmable End Length. Click Apply, and click OK.

75 In the Project Browser, under 3D Views, double-click View 1.

76 Save the Family. A new dataset is provided for you beginning with the next lesson. It is identical to the truss you have been designing. If you are comfortable with your design, you can continue using it in the next lesson. If you have experienced any errors or have deviated from the exercises in any way, you should close the file and begin with a fresh dataset. 77 Proceed to the next lesson, “Testing the Family in a Project” on page 707.

706 | Chapter 17 Parametric Component Design Techniques

Testing the Family in a Project
In this lesson, you load the family into a project to test it in a real-world environment. After you load it into the project, you add several beam instances and then modify the shape of the foundation to see how the beams adapt.

Loading a Family into a Project
In this exercise, you load the truss family into a project that consists of foundation walls, a sill, and a rim joist. NOTE Close any open families or projects. The truss family that you use in this lesson is identical to the truss you have created in the previous exercises. Although you could continue using the previous family, it is recommended that you use the new family in order to ensure consistency. Datasets

Open the truss family
■ ■

Click File menu ➤ Open. In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Metric\Families\m_Wood Floor Truss_1.rfa.

Open the project file

Click File menu ➤ Open.

Testing the Family in a Project | 707

In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Metric\m_WWF1.rvt.

Load the truss family into the project
1 On the Window menu, clickm_Wood Floor Truss_1.rfa. 2 On the Design Bar, click Load into Projects. The truss family is loaded directly into the only other open file. If you had multiple projects or families open, a dialog would have displayed asking for you to specify which projects you wanted to load the family into. Notice that the project file is now active. 3 In the Project Browser, expand Families, expand Structural Framing, and notice that the Wood Floor Truss_1 family has been loaded. 4 Proceed to the next exercise, “Testing a Family Instance in a Project” on page 708.

Testing a Family Instance in a Project
In this exercise, you add several instances of the truss family to the project, and then modify the project to see how the beams adapt. Dataset Continue to use the datasets that you used in the previous exercise.

708 | Chapter 17 Parametric Component Design Techniques

2 In the Project Browser.Southeast Isometric. and double-click 3D . select m_Wood Floor Truss_1. and click Structural. 4 In the Type Selector. double-click Level 1. expand Views. and a wood rim joist. click Beam. add three vertical beams that snap to the rim joist at each end. therefore. 5 On the Options Bar. 3 On the Structural tab of the Design Bar. a wood sill. 6 Using point-to-point insertion. Testing a Family Instance in a Project | 709 .Add beams to project 1 In the Project Browser. verify that Chain is not selected. TIP If the Structural tab of the Design Bar is not active. right-click in the Design Bar. The rim joist was added as a beam. a slab. under Floor Plans. expand 3D Views. the truss family you loaded will interact with it as one beam does to another. This project consists of foundation walls.

Try to make them approximately equidistant as shown. 9 Select Grid 2 and drag it downward until the walls form an approximate square. not the wall or rim joist.Southeast Isometric. Notice the wood truss sits on top of the sill and attaches to the rim joist as expected. 710 | Chapter 17 Parametric Component Design Techniques . 8 In the Project Browser. under 3D Views. under Floor Plans. You do not need to be precise. double-click Level 1. double-click 3D . NOTE Make sure you drag the grid line. you are merely testing the new floor truss to verify that it adapts to the changes.NOTE Do not be concerned with the exact location of the three beams. 7 In the Project Browser.

click Undo Drag. double-click 3D . 12 On the File menu. The center chase remained the same width while remaining centered. The project and family need to interact based on a consistent file name. Notice the wood truss adjusted to the changes.10 In the Project Browser. ■ ■ The truss ends remained constant and adapted to the new beam length. 13 In the Save as dialog. IMPORTANT Do not change the name of the family. you nest the web components into the truss and create an array that adapts to changes in length. navigate to a folder of your choice and save the project with its existing name. under 3D Views. In the next lesson. click Save as. Testing a Family Instance in a Project | 711 .Southeast Isometric. This should return the project to its original dimension. 11 On the Edit menu.

You then align and lock the web extents before applying a formula-controlled array. click Edit Family. Level. 712 | Chapter 17 Parametric Component Design Techniques . 16 When prompted to open the truss family for editing. you nest two wooden web members into the truss. Because the family is already open. Prepare the view for nesting 1 Make sure that m_Wood Floor Truss_1. under Floor Plans. 4 On the View Control Bar. click Load from Library ➤ Load Family. and open Metric\Families\m_Wood_Web. click Hide/Isolate. double-click Ref. and click Hide Element. the wood floor truss family becomes the active view. Dataset Continue to use the datasets from the previous exercise. 5 On the File menu. Load the wood web family ■ In the left pane of the Open dialog. and create a formula controlled array to fill in the truss.Edit a family from within a project 14 Select one of the wooden truss components. click Yes.rfa is the active file. Adding a Nested Component In this exercise. 15 On the Options Bar.rfa. “Working with Nested Subcomponents” on page 712. 3 Select the symbolic line in the center of the truss. 17 Proceed to the next lesson. This will aid in the placement of the wood web. Working with Nested Subcomponents In this lesson. you nest wood web members into the floor truss. click Training Files. 2 In the Project Browser.

click Component. Snap the center line of the web to the center reference plane of the truss. In the following steps. This will be accomplished in the next exercise when you link the nested parameter with the host parameter. click Modify. You will align the left web component first. 13 For the align-to point. Also notice that the depth of the web members needs to be changed. 8 Add two instances of the wood web component as shown. Add two wood web components 6 On the Design Bar. this is the keyboard shortcut for Align. verify that m_Wood_Web: Wood Web is selected. This will make aligning the wood web easier. Place one wood web on each side of the center chase. double-click Front. they are visible only when you place the cursor over the component. 11 Place the cursor over the left wood web. Notice the model lines that surround the web component. IMPORTANT Make sure you snap the center line of the web components to the center reference line of the truss. The geometry is driven by formula-based parameters that link to the host family. 7 In the Type Selector. Leave a slight gap between the chase and the web. The extrusion is aligned and locked to invisible model lines that make it easier to array within the truss. select the reference plane that is coincident with the left edge of the left center chase extrusion. under Elevations. Align the nested web components 12 Enter AL.This family is a single extrusion as shown. you align the web panel using these lines rather than the extrusion edges. Adding a Nested Component | 713 . 10 In the Project Browser. 9 On the Design Bar. Do not select it.

Place each reference plane just to the outside of the center of the web components. 16 On the Design Bar. 18 Add two reference planes as shown. Each of these web components represents the starting point of the web arrays that you add later in this lesson. IMPORTANT Do not lock the alignment 15 Repeat the previous two steps to align the left edge of the right web component to the right edge of the center chase as shown. 714 | Chapter 17 Parametric Component Design Techniques . In addition. click Ref Plane. click Modify. it is important to note that you should avoid adding unnecessary constraints. Add reference planes for array anchors 17 On the Design Bar.14 Select the right vertical model line of the left web component as shown. NOTE You do not have to align the top or bottom the web components because the height of the web members will adapt to the truss height after you create and link the parameters in the next exercise.

20 Select the center of the left web component as the align-to point. Dimension and label array anchors 24 On the Design Bar. 22 Click the lock to lock the reference plane to the centerline of the web component.19 On the Tools menu. 23 Repeat the previous two steps to align and lock the right web component and the reference plane as shown. 21 Select the reference plane that you added to the left of the web components center as shown. In the steps that follow. The reference plane you added in the previous step represents half the web width. click Dimension. click Align. 25 Add the following two dimensions: Adding a Nested Component | 715 . you align the reference planes to the center of the web components.

26 On the Design Bar. ■ Right web dimension ■ ■ Select the reference plane that you aligned to the center of the right web component. Dataset Continue to use the datasets that you saved in the previous exercise.Left web dimension ■ ■ Select the reference plane that you aligned to the center of the left web component. you label these dimensions. click Save As. Place the dimension as shown. 2 In the Family Types dialog. 27 On the File menu. “Creating Formula-controlled Parameters” on page 716. or the width of the center chase. ■ In the next exercise. 716 | Chapter 17 Parametric Component Design Techniques . length. You also add a formula to the parameter in order to maintain the web position as the truss changes depth. click Modify. under Parameters. navigate to the same directory in which you saved the project file and save this family there with its current name. click Add. Create a new parameter for web depth 1 On the Design Bar. Creating Formula-controlled Parameters In this exercise. 29 Proceed to the next exercise. Select the reference plane that is coincident with the right edge of the left web component and the outside edge of the center chase. you add new parameters to control the web components. You then link the nested web parameters to the new host parameters. Select the reference plane that is coincident with the left edge of the right web component and the outside edge of the center chase. Place the dimension as shown. click Family Types. 28 In the Save As dialog.

TIP You can expand the width of the Family Types dialog to facilitate typing within the formula field. 4 In the Family Types dialog. and click Element Properties. 12 On the Design Bar. Click OK. This formula ensures that the web depth will account for any changes in the chord thickness or truss depth. specify the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Enter WebDepth for Name. select WebDepth. Select Common for Discipline. 9 In the Associate Family Parameter dialog. click OK.(Chord Thickness * 2) for the WebDepth Formula. 5 Click OK. Notice the web members are resized to fit more precisely between the chords. NOTE Formulas are case sensitive. click OK. click Edit/New. In the Type Properties dialog.3 In the Parameter Properties dialog. under Constraints. 10 In the Type Properties dialog. 7 In the Element Properties dialog. Select Type. ensure you enter it exactly as it is named. 11 In the Element Properties dialog. In addition. under Parameter Data. notice that “= “displays within the WebHeight button. Select Length for Type. notice the center of each nested web component is locked to the reference plane that bisects it. under Other. click the button to the right of the WebHeight value. Select Constraints for Group parameter under. Link the nested component to the new parameter 6 Right-click the left web component. and click OK. 8 In the Type Properties dialog. Creating Formula-controlled Parameters | 717 . click Modify. enter Depth . When you refer to another parameter within a formula.

Create new formula-controlled parameter for center chase
13 On the Design Bar, click Family Types. 14 In the Family Types dialog, under Parameters, click Add. 15 In the Parameter Properties dialog, under Parameter Data, specify the following:

Enter CC for Name. This parameter is primarily for convenience. It will use a formula to add the center chase width and the thickness of the two bordering chords.

■ ■ ■ ■ ■

Select Other for Group parameter under. Select Common for Discipline. Select Length for Type. Select Instance. Click OK.

16 Under Other, enter Center Chase Width + (2*Chord Thickness) for CC Formula. After you enter the formula, the resulting value is displayed as an inactive field.

Create WebArrayLength formula-controlled parameter
17 In the Family Types dialog, under Parameters, click Add. 18 In the Parameter Properties dialog, under Parameter Data, specify the following:
■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■

Enter WebArrayLength for Name. Select Constraints for Group parameter under. Select Common for Discipline. Select Length for Type. Select Instance. Click OK.

19 Under Constraints, enter (Length - (CC+300))/2 for WebArrayLength Formula. This formula subtracts the length of the center chase and its two bordering chords plus an additional 300mm before dividing it in two to specify the length of each array. The additional 300mm is to account for the ends, which must remain at least 150mm long.

Create WebArrayNum formula-controlled parameter
20 In the Family Types dialog, under Parameters, click Add. 21 In the Parameter Properties dialog, under Parameter Data, specify the following:
■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■

Enter WebArrayNum for Name. Select Constraints for Group parameter under. Select Common for Discipline. Select Integer for Type. Select Instance. Click OK.

22 Under Constraints, enter WebArrayLength/(2*WebDepth) for WebArrayNum Formula. 23 Click OK.

718 | Chapter 17 Parametric Component Design Techniques

Add parameter to anchor web array
24 Select the dimension that refers to the midpoint of the left web as shown.

25 On the Options Bar, select Add parameter for Label. 26 In the Parameter Properties dialog, under Parameter Data, specify the following:
■ ■ ■ ■

Enter Webhalflength for Name. Select Constraints for Group parameter under. Select Instance. Click OK.

27 Select the dimension that refers to the midpoint of the right web. 28 On the Options Bar, select Webhalflength for Label. 29 On the Design Bar, click Modify.

Add formula for Webhalflength
30 On the Design Bar, click Family Types. 31 Under Constraints, enter (WebArrayLength/WebArrayNum)/2 for Webhalflength Formula. 32 Click OK. Notice the location of the web components has adapted to the formula.

Creating Formula-controlled Parameters | 719

Associate web component parameters
33 Right-click the left web component, and click Element Properties. 34 In the Element Properties dialog, click Edit/New. 35 In the Type Properties dialog, under Other, click the button to the right of the WebArrayLength value. 36 In the Associate Family Parameter dialog, select WebArrayLength, and click OK. In the Type Properties dialog, the button next to the WebArrayLength value should have an equals sign within it. 37 In the Type Properties dialog, click OK. 38 In the Element Properties dialog, click OK. 39 On the Design Bar, click Modify. 40 In the Project Browser, under 3D Views, double-click View 1.

Because you have added and constrained new components, it is very important that you flex the model to ensure the nested components and the formulas that controls them work as expected. It is especially important to flex the model before arraying the truss so that you don’t multiply any existing problems.

Flex the design
41 Adjust the view so you can flex the truss while in the Family Types dialog. 42 On the Design Bar, click Family Types. 43 In the Family Types dialog, specify the following:
■ ■ ■

Enter 686mm for Depth. Enter 76mm for Chord Thickness. Click Apply.

The truss should adapt to all the changes. If it does not, fix any problematic alignments and constraints.

44 In the Family Types dialog, reset the values as follows:
■ ■

Enter 286mm for Depth. Enter 38mm for Chord Thickness.

720 | Chapter 17 Parametric Component Design Techniques

Click Apply, and click OK.

45 On the File menu, click Save. 46 Proceed to the next exercise, “Arraying Nested Subcomponents” on page 721.

Arraying Nested Subcomponents
In this exercise, you array the nested web components, add alignment constraints, and link the arrays to the WebArrayNum parameter. Dataset Continue to use the datasets that you saved in the previous exercise.

Array the left web component
1 In the Project Browser, under Elevations, double-click Front. 2 Select the nested web component left of the center chase.

3 On the Edit menu, click Array. Creating an array requires two basic steps. First, you specify the move start point; then you specify the move end point. You must use precision when arraying because any error is multiplied as the array grows. 4 On the Options Bar, specify the following:
■ ■ ■ ■

Verify that Group and Associate is selected. Enter 3 for Number. Select 2nd for Move to. Select Constrain.

5 Select the bottom-right corner of the nested web extrusion as the move start point. When picking the corner, use the TAB key to toggle to the endpoint of the vertical model line within the nested family.

Arraying Nested Subcomponents | 721

6 Select the bottom-left corner of the nested web extrusion as the move end point. When picking the corner, use the TAB key to toggle to the endpoint of the vertical model line within the nested family.

7 Press ENTER to complete the array. 8 On the Design Bar, click Modify.

Array the right nested web component
9 Select the nested web component right of the center chase. 10 On the Edit menu, click Array. 11 On the Options Bar, specify the following:
■ ■ ■ ■

Verify that Group and Associate is selected. Enter 3 for Number. Select 2nd for Move to. Select Constrain.

12 Select the bottom-left corner of the nested web extrusion as the move start point. When picking the corner, use the TAB key to toggle to the endpoint of the vertical model line within the nested family. 13 Select the bottom-right corner of the nested web extrusion as the move end point. When picking the corner, use the TAB key to toggle to the endpoint of the vertical model line within the nested family.

14 Press ENTER to complete the array. 15 On the Design Bar, click Modify. 16 Zoom out to view the truss.

Align and lock the arrays
17 Zoom in on the left array of web components. 18 On the Tools menu, click Align.

722 | Chapter 17 Parametric Component Design Techniques

19 In the left array, place the cursor over the boundary between the two left web components until the reference highlights, then select the line twice.

Because there are two overlapping lines at this location, you are aligning the two bordering web components to each other. 20 Click the lock symbol to keep the web components locked at their edges.

21 Within the left array, align and lock the two right web components.

22 Within the right array, align and lock the two boundaries between the three web components. Use the same techniques as you did in the previous three steps. NOTE This step is very important. If you do not lock the edges of the array, the web components overlap each other when you change the depth of the truss.

Label the arrays
23 Select the middle web component of the left array. 24 Notice the array line displays above the components with the array value. Place the cursor over the array line as shown and select it.

NOTE Do not select the array value. 25 On the Options Bar, select WebArrayNum for Label. 26 Select the middle web component of the right array. 27 Select the array line over the web components on the right. 28 On the Options Bar, select WebArrayNum for Label. 29 On the Design Bar, click Modify.

Arraying Nested Subcomponents | 723

30 Zoom out until you can see the entire truss.

Notice the arrays appear to be too long. This is because earlier in the tutorial, you added a dimension to lock the Member Left and Member Right reference plane to the outer Left and Right reference planes. The primary reason for this was to allow for flexing the length. 31 Zoom around the left side of the truss. 32 Select the dimension between reference plane Left and Member Left as shown.

33 Delete the dimension. 34 On the Tools menu, click Align. 35 Select the reference plane, Left, as the align-to point. 36 Select the reference plane, Member Left, and lock the alignment as shown.

Notice the end of the array still overlaps the trimmable end. You will fix this in later steps by changing the parameter value.

724 | Chapter 17 Parametric Component Design Techniques

NOTE With most beam families, you would not want to align and lock these two reference planes; however, in this case, the wood floor truss normally sits on a sill bordering a rim joist. Therefore, this solution has little, if any, significant impact. 37 On the Design Bar, click Modify. 38 Zoom in around the right side of the truss. 39 Delete the dimension between reference plane Right and Member Right. 40 Align and lock reference plane Right and Member Right.

41 Zoom out until you can see the entire truss.

Change trimmable end length value
42 On the Design Bar, click Family Types. 43 In the Family Types dialog, under Dimensions, enter 150mm for Trimmable End Length. 44 Click Apply, and click OK. Notice the web arrays fit within the truss without overlapping the ends.

Flex the design
45 In the Project Browser, under 3D Views, double-click View 1, and prepare the view for flexing. 46 On the Design Bar, click Family Types. 47 In the Family Types dialog, specify the following:
■ ■ ■ ■

Enter 686mm for Depth. Enter 12000mm for Length. Enter 900mm for Center Chase Width. Click Apply.

The truss should adapt to all the changes. If it does not, fix any problematic alignments and constraints.

Arraying Nested Subcomponents | 725

TIP When flexing a complex model such as this, you should flex the model in as many ways as possible to verify it is working correctly; however, for training and time purposes, these steps have been reduced. 48 In the Family Types dialog, reset the values as follows:
■ ■ ■ ■

Enter 286mm for Depth. Enter 6000mm for Length. Enter 400mm for Center Chase Width. Click Apply, and click OK.

You have completed the design of the primary components of the truss. 49 On the File menu, click Save. 50 Proceed to the next exercise, “Reloading a Family into a Project” on page 726.

Reloading a Family into a Project
In this exercise, you reload the truss family into the project. You then increase the distance between the foundation walls to see how the truss adapts to the changes in length.

726 | Chapter 17 Parametric Component Design Techniques

Dataset Continue to use the datasets that you saved in the previous exercise. In addition to the truss family, the project, m_WWF1.rvt, should be open. Close any other open projects.

Reload the truss into the project.
1 Verify that the truss family is active and the 3D View, View 1, displays. 2 On the Design Bar, click Load into Projects. 3 In the Reload Family dialog, select Override parameter values of existing types, and click Yes. Notice the project file becomes active and the beam has updated with the latest changes.

4 In the Project Browser, under Floor Plans, double-click Level 1. 5 Drag Grid 2 downward until the shape of the building footprint is almost square. 6 In the Project Browser, under 3D Views, double-click 3D - Southeast Isometric. Notice the truss has adapted to the changes.

Reloading a Family into a Project | 727

7 On the Edit menu, click Undo Drag. 8 Save and close the project file and the family file. In the next lesson, you begin with a new dataset which is identical to both of these files. 9 Proceed to the next lesson, “Applying Subcategories, Materials, and Parameters” on page 728.

Applying Subcategories, Materials, and Parameters
In this lesson, you create and apply subcategories and materials. You then create a parameter to specifically control material application.

Creating and Applying Subcategories
In this exercise, you create new subcategories within the truss family. You then reload the family into the project and apply a material to the subcategory. Datasets
■ ■

Click File menu ➤ Open. In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Metric\m_WWF2.rvt.

728 | Chapter 17 Parametric Component Design Techniques

In this dataset, the truss was added to a beam system that occupies approximately half the building footprint. In addition, four instances of the floor truss were added to the other end of the structure.

Apply Object Styles
1 Zoom in around beam system. Notice no material has been applied to the truss. Within the family, the material values were set to By Category by default.

2 On the Settings menu, click Object Styles. 3 In the Object Styles dialog, verify that the Model Objects tab is selected, and expand the category Structural Framing. Notice that the Structural Framing category and all of the subcategories have no material value defined. In addition, notice that the subcategories do not apply to the wood floor truss that you have designed. 4 On the Structural Framing category line, click in the material field until the button displays as shown.

Creating and Applying Subcategories | 729

5 Click the button that displays in the Structural Framing Material field. 6 In the Materials dialog, click Wood - Timber for Name, and click OK. 7 In the Object Styles dialog, click OK. Notice the Wood - Timber material has been applied to all Structural Framing components.

When you apply a material to the Structural Framing category, all subcomponents of that category are assigned that material. If there was a metal beam in this building model, it would also have the wood material applied to it. If you create subcategories as you design in the Family Editor, you have more control over component visibility within a project. 8 On the Edit menu, click Undo Object Styles.

Create subcategories within the truss family
9 Select a truss that is not part of the beam system. 10 On the Options Bar, click Edit Family. 11 Click Yes to open the family for editing. 12 On the Settings menu, click Object Styles. 13 In the Object Styles dialog, under Modify Subcategories, click New. 14 In the New Subcategory dialog, enter Wood Floor Truss for Name, and click OK.

Apply material to subcategory
15 Click in the Material field for the Wood Floor Truss subcategory, and click the button to open the Materials dialog. 16 In the Materials dialog, click Duplicate. 17 In the New Material dialog, enter Wood Floor Truss, and click OK. 18 In the Materials dialog, under AccuRender, click .

19 In the Material Library dialog, navigate to _accurender\Wood\Pine, Yellow, select Natural,No Gloss for Name, and click OK. 20 In the Materials dialog, click OK. 21 In the Object Styles dialog, click OK.

Apply the subcategory to the truss components
22 Draw a pick box around the entire truss. 23 On the Options Bar, click .

24 In the Filter dialog, click Check None, select Other, and click OK. Notice the chords and end extrusions remain selected.

730 | Chapter 17 Parametric Component Design Techniques

25 On the Options Bar, click

.

26 In the Element Properties dialog, under Identity Data, select Wood Floor Truss for Subcategory, and click OK. 27 On the Design Bar, click Modify.

Apply a subcategory to the nested web components
28 Place the cursor over one of the arrayed web components, press TAB to toggle to the web component and click to select it. 29 On the Options Bar, click Edit Family. 30 Click Yes to open the family for editing. The web component family opens in a 3D view.

31 On the Settings menu, click Object Styles. 32 In the Object Styles dialog, under Modify Subcategories, click New. 33 In the New Subcategory dialog, enter Wood Floor Truss - Webs for Name, and click OK. By creating a separate subcategory for the web components, you can apply a different material to all web components when using this truss within a project.

Creating and Applying Subcategories | 731

34 Click in the Material field for the Wood Floor Truss - Webs subcategory, and click the button to open the Materials dialog. 35 In the Materials dialog, click Duplicate. 36 In the New Material dialog, enter Wood Floor Truss - Webs, and click OK. 37 In the Materials dialog, under AccuRender, click .

38 In the Material Library dialog, navigate to _accurender\Wood\Pine, Yellow, select Natural,No Gloss for Name, and click OK. 39 In the Materials dialog, click OK. 40 In the Object Styles dialog, click OK. 41 Select the web extrusion. 42 On the Options Bar, click .

43 In the Element Properties dialog, under Identity Data, select Wood Floor Truss - Webs for Subcategory, and click OK.

Reload web component into truss family
44 On the Design Bar, click Load into Projects. 45 In the Load into Projects dialog, select m_Wood Floor Truss_1.rfa, and click OK. 46 In the Reload Family dialog, select Override parameter values of existing types, and click Yes.

Reload truss into project
47 On the Design Bar, click Load into Projects. 48 In the Load into Projects dialog, select m_WWF2.rvt, and click OK. 49 In the Reload Family dialog, select Override parameter values of existing types, and click Yes. Notice the new object subcategory styles are applied to the truss components.

50 On the Settings menu, click Object Styles. 51 In the Object Styles dialog, under Categories, expand Structural Framing.

732 | Chapter 17 Parametric Component Design Techniques

Notice the two new subcategories are listed. You can change the style of only the wood truss components without impacting other structural framing components. 52 Click OK. 53 On the View menu, click Visibility/Graphics. 54 In the Visibility Graphics dialog, under Visibility, expand Structural Framing, clear Wood Floor Truss Webs, and click OK. Notice the web extrusions no longer display; however, the stick symbols continue to display.

55 On the Edit menu, click Undo Visibility/Graphics. 56 On the File menu, click Save As. 57 In the Save as dialog, navigate to a folder of your preference and save the project with the current name. 58 Proceed to the next exercise, “Creating Material Parameters” on page 733.

Creating Material Parameters
In this exercise, you add a new material parameter that allows you to specify a material for each truss instance. Dataset Continue to use the dataset that you saved in the previous exercise.

Open truss family for editing
1 Select a truss that is not part of the beam system. 2 On the Options Bar, click Edit Family. 3 Click Yes to open the family for editing.

Create material parameter
4 On the Design Bar, click Family Types. 5 In the Family Types dialog, under Parameters, click Add. 6 In the Parameter Properties dialog, under Parameter Data, specify the following:
■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■

Enter Floor Truss Material for Name. Select Materials and Finishes for Group parameter under. Select Common for Discipline. Select Material for Type. Select Instance. Click OK.

7 In the Family Types dialog, notice the default material is By Category.

Creating Material Parameters | 733

In this case, do not assign a material to the parameter. When reloaded into a project, this component will continue to use the material assigned to the subcategory by default. This material parameter allows you to assign a material on an instance parameter. 8 Click OK.

Link truss extrusions to material parameter
9 Draw a pick box around the entire truss. 10 On the Options Bar, click .

11 In the Filter dialog, click Check None, select Wood Floor Truss, and click OK. Notice the chords and end extrusions remain selected. 12 On the Options Bar, click .

13 In the Element Properties dialog, under Materials and Finishes, click the button to the right of the Material value field. 14 In the Associate Family Parameter dialog, select Floor Truss Material, and click OK. 15 In the Element Properties dialog, click OK. 16 Place the cursor over one of the web components, press TAB, and select the component. 17 On the Options Bar, click .

18 In the Element Properties dialog, click Edit/New. 19 In the Type Properties dialog, under Other, click the button to the right of the WebMaterial value field. 20 In the Associate Family Parameter dialog, select Floor Truss Material, and click OK. 21 Click OK twice. 22 On the Design Bar, click Modify.

Reload truss into project
23 On the Design Bar, click Load into Projects. 24 In the Load into Projects dialog, select m_WWF2.rvt, and click OK. 25 In the Reload Family dialog, select Override parameter values of existing types, and click Yes. Notice the appearance of the floor trusses has not changed. 26 Select a floor truss that is not part of the beam system. 27 On the Options Bar, click .

28 In the Element Properties dialog, under Materials and Finishes, click the Floor Truss Material field and click the button that displays. 29 In the Materials dialog, select Metal - Steel for Name, and click OK. 30 In the Element Properties dialog, click OK. 31 On the Design Bar, click Modify. Notice the material is applied only to the selected beam.

734 | Chapter 17 Parametric Component Design Techniques

32 On the File menu, click Save. 33 On the File menu, click Close. 34 Close any open files. You can save the open files if you wish. In the next lesson, a new dataset is supplied. 35 Proceed to the next lesson, “Controlling Component Visibility” on page 735.

Controlling Component Visibility
In this lesson, you add controls to specify the views in which each element displays and at what detail level.

Assigning Detail Level and View Controls
In this exercise, you designate the display of elements in specific views and at specific detail levels.

Datasets
■ ■

Click File menu ➤ Open. In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Metric\m_WWF3.rvt.

Change detail levels
1 On the View Control Bar, click Detail Level, and click Coarse.

Controlling Component Visibility | 735

Notice the rim joist no longer displays. However, notice the floor truss has not changed appearance, because you have yet to assign a detail level to each of the elements within the truss family. Currently within the truss, all elements display at all times in all views.

2 Select a floor truss. 3 On the Options Bar, click Edit Family. 4 Click Yes to open the family for editing.

Apply detail level controls to web components
5 Select a web component. 6 On the Options Bar, click Edit Family. 7 Click Yes to open the family for editing. 8 Select the web extrusion. 9 On the Options Bar, click Visibility. 10 In the Family Element Visibility Settings dialog, specify the following:
■ ■ ■ ■

Under View Specific Display, clear Plan/RCP. Clear Left/Right. Under Detail Levels, clear Coarse. Click OK.

11 On the Design Bar, click Load into Projects. 12 In the Load into Projects dialog, select m_Wood Floor Truss_1.rfa, and click OK. 13 In the Reload Family dialog, select Override parameter values of existing types, and click Yes. Notice the appearance of the floor trusses has not changed.

Assign detail level to center chase extrusions
14 Select the center chase extrusions. 15 On the Options Bar, click Visibility. 16 In the Family Element Visibility Settings dialog, specify the following:
■ ■ ■ ■

Under View Specific Display, clear Plan/RCP. Clear Left/Right. Under Detail Levels, clear Coarse. Click OK.

736 | Chapter 17 Parametric Component Design Techniques

Assign detail level to truss ends
17 Select the end extrusions. 18 On the Options Bar, click Visibility. 19 In the Family Element Visibility Settings dialog, specify the following:
■ ■ ■

Under View Specific Display, clear Plan/RCP. Under Detail Levels, clear Coarse. Click OK.

Assign detail level to truss chords
20 Select the truss chords. 21 On the Options Bar, click Visibility. 22 In the Family Element Visibility Settings dialog, specify the following:
■ ■

Under Detail Levels, clear Coarse. Click OK.

Reload truss into project
23 On the Design Bar, click Load into Projects. 24 In the Load into Projects dialog, select m_WWF3.rvt, and click OK. 25 In the Reload Family dialog, select Override parameter values of existing types, and click Yes. Notice that the floor truss solid geometry is not displayed.

26 On the View Control Bar, click Detail Level, and click Medium. Notice the floor truss solid geometry is displayed. 27 In the Project Browser, under Floor Plans, double-click Level 1. 28 On the View Control Bar, click Detail Level, and click Coarse.

Assigning Detail Level and View Controls | 737

Notice the symbolic representation of the beams.

29 On the File menu, click Save As. 30 In the Save As dialog, navigate to your preferred location and save the project with the current name. 31 Proceed to the next lesson, “Creating Component Types” on page 738.

Creating Component Types
In this lesson, you create multiple floor truss types to speed up the design process when working in a project. In the final exercise, you create a conditional formula that adjusts the truss depth based on the truss length.

Creating Multiple Component Types
In this exercise, you create multiple types for a 89x38 truss and a 64x38 truss. Although you can change the parameters of a truss within a project, creating predefined types can speed up the design process.

Open the truss family for editing
1 Select a floor truss. 2 On the Options Bar, click Edit Family. 3 Click Yes to open the family for editing.

Create new types
4 On the Design Bar, click Family Types. 5 In the Family Types dialog, under Family Types, click New. 6 In the New dialog, enter 89x38 for Name, and click OK. 7 In the Family Types dialog, under Family Types, click New. 8 In the New dialog, enter 64x38 for Name, and click OK. 9 In the Family Types dialog, under Dimensions, enter 64mm for Chord Width, and click Apply. Notice the chord changes width. 10 Select 89x38 for Name, and click Apply. The truss returns to its original designed value. NOTE When creating new components, create types for those most frequently used in your projects. 11 Click OK.

738 | Chapter 17 Parametric Component Design Techniques

286. Creating Conditional Formulas In this exercise. Open the truss for editing 1 Select a floor truss. 16 In the Type Selector. 13 In the Load into Projects dialog. click Beam. click Modify. if(Length < 7500. click Save. and click Yes. click Family Types. 3 Click Yes to open the family for editing. 400. you create a conditional formula that changes the depth automatically as the truss increases in length. click Load into Projects. 21 In the Project Browser. enter the follow formula for Depth: if(Length < 6600. double-click 3D .TIP You can also use new types to flex the model. <result-if-false>) 5 In the Family Types dialog. 20 On the Design Bar. 350. click Edit Family. select 64x38.rvt. select m_WWF3. “Creating Conditional Formulas” on page 739. 15 On the Structural tab of the Design Bar. and click OK. 17 Add a beam in the center of the open space. 22 On the File menu. Load new types into the project 12 On the Design Bar. Adding a conditional formula 4 On the Design Bar. Notice the two beam types. You are going to enter a conditional formula that follows this basic rule: IF ( <condition>. 23 Proceed to the final exercise. under 3D Views. 14 In the Reload Family dialog. 18 In the Type Selector. <result-if-true>. under Dimensions. 2 On the Options Bar. select Override parameter values of existing types. if(Length < 9000. select 89x38. 400))) 6 Click Apply. 19 Add a beam next to the 64x38. Creating Conditional Formulas | 739 .Southeast Isometric.

NOTE You would have to change the depth of the sill and rim joist to accommodate this change. double-click 3D . click Apply. select m_WWF3. you probably noticed a change in the amount of time the view needed to regenerate.Flex the design 7 In the Family Types dialog. 740 | Chapter 17 Parametric Component Design Techniques . enter 8000 for length. and click OK. 10 In the Load into Projects dialog. Load the truss into the project 9 On the Design Bar. enter 6000 for length. IMPORTANT When you changed the width of the building footprint. click Save. and click Yes. double-click Level 1. Test the conditional formula within a project 12 In the Project Browser. 13 Select Grid 2 and drag it downward until it is between 8000-9000mm from Grid 1. under 3D Views. and click Apply. 14 In the Project Browser. 17 Close any open files. 11 In the Reload Family dialog.rvt. Regeneration time and overall performance can be affected by over-designed families. You have completed this tutorial. 16 On the File menu. select Override parameter values of existing types.Southeast Isometric. Notice the truss depth increases. under Floor Plans. and click OK. click Load into Projects. 15 Notice the change in floor truss depth. 8 In the Family Types dialog.

Using Advanced Features 7 741 .

742 | Chapter 18 Using Advanced Features .

Unlike windows. This affects the entire curtain system. You can add curtain systems with the wall command. grid lines. and you can change these elements individually. and mullions. curtain systems are usually assembled on site as a single unit. you need to change the length of the wall. panel. they can define space and separate the exterior from the interior. A typical curtain system comprises a wall. and they are not windows. Like windows. to resize the system. To switch panel types. you need to select a panel. For example. Like walls.Curtain Systems 18 Curtain systems are not walls. To change grids. or you can use a specific curtain system command. you select the grid. they can usually include mullions and have glazed panels. 743 . They are typically not load-bearing and are not cut for doors or windows.

you create a curtain system using the wall command. you further develop the building information model by creating a flat curtain system at the entrance of the model. In the left pane of the Open dialog. expand Views (all) ➤ Floor Plans. click Training Files. 5 Start the curtain system where shown. Dataset ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open.Flat Curtain System In this lesson.rvt. This type of curtain system is also referred to as a curtain wall. 2 Zoom in to Grid F where it meets the arc in the floor. 4 In the Type Selector. click Wall. and double-click Ground Floor. Creating a curtain system using the wall command 3 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. 1 In the Project Browser. This floor edge will be the entrance to the building. 744 | Chapter 18 Curtain Systems . Creating an Entrance In this exercise. and open Metric\m_Curtain_Walls. select Curtain Wall : Curtain Wall 1.

10 Zoom in to the curtain system you just added. 8 In the Project Browser. 7 Zoom in to the join between the curtain system and the exterior wall. Creating an Entrance | 745 . and finish at the outside face of the exterior wall as shown. and double-click Southeast Isometric.6 Move the cursor down along the edge of the floor. expand Views (all) ➤ 3D Views. 9 Click View menu ➤ Orient ➤ Northeast.

using curtain grids. Adding curtain grids 14 In the Project Browser. You want the curtain system to attach to the roof. 12 In the Element Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Constraints ➤ Top Constraint. 13 The curtain system is a single glazed panel.11 Select the curtain system. double-click GROUND FLOOR. enter 1200. Click OK. top and base attachments. 746 | Chapter 18 Curtain Systems . select Up to level: TOP OF ROOF. Note that a curtain system created from the wall command has similar properties to other walls: base constraint. and room bounding. you are going to subdivide the panel into several smaller panels. under Floor Plans. and click (Properties). top constraint. The curtain system is now at the same height as the other existing curtain systems. For Top Offset.

or press CTRL + C on the keyboard. 16 Place the elevation symbol in front of the curtain wall and click Modify on the Design Bar. select SECOND FLOOR. click Elevation. 24 Place another grid so that it snaps to the SECOND FLOOR level line. THIRD FLOOR. FOURTH FLOOR.a. 17 Click the elevation arrow to display the crop boundary. while pressing CTRL. 27 Click Edit menu ➤ Copy to Clipboard. 21 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. and click OK. 26 While pressing CTRL. click Curtain Grid. click Modify.15 On the View tab of the Design Bar. FIFTH FLOOR. 22 Move the cursor along the edge of the wall. right-click Elevation 1 . and resize the crop boundary as shown. 19 Enter Entrance Elevation. 18 In the Project Browser. 28 Click Edit menu ➤ Paste Aligned ➤ Select Levels by Name. double-click the elevation symbol arrow to open the new elevation view. 29 In the Select Levels dialog. and click Rename. 25 On the Design Bar. and click OK. 20 In the drawing area. and SEVENTH FLOOR. and click to place a horizontal curtain grid 1200 mm above the ground floor level line. 23 Place another grid 1500 mm above the first grid. select the 3 grid lines you just placed. SIXTH FLOOR. Creating an Entrance | 747 .

watch the tooltips and the Status Bar. one larger than the other. click Curtain Grid. Click to create a vertical grid. 748 | Chapter 18 Curtain Systems . 33 On the Design Bar. click Modify. TIP To be sure that the curtain grid is at the midpoint of the panel. 32 Move the cursor along the GROUND FLOOR level (left of the vertical grid line) until it snaps to the midpoint of the larger vertical panel. This divides the curtain wall vertically into 2 panels. 30 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. 31 Place the cursor on grid 2 so that it highlights. Click to place another grid line.The selected grid lines are now at each of these levels.

37 Click in any white space to exit the editor. click Add or Remove Segments. 35 Select the left vertical grid line. The segment line style changes to dashed. and on the Options Bar. and then you replace that panel with a curtain system door panel. you add a doorway to the curtain system. Creating an Entrance | 749 .Next. You enter an editor that lets you select segments of the grid line to remove them. The two segments are removed. and then select the segment above it. Instead of using the Door command. 36 Select the lowest segment of the left grid line. you set up a doorway on a curtain panel. Adding the doorway 34 Zoom in to the ground floor level in the Entrance Elevation view.

40 On the Options Bar. 41 Place 4 vertical grid lines as shown. remove the horizontal segment that intersects the vertical segment removed in the previous step. select One Segment. TIP You may need to adjust your zoom settings to view the dimensions. 42 Place dimensions as shown.38 Using the same method. 39 On the Design Bar. click Curtain Grid. 750 | Chapter 18 Curtain Systems . and lock them.

48 When the grids are placed (line style have changed to solid). 44 When the warning about locked dimensions being deleted displays. Next. 45 Select the horizontal grid line that is 1200 mm above the ground floor. 52 On the Type Selector. 54 On the Design Bar. The line style changes from dashed to solid to indicate a grid segment has been added. Watch the Status Bar to be sure you are highlighting the panel.43 Delete the dimensions. 53 Use the same method to replace the other panel with a double door.rfa. Do not click between the 1800 mm panels. click once to the right of the long grid and then click once to the left of it. You are going to add more segments to an existing curtain grid. 47 Click the horizontal grid line between the smaller panels. TIP The middle grid lines are centered between the long vertical grid above them. 49 Click File menu ➤ Load From Library ➤ Load Family. click OK to leave the curtain grids constrained. 50 In the left pane of the Open dialog. and open Metric\Families\Doors\M_Curtain Wall-Store Front-Dbl. click Training Files. Creating an Entrance | 751 . click Modify. You will have to press TAB to highlight it. you replace the 2 larger 1800 mm panels with curtain system doors. The panel changes to a double door. 46 Click Add or Remove Segments on the Options Bar. click in any white space to exit the editor. click M_Curtain Wall-Store Front-Dbl: Store Front Double Door. You now have two 1800 mm wide panels between smaller rectangular panels. Use the following image as a guide. 51 Select the left 1800 mm panel. To get the horizontal grid to display between the vertical grids.

double-click GROUND FLOOR to see the plan view door swings of the curtain wall doors. click . The glazed panel is changed to a solid panel. Next. 64 Replace the two adjacent glazed panels with solid panels. click . you change panels in front of ceilings from glazed to solid. double-click Entrance Elevation.These panels schedule as doors. 57 On the View Control Bar. 59 Select one of the panels below the FIFTH FLOOR level line. not as curtain panels. under Elevations. you replace some of the transparent panels with solid ones. 62 In the Element Properties dialog. Thickness specifies the depth of the panel. and the solid panels display in white. 752 | Chapter 18 Curtain Systems . and click Wireframe. on the new curtain system you added. This changes the graphics style of the view. 56 In the Project Browser. 65 On the View Control Bar. click Edit/New to open the Type Properties of the panel. The Offset property specifies the distance from the centerline of the curtain wall. Now. They are part of the curtain panel category. 61 With the panel still selected. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Shading with Edges. 60 On the Type Selector. The glazed panels display in blue. and Material specifies the shading and patterning. 55 In the Project Browser. 63 Click OK twice. under Floor Plans. click System Panel : Solid. Changing panels 58 Zoom in to the FIFTH FLOOR level.

click Save As. select Grid Line Segment. 67 Change the remaining glazed panels in front of ceilings to solid panels. Adding Mullions to the Curtain System In this exercise. 2 On the Options Bar. 5 Place a mullion on the horizontal grid that is 1200 mm above the ground floor. 1 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. Adding Mullions to the Curtain System | 753 .rvt. 4 On the Options Bar.66 Change the graphics style back to Wireframe. select Entire Grid Line. 68 On the File menu. This completes the exercise for creating an entrance. 3 Place a mullion on the grid segment at the ground floor immediately to the right of the right set of doors. you place mullions on curtain panel grids. click Mullion. Name the file m_Curtain_Walls-in_progress. Dataset ■ Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise.

Now all empty grid segments have mullions on them. 7 Place the cursor on any empty grid segment on the curtain system and click. You are going to change some mullion joins. The two mullions below the doors are not necessary. there are a few that you do not want. Removing mullions 8 Zoom in to the set of doors. so you remove them next. select All Empty Segments. Two mullion join controls display. because their width reduces the size of the doors. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Hidden Line. Changing mullion joins 10 On the View Control Bar. 11 Select the vertical mullion above and between the set of double doors.6 On the Options Bar. 754 | Chapter 18 Curtain Systems . however. Mullions can change their joins to other mullions. 9 Delete the mullions below them. 12 Click the lower mullion join control.

This also completes the lesson on creating a flat curtain system. The curtain wall is sketched as an arc. you add both predefined and custom mullions to the system. you can also right-click. Finally. click Modify. Finally. 15 In the Project Browser.The bottom of the mullion meets the top of the horizontal mullion. Curved Curtain System | 755 . You learned how to create a basic curtain wall system and how to subdivide it with grids. and click Join Conditions ➤ Break at Join to break the mullion at both joins. you add a curtain system using the wall command. double-click Southeast Isometric. you learned how to add mullions and change their joins. This completes the exercise for adding mullions. You also learned how to modify grids and change panels. The top of the vertical mullion now meets the bottom of the horizontal mullion above. Curved Curtain System In this lesson. TIP After selecting the vertical mullion. 16 Save the file. 14 On the Design Bar. Adding a Curved Curtain System In this exercise. 13 Click the top mullion control. you create a curved curtain system near the entrance of the model that was just completed. You also create a custom curtain panel for the system.

under Floor Plans. 2 Zoom in to the circular space above the entrance that was just completed. 7 On the Options Bar. enter 1200. select Curtain Wall : Curtain Wall 1. (Arc passing through three points). for Top Constraint. 9 Place the second point at the lower right side. Click OK. 10 Finish the wall by clicking at the top of the arc. 4 In the Type Selector. 3 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. 6 In the Element Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Constraints. click Wall. specify Up to level: FIFTH FLOOR. click 8 Start the wall by clicking at the left edge of the circle at the centerline of the intersecting wall.Dataset ■ Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous lesson. 756 | Chapter 18 Curtain Systems . For Top Offset. 5 Click . 1 In the Project Browser. double-click GROUND FLOOR.

click Curtain Grid. double-click East. Do not add a grid on the GROUND FLOOR level. Next. Watch the Status Bar to ensure you are at the midpoint. 13 Continue to place more grids by using the snap points on the arc. 11 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. You are going to use one of these snaps points. 16 On the Design Bar. you change some panels in the system. Adding a Curved Curtain System | 757 . and snap the cursor to each level line and click to add horizontal curtain grids. and then sixteenths. eighths. 14 In the Project Browser. 12 Snap the cursor to the midpoint of the curved arc and click. Divide the halves into quarters.The curtain wall displays as one flat panel between the first and second points placed. The curtain grid command snaps only to the curved arc. you place grids on the system. click Modify. Next. 15 Zoom in to the cylinder. under Elevations.

Adding a Custom Curtain Panel In this exercise. 4 On the Design Bar. This completes the first exercise for creating a curved system. Next you create a custom panel and add it to the system. 5 On the Design Bar.Using walls as panels 17 Using a selection box. 2 In the left pane of the New dialog. and on the Options Bar. select Basic Wall: Generic . 7 Start the sketch at the upper left reference line intersection and finish at the lower right reference line intersection. 18 In the Type Selector.rft. double-click Exterior. 758 | Chapter 18 Curtain Systems . enter 100.300mm. click Solid Form ➤ Solid Extrusion. click . to filter out all other 19 Save the file. 6 On the Options Bar. under Elevations. 1 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Family. click Lines. 3 In the Project Browser. for Depth. Remember to click elements from the selection except Curtain Panels. Dataset ■ Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. and open Metric\Templates\Metric Curtain Wall Panel. select the bottom layer of panels. you create a custom curtain panel and place it into the curved curtain system. click Training Files.

16 Click File menu ➤ Close.8 On the Design Bar.Pattern. 11 On the Design Bar. All the panels change to the custom panel you created. . and return to the project file. click Model Lines. Adding a Custom Curtain Panel | 759 .rfa family. under Floor Plans. and click 13 Sketch 2 lines that crisscross the extrusion. 10 In the Element Properties dialog. and click . right-click. click Modify.Pattern. All fourth floor panels are selected.Pattern. select Curtain Panel . and save the family as Curtain Panel . 17 Click File menu ➤ Load from Library ➤ Load Family. 12 On the Options Bar. and click Select Panels ➤ Along Horizontal Grid. 14 On the Design Bar. clear Chain. 18 Load the Curtain Panel . 21 In the Type Selector. 15 Click File menu ➤ Save As. double-click FOURTH FLOOR. for Identity Data ➤ Subcategory. select Glass. 19 In the Project Browser. click Finish Sketch. and click OK.rfa. 9 Select the extrusion. 20 Press TAB until a panel in the arc is highlighted.

26 In the Project Browser. 27 Highlight a panel in the arc. double-click FIFTH FLOOR. select System Panel . and click Flip Orientation. All the panels change to the solid panel. This completes the exercise for adding a custom curtain panel. click (Default 3D View). All fifth floor panels are selected. Adding Mullions to the Curved Curtain Panel In this exercise.22 Select the curved arc curtain wall. right-click. you add both custom and predefined mullions to the curved curtain panel. The finished arc wall should look like the following image. 29 Save the file. and then click (Dynamically Modify View). 25 Hold SHIFT and spin the model so that you can see the curved curtain system. and click Select Panels ➤ Along Horizontal Grid. The structure of the curved curtain system now matches that of the main part of the building. 28 In the Type Selector. 24 On the View toolbar. 23 Right-click. 760 | Chapter 18 Curtain Systems .Solid. under Floor Plans.

6 Click Settings menu ➤ Family Category and Parameters. If Polygon does not display on the Options Bar. and open Metric\Templates\Metric Profile. 7 In the Family Category and Parameters dialog. 3 Select each horizontal grid line on the curved curtain panel. and enter 50 mm for the radius. Adding Mullions to the Curved Curtain Panel | 761 . Select Radius. Click again to specify the ending point. Creating a custom mullion in the Family Editor 4 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Family. Notice that both the starting and ending points are in the same location. select Mullion. for Profile Usage.rft. enter 8. and click OK. 10 Place the cursor at the intersection of the reference planes and click to enter the octagon starting point. 8 On the Design Bar. 1 In the Project Browser. double-click East. 5 In the left pane of the New dialog. you use the Family Editor to create a custom mullion. except at the GROUND FLOOR level. . click Lines. under Elevations. 9 On the Options Bar: ■ Click (Polygon). click Mullion.Dataset ■ Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. click ■ ■ For Sides. For vertical mullions. click Training Files. and select it. 2 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar.

24 Click File menu ➤ Close. 14 In the Family element visibility settings dialog. 31 In the Element Properties dialog. After the new profile is loaded. This controls the detail level at which the mullion profile displays.rfa. 29 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. click Training Files.detail. click Mullion. 12 Select the lines in the octagon. and click OK. and open Metric\Families\Detail Components\m_Cylinder Mullion . 15 Click File menu ➤ Load from Library ➤ Load Family. and click Visibility. 16 In the left pane of the Open dialog. clear Coarse and Medium. under 3D Views. 21 In the Family element visibility settings dialog. and click OK. 19 On the Design Bar. 28 Click . click Visibility. click Modify. The detail component becomes the true representation in plan view. and return to the project file. it can be added as a mullion type. and spin the model so that you can see the curved curtain system. 17 On the Design Bar.rfa. 18 Place the detail component so that it snaps to the mullion profile as shown. 13 On the Options Bar. 27 In the Project Browser.11 On the Design Bar. 762 | Chapter 18 Curtain Systems . 20 Select the detail component. 22 Click File menu ➤ Save As. click Detail Component. clear Fine. click Modify. 25 Click File menu ➤ Load from Library ➤ Load Family. double-click Southeast Isometric. select Circular Mullion for Family. 30 Click . 23 Save the family as Cylinder Mullion.rfa family. 26 Load the Cylinder Mullion.

This completes the exercise for adding mullions. 36 Click OK twice. select All Empty Segments. 40 In the Project Browser. 41 Highlight a mullion in the arc. Adding Mullions to the Curved Curtain Panel | 763 . select Cylinder Mullion : Cylinder Mullion. for Profile. double-click GROUND FLOOR. You have placed more mullions than you want. 37 On the Options Bar. 33 In the Type Properties dialog. click Modify. In this lesson. right-click. and click Select Mullions ➤ On Gridline. under Floor Plans. 43 Save the file. you learned to create a curved curtain system. and then apply those custom elements to the system. click Duplicate. so you remove the unwanted ones. 42 Press DELETE. 39 On the Design Bar. 35 Under Construction. and click OK. make custom curtain panels and mullions. as well as the lesson on creating a curved curtain system. 38 Click on any grid line in the entry cylinder. 34 Enter Cylinder Mullion for Name.32 Click Edit/New.

select Defines slope. All the inside faces highlight. 1 In the Project Browser. a storefront system. and press TAB. 8 In the Element Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Family.Additional Curtain Systems In this lesson. click Finish Roof. select System Family: Sloped Glazing. 6 Select the inside faces of the base walls. 764 | Chapter 18 Curtain Systems . 4 On the Design Bar. Click OK. place the cursor on the inside face of one of the walls. you create additional types of curtain systems: a sloped glazing system. click Roof Properties. and you can click to select them all. enter 600. 5 On the Options Bar. Dataset ■ Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous lesson. under Floor Plans. and a ruled curtain system. click Pick Walls. 7 On the Design Bar. Sloped Glazings Sloped glazings are useful when you are creating skylights and other glazed roofing systems. For Constraints ➤ Base Offset From Level. double-click TOP OF ROOF. click Roof ➤ Roof by Footprint. 9 On the Design Bar. 2 Zoom in to the skylight at the center of the building between Grids 2 and 3 and D and E. 3 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. TIP To chain select all the walls.

1 In the Project Browser. 13 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. under Floor Plans. click Mullion. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Hidden Line. select Entire Grid Line. under 3D Views. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Shading with Edges. 12 Zoom in to the skylight. 11 On the View Control Bar. 16 On the Design Bar. This completes the exercise for creating a sloped glazing system.10 In the Project Browser. double-click Southeast Isometric. Storefront System In this exercise. Storefront System | 765 . you embed curtain walls into other walls to create a storefront system. Dataset ■ Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. 15 Select the grid lines that define the edges of each panel in the sloped glazing. 14 On the Options Bar. 2 Zoom in to the wall at the right of the model. 18 Save the file. click Modify. 17 On the View Control Bar. double-click GROUND FLOOR.

3 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. 7 Sketch a curtain wall along the wall centerline to the approximate length shown. and enter 2400. click Wall. 4 In the Type Selector.You are going to place a storefront system in this wall. You can place the curtain wall right inside this wall. 6 Start the wall 1200 mm from one end of the wall on the wall centerline. 766 | Chapter 18 Curtain Systems . 5 On the Options Bar. select Unconnected for Height. select Curtain Wall : Storefront.

This means that the panel heights will be exactly 2400 mm. enter 10200 mm. 10 In the Project Browser.The curtain wall cuts the original wall. and click . The storefront wall already has a curtain grid layout. you can look at the properties of the storefront wall. 12 Select the storefront wall. click OK to close the Type Properties dialog and return to the Element Properties dialog that displays the instance parameters. click Modify. 8 Click the temporary dimension. under 3D Views. and the Spacing (Vertical Grid Pattern) is set to 1524 mm. and the Spacing (Horizontal Grid Pattern) is set to 2400 mm. which is specified in the type. 11 Zoom in to the new storefront wall. For this wall. 9 On the Design Bar. double-click Southeast Isometric. The type parameters under the Vertical Grid Pattern and Horizontal Grid Pattern headings create the predefined layout. click Edit/New. the Layout (Vertical Grid Pattern) is set to Maximum Spacing. Storefront System | 767 . This specifies an exact length for the wall. 13 In the Element Properties dialog. This indicates that the curtain grids are placed at even intervals along the length of the curtain wall at a distance up to 1524 mm. even if the wall height changes. and press ENTER. 14 After you have looked at the Vertical Grid Pattern and Horizontal Grid Pattern parameters. To see how the grid layout is defined. The Layout (Horizontal Grid Pattern) is set to Fixed Distance.

2 Orient the view to the storefront wall you added in the last exercise. for Vertical Grid Pattern ➤ Angle. Under Vertical Grid Pattern. under 3D Views. you are rotating the grid lines to an angle on the face of the panel. see the Revit Architecture help. you create a curtain wall based on 2 lines that have been sketched at different elevations on the model. 768 | Chapter 18 Curtain Systems . enter 45 and for Horizontal Grid Pattern ➤ Angle. In this exercise. 1 In the Project Browser. center. 18 On the Options Bar. select All Empty Segments.The Instance Parameters list includes additional parameters that define the curtain grid layout. The Justification specifies the vertical spacing at the beginning. or end. For more information about these curtain wall parameters. By setting the Angle value. 16 Click OK. you learned how to embed a curtain wall and set up a grid layout. double-click Southeast Isometric. This completes the exercise on creating a storefront. This type of curtain system is known as a ruled curtain system. 20 Save the file. Justification. Dataset ■ Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. The Offset is the distance the spacing starts from the justification point. 15 To see how these parameters can affect the wall. the Number is the number of vertical curtain grids you want on the curtain instance. The Horizontal Grid Pattern counterparts are the same but for the perpendicular direction. 19 Select a curtain grid. You see these same parameters for Horizontal Grid Pattern. Under the Vertical Grid Pattern heading. Curtain System by Lines In this exercise. Angle. enter 15. click Mullion. and Offset. you find Number. 17 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar.

7 Place the cursor at the top edge of the TOP OF ROOF level. Watch the Status Bar and Tooltips to be sure you are highlighting the model line. 4 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. click Curtain System ➤ Curtain System by Lines. and highlight the model line. making sure Lines : Model Lines : Line is highlighted.3 On the View Control Bar. 6 Click the highlighted line. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Hidden Line. Curtain System by Lines | 769 . Press TAB to select the line if it does not immediately highlight. 5 Place the cursor at the top edge of the SECOND FLOOR slab.

8 Select the highlighted line. 9 On the Design Bar. 11 Click OK. click Modify. 10 Select the panel. you can vary the steps to style the system the way you want. Next. but now that you have created a ruled curtain system. click Curtain Grid. you subdivide the ruled curtain system using curtain grids. A ruled curtain system does not have all the properties of a curtain wall. 770 | Chapter 18 Curtain Systems . Notice there are very few properties for the ruled curtain system. quarters. and then eighths. A panel between the 2 lines is created. 13 Using the midpoint curtain grid snaps. place horizontal grids that divide the panel into halves. 12 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. NOTE The next few steps are intended as a guide to finish the system. and click .

In this lesson you learned to create a sloped glazing system. and define a ruled curtain system. Finally.This is similar to placing the grids on the curved curtain system. quarters. select System Panel : Solid. right-click. Curtain System by Lines | 771 . This completes the exercise for creating a ruled curtain system. 15 Highlight a top level glazed panel. and then eighths. you replace some of the glazed panels in front of the ceilings with solid panels. embed a curtain system inside another wall. 18 Save the file. 16 In the Type Selector. and click Select Panels ➤ Along Grid 2. and the lesson on creating additional curtain systems. 17 Change the THIRD FLOOR level panels to solid. 14 Place vertical grids that snap to the midpoints on the panel and divide the panel into halves.

772 | Chapter 18 Curtain Systems .

gutters. 773 . In addition. and soffits to the roofs that you create.Roofs 19 In this tutorial. you learn how to add fascia. you learn how to create different types of roofs in Revit Architecture 2008.

and double-click Level 1. you create roofs from footprints and by extrusion. including hip. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Dataset ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. a work plane named Breezeway exists for the purpose of this exercise. 5 In the Go To View dialog. and open Metric\m_Roofs. expand Views (all). 4 Click OK. Before you can sketch the roof profile. click Training Files. and then select Reference Plane : Breezeway.Creating Roofs In this lesson. and mansard roofs. expand Floor Plans. click Roof ➤ Roof by Extrusion. gable. 774 | Chapter 19 Roofs . 1 In the Project Browser. you need to select a work plane to use as a sketching guide. You do not need to create the work plane. 6 In the Roof Reference Level and Offset dialog. verify Level 3 is selected for Level. you learn to create several different types of roofs. verify that Section: Section1 is selected. You create the roof by sketching the top roof profile and extruding it over the length of the breezeway. select Name. shed. 3 In the Work Plane dialog. you create an extruded roof over a breezeway between a house and a garage. 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. and then click Open View to select a section view parallel to the work plane in which to sketch the roof.rvt. and click OK. In this lesson. Creating an Extruded Roof In this exercise.

9 Sketch a similar reference plane 450 mm to the right of the right exterior breezeway wall face. To change where the temporary dimension is measured from (face. Before you can sketch the profile of the roof. TIP Instead of trying to place the reference plane in its exact location initially.The section view is automatically cropped around the area where you want to sketch the roof. centerline. 7 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. 10 Sketch a vertical reference plane centered between the two vertical walls. This helps ensure that the plane is measured from the face of the wall rather than from the wall centerline. click the blue square on the witness line. you can place it in the general location and then zoom in and use temporary dimensions. click Ref Plane. and so on). 8 Sketch the first reference plane 450 mm to the left of the left exterior breezeway wall face. Creating an Extruded Roof | 775 . you need to define four reference planes to help determine key points on the profile sketch.

click Finish Sketch to complete the roof. 15 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. select Chain. Next. click Lines. sketch the roof profile. 776 | Chapter 19 Roofs . 12 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. Use automatic snaps to link the chain to the reference plane intersections. 14 Sketch two sloped lines to create the roof profile. Begin the sketch at the intersection of the left vertical reference plane and the horizontal plane. 13 On the Options Bar.11 Sketch a horizontal reference plane 450 mm below Level 2.

18 Select the edge of the roof. 17 On the Tools toolbar. Notice that the breezeway roof penetrates the house walls inappropriately. The roof should resemble the following illustration. 20 Select the breezeway roof edge. Creating an Extruded Roof | 777 . use the Join Roofs command to adjust the length of the roof and join the roof edges to the exterior walls.The roof is automatically extruded from the Breezeway work plane in one direction. click . and then select the exterior face of the wall. and then select the exterior wall face of the garage to join the roof to the garage wall. 16 On the View toolbar. Use the Join Roof command again to join the opposite end of the breezeway roof to the exterior wall of the house that joins the breezeway. 19 On the Tools toolbar. press TAB. click . click to display the model. Next.

The breezeway walls still penetrate the roof. click to view the completed breezeway roof in the model. You begin by sketching the perimeter of the roof in plan view to create the roof footprint. so you next attach the breezeway walls to the breezeway roof. You use roof slope lines to define the roof gable ends. 21 In the Project Browser. 23 Select one of the breezeway walls. click Modify. 25 Select the roof to join the wall tops to the roof. 778 | Chapter 19 Roofs . you create a gable roof over a garage from a footprint. and then verify that Attach Wall: Top is selected. expand Views (all). 24 On the Options Bar. expand Sections (Type 1). 27 Proceed to the next exercise. and select the second wall. 26 On the View toolbar. Creating a Gable Roof from a Footprint In this exercise. press CTRL. and double-click Section 1. “Creating a Gable Roof from a Footprint” on page 778. 22 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. click Attach for Top/Base.

2 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. you set the roof slope as a property of the footprint slope lines.To complete the gable roof with the correct pitch. 5 Select the parallel wall on the right to define the second roof slope line. click Roof ➤ Roof by Footprint. By default. 6 On the Options Bar. The Element Properties dialog is displayed. click . Creating a Gable Roof from a Footprint | 779 . the roof slope has a 750 mm rise over a 1000 mm run. Verify that a dashed green line displays to the right of the wall from the edge of the roof as you select the wall. m_Roofs. 3 On the Options Bar. click Modify. Verify that a dashed green line displays to the left of the wall from the edge of the roof as you select the wall. click Pick Walls. and enter 600 for Overhang. clear Defines slope. 7 Select the two horizontal walls to create a closed loop and complete the roof footprint. select both slope definition lines. Next. verify that Defines slope is selected. edit the properties of the two vertical slope definition lines to change the roof pitch.rvt. 8 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. 4 Select the left vertical wall of the garage to define the first roof slope line. and on the Options Bar. 9 Press CTRL. 1 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar.

expand Floor Plans. you sketch a closed rectangular opening around the chimney. enter 500 mm for Rise/1000 to change the roof slope. click Pick Walls. the opening that you sketched becomes a void in the roof. NOTE You add the slope defining lines in a later step. 4 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. “Creating a Roof with a Vertical Penetration from a Footprint” on page 780.10 In the Element Properties dialog. 13 On the View toolbar. 14 Proceed to the next exercise. When you complete the roof. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. After you define the roof slope lines and complete the footprint. 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. and double-click Level 3. m_Roofs. expand Views (all). click Roof ➤ Roof by Footprint. 11 On the Design Bar. you add a main gable roof to a house from a footprint. and enter 600 for Overhang. 780 | Chapter 19 Roofs . click Yes to attach the highlighted exterior garage walls to the roof. The roof requires an opening to accommodate a chimney.rvt. 1 In the Project Browser. 12 When you see the informational dialog. click to view the gable roof and attached walls in the model. You begin by sketching the perimeter of the roof in plan view to create the roof footprint. 3 On the Options Bar. and click OK. clear Defines slope. Creating a Roof with a Vertical Penetration from a Footprint In this exercise. click Finish Roof. under Dimensions.

13 On the Options Bar. 12 Select the uppermost horizontal line. click Lines. click Zoom ➤ Zoom To Fit to view the entire floor plan. sketch the chimney opening. Creating a Roof with a Vertical Penetration from a Footprint | 781 . click . 9 Using automatic snaps. Next. select Defines Slope. click Modify. Next. 11 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. 8 On the Options Bar. add new slope lines to the roof. and then verify that a dashed green line displays to the exterior side of the walls. press TAB.5 Place the cursor over one of the exterior walls. 7 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. 6 Click to select all the walls. 14 Select one of the shorter line segments shown in the following illustration. sketch a rectangle from the upper left corner of the exterior chimney face to the lower right corner of the exterior chimney face. 10 On the View menu.

you create a hip roof over the rear of a house from a footprint. click Pick Walls. and double-click Level 2. and enter 600 for Overhang. 17 When you see the informational dialog.15 On the Options bar. expand Floor Plans. click to view the new roof in the model. select Defines Slope. Roof sketches must create a closed loop before you can create the roof. The sketched lines cannot overlap or intersect each other. Creating a Hip Roof from a Footprint In this exercise. close the roof sketch. 782 | Chapter 19 Roofs . 16 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. 4 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. click Yes to attach the walls to the roof.rvt. m_Roofs. Next. expand Views (all). 1 In the Project Browser. click Finish Roof. select Defines slope. 19 Proceed to the next exercise. 18 On the View toolbar. Verify that a dashed green line displays on the exterior side of the wall from the edge of the roof as you select the walls. 5 Select the exterior edges of the three walls that create the rear addition to the house. click Roof ➤ Roof by Footprint. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. “Creating a Hip Roof from a Footprint” on page 782. 3 On the Options Bar.

8 Select the exterior edge of the uppermost horizontal wall of the main building. 7 On the Options Bar. Make sure you select the segment on the side that you want to keep. 12 Repeat the trim procedure on the adjacent corner to create a closed loop without intersections. click . The Element Properties dialog is displayed. 13 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. click to display the model. 14 Under Constraints. Next. enter 600 for Base Offset From Level. You must trim these lines to create a valid sketch. 9 On the Tools toolbar. clear Defines Slope. raise the roof 600 mm above the current level. and click OK. Creating a Hip Roof from a Footprint | 783 . click Finish Roof. select the left vertical slope definition line. 11 To trim the first line segment. trim the extra line segments that result from the intersection of the sketch lines. and then specify a point near the midpoint of the line that you sketched along the wall of the main building. 15 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. 10 On the Options Bar. click Lines. using the following illustration for guidance.6 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. verify that the Trim/Extend to Corner option is selected. click Roof Properties. and click . Next. 16 On the View toolbar.

784 | Chapter 19 Roofs . click . click Modify. Next. and then select the edge of the main roof to join the roofs. use the Join Roof command to fix the roof. 23 On the Tools toolbar.17 Click to use the Dynamic View tool to view the back of the house. 22 Using the same method that you used previously. click Attach for Top/Base on the Options Bar. 18 On the Design Bar. and then verify that Attach Wall: Top is selected. 20 Select the roof to join the wall top to the roof. Use the Attach Top/Base command to join the walls to the roof. 19 Select one of the walls under the hip roof. 21 Click to use the Dynamic View tool to view the remaining walls that support the hip roof. Notice that the new hip roof does not properly join to the back of the house. Press and hold CTRL to select and join the two remaining walls at the same time. 24 Select the edge of the hip roof. Notice that the walls do not join to the roof. join the two remaining walls to the roof.

expand Views (all). clear Defines Slope.The properly joined roof should resemble the following illustration. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. click Roof ➤ Roof by Footprint. 3 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. 1 In the Project Browser. 25 Proceed to the next exercise. m_Roofs. click Pick Walls. “Creating a Shed Roof from a Footprint” on page 785. Creating a Shed Roof from a Footprint In this exercise. Creating a Shed Roof from a Footprint | 785 . and enter 300 for Overhang. 4 On the Options Bar. and then click to select all three of the entry way walls. enter 0 for Overhang.rvt. Verify that a green dashed line displays around the exterior side of the walls before clicking to select the walls. and double-click Level 2. 5 Place the cursor over one of the exterior walls that defines the entry way. 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 6 On the Options Bar. you create a shed roof over the entrance to a house from a footprint. expand Floor Plans. press TAB.

and click OK. verify that the Trim/Extend to Corner option is selected. 19 Click 20 Click on the View toolbar to display the model. enter -600 for Base Offset From Level. Make sure you select the segment on the side that you want to keep. Notice the rise value is displayed next to the slope marker. click . 18 Click Yes to attach the walls to the roof. and select the lower horizontal line at the front of the roof. click Modify. click Finish Roof to complete the roof. 9 On the Options Bar. 12 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. 14 Enter 500 mm for the rise value to change the roof slope. Next. 786 | Chapter 19 Roofs . you add a slope-defining line. trim the extra line segments that result from the intersection of the sketch lines. 15 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. select the left vertical roof line. 8 On the Tools toolbar. 11 Repeat the trim procedure on the adjacent corner to create a closed loop without intersections. You must trim these lines to create a valid sketch. and press ENTER. 13 On the Options Bar. Next. and then select a point near the midpoint of the upper horizontal line you sketched earlier. to use the Dynamic View tool to rotate the model. select Defines slope.7 Select the exterior face of the main wall to close the sketch. 10 To trim the first line segment. 17 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. click Roof Properties. 16 Under Constraints.

6 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. click Zoom ➤ Zoom in Region. Next. Verify that the reference planes are located inside the shed roof sketch. click Slope Arrow. expand Views (all). expand Floor Plans.rvt. 14 On the Options Bar. 1 In the Project Browser. click Modify. and double-click 3D. 3 On the Options Bar. 13 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. add two new slope arrows. 2 Select the shed roof over the entrance of the house. 5 On the View menu. m_Roofs. 8 Select the two vertical sketch lines. Before you can add slope arrows. and select the middle segment of the slope defining line. click Edit to activate the roof footprint sketch. Adding Slope Arrows to a Shed Roof In this exercise. verify is selected. Adding Slope Arrows to a Shed Roof | 787 . clear Defines Slope. you need to split the slope defining line into three segments. 10 Split the slope defining line where the reference planes intersect as shown in the following illustration. 12 On the Options Bar. Next. 7 On the Options Bar. change the longest slope line segment (the middle segment) so that it no longer defines slope.21 Proceed to the next exercise. 9 On the Tools menu. expand 3D Views. you need to add two reference planes. click Ref Plane. To help locate the position of each split. and zoom in around the shed roof footprint. click Split Walls and Lines. 4 In the Project Browser. you add slope arrows to the shed roof. “Adding Slope Arrows to a Shed Roof” on page 787. and enter 600 for Offset. click . and double-click Level 2. 11 On the Design Bar. expand Views (all).

select both slope arrows. click Edit. expand Views (all). 788 | Chapter 19 Roofs . 4 Select the two gable end lines (the lines without slope definition). When you sketch a hip roof. 3 On the Options Bar. “Aligning Roof Eaves” on page 788. 5 On the Options Bar. Begin the tail at the right reference plane. m_Roofs. 2 Select the gable roof over the garage. 21 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. and then select it to specify the location of the slope arrow head. 1 In the Project Browser. When eave heights differ. use the Attach Top/Base command to join the wall to the roof. and click 19 Under Constraints. The head should snap to the midpoint of the line as in the previous steps. 23 Proceed to the next exercise. 20 Under Dimensions. Move the cursor along the roof line until the midpoint displays. select Slope for Specify. and double-click Garage Roof. 17 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. NOTE If the front wall is separated from the roof. expand Floor Plans.15 to add the second slope arrow. click Finish Roof to complete the roof. and then click OK. you convert the gable roof over the garage to a hip roof and use the Align Eaves tool to adjust the eave heights. enter 500 for Rise/1000. click Modify. .15 Sketch a slope arrow from the reference plane to the midpoint of the lower horizontal roof line: ■ Select the intersection of the left vertical reference plane and the roof line to specify the location of the slope arrow tail. 18 Press CTRL. the adjacent eave heights must align. ■ 16 Repeat steps 13 .rvt. and move the cursor to place the arrow. you can use the Align Eaves tool to align them. 22 Click on the View toolbar to display the model. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. select Defines Slope. Aligning Roof Eaves In this exercise.

enter 800 mm for Rise/1000. The eave lines display with a dimension. select Adjust Overhang to align the eaves by adjusting the overhang to match the eave height of the first eave. 15 Close the exercise file without saving your changes. This dimension is the height of the eave measured from the sketch plane. 8 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. under Dimensions. on the Options Bar. When aligning eaves. click Align Eaves. Notice how the overhang adjusts to match the eave height of the first eave. Creating a Mansard Roof | 789 . 12 On the Design Bar. 9 Select the left vertical eave to use to align the eaves. click Finish Roof. and click OK.6 With the two gable end lines selected. select a method to align the eaves. click . “Creating a Mansard Roof” on page 789. Creating a Mansard Roof In this exercise. 10 On the Options Bar. you create a mansard roof by cutting off a hip roof at a specific level and adding another roof on top of it. Next. and save the exercise file with a unique name. 16 Proceed to the next exercise. 11 Select both the horizontal eave lines. click to display the model. 13 On the View toolbar. on the File menu. 14 If you want to save your changes. 7 In the Element Properties dialog. click Save As. you must select one eave to use to align both eaves.

click . and open Metric\m_Mansard_Roof. Notice the model has four defined levels: In the next steps. 6 On the View toolbar. 5 Click OK to cut the top of the roof off at level 3. under Constraints.Dataset ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. on the Options Bar. click to display the model. 3 Select the roof and. you constrain the current roof so it does not rise above Level 3. expand Views (all). select Level 3 for Cutoff Level.rvt. click Modify. 4 In the Element Properties dialog. and double-click North. 790 | Chapter 19 Roofs . click Training Files. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 1 In the Project Browser. expand Elevations. 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar.

12 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. under Dimensions. 9 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. click Finish Roof. click . create a new roof that starts at level 3 and completes the mansard roof. click Roof ➤ Roof by Footprint. and Soffits In this lesson. and save the exercise file with a unique name. and click OK. you can easily create its fascia. 16 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. click to display the model with the complete mansard roof. click Lines. and then select Defines slope. gutters. 8 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. Gutters. press TAB. 15 In the Element Properties dialog. 19 Close the exercise file without saving your changes. 11 Select the four edges of the roof cutoff. 14 On the Options Bar. click . and double-click Level 3. 10 On the Options Bar. expand Floor Plans.Next. and select the remaining three lines. gutters. you learn how to create roof fascia. Gutters. 13 Select one of the roof cutoff lines. After you create a roof. click Modify. click Save As. on the File menu. Creating Fascia. expand Views (all). enter 750 mm for Rise/1000. Creating Fascia. and soffits in Revit Architecture. 7 In the Project Browser. 18 If you want to save your changes. and soffits. and Soffits | 791 . 17 On the View toolbar.

In the left pane of the Open dialog. and open Common\c_Condominium. and open Metric\Families\Profiles\Roofs. 9 In the Type Properties dialog. click Edit/New to access the type properties of the fascia. click . 7 In the Type Properties dialog. 2 In the left pane of the Open dialog. 8 In the Name dialog. and click OK. 12 Select all of the roof top edges to place the fascia around the building. click Duplicate. click Host Sweep ➤ Roof Fascia. under Construction. 1 Click File menu ➤ Load From Library ➤ Load Family. 5 On the Options Bar. 792 | Chapter 19 Roofs .rvt.rfa.rfa and M_Gutter-Cove. select M_Fascia-Built-Up. click Training Files. and click OK twice. enter Built-up Fascia. Dataset ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. and click Open. 3 Press CTRL. click Training Files. 10 Move the cursor to the top edge of the roof. 11 Select the top edge of the roof to place the fascia. you learn to use the Host Sweep command to create fascia on the roof of a condominium. select M_Fascia-Built-Up: 38 x 184mm x 38 x 286 for Profile.Creating Roof Fascia In this exercise. 4 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. 6 In the Element Properties dialog.

5 Enter Cove Shape Gutter for Name. and then click 8 In the Materials dialog. 6 In the Type Properties dialog. Creating Gutters | 793 . click in the Value field for Material. click Modify to exit the Fascia command.rvt. 14 Proceed to the next exercise. 1 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. click Host Sweep ➤ Roof Gutter. and click OK. select Metal-Aluminum for Name. 4 In the Type Properties dialog. 7 Under Materials and Finishes. click Duplicate.13 On the Design Bar. click . click Edit/New. 10 Click to place the gutter. you use the Host Sweep command to place a gutter at the bottom edge of the roof on a condominium building model. 2 On the Options Bar. 9 Move the cursor to the bottom edge of the roof. Creating Gutters In this exercise. select M_Gutter-Cove: 125 x 125mm for Profile. c_Condominium. under Construction. “Creating Gutters” on page 793. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. 3 In the Properties dialog. and click OK three times. .

click Roof ➤ Roof Soffit. 12 Proceed to the next exercise. “Creating Soffits” on page 794. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. you learn how to place a roof soffit. You add the soffit underneath the roof of the condominium building model that you used in the previous exercise. Creating Soffits In this exercise. 4 Select the roof. 1 In the Project Browser.11 Continue to add gutters to the other roof edges of the building model. and double-click Roof.rvt. expand Floor Plans. c_Condominium. expand Views. 794 | Chapter 19 Roofs . 3 On the Design Bar. click Pick Roofs.

on the File menu. Creating Soffits | 795 . click Finish Sketch. and then select the soffit to join them. and save the exercise file with a unique name. 8 Select the roof. 7 On the Tools menu. Notice that the geometry of the roof and the soffit overlap. 10 Close the exercise file without saving your changes. click Join Geometry. expand Views (all). expand 3D Views. 6 In the Project Browser. click Save As. and double-click 3D.5 On the Design Bar. 9 If you want to save your changes.

796 | Chapter 19 Roofs .

You then create area plans for each scheme as needed. Each area scheme can have multiple area plans. you learn how to use area analysis tools to define and label spatial relationships. Two schemes are provided by default: Gross Building and Rentable.Area Analysis 20 In this tutorial. 797 . The first step in area analysis is the definition of area schemes. Finally. you create area schedules and color fill plans based on the area schemes and plans. You can edit the rentable scheme and create additional schemes.

Dataset ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. 7 In the Room and Area Settings dialog. TIP If the Room and Area tab is not visible. and verify that Level 1 is the active view. you use the two predefined area schemes to create respective area plans to define gross area and a rentable area. ■ ■ Gross Building: Total constructed area of a building. 798 | Chapter 20 Area Analysis . 4 In the Project Units dialog. click the Area Schemes tab. 3 Under Area. Set units of measurement to metric 1 On the Settings menu.Using Area Analysis Tools In this lesson. click Settings. In the left pane of the Open dialog. right-click in the Design Bar. View predefined area schemes 5 In the Project Browser. you create a color fill plan and area schedule based on the area schemes and plans. These schemes define spatial relationships. Rentable: Area measurements based on the standard method for measuring floor area in office buildings. click OK. expand Floor Plans. click Project Units. You add and modify the area boundaries and add areas. you use the two predefined area schemes to create respective area plans to define gross area and a rentable area. In the final exercise. Click OK. select Square meters. NOTE Images in this exercise reflect Imperial values. For Unit Suffix. 2 In the Project Units dialog. and click Room and Area. expand Views (all). select Millimeters. your values will be different. 6 On the Room and Area tab of the Design Bar. click Training Files. and open Common\c_Area. select m2 Click OK.rvt. click Format and specify the following: ■ ■ ■ For Units. click Format and specify the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ For Units. If you are using metric units. select 2 decimal places. There are two schemes currently defined: Gross Building and Rentable. under Length. Creating Area Schemes and Plans In this exercise. You add and modify the area boundaries and add areas. For Unit Suffix. For Rounding. select mm.

Expand Area Plans (Gross Building). area boundary lines are automatically placed on the exterior walls of the building model.Although you can create new schemes that are based on the Rentable scheme. 13 In the Project Browser. Creating Area Schemes and Plans | 799 . it is not necessary in this exercise. When you select Yes in this dialog. Select Level 1 for Area Plan views. You can specify the height where the room area is calculated. click the Room Calculations tab. the system-computed height defaults to the level. NOTE If you clear Do not duplicate existing views. Verify that Do not duplicate existing views is selected. as well as selecting whether to have room volumes calculated automatically. forming a closed loop. you can create a copy of the area plan with subsequent changes to the original area plan duplicated in the copied plan. click Yes to create the boundary lines automatically. ■ At specified height: You specify the height above the level that area is calculated. ■ ■ Verify that the scale is 1/8'' = 1'-0''. notice there is a new view type called Area Plans (Gross Building). ■ At system computed height: Generally defaults to or 1000 mm above the level. 8 In the Room and Area Setting dialog. 11 In the New Area Plan dialog. You can specify the boundary location to be used for room area calculations. 9 Click Cancel. and notice that the Level 1 area plan is the active view. If you select No. Click OK. click Area Plan. Create a gross building area plan 10 On the Room and Area tab of the Design Bar. under Views (all). do the following: ■ ■ ■ Select Gross Building for Type. NOTE If the room area includes a room separation line. you must manually add these boundary lines. or 0. 12 When the informational dialog displays.

Select Level 1 for Area Plan views. An area is represented by two crossed reference lines. 18 Click Yes to automatically define the area boundary lines. NOTE The Area command is used to create and tag new areas. Next. Click OK. 17 In the New Area Plan dialog.14 On the Room and Area tab of the Design Bar. you create a new area plan for rentable space. The area reference lines are for design purposes only and do not print. Create a rentable area scheme and plan 16 On the Room and Area tab of the Design Bar. 800 | Chapter 20 Area Analysis . rather than the area tag. To modify the area. Verify that Do not duplicate existing views is selected. and store area. click Area Plan. 15 Click in the middle of the room on the lower left corner of the building model to place the tag. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Select Rentable for Type. NOTE An area tag measures area based on the area plan boundary lines. click Area. The Area Tag command is used to tag existing areas. You add and use area boundary lines to define the office areas. common areas. A room tag measures the area enclosed within the room-defining walls at the boundary location specified in Room and Area Settings. you must select one of the reference lines.

Notice that there is a new view type called Area Plans (Rentable). 24 In the upper left corner of the building model. and notice that the Level 1 area plan is the active view. When you pick the walls. click inside the middle of the room to place the tag. Expand Area Plans (Rentable). NOTE The area lines follow some of the windows hosted by the exterior wall. 19 Zoom out until you can see the entire building model. click Area Boundary. Although the rule for these lines is to follow the inside face of the wall. When you add area boundary lines.Notice that the area boundary lines are on the inner face of the exterior walls. Add area boundary lines 20 On the Design Bar. you can select the option "Apply Area Rules" so that the area boundary lines adjust to the area type. you can either draw them or pick them. 21 On the Options Bar. click Area. the area boundary lines are placed on the face of the glass. If you do not select this option. verify that Pick Lines and Apply Area Rules are selected. the area boundary lines do not update automatically. 22 Select all the interior walls by clicking them one at a time. 23 On the Design Bar. Creating Area Schemes and Plans | 801 . if the window glass is greater than 50% of the wall height.

click . and click to select the area. 32 On the Options Bar. 802 | Chapter 20 Area Analysis . place the cursor over the Area Tag and press Tab until Area displays in the status bar. click Area. Click OK. 28 In the Element Properties dialog. click . 30 Add the area to the room on the lower left corner of the building model. 29 On the Design Bar. NOTE If you have difficulty selecting the area. click Modify and select the area. do the following: ■ ■ ■ Enter Tenant 1 for Name. Select Office area for Area Type.25 On the Design Bar. 26 Select the area you added to the room in the upper left corner of the building model. 31 On the Design Bar. 27 On the Options Bar. click Modify.

Creating Area Schemes and Plans | 803 . and select Store Area for Area Type. Select Building Common Area for Area Type. do the following: ■ ■ ■ Enter Tenant 2 for Name. 35 Add an area to the building model core. Click OK. Tenant 3 should be in the upper right. add an area in the common space to the right of the double doors hosted by the west exterior wall. 36 Add the last two areas to the two spaces on the right side of the building model.33 In the Element Properties dialog. and Tenant 4 in the lower right. and select Major Vertical Penetration for Area Type. Name the areas Tenant 3 and Tenant 4. Click OK. enter Core for Name. 34 Using the techniques learned in previous steps. do the following: ■ ■ ■ Enter Circulation for Name. Select Office area for Area Type. In the Element Properties dialog.

you create a color fill area plan and an area schedule. click Color Scheme Legend. NOTE This project is required in its current state if you intend to continue with the next exercise.Notice that within the two store areas. the area boundary lines have adjusted to the new area type. 38 Navigate to your preferred directory. Create a color scheme legend 1 On the Room and Area tab of the Design Bar. Creating Area Schedules and Color Fill Area Plans In this exercise. you create a color fill area plan and an area schedule. and click Save. you used the two predefined area schemes to create respective area plans to define gross area and a rentable area. In the next exercise. and click to place the legend. 2 Move the cursor under the left corner of the building model. name the project Area-in progress.rvt. You added and modified the area boundaries and applied area tags to define spaces. click Save. 37 On the File menu. NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercise. 804 | Chapter 20 Area Analysis . In this exercise.

click the Fields tab. Creating Area Schedules and Color Fill Area Plans | 805 . The fields you selected in the Schedule Properties dialog are displayed as column headings within the schedule. under Category. 9 Click OK. click Schedule/Quantities. click OK to make the required visibility setting changes. 7 Under Available fields.3 When the dialog displays. Create an area schedule 4 On the View tab of the Design Bar. and click OK. select Area Type and click Add. select Areas (Rentable). 6 In the Schedules Properties dialog. 5 In the New Schedule dialog. 8 Add the fields Area and Name.

806 | Chapter 20 Area Analysis .

you then need to update the building face. floors. and roofs. you can specify the view to display massing elements. you convert to the basic shell elements of the building model. you create a new building model using the various massing tools to add and cut mass. You then modify the building model in both the massing view and the shell view to see how changes propagate throughout the project. building elements. After you make building elements. You can create and modify the geometric shapes that aggregate to form the building model shell. After you create the basic geometric shape of the building model. 807 . curtain systems. Massing elements and building elements are not linked automatically. In this tutorial. you can pick massing faces and make building model elements such as walls.Massing 21 You can use massing tools during the initial design process to convey a potential design concept without the level of detail usually found in a project. At any time. If you modify a massing face. or both.

under Views (all). Adding a mass element 1 In the Project Browser. You assign the default wall. roofs. click Create Mass. 808 | Chapter 21 Massing . Adding Massing Elements to a Building Model In this exercise. TIP If the Massing tab is not available on the Design Bar.Using Massing Tools In this lesson. Dataset ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. double-click Level 1. 5 On the Design Bar. click Solid Form ➤ Solid Extrusion. and floors. 2 On the Massing tab of the Design Bar. you create the basic geometric shape of the building model using various massing tools. you create the basic geometric shape of a building model by adding solid and void extrusions. under Floor Plans. 4 Click OK in the Name dialog to accept the default name Mass 1. and click Massing. click Training Files. right-click anywhere over the Design Bar. 3 Click OK in the Show Mass mode informational dialog. and open Metric\m_Massing_Start. In the left pane of the Open dialog. sweeps. The Design Bar title changes to Mass. and cutting geometry. and roof types so that when you convert the massing elements to shell elements in the final exercise.rvt. floor. the building model uses those element types to define the walls.

under Views (all). and click 17 On the Options Bar. select Mass (Opaque) for Name. and click 7 Sketch the shape as shown using the exact values. double-click Level 1. enter 25000 for Extrusion End. 8 On the Design Bar. 15 On the Design Bar. click Lines. on the Options Bar. click Lines. click Finish Sketch. Adding Massing Elements to a Building Model | 809 . under Floor Plans. 19 Click the edges of the form to create sketch lines as shown. 9 In the Element Properties dialog. 13 On the View toolbar. 12 On the Design Bar. click the Value for Material. 11 In the Element Properties dialog. click Extrusion Properties. click Solid Form ➤ Solid Extrusion. enter 1550 mm for the Offset. and click OK. TIP You may want to dimension and constrain the lines to maintain the exact dimensions. This means the sketch line is placed 1550 mm from the position you pick with the cursor. 18 Place the cursor in the drawing area on an edge of the existing form so that the edge is highlighted. 16 On the Sketch Design Bar. and click OK. Create next extrusion form 14 In the Project Browser. 10 In the Materials dialog.6 On the Sketch Design Bar. click . and then click . under Constraints. Watch the Status Bar in the lower-left corner of the screen to be sure you are highlighting the Form : Extrusion : Shape Handle. on the Options Bar. under Materials and Finishes.

25 In the Project Browser. double-click {3D} to see the results. under Materials and Finishes. click Finish Sketch. 22 In the Materials dialog. 810 | Chapter 21 Massing . highlight the larger form.Be sure to click to the inside of the extrusion. Continue creation of next massing form 26 In the Project Browser. TIP If necessary. under Views (all). 21 In the Element Properties dialog. 23 In the Element Properties dialog. 20 On the Design Bar. and then click . 28 In the Work Plane dialog. 29 In the drawing area. and click OK. select Mass (Transparent) for Name. press TAB to highlight the entire face. and click OK. under Elevations (Building Elevation). select Pick a plane. click Extrusion Properties. click the Value for Material. 30 Click to select the face. enter 25000 for Extrusion Start and 27500 for Extrusion End. 24 On the Design Bar. under Constraints. under Views (all). click Solid Form ➤ Solid Blend. The second form is on top of the first form. 27 On the Design Bar. double-click West. and click OK.

The triangle indicates that the cursor is at the midpoint. click the arrow next to the drawing options. you draw a sketch line that acts as a construction line to create an arc. and click Arc passing through three points from the menu. Sketch the blend base 32 Select the top of the larger extrusion as shown. Next. TIP If you do not see this option. click . 36 On the Options Bar. and click to select the line start point. click Lines. 33 On the Options Bar. 34 Place the cursor at the midpoint of the sketch line as shown.31 On the Sketch Design Bar. click . 37 Sketch the arc as shown with the top of the arc snapping to the top of the construction line. and click on the Options Bar. Adding Massing Elements to a Building Model | 811 . 35 Sketch a line 6000 mm up as shown.

click 46 Sketch the horizontal line as shown. click Modify. click Edit Top. click Lines and. under Elevations (Building Elevation). under Views (all). 40 On the Edit toolbar. double-click East. . Sketching the blend top 43 On the Design Bar. 41 Click the cursor at the midpoint of the horizontal sketch line as shown. click . and delete the vertical construction line. on the Options Bar.38 On the Design Bar. 39 Select the arc and the horizontal line. 42 Move the cursor straight up and click at the top horizontal line of the smaller extrusion as shown. click 48 Create an arc as shown. . 44 In the Project Browser. 812 | Chapter 21 Massing . 45 On the Design Bar. 47 On the Options Bar.

In the next exercise. you use a void extrusion to cut geometry from one of the massing shapes you added in the previous exercise. Using Massing Tools to Cut Geometry from the Building Model In this exercise. Using Massing Tools to Cut Geometry from the Building Model. click Blend Properties. and click OK. 53 Proceed to the next exercise. NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercise and the resulting building model. you use the massing tools to cut geometry from the shapes you have created.49 On the Design Bar. click . 51 On the Design Bar. 50 In the Element Properties dialog. verify that Mass (Opaque) is selected for Material and that -92000 is specified for Second End. 52 On the View toolbar. Using Massing Tools to Cut Geometry from the Building Model | 813 . click Finish Sketch. In this exercise. you created two extrusions and a blend that form the basic geometric shape of the building model.

Dataset ■ Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. 814 | Chapter 21 Massing . and place the first reference plane 15000 mm to the right. click Extrusion Properties. and then click Hidden Line. on the View Control Bar. 13 Under Constraints. 4 On the Options bar. 14 Click OK. 6 Place another reference plane 15000 mm to the right of the first reference plane. 15 On the Design Bar. click Finish Sketch. 9 On the Design Bar. enter 12000 for Extrusion End. 11 Sketch two additional void extrusions as shown. under Floor Plans. click and select Chain. 12 On the Design Bar. on the Options Bar. snap the corners to the intersections. Sketch extrusion voids 8 On the Design Bar. 2 In the drawing area. click Ref Plane. place three more reference planes 15000 mm apart from left to right. m_Massing_Start. When sketching each extrusion. 5 Place the cursor near the left edge of the massing element so that the edge is highlighted. When sketching the void extrusions in the steps that follow. click NOTE If the file is currently in shaded mode. and sketch the first void extrusion as shown.rvt. and 0 for Extrusion Start. 7 Using the same technique. These reference planes act primarily as sketching aids. select the mass. click Void Form ➤ Void Extrusion. 10 Enter SI for intersection snap. 1 In the Project Browser. Add reference planes 3 On the Mass tab of the Design bar. double-click Level 1. click Lines and. click and enter 15000 for Offset. you specify the intersection of the reference planes and the top and bottom edges of the massing element. under Views (all). as shown.

2 In the Family Types dialog.16 On the View toolbar. click Save As.rfa. 19 Save the file as m_Massing_Complete. enter 15000 mm for Width. click Finish Mass. 17 On the Mass Design Bar. Creating New Mass Family Types In this exercise. 4 In the Family Types dialog. and click OK. you cut voids through an extrusion you added in the first exercise. Finally. and 18000 mm for Depth. Creating three new family types 1 On the Design Bar. enter 15000 mm x 18000 mm x 12000 mm for Name. you create new family types from a mass family file. 18 On the File menu. and click Apply. You then load that mass family file and others into a project. Using Mass Family Files in a Project In this lesson. You place several instances of the mass families into the project. 3 In the Name dialog. 12000 mm for Height. click . Using Mass Family Files in a Project | 815 . under Other. click New. In this exercise. you open a predefined mass family file and create new types from it. Dataset ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. click Training Files. In the left pane of the Open dialog. click Family Types.rvt. you use the Join Geometry command to join several instances of the mass elements. and open Metric\Families\Massing\Box.

click Save As. 7 Click New and enter 46000 mm x 6000 mm x 11000 mm for Name. 18000 mm for Height. 6 Enter 68000 mm for Width. 8 Enter 46000 mm for Width. 816 | Chapter 21 Massing . click Training Files. click on the View toolbar to show the massing model. Dataset ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. 9 Click OK. 1 If not already selected. and click OK. and 9000 mm for Depth.5 Click New and enter 68000 mm x 9000 mm x 18000 mm for Name. In this exercise. and click OK. 11 Save the file as Box-Training. TIP Zoom out to see the entire massing model.rvt.rfa. In the left pane of the Open dialog. and click Apply. you load and place the new family types that you created from the previous exercise. and open Metric\m_Massing_In-place. you opened a mass family file and created three new types of this family file. 11000 mm for Height. and 6000 mm for Depth. and click Apply. 10 On the File menu. Loading and Placing New Mass Families In this exercise. You also load other existing mass families and place them.

Semi Barrel Vault. enter 90 for Angle.2 In the Project Browser. and Triangle. 10 On the Design Bar. 5 In the left pane of the Open dialog. and use the Move command on the Edit toolbar to place the triangle as shown. 20 In the Type Selector. click Training Files. 12 Specify Mass (Transparent) for the Material instance parameter. 21 On the Options Bar. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Wireframe. under Views (all). and click OK twice. 14 In the Type Selector. click Place Mass. under Floor Plans.rfa. 22 Place the cursor in the drawing area. 23 On the Options Bar. 7 On the Massing tab of the Design Bar. 6 Open the Box-Training. 16 On the Design Bar. 13 On the Massing tab of the Design Bar. select the triangle. 15 Place 3 of these box families on the larger box family as shown. and open the Metric\Families\Massing folder. 3 On the View Control Bar.rfa. click Place Mass. 4 On the File menu. 8 In the Type Selector.rfa family files. TIP You may want to use the Move tool to accurately place the mass families. 19 On the Massing tab of the Design Bar. select Box-Training: 68000 mm x 9000 mm x 18000 mm. and click OK twice. 11 Select the box. Loading and Placing New Mass Families | 817 . select the 3 boxes.rfa. click Modify. click Load from Library ➤ Load Family. 18 Specify Mass (Opaque) for the Material instance parameter. select Rotate after placement. and click . Arc Dome. and click to place the mass. click Place Mass. 9 Place the box mass family on the in-place mass family as shown. 25 In the drawing area. 24 On the Design Bar. double-click Site. 17 Press CTRL. click Modify. and click . select Box-Training: 15000 mm x 18000 mm x 12000 mm. select Triangle: 15000 x 45000 x 10500. click Modify.

32 Specify Mass (Opaque) for the Material instance parameter. In this exercise. and click OK twice. 33 On the View toolbar. 818 | Chapter 21 Massing . 34 On the View menu. You also loaded other existing mass families and added them to the building model. 27 Specify Mass (Transparent) for the Material instance parameter. you loaded and placed the new family types that you created in the previous exercise. 29 In the Type Selector. and click . click Orient ➤ Northeast. In the next exercise. you join these mass elements. click . click Place Mass.26 Select the triangle. 31 Select the box and click . 28 On the Massing tab of the Design Bar. and click OK twice. 30 Place the box mass family as shown. select Box-Training: 46000 mm x 6000 mm x 11000 mm. Notice that the triangle and the box masses that you just placed all overlap.

click . 4 Select the triangle. Join geometry 1 On the View toolbar. .Joining Mass Elements In this exercise. Dataset ■ Continue using the m_Massing_In-place. and then press ESC to see the result. click 2 On the Tools toolbar. the first mass element selected cuts volume from any subsequently selected mass element.rvt file. Joining Mass Elements | 819 . 3 Select the middle Box-Training: 15000 mm x 18000 mm x 12000 mm mass element as shown. NOTE When you join geometry. you join and modify the mass elements you placed from the previous exercise.

Modify existing massing elements 5 In the Project Browser. 820 | Chapter 21 Massing . and snap to the midpoint of the edge. enter SM. 11 Drag the cursor down to create a vertical axis of reflection as shown. Mirror the modified mass element 7 With the smaller box still selected. click for Axis. under Floor Plans. under Views (all). on the Edit toolbar. 6 Select the right edge of the Box-Training: 46000 mm x 6000 mm x 11000 mm and drag it to the left edge of the middle Box-Training: 15000 mm x 18000 mm x 12000 mm as shown. double-click Site. click 8 On the Options Bar. TIP Pressing SHIFT while dragging the cursor locks the axis orthogonally. 10 Click to select the mirror axis start point. 9 Position the cursor over the upper edge of the middle box.

15 Select one instance of the modified Box-Training: 46000 mm x 6000 mm x 11000 mm first. click 14 On the Tools toolbar. Joining Mass Elements | 821 .12 Click to mirror the existing massing element. and then select the triangle. Join geometry 13 On the View toolbar. you joined mass elements together. . In this exercise. 16 Repeat for the other instance of the modified mass element and the triangle. click . The first selected mass element cut geometry from the subsequently selected mass element. 17 Press ESC to see the result. You also modified and mirrored a mass element before joining its geometry with that of another element.

4 In the Add to Design Option Set dialog. 11 Place a semi barrel vault where shown. click . select Rotate after placement. Placing semi barrel vaults 6 On the Massing tab of the Design Bar. 822 | Chapter 21 Massing . 10 On the Options Bar. clear Curved. and select the triangle mass element. click Modify. 1 On the Design Bar. you continue using the same file from the previous lesson. Dataset ■ Continue using the file m_Massing_In-place. click Toolbar ➤ Design Options. you place the mass elements from the previous exercise into Design Options. click Place Mass. Mass Elements in Design Options In this exercise. You then make one of the design options the primary one for the model. enter 90 degrees for Angle. under Views (all). 5 In the Project Browser. and then click OK. You add mass elements to design options to experiment with different versions of the design.) 3 On the Design Options toolbar. do not clear the check mark. select Semi Barrel Vault: 10000 x 15000 x 7500. under Floor Plans.Using Mass Elements with Design Options In this lesson.rvt. TIP You may want to use the Move tool to place the mass precisely. double-click Site. 8 On the Options Bar. select Sloped (primary). You then switch between different design options to get different versions of the design. 2 On the Window menu. 7 In the Type Selector. 9 Place the cursor in the drawing area and click to place the mass. (If Design Options is already selected.

under Elevations. and click OK twice. 20 On the Design Bar. select Arc Dome: 6000R x 2750H. click . 21 In the drawing area. TIP Use the snap control lines to assist in placing the domes. and click OK twice. Placing arc dome mass elements 17 On the Massing tab of the Design Bar. 23 In the Project Browser. and click Wireframe. and click . click Modify. 16 On the View Control Bar. double-click North. and click . 18 In the Type Selector. 22 Specify Mass (Transparent) for the Material property. Mass Elements in Design Options | 823 . 19 Place 3 arc domes as shown.12 Place another semi barrel vault as shown. select the 2 semi barrel vaults. under Views (all). select the three arc domes. 14 In the drawing area. 15 Specify Mass (Transparent) for the Material property. click Place Mass. click Modify. 13 On the Design Bar.

select Curved from the Design Option menu. move the cursor over shapes in the drawing. clear Sloped. 25 Move the three arc domes to the position shown. and click OK. While pressing CTRL. TIP To find the correct shapes. click the Design Options tab. click . 27 On the Design Options toolbar.24 On the View Control Bar. under Views (all). 31 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog. 30 On the View menu. click . 29 In the Project Browser. click to select each of the arc domes and semi barrel values. and click Wireframe. 824 | Chapter 21 Massing . 28 In the Add to Design Option Set dialog. under 3D Views. click Visibility/Graphics. 32 Click the value for Design Option. and click OK. Create a Design Option set 26 Select the 3 arc domes and the 2 semi barrel vaults. select Curved. double-click {3D}. It will indicate when you locate an arc dome or semi barrel vault. and watch the status bar.

34 In the Design Options dialog. click . and open Metric\m_Massing_Building_Components. 33 On the Design Options toolbar.rvt. Because it is likely that your client prefers the design option with curved shapes. 36 On the File menu.You can now see the shapes that are part of the curved design option. you placed mass elements into Design Options.rvt. 35 Close the warning that displays. Dataset ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. select Curved and. you use building component creation tools to make building components from mass faces. You then switched between different design options to get different versions of the design. In the left pane of the Open dialog. you pick massing faces to create walls. Creating Building Components from Mass Elements In this lesson. and click Close. Creating Building Components from Mass Elements | 825 . click Training Files. Creating Walls by Picking Faces In this exercise. click Make Primary. click Save As and save the file as m_Massing_Design_Options. you can make it the primary option. under Option. In this exercise.

Brick on CMU. under Floor Plans.1 In the Project Browser. double-click Level 3. click Wall by Face. and select Wall Centerline for Loc Line. The southeast wall of the mass model is now Brick on CMU. TIP Zoom out to see the entire massing model. 8 In the Project Browser. 6 On the Options Bar. click to show the massing model. 2 On the View toolbar. under Views (all). 7 Place the cursor in the drawing area and select the face of the in-place mass family as shown. select Basic Wall: Exterior . 10 Select all the faces shown in red. click Wall by Face. under Views (all). click Orient ➤ Southeast. 5 In the Type Selector. click . 826 | Chapter 21 Massing . double-click {3D}. 9 On the Design Bar. 3 On the View menu. Creating walls 4 On the Massing tab of the Design Bar.

click Wall by Face. 16 In the Type Selector. 18 Select all the faces shown in red. 11 In the Project Browser. 15 On the Design Bar. under Floor Plans. under Floor Plans. double-click Level 1. 12 On the Design Bar. alerting you that the highlighted walls overlap. 14 In the Project Browser. under Views (all). double-click Level 5. ignore the warning and continue selecting wall faces.NOTE If a Warning dialog is displayed. under Views (all). Creating Walls by Picking Faces | 827 . click Wall by Face. select Curtain Wall : Storefront. 13 Select the face indicated by the arrow as shown. 17 Select the 3 faces shown in red.

22 Select all the faces shown in red. Creating Floors by Picking Faces In this exercise.You can ignore the warnings about walls overlapping. under Floor Plans. and click Wireframe. 20 On the View Control Bar. 828 | Chapter 21 Massing . double-click Level 9. In this exercise. and click Edit Profile on the Options Bar. You can then edit the profile to clean up the overlapping geometry. you picked several massing faces and created both basic walls and curtain walls. If desired. you can select the overlapping curtain wall. you pick massing faces to create floors. click Wall by Face. 19 In the Project Browser. 23 Open the 3D view to see the results. click . under Views (all). 21 On the Design Bar.

rvt. 1 In the Project Browser. 4 Click OK. Curtain Systems. 6 On the Options Bar. 7 In the Floor Area Faces dialog. Creating Floors by Picking Faces | 829 .Dataset ■ Continue using the file m_Massing_Building_Components. 3 On the Model Categories tab. click Floor Area Faces. and Walls. Creating floors 5 Select the in-place mass family Mass 1. and click OK. clear Curtain Panels. select all levels. click Visibility/Graphics. double-click {3D}. under Views (all). 2 On the View menu.

9 On the View menu. click Modify. select Levels 1-4. 12 In the Floor Area Faces dialog. 11 On the Options Bar.8 On the Design Bar. 10 Press CTRL. click Floor Area Faces. 830 | Chapter 21 Massing . and select the three 15000 mm x 18000 mm x 12000 mm box mass elements and the mirrored 46000 mm x 6000 mm x 11000 mm box masses as shown. and click OK. click Orient ➤ Northeast.

under Floor Plans. 23 On the View toolbar. 14 On the Options Bar. click Create Floors.13 On the Design Bar. clear Exclude Options. and select the semi vault barrel mass elements and the 68000 mm x 9000 mm x 18000 mm box mass element as shown. 20 On the Options Bar. under Views (all). click . double-click Level 1. select Level 1. 18 In the Project Browser. click Modify. verify that Select Multiple is selected. 21 Drag a pick box over the entire model to select all the floor area faces. Creating Floors by Picking Faces | 831 . 15 Press CTRL. 22 On the Options Bar. 19 On the Massing tab of the Design Bar. 16 On the Options Bar. and click OK. 17 In the Floor Area Faces dialog. click Floor by Face. click Floor Area Faces.

you created floors by first creating floor area faces and then picking those faces to create floors. you pick massing faces to create roofs. This shows you the gross floor area of each mass. double-click Mass Schedule.24 In the Project Browser. Creating Roofs by Picking Faces In this exercise. under Schedules/Quantities. You then viewed a massing schedule that listed the gross floor area of each mass in the model. In this exercise. 832 | Chapter 21 Massing .

Creating Roofs by Picking Faces | 833 . 3 Select the top face of the left 15000 mm x 18000 mm x 12000 mm box mass element as shown.Dataset ■ Continue using the file m_Massing_Building_Components. 6 Create the same roof on the remaining 15000 mm x 18000 mm x 12000 mm box mass elements. click Create Roof. under Views (all). 5 On the Options Bar. 4 In the Type Selector.400mm. NOTE Each time you select a face on an instance of the 15000 mm x 18000 mm x 12000 mm box mass element family. click Roof by Face. 1 In the Project Browser. Creating roofs 2 On the Massing tab of the Design Bar. and also on the top faces of the 46000 mm x 6000 mm x 11000 mm box mass elements.rvt. double-click {3D}. This creates the roof and lets you pick another face to create a new roof. click Create Roof. select Basic Roof : Generic .

click Create Roof. 8 Select the left semi barrel vault mass element. select Sloped Glazing in the Type Selector. 9 On the Options Bar. 12 Click the Model Categories tab. 10 Repeat these steps to create a sloped glazing roof on the other semi barrel vault mass element. and then click OK. Creating Curtain Systems In this exercise. In this exercise. 7 With the Roof by Face command still selected. 11 On the View menu. 834 | Chapter 21 Massing .Your model should now look as shown. you create curtain systems by picking non-planar massing faces. Curtain Systems. click Visibility/Graphics. select Curtain Panels. you created roofs by picking faces of massing families. and Walls.

double-click {3D}. 1 In the Project Browser. Creating Curtain Systems | 835 . and select both halves of the left arc dome mass element as shown. under Views (all). click Create System. 5 Press CTRL. click Curtain System by Face. 4 On the Options Bar. select Curtain System: 1500 x 1500mm.rvt. 3 In the Type Selector. 6 On the Options Bar. be sure that Select Multiple is selected. 2 On the Massing tab of the Design Bar.Dataset ■ Continue using the file m_Massing_Building_Components.

8 With the Curtain System by Face command still selected. select the blended form on the in-place mass. 836 | Chapter 21 Massing .7 Repeat the same steps for the two other domes.

9 On the Options Bar. you create curtain systems by picking non-planar massing faces. 10 Click Modify to exit the command. click Create System. In this exercise. Editing Elements Created from Massings In this exercise. Editing Elements Created from Massings | 837 . you created curtain systems on non-planar faces.

rvt. enter 30000 for Width.Dataset ■ Continue using the file m_Massing_Building_Components. 8 In the Type Properties dialog. under Views (all). Next. click Edit/New. 7 Enter Larger Size for Name. and then click OK. clear Curtain Panels. 6 In the Type Properties dialog. and Walls. click Visibility/Graphics. 2 On the View menu. Roofs. Curtain Systems. 4 Select the box mass family as shown and click . and click OK. 5 In the Element Properties dialog. double-click Site. under Floor Plans. 9 In the Element Properties dialog. 838 | Chapter 21 Massing . 3 On the Model Categories tab. 1 In the Project Browser. you resize one of the 15000 mm x 18000 mm x 12000 mm box mass elements. click OK. click Duplicate. and click OK. Floors.

13 Use the Move tool to position the box and dome families as shown. 14 Open the 3D view to see the result. 11 On the Options Bar. click Modify. Editing Elements Created from Massings | 839 .10 On the Design Bar. clear Exclude Options. 12 Drag a selection box over the box family and the dome family.

you want to select the smaller one. 16 Zoom in to the upper right-hand portion of the model and select the three walls shown. click OK. under Floor Plans. 17 On the Options Bar. 18 In the Exclude Hosts dialog. remember that there are two curtain walls of this type that are overlapping here. press TAB several times until the Status Bar indicates you are highlighting the Walls : Curtain Wall : Storefront. under Views (all). 15 In the Project Browser. click Remake. 840 | Chapter 21 Massing . TIP To select the curtain wall.The curtain system is no longer aligned with the dome family. In the next steps. 19 On the View toolbar. click . Also. double-click Level 1. you remake several of the building elements to fit to the new size of the massing family.

Editing Elements Created from Massings | 841 . you will notice that Revit Architecture resized the floors. 21 On the Options Bar. 20 Select the roof as shown.TIP If you temporarily hide one of the resized walls. click Remake.

Controlling Mass/Shell Visibility In this exercise. you changed the size of an existing mass family. In this exercise. and click Remake. Dataset ■ Continue using the file m_Massing_Building_Components. You then modified building elements to resize with the new mass family. you switch the visibility of the view between the massing elements and the model (shell) elements.22 Select the arc dome curtain system.rvt. 1 Open the 3D view. 842 | Chapter 21 Massing .

5 On the View menu. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. Controlling Mass/Shell Visibility | 843 . 8 Click None to clear the selection. right-click on the 3D view. click Visibility/Graphics. 9 Select Mass. 4 Rename the view 3D . 6 On the Model Categories tab. 3 In the Project Browser.Turn off massing 2 Click on the View toolbar to turn off massing.Massing only. click All to select all categories. Now you create a 3D view that shows only the massing. and click OK. The 3D view now shows only the building shell. 7 Clear one of the check boxes.

to the building shell. This concludes the massing tutorial. such as columns and an extruded roof. You might create the model shown. If desired. 844 | Chapter 21 Massing . you can continue adding additional Revit modeling components.In this exercise. you switched the visibility of the 3D view to show either the building shell or the mass model.

you create a model group for a typical kitchen. place. and modify repetitive units. creating a library of groups for your office can reduce the amount of work needed to create. 845 . For example. Modifications to the nested group are automatically included in the host group. you also simplify the modification process. and all new instances that you place contain the modifications. you not only simplify their placement. Because existing groups can be duplicated and then customized for another purpose. Saving a group to a library gives you the ability to share the group with other team members working on the same project. In this tutorial. when you make changes to a single instance of a model group. By grouping objects. and then you nest the kitchen in a 2 bedroom condominium unit group. you can create reusable entities that represent layouts common to many building projects. It also gives all those with access to the library the ability to load any group from the library into their project drawing.Grouping 22 Using the grouping functionality in Revit® Architecture 2008. This functionality ensures consistency within and across projects. You can also nest groups within other groups. all instances in the building model are updated. or with those working on a different project.

the host group is also updated automatically. and Nesting Groups In this lesson. You can also update all instances of a group in the building model by editing a single instance of the group and saving the changes. In this exercise. you create a model group for a typical kitchen for a condominium unit. and double-click First Floor.rvt. and typical office layouts. Create a group for the typical kitchen layout 1 In the Project Browser. and rotate the other instance to modify the layout position. and is contained in every instance of the host group that you place in the building model. you add the new model group to a previously created group. expand Floor Plans. Creating and Placing a Group In this exercise. In another exercise.Creating. 846 | Chapter 22 Grouping . The new group is considered nested within the host group. In the left pane of the Open dialog. expand Views (all). and open Metric\m_Groups-Condominium. Modifying. You create the group by selecting drawing objects and grouping them as a single entity. hotel rooms. Examples of the types of units for which groups are intended include condominium units. you place 2 new instances of the kitchen group in the floor plan. When you make changes to a nested group. After you create a model group. you learn how to use model groups to collect related elements to simplify placement of repetitive units. Dataset ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. You mirror one instance of the group. click Training Files. you can place instances of the group in the building model using various methods.

and click OK. Creating and Placing a Group | 847 . 3 Draw a selection box around the kitchen. click (Group). enter Typical Kitchen. and zoom to the kitchen in the upper-left area of the floor plan.2 Enter ZR. 5 In the Create Model Group dialog. 4 On the Edit toolbar.

select the center control for the group origin. click Modify. 8 On the View toolbar.The objects are now grouped and can be placed in the drawing as a single entity. click Zoom To Fit. 848 | Chapter 22 Grouping . and drag it to the upper-right corner of the kitchen. 7 On the Design Bar. Change the origin point for the group 6 In the drawing area. Zoom flyout.

11 Click in the upper-right corner of the stairwell to place a second instance. 10 Zoom to the center of the floor plan. under Groups. Creating and Placing a Group | 849 . right-click Typical Kitchen. expand Model. click Modify.Place instances of the group 9 In the Project Browser. and click Create Instance. and click the upper-left corner of the lower unit to place the kitchen group. 12 On the Design Bar.

15 On the Options Bar. The kitchen is now positioned correctly in the floor plan. click (Mirror). 850 | Chapter 22 Grouping . 14 On the Edit toolbar. clear Copy. 16 Select the adjacent wall near the sink as the axis of reflection.13 Select the first instance of the Typical Kitchen group that you just placed.

18 Click in the drawing area to the left of the kitchen. click (Rotate). Creating and Placing a Group | 851 .17 Select the kitchen in the stairwell. and on the toolbar.

21 On the Zoom flyout. 20 On the Design Bar. click Modify. click Zoom To Fit.19 Click above the right area of the kitchen to rotate the placement. 852 | Chapter 22 Grouping .

Modifying a Group | 853 . and click Save. When you finish editing. Modify visibility of elements in a group 1 Zoom in to the kitchen on the right above the stair.You should now have three instances of the Typical Kitchen group in your model: one with the original orientation.rvt. as shown. you make changes to an instance of a group. 23 Navigate to your preferred directory. m_Groups-Condominium_in_progress. click Save As. name the file m_Groups-Condominium_in_progress. and one rotated. all instances of the same group in the drawing are updated.rvt. Dataset Continue using the dataset saved at the end of the previous exercise. one mirrored. Save the dataset 22 On the File menu. Modifying a Group In this exercise.

and click to select the wall. 3 Click (Exclude group member). NOTE To display an excluded element. 5 Click (Exclude group member). This element remains in the group but is not visible in the project view for this group instance. and click to select it.2 Move the cursor over the wall to the left of the kitchen. select the element. press TAB to highlight the wall. (Include group member). and click to select the door. 854 | Chapter 22 Grouping . 7 Click (Exclude group member). 6 Move the cursor over the horizontal wall. press TAB. and click 4 Move the cursor over the door. press TAB.

Modifying a Group | 855 . 11 Click at the endpoint of the short vertical wall in the kitchen entrance. select Bifold-4 Panel : 1220 x 2134mm.8 On the Design Bar. 15 On the Options Bar. 16 Click in the new wall on the left and on the right to place 2 sets of folding doors for a closet. Add elements for a unique condition 9 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. move the cursor to the left.127mm. and click to draw a horizontal wall that extends to the left vertical wall. click Wall. click Door. click Modify. clear Tag on Placement. 10 In the Type Selector. click Modify. select Basic Wall : Generic . 13 On the Design Bar. 12 On the Design Bar. 14 In the Type Selector.

The elements in this instance of the group remain displayed in their object style. the background color of the drawing area is pale yellow. Zoom flyout. All other elements in the model are grayed out. move the cursor up. 18 On the View toolbar. 23 In the drawing area. 20 Select the Typical Kitchen group. 21 On the Options Bar. click Edit Group.17 On the Design Bar. 24 Click near the bottom corner of the wall. 856 | Chapter 22 Grouping . 22 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. and click near the top corner of the wall to create an opening. select Opening ➤ Wall Opening. and the group editor toolbar initially displays in the upper left corner. In edit group mode. click Zoom To Fit. click Modify. select the vertical wall to the left of the long counter top. Modify geometry of a group and have changes display in all group instances 19 Zoom in to the kitchen in the left area of the floor plan.

Nesting Groups In this exercise. click Finish. you add the Typical Kitchen group. 28 For Base Offset. When you nest the kitchen in the 2 bedroom unit. 27 In the Element Properties dialog. click Properties. to the 2 Bedroom Unit group. created in an earlier lesson. all instances of the host group are updated to contain the nested group. double-click First Floor. Dataset Continue using the dataset saved at the end of the previous exercise. Add elements to an existing group 1 If necessary. 26 Select the opening. which acts as the host. in the Project Browser. The kitchen group is then nested within the 2 bedroom unit group. and the wall and folding doors for the closet. Nesting Groups | 857 . 30 Click File menu ➤ Save.rvt. enter 2134. and click OK. 29 In the group editor toolbar. enter 1000. and on the Options Bar. under Constraints. click Modify.25 On the Design Bar. under Floor Plans. All instances of the Typical Kitchen are updated to reflect the change. for Unconnected Height. m_Groups-Condominium_in_progress.

click (Add to Group). click Edit Group. 5 In the drawing area. select the Typical Kitchen group. 3 On the Options Bar. 858 | Chapter 22 Grouping .2 Select the 2 Bedroom Unit group in the top area of the floor plan. 4 In the group editor toolbar.

such as door and window tags. select the wall between the folding doors. 8 In the Project Browser. Working with Detail Groups In this lesson. Attached detail groups are created when you group view-specific elements that are associated with a specific model group. under Floor Plans. such as text. In the next exercise. and create an attached detail group containing the tags. you add door tags to a group. 10 Click File menu ➤ Save.6 Press TAB. Detail groups are created when you group view-specific elements. You work with the attached detail group in a different way than you had previously worked with host and nested groups because attached detail groups require more manual manipulation. you work with groups in order to use them in the most efficient manner within and across projects. 9 Select the 2 bedroom group. and each of the bifold doors. 7 In the group editor toolbar. double-click Second Floor. You create a detail group in the First Floor plan and add the group to the Second Floor plan of the building model. click Finish. Notice that the Typical Kitchen and pantry are nested within the 2 bedroom group. Working with Detail Groups | 859 . and filled regions.

click to draw a rectangular region.rvt. 4 On the Options Bar. under Floor Plans.Creating a Detail Group In this exercise. You then save the region and the text note as a detail group. double-click First Floor. 3 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. 860 | Chapter 22 Grouping . m_Groups-Condominium_in_progress. Dataset Continue using the dataset saved at the end of the previous exercise. Draw a filled region 1 In the Project Browser. 2 Zoom in to the stair area in the center of the floor plan. you sketch and annotate a rectangular filled region that represents an area of tiled flooring in front of the elevators in the building model. You can add the detail group to other views of the building model. 5 Click the upper-right endpoint below the elevators as the start point of the rectangle. click Filled Region.

click Text. A rectangular region with a diagonal cross hatch pattern is added in front of the elevator doors. click Modify. Add a text note 8 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar.6 Move the cursor down and to the left. and on the Design Bar. and select a point below the left elevator. Creating a Detail Group | 861 . 9 On the Options Bar. 12 Enter Tile. 11 Click below the filled region to end the leader and specify the text start point. 10 Click in the filled region to specify the leader start point. click Finish Sketch. click to add an arc leader. 7 On the Design Bar.

double-click Second Floor. and click OK. select the instance of the Elevator lobby tile group. 17 Move the origin of the group to the corner of the elevator shaft.The text note with arc leader is added to the building model. under Groups. enter Elevator Lobby Tile. 14 On the Edit toolbar. expand Detail. 20 In the Project Browser. click Modify. right-click Elevator Lobby Tile. and select the note and the filled region. Add a group instance to a different drawing view 19 In the Project Browser. 18 On the Design Bar. 862 | Chapter 22 Grouping . Create a detail group 13 Press and hold CTRL. under Floor Plans. and click Create Instance. as shown. 16 In the drawing area. click (Group). 15 In the Create Detail Group dialog.

rvt. click Modify 23 On the Zoom flyout. and then use the door tags to create an attached detail group. Using Attached Detail Groups | 863 . Using Attached Detail Groups In this exercise. double-click First Floor. 22 On the Design Bar. 2 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. under Floor Plans. clear Leader. Place door tags 1 In the Project Browser. Because the detail group contains variables. click Tag ➤ By Category. Dataset Continue using the dataset saved at the end of the previous exercise. it cannot be added to a group in the same manner that a drawing component can be added.21 In the drawing area. m_Groups-Condominium_in_progress. 3 On the Options Bar. you add door tags to the 2 Bedroom Unit group. you must manually attach it to each instance of the 2 Bedroom Unit group. click Zoom To Fit. 24 Click File menu ➤ Save. click to place the detail group.

draw a selection box around the right area of the floor plan including the door tags. 9 On the Edit toolbar. click Modify. 864 | Chapter 22 Grouping . click Check None. select Door Tags.4 Place door tags in the original instance of the 2 Bedroom Unit. and click OK. Create an attached detail group 6 In the drawing area. 8 In the Filter dialog. click (Group). click (Filter Selection). 7 On the Options Bar. as shown: 5 On the Design Bar.

the doors are numbered based upon the order in which you placed each group. 11 In the Project Browser. click Place Detail. therefore. and click OK. Place a detail group in another group instance 12 In the Project Browser. and click OK.10 In the Create Model Group and Attached Detail Group dialog. select Floor Plan: 2 Bedroom Door Tags. for Attached Detail Group Name. and view that Floor Plan: 2 Bedroom Door Tags is attached. double-click Second Floor. 13 Select the model group 2 Bedroom Unit. under Floor Plans. 14 On the Options Bar. expand Groups\Model\2 Bedroom Unit. enter 2 Bedroom Door Tags. Using Attached Detail Groups | 865 . 15 In the Attached Detail Group Placement dialog. NOTE Component instance numbering is sequential. Door Tags are placed on the Second Floor instance of the 2 Bedroom Unit group.

the file is saved as a Revit project file (RVT). m_Groups-Condominium_in_progress. or a Revit family file (RFA) if you are working in the Family Editor.rvt. accept the default template file. you save a group to a library so that you can use the group in a new project. 2 In the left pane of the Save Group dialog. Dataset Continue using the dataset saved at the end of the previous exercise. 7 In the Load File as Group dialog. Saving and Loading Groups In this exercise. Save a group to a library 1 In the Project Browser. When you load the group from the library into a new project. verify that Same as group name is selected. 866 | Chapter 22 Grouping . and click OK. 17 Click File menu ➤ Save. click OK. Using groups from a library ensures consistency and increases productivity for projects that reuse similar typical layouts for repetitive units. select 2 Bedroom Unit. 3 For File name. and click Save. you can then work with it in the context of the new project. and click Save Group. under Groups\Model. right-click 2 Bedroom Unit. 8 In the Duplicate Types dialog. and click Open. click Modify. 6 Click File menu ➤ Load from Library ➤ Load File as Group. Saving and Loading Groups In this lesson. verify that Project is selected. browse to the Desktop. click Desktop. You also convert the group instance to a linked file to replace the group with an alternative unit layout. click New ➤ Project. This enables you to create a library of groups that can be shared with other team members and used on multiple projects.rvt. Load the group in a new project 4 On the File menu. You can save a group as a Revit project file (RVT) if you are working in a project. for Create new. you save a typical condominium layout to a library where it can be accessed by other team members for use in other projects. 5 In the New Project dialog.16 On the Design Bar. In this case.

click Use Existing. and open Common\c_2 Bedroom Unit-Alternate. 11 Click in the drawing area to place the group instance. 13 Zoom in to the 2 Bedroom Unit group.rvt.A warning dialog is displayed. 15 In the Convert Group to Link dialog. explaining that duplicate types were found and the types from the new project will be used. 16 In the left pane of the Open dialog. expand Groups. either the selected group can be used to make a new linked file. 12 On the Design Bar. and click Create Instance. Saving and Loading Groups | 867 . 10 Right-click 2 Bedroom Unit. click Modify. When a group is converted to a link. click Training Files. and expand Model. and on the Options Bar. or the group instance can be replaced with an existing linked file. Convert group instance to a linked file 14 Select the group. click Link. Place an instance of the loaded group 9 In the Project Browser.

26 Close the file with or without saving it. and click OK. 22 In the Duplicate Types dialog. click Bind. click Modify. click Remove Link. expand Revit Links. 18 In the Project Browser. Convert the linked model to a group 19 In the drawing area. You can remove the linked file from the project by clicking Remove Link. click OK.17 On the Design Bar. The 2 Bedroom Unit-Alternate. verify that Attached Details is selected only. 868 | Chapter 22 Grouping . click Yes to replace the existing Typical Kitchen group with the alternate Typical Kitchen group.rvt file is added as a link to the project. This message indicates that all instances of the linked model will be deleted from the project. or you can remove it at a later time from the Manage Links dialog. 20 On the Options Bar. select the linked Revit model. and the link is removed. 21 In the Bind Link Options dialog. but the linked model file will still be loaded in the project. 25 The linked file is converted to a new model group stored in the project. 24 In the message dialog. 23 In the confirmation dialog.

Site 23 In this tutorial. you use the site tools in Revit Architecture 2008 to add and modify site components within a project. 869 .

you add a building pad to the site. click Point. and then modify the data. click Toposurface. TIP If the Site tab is not displayed. You start by importing the site contour data and converting it to 3D contour data.Using Site Tools In this lesson. The scale of this view is 1 : 100. In the left pane of the Open dialog. The exercises are sequential and must be done in order. and walkways. click Training Files. you add parking and planting components and create a parking space schedule. right-click in the Design Bar. expand Views (all).rvt. islands. and double-click Site. you create a toposurface using two different methods. In the final exercises. you import contour data from a DWG file and use it to create the project toposurface. 870 | Chapter 23 Site . Creating a Toposurface In this exercise. convert the data to a table. enter an absolute elevation of 3000 mm. This project file was created using the default metric template. you use site tools to add and modify site components within a project. and open Metric\m_First_Project. 3 On the Design Bar. You add property lines manually. 4 On the Options Bar. 2 On the Site tab of the Design Bar. In the second part of this exercise. expand Floor Plans. You add subregions to the area to define parking areas. you create a toposurface by manually placing elevation points in the site plan. Create a toposurface by adding elevation points 1 In the Project Browser. Using the first method. and click Site. Dataset ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. After grading the topography to create a slightly elevated and flat surface.

enter an absolute elevation of 6000 mm. 9 Add a concentric circle of 6000 mm elevation points inside the 3000 mm contour.5 Click in the drawing area to specify a point. 7 Add additional points to create a contour circle similar to the following illustration. Use the following illustration as a reference. 8 On the Options Bar. The circle should be approximately 55000 mm wide. Triangulation boundaries display only after you add the third elevation point. 6 Add two additional points to create a triangle. A toposurface must have at least three elevation points. Creating a Toposurface | 871 .

15000 mm.TIP Do not be concerned with the exact quantity or placement of the points. and 18000 mm absolute elevations. and click OK. 12 On the Settings menu. under Additional Contours. 11 On the Design Bar. Use the following illustration as a reference. 10 Repeat the previous step for 9000 mm. click Site Settings. enter 1500 mm. click Finish Surface. 872 | Chapter 23 Site . under Increment. Try to add each circle concentrically inside the previously created circle. 12000 mm. 13 In the Site Settings dialog.

21 Click the Level 2 text. 15 On the View Control Bar. Use imported contour data to create a toposurface 17 Select the toposurface and. under Views (all). 23 Click the Level 1 text. 18 In the Project Browser. and press ENTER. and press ENTER. and double-click South. click Modify. 14 On the View toolbar. click Model Graphics Style. click to delete it. modify the level names and elevations. click the elevation value. 16 On the View toolbar. enter 1000 mm. 22 When you are asked if you want to rename corresponding views. expand Elevations (Building Elevation). click and spin the toposurface to view it at various angles. click . rename the level Basement. click Yes. Click Yes when prompted to rename corresponding views. Before importing the contour data. 19 On the Design Bar. and click Shading with Edges.This setting reduces the quantity of contour lines in the view. and press ENTER. 20 Zoom in around the Level 2 head. on the Standard toolbar. Creating a Toposurface | 873 . rename the level Base Site Elevation.

30 On the Edit menu. 874 | Chapter 23 Site . 29 Select the imported topography. clear Current view only and choose Select for Layers. clear layer 0 and layer C_bench_mark. click Modify. 28 On the Design Bar. click Modify. Click Open. Until it is exploded. and zoom out until you can see the entire topography within the view. and click OK. click Training Files.24 In the Project Browser. Under Layer/Level Colors. 26 In the Import/Link dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ In the left pane. 27 In the Select Layers/Levels to Import/Link dialog. select Preserve colors. 31 On the Design Bar. This ensures the import symbol is not accidently moved. under Floor Plans. Select the c_Import_Site file located in the Common folder. Under Import or Link. click Import/Link ➤ CAD Formats. under Views (all). click Pin Position. 25 On the File menu. double-click Site. You are immediately prompted to select the layers you want to import. it is considered an import symbol.

and click OK. clear C_INDX. When you select the import symbol. clear Elevations. 35 On the Site tab of the Design Bar. 32 On the View menu. Creating a Toposurface | 875 . when the edges highlight. 37 Place the cursor over the imported symbol and. 34 Under Visibility.Notice the elevation symbols are displayed. 38 In the Add Points from Selected Layers dialog. 36 On the Design Bar. click Use Imported ➤ Import Instance. select it. 33 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog. you are prompted to select the layer that will generate the elevation points. click Toposurface. and then click OK. click the Annotation Categories tab. click Visibility/Graphics.

45 Proceed to the next exercise. 40 On the View toolbar. 44 Navigate to your preferred folder. this project file is required in its current state. 39 On the Design Bar. 42 On the View toolbar. NOTE If you intend to complete the next exercise. 41 Enter ZF to zoom to the extents of the image. and click Save. name the project Site-in progress. click Save As.The import symbol is converted to elevation points and contours.rvt. click Finish Surface. click . Using the first method. 876 | Chapter 23 Site . you sketch the property lines and then convert the sketch into survey data. you create property lines by entering survey data into a table of distances and bearings. you add property lines using two methods. Adding Property Lines In this exercise. Notice the change in this toposurface elevation is minor. click and spin the toposurface to view it at various angles. 43 On the File menu. Using the second method. “Adding Property Lines” on page 876.

Although you can use your preferred sketching method. 5 Using the sketching tools available on the Options Bar. under Floor Plans.rvt. click Lines. Site-in progress. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. sketch the shape shown in the following illustration. If you have not completed the previous exercise. Using the 3-point Arc tool. select Create property lines by sketching. Sketch property lines 1 In the Project Browser. Select and delete the right vertical line. you can quickly create the shape by doing the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Sketch the rectangle first. click Property Line. and click OK. add an arc line on the right. 2 On the Site tab of the Design Bar. click Lines. On the Design Bar. double-click Site. 4 On the Design Bar. do so before continuing. Click Modify. 3 In the Property Line Creation dialog.This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercise and the project file in its current state. Adding Property Lines | 877 . NOTE The weight of the sketch lines has been increased in the illustration for training purposes.

A warning dialog is displayed. 13 In the Property Line Creation dialog. click OK. click Property Line.6 On the Design Bar. 100000 S 0°0'0" E 80000 N 90°0'0" W 100000 N 0°0'0" E 80000 N 90°0'0" E 878 | Chapter 23 Site . click Insert three times until there are four rows of deed data. enter the following deed data for rows 1 through 4: ■ ■ ■ ■ to delete them. when they highlight. click Finish Sketch. select the lines. click OK. click 12 On the Design Bar. 8 On the Options Bar. The property lines are displayed with a dash-dot line type on the topography. on the Standard toolbar. select Create property lines by table of distances and bearings. 7 Move the cursor over the property lines and. 10 In the Property Lines dialog. select Edit Table. NOTE The values displayed in the Property Lines dialog depend on the exact dimensions and location of your sketch. 9 In the warning dialog. 14 In the Property Lines dialog. Create property lines using a table of distances and bearings 11 Select the property lines and. 15 Starting in Row #1. informing you that converting a property line sketch to a table cannot be undone. and click OK.

If the gap is not closed. click Training Files. and click OK. The property lines are displayed at the tip of the cursor.Notice that after you complete the last line. the visibility of the imported symbol needs to be turned off. review your data entry and make necessary corrections. the distance that displayed under From last to first point now displays Closed. 21 In the left pane of the Open dialog.dwg and click OK. 22 In the Tags dialog. Before adding property line segment tags. 20 Click Load. click Visibility/Graphics. Even though you converted the symbol to elevations points and contours. click Annotations ➤ Loaded Tags. click the Imported Categories tab. 16 Click OK. Adding Property Lines | 879 .rfa. scroll down the list of categories until you find Property Lines and notice there are no tags loaded for Property Line Segments. clear the checkbox for c_Import_Site. click to place the property lines. 23 On the View menu. notice a tag is now loaded for property line segments. 25 Under Visibility. 19 In the Tags dialog. This means there is no gap in the property lines. 24 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog. the original DWG file remains visible in the view. and open Metric\Families\Annotations\Civil\M_Property Line Tag. Tag property lines 18 On the Settings menu. 17 Move the cursor over the topographic surface and using the following illustration as a reference.

you created two sets of property lines. 29 Tag the three remaining property lines. right-click in the Design Bar. When the tag displays at the tip of the cursor.26 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. In this exercise. 30 On the View Control Bar. In the final step. 28 Zoom in and place the cursor over the center of the north property line. you modify site settings and contour line visibility. click Tag ➤ By Category. click to place it. click Model Graphics Style. you create a new object style subcategory to mark a specific elevation. 31 On the File menu. NOTE If the Drafting tab of the Design Bar is not visible. In the next exercise. The first set you sketched and then converted into deed data. this project file is required in its current state. “Modifying Contour Visibility and Site Settings” on page 880. and click Shading with Edges. NOTE If you intend to complete the next exercise. 880 | Chapter 23 Site . clear Leader. 32 Proceed to the next exercise. The tags display more prominently in this view. You also modify the site settings so that the new subcategory is displayed at the specific elevation. Modifying Contour Visibility and Site Settings In this exercise. you loaded and tagged the property line segments. and click Drafting. You created the second set of property lines directly from deed data and located it on the topography. click Save. 27 On the Options Bar.

and click OK. 4 Under Modify Subcategories. select a shade of Brown. for Subcategory. Under Subcategory.rvt. Modifying Contour Visibility and Site Settings | 881 .0 mm. click Site Settings. scroll down the list of categories and expand Topography. select Topography. select Single Value. Under Range Type. and click Wireframe. enter the name Working Contour. the new object style subcategory is displayed under Topography. In the Object Styles dialog. 6 In the Object Styles dialog. 10 Under Additional Contours. click Object Styles. Under Line Pattern. Under Line Color. select Working Contour.Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. 9 In the Site Settings dialog. enter 1000. under Contour Line Display. specify the following values: ■ ■ ■ Under Start. specify the following settings for the Working Contour subcategory: ■ ■ ■ Verify that the Line Weights are 1. 5 In the New Subcategory dialog. select Dash dot. click Model Graphics Style. 2 On the Settings menu. click New. Create an object style subcategory for specific elevation 1 On the View Control Bar. Modify site settings 8 On the Settings menu. Site-in progress. specify an interval of 1000 mm passing through elevation 0. 7 Click OK. 3 On the Model Objects tab of the Object Styles dialog.

you create topographic subregions to define roads. such as material. and islands. In this exercise. In the next exercise. “Creating Topographic Subregions” on page 882. it merely defines an area of the surface where you can apply a different set of properties. parking areas. displays on the topography only at the elevation you specified. and islands.11 Click OK. Creating Topographic Subregions In this exercise. Click Yes when prompted to save changes. The object style subcategory. Creating a subregion does not result in separate surfaces. 13 Proceed to the next exercise. 12 On the File menu. click Close. The next exercise requires a new dataset. you create subregions in order to define roads. 882 | Chapter 23 Site . Working Contour. parking areas. You then modified the site setting to distinguish a specific contour interval using this subcategory. you created a new object style subcategory for topography.

click Subregion. Creating Topographic Subregions | 883 .rvt. Although the exact dimensions are not important. Sketch initial parking area 1 On the Site tab of the Design Bar. 2 On the Design Bar.Dataset ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. click Training Files. click Lines. use the trim tool to create just one closed loop. try to replicate the location and proportion. TIP You can either sketch the shape freehand or draw two perpendicular rectangles. the vertical rectangle is approximately 19500 mm wide. sketch the shape highlighted in the illustration below. 3 Using the sketching tools on the Options Bar. In the left pane of the Open dialog. The horizontal rectangle is approximately 7500 mm wide. and open Metric\m_Site. and use the fillet arc sketching tool to add the curved corner.

884 | Chapter 23 Site . click Shading with Edges. 6 In the Materials dialog. enter Parking for Name. select Site . and click OK.NOTE In the Metric dataset. under Materials and Finishes. the subregion will end at the edge of the defined topography. Specify subregion properties for parking area 4 On the Design Bar. 8 On the Design Bar. 7 In the Element Properties dialog. Notice that the left edge of the subregion overhangs the site topography. 5 In the Element Properties dialog. under Identity Data. and click OK. and then click the down arrow to open the Material dialog. click the Value for Material.Tarmacadam for Name. 9 On the View menu. click Finish Sketch. When you finish the sketch in a later step. you may see fewer contour lines than in the images shown in this exercise. click Properties.

Creating Topographic Subregions | 885 . they display within this schedule. double-click Topography Schedule. under Floor Plans. click Model Graphics Style.Notice that the new subregion uses the material Site . the toposurface and its contour data remain one element. Delete overlapping lines. NOTE Your values may differ depending on your sketch. 17 On the View Control Bar. 13 Select the subregion you created in the previous steps. under Schedules/Quantities. expand Schedules/Quantities. and use the split and trim tools to clean up the sketch. The two additional parking areas in the top portion of the sketch must be at least 5500 mm deep to accommodate parking spaces. click Edit Boundary. You can create a toposurface schedule to report information regarding each toposurface region. Although you can select each toposurface region separately and apply different properties to each. double-click Site. 18 In the Project Browser. 14 On the Options Bar. Mirror the arc line to create an exact duplicate. click Model Graphics Style. Notice that the project area has increased. 12 On the View Control Bar. This topography schedule uses a filter to omit unnamed topographic regions. click Finish Sketch.Tarmacadam. 15 Add new lines and modify the existing lines to create a boundary similar to the one shown in the following illustration. Open the topography schedule 10 In the Project Browser. and click Shading with Edges. and double-click Topography Schedule. 16 On the Design Bar. and click Hidden Line. As you create new subregions. TIP Add the two upper parking areas as rectangles. Modify the subregion 11 In the Project Browser.

enter Island . In this training project. Within each subregion.Grass for Name. and click OK. click Lines. click Model Graphics Style. double-click Site. under Materials and Finishes. and click Shading with Edges. click Finish Sketch.Grass for Name. select Site . 29 On the View Control Bar. Notice that the schedule has been updated with the new information. and click OK. 28 On the Design Bar. and click Hidden Line. click Subregion. click Model Graphics Style. under Floor Plans. 25 In the Element Properties dialog. use the sketching tools available on the Options Bar to sketch the parking island shown in the following illustration. 886 | Chapter 23 Site . click Properties. and then click the down arrow to open the Material dialog. Precise dimensions are not important at this time. additional subregions are required to create a more attractive parking area. double-click Topography Schedule. click the Value for Material. 22 On the Design Bar. 26 In the Materials dialog. under Identity Data. 23 In the upper-right parking area. 20 On the View Control Bar. 21 On the Site tab of the Design Bar. under Schedules/Quantities. 24 On the Design Bar. 30 In the Project Browser. you apply different materials such as grass and concrete.Add additional subregions 19 In the Project Browser. 27 In the Element Properties dialog.

31 In the Project Browser.walkway. click Lines. click Subregion. Name the subregion Walkway. You must sketch each region separately. under Schedules/Quantities. double-click Site. Add the concrete walkway 33 In the Project Browser. 35 On the Design Bar. double-click Topography Schedule. double-click Site. and apply the material Concrete . under Floor Plans. and apply the material Site . Name each region Island . Using the techniques learned in previous steps. Creating Topographic Subregions | 887 . 36 Use the sketching tools available on the Options Bar to sketch the new concrete walkway shown in the following illustration. 32 In the Project Browser.Grass.Grass. 34 On the Design Bar. Notice that the schedule has been updated. under Floor Plans.Cast-in-Situ Concrete . add the three additional subregions shown in the following illustration.

37 On the Design Bar. there is still only one toposurface. Notice that the schedule has been updated. click Save As. so you need to offset coincident lines between the subregions by 100 mm. double-click Topography Schedule. 39 On the File menu. under Schedules/Quantities.WARNING Subregions cannot intersect. you must either edit the entire toposurface or split the toposurface. 38 In the Project Browser. click Finish Sketch. If you want to modify the elevation points of a particular subregion. NOTE Although several toposurface subregions now exist within this project. 888 | Chapter 23 Site .

select Existing for Phase Created. The display settings are controlled by the phase filter. see the tutorial. NOTE If you intend to complete the next exercise. “Using Phasing” on page 992.rvt. and click Save. under Floor Plans. stating that subregions must have the same Phase Created parameter and the same Phase Demolished parameter as the host toposurface. Site tutorial-in progress. RELATED For more information regarding phasing. 2 Select the toposurface. under Phasing. and click OK. click Modify.40 Navigate to your preferred folder. 3 On the Options Bar. When you use the grading tool. 5 On the Design Bar. Modify toposurface phase assignment 1 In the Project Browser. the existing topography is demolished and a new toposurface is created where you can edit the elevation points. 4 In the Element Properties dialog. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. click . Grading the Toposurface | 889 . you grade the toposurface to create a slightly elevated and flat parking area. “Grading the Toposurface” on page 889. Click OK to set the subregion phase to match the toposurface. double-click Site. this project file is required in its current state.rvt. Grading the Toposurface In this exercise. Notice that the toposurface displays differently. 41 Proceed to the next exercise. A warning dialog is displayed. name the project Site tutorial-in progress.

890 | Chapter 23 Site . 8 Select the topographic surface. The intent is to select all the elevation points inside and around the parking area. and click Select and Edit. 7 In the Graded Region dialog. click Graded Region. select Copy Internal Points. Copying internal points lets you delete only the points in the parking area without altering the remaining elevation points. Delete elevation points 9 Draw a pick box outside the main parking area as in the following illustration.6 On the Design Bar. Make sure the pick box allows a significant buffer around the area.

demolished. 13 Press DELETE. and click Hidden Line. Notice the toposurface displays with different colors representing the different phases: existing. Grading the Toposurface | 891 . click Model Graphics Style. 12 Draw another pick box around the driveway and remaining parking area as in the following illustration.10 Press DELETE. and new. 11 On the View Control Bar.

click Model Graphics Style. Place the points until there are no contour lines crossing the parking area or walkway. click . click Finish Surface. click Point. 892 | Chapter 23 Site . 19 On the View Control Bar. 15 On the Options Bar. and spin the toposurface to view it at various angles. The parking and walkway areas are now elevated and flat. click . and click Shading with Edges. 18 On the View toolbar.Add new elevation points 14 On the Design Bar. 16 Add elevation points outside the perimeter of the entire parking area and walkway as in the following illustration. 20 On the View toolbar. 17 On the Design Bar. specify an Absolute Elevation of 5500 mm.

25 In the Element Properties dialog. this project file is required in its current state. Adding a Building Pad | 893 . 26 On the File menu. 27 Proceed to the next exercise. you can delete it. This accounts for the red surface that you see in this view. click View Properties. under Phasing. Adding a Building Pad In this exercise. Therefore.The phase filter for this view allows both the new and demolished surfaces to display. under Phasing. specify Existing for Phase. Delete the demolished toposurface from the project 21 On the View menu. and click OK. specify New Construction for Phase. click Save. NOTE If you intend to complete the next exercise. because you assigned it to the Existing phase before grading. click View Properties. A building pad is a toposurface hosted element and cannot be added to any other element. Only the graded topography displays. and click OK. 23 Select the toposurface. 22 In the Element Properties dialog. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. Only the components created in or assigned to the Existing phase display in this view. Site tutorial-in progress. 24 On the View menu. nor can you add it without first adding a topographic surface. Because this toposurface is no longer required for this project. it automatically cuts a hole in the toposurface and places it at the depth you specify.rvt. and delete it. you create a building pad. “Adding a Building Pad” on page 893. When you add a building pad. only the original toposurface displays.

The building pad should border the concrete walkway on the right and the upper parking area. click Pad. 3 On the Site tab of the Design Bar. 4 On the Design Bar. sketch an approximate replica of the outline shown in the following illustration. 2 On the View Control Bar. under Floor Plans. the Pick Walls command is active. click Model Graphics Style. 894 | Chapter 23 Site . and click Hidden Line. If you have an existing building model.Add a building pad to the project 1 In the Project Browser. click Lines. NOTE By default. 5 Using the sketching tools available on the Options Bar. double-click Site. you can pick the exterior walls to define the building pad.

and spin the toposurface to view it at various angles. click Finish Sketch. click Model Graphics Style. 7 On the View Control Bar. click 9 On the View toolbar. Notice the new 10 On the File menu. 8 On the View toolbar.6 On the Design Bar. click building pad. 11 Proceed to the next exercise. click Save. you add parking and planting components to the site surface. and click Shading with Edges. . this project file is required in its current state. “Adding Site Components” on page 895. Adding Site Components In this exercise. . NOTE If you intend to complete the next exercise. Adding Site Components | 895 .

Site tutorial-in progress. 4 Zoom in on the upper parking area that borders the building pad and add a parking component to the area. click Parking Component. double-click Site. 6 Use the flip arrows so it displays as shown below and move it toward the lower left corner of the parking area. 3 In the Type Selector. NOTE Make sure you place the parking space a slight distance above the building pad. under Floor Plans. and select the parking space. click Modify.90 deg. 5 On the Design Bar. select M_Parking Space: 4800 x 2400mm . 896 | Chapter 23 Site .Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. 2 On the Site tab of the Design Bar.rvt. Add parking components 1 In the Project Browser.

Verify that the spaces are horizontally aligned and the left edge of each space is aligned with the right edge of the previous space. under Floor Plans. click parking spaces. click Site Component. . 8 On the View toolbar. Adding Site Components | 897 . double-click Site. click 9 On the View toolbar. . and spin the toposurface to view it at various angles. TIP You could also use the Array tool to accomplish this task. Notice the new Add planting components to the site 10 In the Project Browser.7 Add 6 additional parking spaces to the right of the first space. 11 On the Site tab of the Design Bar.

13 Add some more trees outside the parking area as shown below. 14 On the View toolbar. choose any tree type.12 In the Type Selector. 898 | Chapter 23 Site . and add a tree to each of the two round parking islands as shown below. click .

click . In the following illustration. Tagging Site and Parking Components In this exercise. Tagging Site and Parking Components | 899 . “Tagging Site and Parking Components” on page 899. double-click Site. the landscape shown in the previous illustration has been rendered. Notice how the trees vertically attach to the toposurface. 17 Proceed to the next exercise. under Floor Plans. and spin the toposurface to view it at various angles. Site tutorial-in progress.rvt. you tag the planting and parking components that you added previously. this project file is required in its current state. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. 16 On the File menu. Tag site components 1 In the Project Browser. NOTE If you intend to complete the next exercise.15 On the View toolbar. NOTE Plants are displayed as simple geometry unless rendered. 2 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. click Tag All Not Tagged. click Save.

click Apply. NOTE Site components can also be numbered by clicking the tag number and changing the value.rvt. and click OK. NOTE If you intend to complete the next exercise. Creating Parking Space Schedules In the final exercise of this tutorial. and click Add. 4 Under Available fields. 8 Proceed to the next exercise. In the following exercise. you create a parking schedule. select the line for the category Parking Tags that uses the loaded tag M_Parking Tag: Boxed. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. select Parking for Category. 3 In the Schedule Properties dialog. and click OK. click the Fields tab. you use a parking schedule to number the parking spaces. 7 On the File menu. 5 On the View menu. 6 Zoom in to the upper parking area and around the trees. click Schedule/Quantities. click Hidden Line. Notice each is tagged with no instance mark. click Save.3 In the Tag All Not Tagged dialog. 4 Select the line for the category Planting Tags that uses the loaded tag M_Planting Tag: Boxed. 900 | Chapter 23 Site . 2 In the New Schedule dialog. this project file is required in its current state. and click Apply. select Mark. Site tutorial-in progress. “Creating Parking Space Schedules” on page 900. Create a parking schedule 1 On the View tab of the Design Bar. You can use a parking schedule to report the quantity and area of each type of parking space.

This tiles the Site plan next to the parking schedule. 9 On the Window menu. you can resize the column width by dragging the column edges. finish numbering the remaining spaces. and under Heading. The parking schedule is displayed. 7 Under Fields. and click Add. under Views (all). double-click Site. Creating Parking Space Schedules | 901 . 15 On the File menu. and click OK. enter Space.5 Under Available fields. enter Size. Also notice that when you place the cursor in the parking schedule. click Close Hidden Windows. zoom in around the upper parking lot where you previously added the parking spaces. the selected space highlights in the Site plan. and under Heading. click Tile. This closes all the views except the parking schedule. 11 On the Window menu. If necessary. This allows you to know which space you are numbering. select Mark. 10 In the Project Browser. select Type. under Floor Plans. number the first three spaces consecutively. 12 In the Site plan. 13 In the Parking Schedule. under Space. 6 Click the Formatting tab. select Type. 8 Under Fields. click Save. under Space. Notice that the parking spaces in the Site plan update automatically. 14 In the Parking Schedule.

902 | Chapter 23 Site .

Structural 24 In this tutorial. you use the structural tools in Revit Architecture 2008 to create a building model skeleton. and beams to Level 1. you create framing elevations and add structural braces to the building model. In the final lesson. columns. You begin by adding the structural walls. After completing level 1. you copy the entire structure and use the paste-align command to add the structure to the three levels above it. 903 .

Import the DWG file 1 Before importing the DWG file. click Training Files. click Import/Link ➤ CAD Formats. 904 | Chapter 24 Structural . 2 On the File menu. go to the Project Browser. and double-click Level 2. verify that the Level 2 floor plan is open. and select Metric\m_Wall_Import. The DWG file contains walls that you trace in the next exercise to create the structural walls. specify the following: ■ Select Link (instead of import). and open Metric\m_Structural. under Import or Link.rvt.Adding Structural Walls In this lesson. Dataset ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open.dwg. you add structural walls to a project file where only the grid lines have been added. Importing a DWG for Use as an Underlay In this exercise. 3 In the left pane of the Import/Link dialog. you import a DWG file into the Level 2 floor plan. under Views (all). You then sketch additional walls to which you add dimensions and constraints. If necessary. click Training Files. 4 In the Import/Link dialog. In the left pane of the Open dialog. under Floor Plans. You use an imported DWG file as an underlay to trace the initial outline of the structural walls.

select Invert colors. 7 Click Open. 6 Under Positioning. This project file is required for all subsequent exercises in this tutorial. After you trace the walls. 9 Navigate to a folder of your choice and save the project as Structural_tutorial. you use the linked DWG file to trace the initial set of structural walls. 5 Under Layer/Level Colors. Structural_tutorial. Dataset This exercise requires the project file. Sketching Structural Walls | 905 . Display the Structural tab of the Design Bar 1 If the structural tab is not displayed. to trace the initial set of structural walls. click Save As. “Sketching Structural Walls” on page 905. you turn off the visibility of the DWG file.rvt that you saved at the end of the previous exercise. In this exercise. The DWG file is displayed on the Level 2 floor plan. select Automatically place. and add the remaining structural walls to the building model. Select All for Layers. This file is used in the next exercise. you imported a DWG file. right-click in the Design Bar and click Structural. Sketching Structural Walls In this exercise.■ ■ Select Current view only. 8 On the File menu. and select Origin to origin.rvt.

Structural walls differ from non-structural walls in several ways. In the steps that follow. Select Finish Face: Exterior for Loc Line. 906 | Chapter 24 Structural . select Basic Wall: Generic . 6 On the Options Bar.200mm. you add a structural wall by specifying the depth of the wall. Click . 3 Draw a zoom region around the upper set of lines. rather than the height. In addition. First. 5 In the Type Selector. click Zoom ➤ Zoom in Region. 4 On the Structural tab of the Design Bar. 7 Begin the first wall by selecting the intersection of the upper left corner of the line chain. and click to specify the wall endpoint. This requires the bottom of the primary view range to be set to the level below in order to see the walls as you sketch them. 8 Move the cursor over the top right intersection of the line. specify the following: ■ Select Depth. you sketch a chain of walls over the path highlighted in the following illustration. click Structural Wall.Sketch structural walls by tracing the DWG 2 On the View menu. their Structural Usage parameter is automatically set to Bearing. ■ ■ ■ Select Chain.

and click to complete the chain of walls. click . 13 On the View toolbar. and click the next line intersection. 10 Move the curser to the right. and click to specify the next wall endpoint. 12 On the Design Bar. click Modify to finish the sketch. Sketching Structural Walls | 907 . 11 Move the cursor to the top of the line chain until a reference plane displays indicating the cursor is on a parallel plane with the slanted wall on the left.9 Move the cursor downward to the next line intersection.

and double-click Level 2. Use the Dynamic 14 In the Project Browser. On the Options Bar. ■ Begin the wall chain by clicking the lower left intersection where the end of the line chain adjoins grid C. sketch a chain of walls over the path highlighted in the following illustration. 17 Using the bulleted steps below. expand Views (all). click Structural Wall.TIP If necessary. 15 Zoom around the second chain of lines. Click each exterior line intersection in a clockwise direction. you can spin the model in a 3D view by clicking View tools to modify the 3D view. zoom in to ensure you select the intersection of the imported lines and grid C. When you reach the endpoint on the lower right corner of the chain. 16 On the Structural tab of the Design Bar. in the View toolbar. ■ ■ 908 | Chapter 24 Structural . notice that the wall options you used previously are still selected. expand Floor Plans.

23 Under Visibility.18 On the Design Bar. ■ Sketching Structural Walls | 909 . click Modify to end the wall chain. Turn off the DWG visibility 20 In the Project Browser. click Structural Wall. 25 In the Type Selector. click Visibility/Graphics. specify the following: ■ ■ Clear Chain. double-click Level 2. 26 On the Options Bar. 22 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog. Click to create a three-point arc. 19 On the View toolbar. click the Imported Categories tab. under Floor Plans. Sketch additional structural walls 24 On the Structural tab of the Design Bar. 21 On the View menu. click .200mm.dwg and click OK. Select Wall Centerline for Loc Line. Unselected categories are not visible in the referenced view. select Basic Wall: Generic . clear m_Wall_Import.

This is the right extent of the arc. 30 Move the cursor to the right until it intersects with the slanted wall on the right. 29 Add a horizontal wall beginning at the midpoint of the left vertical wall as shown. Move the cursor upward and specify an arc radius of 180 degrees.27 Follow the sequence of steps in the illustration below to add a 180 degree three point arc. 31 Add a vertical wall between the two horizontal walls as shown. This is the left extent of the arc. ■ ■ ■ Select the endpoint of the left vertical wall. Select the right endpoint of the horizontal wall. 910 | Chapter 24 Structural . click . 28 On the Options Bar.

enter 1500.32 On the Design Bar. 34 Select the horizontal wall. click the temporary dimension value between it and grid C. and press ENTER. click the value. enter 1500. If it is not. Sketching Structural Walls | 911 . click Modify. 33 Select the vertical wall you added in the previous step and make sure the temporary dimension between the wall and the centerline of the left vertical wall is equal to 1500 mm. and press Enter.

In the steps that follow. click Structural Wall and on the Options Bar. Create the final structural walls 37 Begin the first wall on the endpoint and wall centerline shown in the illustration below. clear Chain.35 Zoom around the upper set of walls as shown. 36 On the Design Bar. 38 Draw the 1200 mm wall parallel to the adjoining wall as shown. Both walls are 1200 mm long. you create the final structural walls for the project. 912 | Chapter 24 Structural .

to continue with the subsequent exercises in this tutorial. Floor Plans. click . Structural_tutorial. 2 Zoom around the lower set of walls.39 Create an additional 1200 mm wall as shown. In this exercise. Begin the wall at the top of the right vertical wall and draw it inward so that it is parallel with the wall you sketched in the previous steps. that you saved at the end of the previous exercise. click Modify. 40 On the Design Bar. Dimensioning and Modifying Walls In this exercise. This project file is required. you used the DWG file to trace the initial set of structural walls. Dataset This exercise requires the project file. 42 On the File menu. You then make minor modifications to their position. 41 On the View toolbar. double-click Level 2. You also reposition the walls to see how they adapt to changes in the design. under Views (all). In the next exercise. “Dimensioning and Modifying Walls” on page 913. click Save. After turning off the visibility of the linked DWG. in its current state. Add an aligned dimension 1 In the Project Browser.rvt. you dimension the structural walls and add an equality constraint to the dimension to keep the walls equidistant. you add dimensions and equality constraints to the walls. Dimensioning and Modifying Walls | 913 . you added the remaining structural walls required for this building model.

select Intersecting Walls. Create an equality constraint 7 On the Design Bar. In the Auto Dimension Options dialog. After you select Entire Walls. 914 | Chapter 24 Structural . Select Wall Centerlines for Prefer. and click to place the dimension as shown. 5 Move the cursor over the left vertical wall. specify the following: ■ ■ ■ Select . Select Entire Walls for Pick. 6 Move the cursor to the left. click Modify. and click OK. click Options to specify the wall pick options. click Dimension. 4 On the Options Bar. and when it highlights. the Options button becomes available.3 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. select it. ■ ■ On the Options Bar.

Dimensioning and Modifying Walls | 915 . Modify wall position 10 Select the upper horizontal wall as shown. 9 Click the EQ symbol to make each of the segments equal.8 Select the dimension you added in the previous steps.

916 | Chapter 24 Structural . several different beam types. Notice the horizontal walls remain equally spaced. This project file is required. and purlins to complete the Level 1 structure. and enter 4000 for the distance between the wall centerline and grid B. Adding Structural Columns and Beams In this lesson. In this exercise. to continue with the next lesson in this tutorial. In the next lesson. joists. click Save. 13 On the File menu. in its current state. “Adding Structural Columns and Beams” on page 916. 12 On the Edit menu. You also repositioned the walls and observed how they adapted to the change in the design. you added a dimension to the structural walls and used an equality constraint to keep the walls equidistant. you add structural columns. click Undo Edit Dimension Length. you add structural columns and different beam types to the building model.11 Click the temporary dimension value.

In addition. double-click Level 1. and you add a column outside the grids. under Floor Plans. 3 On the Structural tab of the Design Bar. if the column orientation is not similar to the callout shown below. Dataset This exercise requires the project file. Structural_tutorial.Adding Structural Columns In this exercise. TIP When adding the column. you use the grid intersection tool. zoom in to place the column. Add columns to grid intersections manually 1 In the Project Browser.rvt that you saved at the end of the previous exercise. press the SPACEBAR to rotate the column. 6 Add a column to C1 as shown. 5 On the Options Bar. select Height and specify Level 2. click Structural Column. you use several different methods to add structural columns: you manually select grid intersections. Adding Structural Columns | 917 . click Zoom ➤ Zoom to Fit. If necessary. select M_W-Wide Flange-Column: W250x80. you rotate columns by pressing the SPACEBAR when necessary. 2 On the View menu. 4 In the Type Selector.

9 Use a crossing selection. C3. Add columns using selected grid intersections 8 On the Options Bar. and A. and select grids 1-5. This option allows you to place columns at the intersections of selected column grids.7 Add similar columns to C2. and C5. 918 | Chapter 24 Structural . click Grid Intersection.

Notice the columns rotate until they are parallel with grid A. specify a point under grid A and to the right of grid 5. 12 Press the SPACEBAR again. and drag your cursor up and to the left as shown below. 10 Notice columns are added to A1-5. Adding Structural Columns | 919 . Columns A3-5 are shown below.TIP To create the crossing selection. All of the columns on grid A rotate until they are parallel with the vertical grids. Rotate the columns 11 Press the SPACEBAR. 13 Press the SPACEBAR until the columns return to their original position.

19 On the Options Bar. 18 If the columns are not aligned as in the illustration below. click Finish. 920 | Chapter 24 Structural . 20 On the Design Bar. click Grid Intersection. zoom out until you can see all the grids. click Finish. Add a column outside of the grid 22 On the Design Bar. click Modify. TIP Notice that as you rotate these columns using the SPACEBAR. 21 Select column A5 and delete it. Add columns B1-5 16 On the Options Bar. This completes this set of columns. Although you could have added columns B1-5 with the first set of columns. 23 Add a M_W-Wide Flange-Column: W250x80 between B4 and C5. The column should be 4200 mm to the left of grid 5.14 If necessary. the columns on A1-5 do not rotate. press the SPACEBAR to rotate them. click Structural Column. 17 Create a crossing selection that includes B1-5. you could not have rotated them independently of each other. Columns B3-5 are shown below. That is why you finished the first set and then reentered the grid intersection mode to add columns B1-5. 15 On the Options Bar. and 6900 mm below the exterior face of the horizontal wall above it.

and you rotate the columns using the SPACEBAR. in its current state. In the next exercise. Adding Structural Beams and Girders | 921 . “Adding Structural Beams and Girders” on page 921. and use the grid tools to add beams automatically. click .24 On the Design Bar. click Modify. This project file is required. Adding Structural Beams and Girders In this exercise. 26 On the File menu. 25 On the View toolbar. In this exercise. you add beams manually. you learn how to work with these varied conditions. click Save. As you use the beam tool. Different structural conditions exist within the building model that require specific beam conditions. to continue with the subsequent exercises in this tutorial. you add structural beams to the building model. you used various methods to add structural columns.

double-click Level 2. 3 On the Structural tab of the Design Bar. 6 Add a beam between the column shown below and the horizontal wall above it. Add beams using point-to-point insertion 1 In the Project Browser. Start the beam at the column midpoint and move your cursor up until it connects with the wall centerline. 4 In the Type Selector. 7 On the Design Bar. select M_W-Wide Flange: W310x67. 5 Zoom around the right side of the building model. 8 Zoom around the upper set of walls as shown.Dataset This exercise requires the project file. under Floor Plans. Structural_tutorial. click Modify. you specify the start and endpoint of the beam. 2 On the View menu. 922 | Chapter 24 Structural . click Zoom ➤ Zoom to Fit.rvt that you saved at the end of the previous exercise. click Beam. To add a beam using point-to-point insertion.

15 Create a crossing selection that includes grids 1 and 2.7. click Beam. When you use the grid tool to place beams. 14 On the Options Bar. the Structural Usage parameter of each beam is automatically specified depending on the join conditions. the Structural Usage parameter is automatically set to Girder. Adding Structural Beams and Girders | 923 .9 On the Structural tab of the Design Bar. Use the grid tool to add beams between columns 13 In the Type Selector. click Grid. 10 In the Type Selector. select Girder for Usage. 12 Add a beam between the midpoint of the structural wall shown and grid A. Use the following table for other conditions. select M_W-Wide Flange: W310x67. For example. Column Brace Horizontal Bracing Horizontal Bracing Other Horizontal Bracing Girder Joist Purlin Other Column* Girder Other Girder Joist Purlin Other Brace Horizontal Brace Girder Joist Purlin Other Other Other Horizontal Bracing Joist Other Horizontal Bracing Joist Purlin Other Horizontal Bracing Purlin Purlin Purlin Other Other Other Other Other Other *Structural walls produce the same result as columns. 11 On the Options Bar. TIP Select the midpoint of the wall first. if a beam is joined column-to-column. and then move the cursor up to grid A. select M_W-Wide Flange: W310x32.

and select grid C. select M_W-Wide Flange: W310x67. enter 8200. 19 Zoom in the upper-right quadrant of the building model. press and hold CTRL. click the temporary dimension value. 924 | Chapter 24 Structural .16 Notice that beams are added at the grids and connected to each column. 18 On the Design Bar. and press ENTER. click Beam. 22 In the Type Selector. 17 On the Options Bar. click Modify. 24 Select grid 3. Add beams to an intersecting structural wall 20 Select the structural wall that spans grids 3 and 4. 21 On the Design Bar. 23 On the Options Bar. click Grid. click Finish.

Notice beams are added between columns. ■ ■ ■ ■ Click column C5 to start the beam chain. 27 Using point-to-point insertion. select Girder. Press ESC to end the chain. Click the intersection of grid 5 and the structural wall as shown to add the final beam in the chain. click Finish. Click column B5 to add the first beam. Adding Structural Beams and Girders | 925 . notice that beams connect to the structural walls that intersect grids. refer to the following steps and illustration to add two beams to grid 5. select Chain. Add a chain of beams 26 On the Options Bar. In addition. and for Usage. 25 On the Options Bar.

31 Add a chain of beams beginning with the end of the structural wall at C4. 30 On the Options Bar. You can also use the shortcut key. make sure you select the intersection of the grid lines. select Girder for Usage. select Girder for Usage. Press ESC to end the chain. and ending with the structural wall that intersects grid 4 as shown. 29 Add a beam between A4 and the structural wall that intersects grid 4 as shown. You may need to zoom in significantly to accomplish this. Press ESC to end the chain. NOTE When you begin the beam chain at C4. SI. 926 | Chapter 24 Structural . to snap only to intersections. connecting the column at B4.28 On the Options Bar.

36 On the Options Bar. click Finish. and the W310x67 beam spanning A3-4 would have been two separate beams.7 beam that intersects it perpendicularly. click Grid. 33 Select grid A. The W310x67 beam spanning A3-4 supports the W310x32. 35 Zoom around the beam between A3-4.Add beams that intersect other beams 32 On the Options Bar.7 beam had crossed grid A. Adding Structural Beams and Girders | 927 . 34 On the Options Bar. it would have become the supporting beam because it was placed first. click Grid. If the W310x32.

45 Specify the beam start point at the endpoint of the short wall segment adjacent to grid 4 as shown below. Add a concrete beam 40 In the Project Browser. 41 Zoom around the upper structural walls between A4-5. 928 | Chapter 24 Structural . select Girder for Usage. you use point-to-point insertion to add the beam between the two short wall segments that adjoin grid 4 and 5. click Beam. 44 On the Options Bar.37 Select grid B. select M_Concrete-Rectangular Beam: 200 x 500mm. 43 In the Type Selector. 38 On the Options Bar. double-click Level 2. 42 On the Structural tab of the Design Bar. click . 39 On the View toolbar. click Finish. In the steps that follow. under Floor Plans.

click Modify. and click the endpoint of the short wall segment adjacent to grid 5 as shown below. Adding Structural Beams and Girders | 929 . 47 On the Design Bar.46 Move the cursor to the right. click . enter SE (shortcut key for endpoints). Notice the concrete beam you added in the previous step. 48 On the View toolbar.

double-click Level 2. 52 In the Type Selector. and click when it intersects grid 2. In the steps that follow. for Usage. click Beam. select Girder. under Floor Plans. 53 On the Options Bar. and select Chain. select M_W-Wide Flange: W310x67. 51 On the Structural tab of the Design Bar. 930 | Chapter 24 Structural . you add two W310x67 beams parallel to the wall that intersects grid 3. 50 Zoom around the A1-B3 region. 55 Move the cursor to the left and parallel to the wall. 54 Begin the beam chain by selecting the intersection of the wall and grid 3.Add remaining girders 49 In the Project Browser.

57 On the View toolbar.56 Move the cursor to the left and parallel to the wall. and click when it intersects grid 1. Press ESC twice to end the beam placement mode. click . Adding Structural Beams and Girders | 931 .

you add joists and purlins to the building model. Add a W-Wide Flange joist 1 In the Project Browser. “Adding Joists and Purlins ” on page 932. In the next exercise. double-click Level 2. Adding Joists and Purlins In this exercise. 4 In the Type Selector. Do not worry about the exact placement at this time. to continue with the subsequent exercises in this tutorial. in its current state. You then create a joist array. 2 Zoom around the A1 .B3 quadrants.rvt that you saved at the end of the previous exercise. 3 On the Structural tab of the Design Bar. 6 Add one beam between the A1-2 girder and the parallel girder below it. 5 On the Options Bar. the structural usage of the beams is automatically set to purlin. click Beam. In this exercise. Structural_tutorial.58 On the File menu. select Automatic.7. 932 | Chapter 24 Structural . Add the beam a few feet to the right of grid one. and their display within the plan view adjusts accordingly. for Usage. You begin by adding W-Wide Flange joists. while allowing the automatic beam tool to assign the Structural Usage parameter value depending on the join conditions. under Floor Plans. Dataset This exercise requires the project file. This project file is required. you add joists and purlins to the building model. You used the grid tool to add beams to selected grids and learned how varied structural conditions affect the outcome of the automatically placed beams. when you use the automatic beam tool to add beams between joists. you added beams and girders using the point-to-point insertion method. click Save. For example. select M_W-Wide Flange: W310x32.

Modify the temporary dimension value if necessary. 10 In the Element Properties dialog. you selected the Automatic option. The beam needs to be 1250 mm right of grid 1. click Array. any beam added between two girders becomes a joist when the Automatic option is selected. 9 With the beam selected. Adding Joists and Purlins | 933 . According to the table shown at the beginning of this lesson. This value was set automatically because when you created the beam.7 On the Design Bar. 11 Click OK. click Modify. click on the Options Bar. on the Edit menu. under Structural. 8 Select the beam you added in the previous steps. Create a joist array 12 With the joist selected. notice that the Structural Usage value is Joist.

14 Click the intersection of the upper extent of the joist and grid A as shown to specify the array start point. Once the direction is set. This creates an array of 14 joists that are parallel to grid A. Make sure the cursor is over grid A.13 On the Options Bar. Enter 14 for Number. Select 2nd for Move to. 934 | Chapter 24 Structural . ■ ■ ■ ■ Clear Group and Associate. enter 1250 and press ENTER. 15 Move the cursor to the right and parallel to grid A. specify the following: Click .

click Beam. 18 Zoom in around the area surrounding the purlin.Add purlins 16 On the Structural tab of the Design Bar. Adding Joists and Purlins | 935 . 17 Add a beam from the midpoint of the first joist to the right of grid 2 that stretches perpendicularly to the next joist on the right as shown.

specify the following: Click . and color within the Object Styles dialog. 22 Click the endpoint of the left joist as shown to specify the array start point. 936 | Chapter 24 Structural . and click. Select 2nd for Move to. 23 Move the cursor to the endpoint of the next joist on the right. click Array. style. ■ ■ ■ ■ Clear Group and Associate. Their display in plan view is dependent on their Structural Usage parameter value. joists. Enter 7 for Number. 20 On the Edit menu. NOTE You can control the structural framing line weight. 21 On the Options Bar. and purlins. 19 Select the purlin you created in the previous steps.Notice the difference between the line weights and patterns of the girders.

click .The purlins array along the midpoints of the joists. 25 On the Options Bar. click . and click OK. Turn on connection symbol visibility 24 Zoom in around the structural framing below A1-2. change the following instance parameters: ■ Select Moment Connection Last. under Other. 26 In the Filter dialog. and create a crossing selection that includes all the structural framing members in this portion of the view. 28 In the Element Properties dialog. clear all options except Structural Framing (Girder) and Structural Framing (Joist). 27 On the Options Bar. Adding Joists and Purlins | 937 .

■ ■ Select Moment Connection First. 30 On the View toolbar. you create new levels and copy the level one structure to the upper levels of the building model. in its current state. click Save. “Copying Level 1 Structure to Upper Levels” on page 938. 29 On the Design Bar. This project file is required. You then copy the entire structure that you have designed up to this point and use the paste-align command to create the structure on the upper levels. 31 On the File menu. click . click Modify. In this exercise. In the next lesson. you added different joist types and allowed the automatic beam tool to assign the Structural Usage parameter value depending on the join conditions. Copying Level 1 Structure to Upper Levels In this lesson. to continue with the subsequent exercises in this tutorial. This technique saves significant design time and ensures consistency on each level. 938 | Chapter 24 Structural . and adjust the view until it resembles the image below. Click OK. and notice the connection symbols display. you create new levels.

Structural_tutorial. You need at least 3 meters of space. click Level. Defining New Levels | 939 . Create three new levels 1 In the Project Browser. 4 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar.Defining New Levels In this exercise.rvt that you saved at the end of the previous exercise. Dataset This exercise requires the project file. 5 On the Options Bar. under Elevations. 2 Select grid 1. double-click Building Elevation. 6 Sketch the new level line 3000 mm above Level 2 as shown below using the following steps: ■ ■ ■ Click the level line starting point 3000 mm above the left extent of Level 2. These levels are required in the next exercise where you copy the existing structural components to the new levels. Move the cursor over the right extent of Level 2. Click to add Level 3. 3 Drag the upper grid control up to move the grid heads out of the way of the new levels. you create several new levels. select Make Plan View.

notice that the Level 3 floor plan is displayed. where you copy the structural elements and paste align them to the new levels. to continue with the subsequent exercises in this tutorial. 940 | Chapter 24 Structural . These levels that are required in the next exercise. 7 Repeat the steps above to create Levels 4 and 5 as shown. 8 On the File menu. Duplicating the Existing Design In this exercise. you created three new levels.rvt that you saved at the end of the previous exercise. Copy the structural elements 1 On the View toolbar. click Save. In this exercise. Each level is 3000 mm high. This project file is required. This technique saves you significant time compared to manually recreating the design on each level. in its current state.In the Project Browser. Structural_tutorial. Dataset This exercise requires the project file. you copy the structural elements and use the paste-align command to add them to the new levels. click . “Duplicating the Existing Design” on page 940.

“Adding Braces in a Framing Elevation” on page 942. 3 On the Edit menu. Although you can select and copy the components from any view. you copied the existing structural elements on Level 1 and used the paste-align command to create the structural framing on the upper levels. click OK. Paste the structural components on the new levels 4 On the Edit menu. and select Levels 4 and 5.2 Draw a selection box around the entire design. This project file is required. select Level 3. in its current state. 7 In the Project Browser. press and hold CTRL. you create a framing elevation in order to add structural braces. 6 In the Select Levels dialog. to continue with the subsequent exercises in this tutorial. 5 In the Select Levels dialog. In the next lesson. Duplicating the Existing Design | 941 . it is often easier and more certain to copy from a 3D view if your intent is to select the entire building model. Make sure the entire building model is included. double-click Building Elevation. under Elevations. click Copy to Clipboard. click Save. 8 On the File menu. click Paste Aligned ➤ Select Levels by Name. In this exercise.

make sure Attach to Grid is selected. Create a framing elevation 1 In the Project Browser. 3 On the Structural tab of the Design Bar. You use this elevation view in the next exercise to place structural braces. Elevation 1-a. Structural_tutorial. at the midpoint between grids 2 and 3.rvt that you saved at the end of the previous exercise. You can now view the new elevation. you create a framing elevation in order to provide a view in which to place structural bracing members. and click. Creating a Framing Elevation In this exercise. click Modify. you create a framing elevation. under Floor Plans. click Framing Elevation. You then add C-channel bracing to one level and array it to the remaining levels. 4 On the Options Bar. 6 On the Design Bar. 2 Zoom out so you can see the entire building model.Adding Braces in a Framing Elevation In this lesson. Dataset This exercise requires the project file. in the Project Browser. double-click Level 2. 942 | Chapter 24 Structural . 5 Place the cursor over grid C.

In the next exercise. click Save. 8 On the File menu. you add c-channel bracing to the building model. Dataset This exercise requires the project file. Notice the stick framing representation. you created an elevation view design specifically to add structural braces. This is because the Detail Level of this view is automatically set to coarse.7 Double-click the elevation head in order to open the view. In this exercise. Adding Structural Braces | 943 . Adding Structural Braces In the final exercise of this tutorial. to continue with the subsequent exercises in this tutorial. in its current state. “Adding Structural Braces” on page 943. This project file is required. Structural_tutorial. You then array the braces to the remaining levels.rvt that you saved at the end of the previous exercise. You are ready to add the structural braces. You begin by adding a set of braces to level 4. Also notice that grid 3 is identified within the view. you add structural braces to the building model.

Also select grids 2 and 3 and drag them until they appear as shown. select the view crop box. you should use the following snap shortcut keys when applicable. Because it is often necessary to make sure you snap to the endpoints and midpoints. you use point-to-point insertion. 3 In the Type Selector. SE: Snap only to endpoints of objects.4. ■ ■ SM: Snap only to midpoints of objects.Expand the view extents 1 Before adding the braces. 2 On the Structural tab of the Design Bar. selectM_ C-Channel: C75x7. 4 Enter SE and click the beam endpoint below the intersection of grid 2 and Level 4. 944 | Chapter 24 Structural . drag the left and right extents until you can see the grid heads for 2 and 3 as shown. and using the shape grips. When adding the braces. 5 Enter SM and click the midpoint of the girder located on Level 5. click Brace.

The second brace is displayed. 7 Enter SE and click the endpoint below the intersection of grid 3 and Level 4. 6 Enter SM and click the midpoint of the girder located on Level 5.The brace displays. Adding Structural Braces | 945 .

13 Click the intersection of Level 4 and grid 2 to specify the array endpoint. 10 On the Edit menu. click Tag All Not Tagged. Enter 4 for Number. specify the following: Click . click Array. 11 On the Options Bar. 14 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. The braces are arrayed to Level 1.Array the braces 8 On the Design Bar. click Modify. 9 Select both braces on Level 4. Select Constrain. 946 | Chapter 24 Structural . ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Clear Group and Associate. Select 2nd for Move to. 12 Click the intersection of Level 5 and grid 2 to specify the array start point.

16 On the View toolbar. and click OK. 17 On the File menu. In this exercise.15 In the Tag All Not Tagged dialog. select Structural Framing Tags. click . Adding Structural Braces | 947 . click Save. you added structural braces to the design and created a brace array.

948 | Chapter 24 Structural .

All other team members can view this workset. In this tutorial. Only one user can edit each workset at a given time. architects commonly work in teams with each person assigned to a specific functional area. you can borrow that element without requiring the workset owner to relinquish control of the entire workset.Sharing Projects 25 When working with large building projects. doors. 949 . A workset is a collection of building elements. called Worksharing. This prevents possible conflicts within the project. If you need to modify an element that belongs to a workset that someone else is actively working on. This involves simultaneously working on and saving different portions of the project at the same time. floors. They can update their local files at any time in order to see the changes other team members have published. you learn how to use Worksharing to divide a project into worksets so multiple users can access the project and have all their changes coordinated by Revit Architecture 2008. and so on. they cannot make changes to it. Using Worksharing. stairs. You can enable Worksharing for any project. such as walls. team members adding and changing elements in worksets can save their work to a local file on the network or their own hard drive and publish work to a central file whenever they choose. however.

Working in a shared project In a shared project. you learn the fundamentals of Worksharing application. Using Worksharing in a Project In this lesson. use Element Borrowing. In the lessons and exercises that follow. In the next exercise.Overview Sharing a project for the first time To share a project. Elements specific to a view. are automatically assigned to the view workset of the current view. and click Editable. You then learn how to work within a Worksharing-enabled project with multiple users and borrow particular elements from other users. Elements in closed worksets are not read from disk until they are required. go to the Worksets dialog. After the project is shared. you must first enable Worksharing. Establishing practical policies on how all team members access and create new worksets in the project will maintain performance for existing users and ease the process of introducing new team members to the project. When you are working on a shared project. You gain valuable practical experience setting up a project for worksets and working within that project. Any new model elements are automatically assigned to the active workset. You learn what to consider before enabling and using Worksharing. you enable Worksharing within a project and set up the initial workset environment. Understanding Worksharing Fundamentals In this conceptual exercise. a dialog displays allowing you to set up the initial sharing of the project. each building element in the project is contained in exactly one workset. You learn the basic steps of project sharing as well as tips for dealing with common workplace scenarios. you learn how to work as an individual with the central and local project files. select the desired workset. you learn some of the strategies that maximize your use of worksets. Each workset can only be editable by one user at a time. You can close or open worksets at any time using the Worksets dialog. After learning the fundamentals. you learn the fundamentals of Worksharing. You can improve the display-related performance of Revit Architecture by opening only those worksets required for your work. you can only make changes to the worksets that are editable by you. The first time you activate worksets within a project. You can change the workset assignment of any modeling element within the property dialog for that element. you can select which worksets are open or closed. Increasing performance using selective open When opening a Worksharing-enabled project. When planning a Worksharing-enabled project The decisions you make when sharing a project and setting up its worksets can have long-lasting effects on the project team. you should take several considerations into account: General Considerations: ■ ■ ■ ■ Project size Team size Team member roles Default workset visibility You can maximize long-term project performance more easily if you plan Worksharing appropriately and use the feature correctly. This reduces the time it takes to open the file and the amount of memory it uses. such as annotations and dimensions. If you only need to modify a single element within a workset that someone else has checked out. When setting up Worksharing. To make a workset editable. Project size 950 | Chapter 25 Sharing Projects . you specify an active workset. This includes how to plan and execute the use of worksets in a project in order to maximize project and team performance.

you could create separate worksets for a set of building elements that will only appear on one floor. such as a tenant interior. In a multi-story structure. On this tab. remember to create worksets for functional roles and properly assign default visibility. you may want to create separate worksets for each portion. By subdividing the project based on these task roles. Shared Levels and Grids. This allows Revit Architecture to display the view faster because computing time is not spent figuring out if the element belongs to a workset that should be displayed. If the project floor plan is so large that you need to split it with match lines to fit it on sheets. TIP As new team members create new worksets for their own use. You should have at least one workset for each person. As new members create worksets for their own use. you can turn off the visibility of that workset within that view. you do not need to make separate worksets for each floor of the building. you can change the visibility setting in the Visibility/Graphics dialog. not including the Project Standards. A typical scenario for a multi-story commercial building is shown in the following illustration. for a typical project. Team size You should take into consideration the size of the project team at the time you enable Worksharing. Instead. If you are sure that the elements of a particular workset should not appear in a view. the project coordinator should create the additional worksets required by the team. Conceptual stages of project sharing The following steps explain the basic stages of project sharing. make sure visibility defaults are set appropriately. This project file should incorporate as many office/project standards as possible and it should include many of the families required by the project. and View worksets. designers work in teams. Step 1: Start the project with one user One user starts to work on the project. When you create a new workset. a Worksets tab displays on the Visibility/Graphics dialog. you should separate the project into worksets that allow team members to work without interfering with each other. the project coordinator should enable Worksharing. Step 2:Activate Worksharing After the building model is ready for multiple user access. In most projects. Understanding Worksharing Fundamentals | 951 .The size of your building may affect the way you decide to segment the worksets for your team. Unlike AutoCAD Xrefs. you decide whether or not the elements in that workset are visible by default in each view. you control workset visibility on a per view basis. greater subdivision improves workflow by reducing interference between team members. with each assigned a specific functional task. Step 3: Create additional worksets After enabling Worksharing. When creating the new worksets. the optimum number of worksets is approximately four for each team member. Notice that the workset names refer to functional roles. The building model should also reach a reasonable point of development before you enable Worksharing. Team member roles Typically. Team size usually increases as the project progresses from the design stage to the documentation stage. each team member has control over a portion of the design. the worksets they add often do not need to be visible by default. Long-term performance is improved if new worksets are not visible by default unless they need to be. Experience has shown that. Default workset visibility After a project has been shared. Regardless of the default setting.

however. no other users can make modifications to any elements in those worksets until you check them back into the central file. Step 5: Create the central file The first time you save a project after Worksharing has been enabled. each user saves their changes back to the central file where the changes can be propagated to all team members. The tips discussed below provide useful information for working creatively with worksets. you must assign building model elements to their respective workset. The central file coordinates and propagates the changes of each user and keeps track of which worksets are available. Step 9:Work on the project Work on the project. When you save to the central file. Step 6: Create local files Each team member creates a local file that makes it possible to check out worksets and work on their respective portion of the building model. if a workset named Interior was created. After saving to the central file. you should save the file locally and to the central file at regular intervals. This ensures that your local file is synchronized with the central file. Step 7: Open worksets Whenever you open a central or local file. the central file is not a file that a team member would open and work in directly. When you save to the central file. within the local file. However. When you save locally (to your local file). Therefore. you make that workset editable by you. they are not propagated to the rest of the team. Step 11: Closing a local file At the end of a work session. Generally. you should save to the central file and relinquish control of all worksets that you set as editable. you have the option to choose which worksets to open. This is called “Selective Open. you should then save to your local file. the file is saved as the central file. This makes them available to other team members. new building elements are assigned to the workset that is active at the moment. Any changes that other users have made to the building model become visible to you after you save to the central file or when you select Reload Latest. your changes propagate to the entire team. Local files are user-specific and can only be accessed by the users that created them. You create a local file by opening the central file and using “Save As” to create a local copy of the central file.Step 4: Subdivide the building model into worksets After you have created the initial worksets. When finished or at regular intervals. For example. you should relinquish any worksets that you no longer need. You can make a workset active only if it is editable by you. it is essential that you save the central file to a location accessible to all team members. you can select which workset is active. you would want to assign the interior walls and other interior components to that workset. This gives you the right to make changes to the elements in the workset and to add to the workset. As you work. you can shorten the time required to open the file by selecting to open only the worksets required to complete your assigned tasks. Step 10: Saving your changes As you work on the project throughout the day. Tips and common scenarios 1 When working on a Worksharing-enabled project. your changes are saved. There is no limit to the number of worksets you can have editable at one time. On the Options Bar. proceeds as usual. you can still work remotely as an individual and as a team. Step 8: Check out worksets from the central file When you “check out” a workset.” When opening a Worksharing-enabled project. 952 | Chapter 25 Sharing Projects .

save to the central file. you can save your changes back to the central file but then the other owner loses all their work. You subdivide the project into worksets and save the project as the "Central File. Enabling Worksharing and Setting Up Worksets | 953 . WARNING You should avoid editing a workset “at risk” whenever possible. it is not recommended unless you understand the implications for the rest of the team. In this instance. If the owner of the at-risk workset agrees to relinquish editability of the contested workset. To do this. and transfer the updated local file back to the remote user.rvt. You can also add new elements to any View or Project Standards workset even if they are not editable. Remote rendering 4 While rendering remotely using AccuRender® is supported." Dataset ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. In this conceptual exercise. reload the latest changes from the central file. for instance. ■ If you realize that you need to modify elements in a workset that you did not make editable before going remote. If you have a colleague who is in the office with access to the central file.Taking your computer to a remote location with the project 2 You do not need to have access to the central file in order to work on the project. you will not be able to save your changes back to the central file if another user has changed the same workset and already published those changes back to the central file. In this situation. If you choose Editable at Risk and the owner of the at-risk workset has already published their files to the central file. This means that other team members will not be able to change any materials while you have the Materials workset checked out. or You are very confident that no other user will make that workset editable in your absence. you enable Worksharing in a project and set up some initial worksets. you work no differently then you would in the office. Since making a workset Editable at Risk carries a high risk that work will be lost. You learned the basic steps of project sharing as well as tips for dealing with common workplace scenarios. you should check out the Materials workset. make any required worksets editable. and make that workset editable. using VPN. you will not only lose the changes to that workset. You can work on the project from a remote location by doing the following: ■ Before leaving the office and disconnecting from the networked access to the central file. you enable Worksharing within an existing project. change the username to your name under Settings ➤ Options. you may want to request that someone start a session of Revit Architecture. When working remotely. and open Common\c_Worksets. if you know who checked out the required workset. This will guarantee that no other user can make it editable during the remainder of your absence. In the next exercise. you should use it only when: ■ ■ You do not intend to save your changes back to the central file. In the left pane of the Open dialog. you can make the workset Editable at Risk. a user can transfer a local file to someone with network access who can then publish the changes back to the central file. Multiple users working remotely 3 Users can work remotely provided the remote users have high-speed network access to the central file. Enabling Worksharing and Setting Up Worksets In this exercise. You can modify any elements in an editable workset and all new elements are added to the active workset. you will lose the changes you made to all your worksets. and then save the local file. If you intend to render the building model while away from the office. you will probably be changing material definitions and other project settings. click Training Files. you may want to phone them and make arrangements rather than waste valuable work time. Alternatively. you learned what to consider before enabling Worksharing.

Your username displays as the present owner. It also informs you that existing elements in your project move to a default workset. Project Standards. In this case. A confirmation dialog displays indicating that you are about to enable Worksharing. imagine four users including yourself. select: ■ ■ ■ Families Project Standards Views 5 Scroll down the list of workset names. and notice all are editable by you. 4 In the Worksets dialog. For training purposes. When you enable worksharing. 2 Click OK to accept the default workset name. ■ 6 Under Show. Floor Plan Level 1 view moves into a workset called View: "Floor Plan Level 1". The Worksets dialog is displayed. Do not change your username during this exercise unless explicitly instructed to do so. Revit Architecture creates new worksets and moves project elements and settings into the new worksets: ■ ■ Families: Loaded families in the project move into separate worksets. 954 | Chapter 25 Sharing Projects . Therefore.Enable Worksharing 1 On the File menu. Views: Each view moves into a separate View workset. You cannot change your username with an unsaved Worksharing-enabled project open. click Worksets. a small number of team members are working on the building model. The project must be subdivided in such a way as to reflect the tasks of each user. TIP You can change your username by selecting Options under the Settings menu. another is assigned the interior layout. clear Families. In this simple training project. one user is assigned to the development of the exterior. a third team member is assigned furniture placement. and the remainder of the team must work on wall section details. under Show. Only User-Created worksets should display. For example. and Views. you must create worksets that allow each team member to work independently. Project Standards: All project-wide settings defined from the Settings menu move to Project Standards worksets. 3 Notice that all worksets are open and editable by you.

9 Click OK. 11 Enter Furniture Layout. Enabling Worksharing and Setting Up Worksets | 955 . under Identity Data. all building model elements are assigned to that workset. expand Views (all). 24 Select all of the interior elements. select Workset1. Because the interior walls appear in many views. you should turn off Visible by default in all views. including the interior doors. 10 Click New. furniture components have not been added to the building model and therefore do not need to be moved to the respective workset. 20 Click OK. and click OK. You do. 23 In the Element Properties dialog. The next workset you create is for the furniture layout.Creating new worksets 7 In the Worksets dialog. 22 On the Options Bar. Subdividing the project into worksets 16 In the Project Browser. Notice that Visible by default in all views is checked. 13 Click Rename. The next step is to assign elements within the building model to specific worksets. and double-click Level 1. 14 In the Rename dialog. 8 Enter the name Interior Layout. expand Floor Plans. and walls. The final new workset is for the exterior shell of the building model. select Interior Layout for Workset. In this training file. and click OK. select any of the exterior walls of the building model. under Identity Data. all building model elements are placed into Workset1 by default. 21 Select one of the interior walls. click New. Because you renamed Workset1 to Exterior Shell. click . 18 On the Options Bar. it is better to make them visible by default. 19 In the Element Properties dialog. click OK. This is why all worksets are editable immediately after you enable worksets. however. This improves performance since fewer components need to be generated in each view. need to reassign the interior elements to the Interior Layout workset. click . Rather than create a new workset for these elements. stairs. 15 In the Worksets dialog. currently named Workset1. type the name Exterior Shell. 17 In the drawing area. and click OK You have created the required worksets for each team member working on this project. When you initially activate Worksharing. 12 In the Worksets dialog. clear Visible by default in all views. you can rename the default workset. notice that the Workset parameter is set to Exterior Shell. Because furniture should only be visible in specific views.

click . 25 On the Options Bar. Notice that the visibility of the Furniture Layout workset is turned off in this view. 30 Click OK. TIP You can also hold CTRL down to select multiple elements. 29 Clear Interior Layout to turn off the visibility of that workset in the view. The Level 1 floor plan should display with only the exterior shell visible. 32 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog. click the Worksets tab. click Visibility/Graphics. select Interior Layout for Workset. You can verify that all interior elements have been reassigned to the Interior Layout workset by turning off the visibility of that workset. click Visibility/Graphics.The easiest way to do this is to drag a pick box beginning inside the lower right corner and up to the upper left corner. select them and change their workset assignment to Interior Layout. 26 In the Element Properties dialog. 27 On the View menu. 28 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog. and click OK. under Identity Data. click the Worksets tab. 956 | Chapter 25 Sharing Projects . Hold Shift down to deselect an element. 31 On the View menu. This is because you turned off “Visible by default in all views” when you created the workset. If any interior elements remain.

The central file is created automatically the first time you save the project after enabling worksets. enter Worksets Project-Central as the file name. select the central file and. Only the worksets you select and any worksets already editable by you are opened. but be sure not to save the file in the training files location. Notice that your name has been removed as the owner of the worksets and all Editable values are set to No. In addition. Now that you have created the central file. This reduces the amount of time required to open very large project files and increases performance while you work. 45 On the File menu. 44 Click OK. This is imperative if you and another user intend to complete the multi-user exercise later in this tutorial. Creating a local file 1 On the File menu. 2 In the Open dialog. under Views (all). make modifications to the building model. and navigate to the location where you saved the central file created in the previous exercise. Working Individually with Worksets | 957 . created new worksets to accommodate each team member. If you intend on completing the remaining exercises in this tutorial. 37 In the Element Properties dialog. under Open Worksets. Working Individually with Worksets In this exercise. this can be accomplished by saving the central file to your hard drive and changing your user name before accessing the project. you enabled Worksharing on a project. click Non Editable. check out worksets. and publish your changes back to the central file where other team members can see them. and click OK. This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercise and access to the resulting central file. click Worksets. 3 Click Open. If you do not have access to a network and still want to complete that exercise. click Save As. Using selective open allows you to choose which worksets you want to open. 40 Click Save. Navigate to a location on a network drive that all team members have access to. 42 In the Worksets dialog. select all the User-Created worksets by pressing CTRL + A. 35 In the drawing area. select Interior Layout for Workset. 34 In the Project Browser. You then created the central file and checked in all worksets. double-click Level 2. please do so before continuing. 36 On the Options Bar. click Open.33 Select Interior Layout. Checking in the worksets 41 On the File menu. Create the central file 38 On the File menu. You must access it in each of the remaining exercises. any referenced workset is opened but hidden. click . under Identity Data. “Enabling Worksharing and Setting Up Worksets” on page 953. make sure you remembe